This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
__

THE LIBRARW
OF
THE UNIVERSITW
OE CALIFORNIA

GIFT OF
 ।
।
।

।
।
।
। ।
। ।

।
त्र। ३ ७ \ ० \

८।। ब- U *-2 (*१ १

=ऽ ह्ऽ C० ～~.

८.–ऽ
_ZºyZ77)M79.7ट7८'A17 A''7G77ं7?79.S .

_Z 2 ऽत् ॰? `_ 4 •2।।
५७
&' ~__`1_~_~
.9 _7८) 26) `ऽ .१ 626x

.pºx ८. Wळे’s ॰%०* " (* ॐ.27ंट; ॰,ंग्.4ं ?

7%AZAZ4272 & ८' ँ'-4८2724?ं7८.

 cC॰ ८ ८

AN

EI)EMB}NTARW (GRAM[MAR)
OP THE

S ANS C R, IT I, A N G UAG B,
PARTLW IN 'THE R0MAN OHARACTRR,

। ARRANGED ACCORDING T0 A NEW THEORW,

IN REFERENOB BSPE0IALI,W T0 THE OLASSI0AI, LANGUAGES :

६ंatti) sport BExttatts in tasi) १Brost.

TO WHICH IS ADDED,

A S BLB C TION FROM

THE INSTITUTES OE' M AN U 9

wITII coProus REFERENCEs To THE GRAMMAR, ।
ANTTD ANT TEN G:का " " 81घा " ， कां AN ST A " " " (D का',

BW IMONIER, W ILLIAMS, M.A.

MEMBER OR THE RowAI, ASIATIC socIETw,
ONE oF THE PRoFESSORs oF SANSCRIT IN THE EAST-INDIA COLLEGPं,
I,ATE; BODEN SANSCRIT SCHOLAR IN THE UNIWER.SITW OR Ox FORD.

LONDON :
WM. H. ALLEN & CO., 7, LEADENHALI, STREET.
M IDCOC xI,WI.
 I,ONIDON :

PIRINTEI) BW wILLIAM WATrs, CRowN CouRT, TEMPLE BAR.

 PRER'A OE.

SIR WiLLIAM JoNEs has said of the Stitras of Pānini that they
are “ dark as the darkest Oracle ;' and CoLEBROOKE, in one of
। his Essays, has given a list of about One hundred and forty
Indian grammarians and commentators whO have followed in
the footsteps of the great Patriarch of Sanscrit Grammar,
and endeawoured to throw light upon the Obscurity of his
aphorisms. In this endeawour they have succeeded rather
in shewing the depth of their own knowledge, than in making
the subject more accessible to the generality of European
students ; and the explanations which they offer are some
times more unintelligible than the original itself.
Happily, howewer, a Writer has arisen in our own country
Competent to elucidate º most thoroughly the difficulties of
this subject. Professor Wilson, the greatest Sanscrit scholar
of the present day, whose name the University of Oxford is
proud to associate with its own, in the excellent Grammar
which he has given to the public has added to his high repu
tation by his graceful adaptation of the English language to
the exposition of the native system of grammatical teaching.
It may be said of all this author’s numerous works, that, as
they abound in indications of Surpassing genius, So they offer
to the student of Oriental Literature the most valuable in
formation on ewery topic of induiry. _

But notwithstanding the advantages thus afforded for the

study of a language So interesting in its affinities, SO rich in
its literature, and So important in its bearing upon Our inter
ests in the East, it is remarkable that the greater part of the
ii PREFA CE.

English public are not merely indifferent to its acguisition,

but ignorant of its character, and even of its very name. It
must be confessed that this indifference on the part of the
generality to a language which recommends itself to their
attention by no considerations of immediate practical utility,
ought not to excite surprise. It is even, perhapS, t00 much
to expect that the study should flourish in the University of
Oxford. Its neglect in this ancient Seat of learning only
points to a fact which has escaped the observation of those
would-be reformers of the present system of education at
Haileybury, who are not for wholly abolishing the study of
So important a language, but would leave its cultivation to
the will of the student : and this fact is, that to make any
Course of study woluntary in a place of public education is
tantamount to its total abolition ; and that no temptation of
honour, or reward, or present or prospective benefit, and no
amount of facilities or opportunities, and no degree of intrin
sic excellence or interest in the subject itself, will ever attract
any number of wotaries to a study which is not made compul
s0ry t/pon all.
But how does it come to pass, that in the East-India Col
lege, where this study is still, with true wisdom, made incum
bent upon every one ; where it is only reasonable to expect
that the classical languages of the Hindus should be culti
vated with as much ardour as the classical languages of
Europe in the European Universities ; and where to educate
the minds of the future gowernors of India with any reference
to the duties they are to fulfil, or at least to imbue them
with any sympathy for the people they are to gowern, is
Surely to give them Some knowledge of the language which
is the vehicle of that people's literature, the key to their
Opinions, the repository of all that they hold Sacred, and the
source of nearly all their Spoken dialects ;–how does it come
to pass, that in this College the study of Sanscrit is not pro
secuted with greater Zest ?
 PR B E' A C' E. IIi

Many Causes are assigned for this indifference. It might,

indeed, be anticipated that ignorance and idleness would
league themselves in a Common Crusade against any course
of reading which entails a more than usual degree of mental
effort and persewerance. But ignOrance and idleness would
not prevail, were it not in their power to make use of argu
ments that have a COnsiderable shew of reaSOn. To those
who would excuse their indifference by alleging that a know
ledge of this language is useless to the Civil Servants of India,
no reply need be given. Such an argument is unworthy of
refutation, as proceeding from am utter ignorance of facts, and
a stupid contempt for the authority of those eminent Scholars,
who have long since determined otherwise. To those who
do not deny its utility, but affirm that many great men in
India have succeeded very well without it, there is but One
answer to return. No One disputes that Such men have suo
ceeded very well without a knowledge of this language, but
no one can tell how much better they might have succeeded,
or in how much less time they might have attained the same
position, Or how much more consideration they might have
shewn for the feelings and prejudices of the natives in the
course of their career, had the study of Sanscrit formed a
part of their education. Our forefathers doubtless prospered
very well without a knowledge of Latin and Greek ; but now
that so many beneficial effects are found to result from an
acguaintance with these languages, and now that so many
facilities exist for their acGuisition, InO One would think of
making Such an argument an excuse for the neglect of a
branch of education which, as civiliZation and learning ad
vance, becomes every day more essential.
But there are some who rest their objection to the study of
Sanscrit on the ground of its difficulty. These adopt a very
specious line of argument, and one which, it must be con
fessed, has every appearance of reason on its side. They
maintain that the grammar alone is of itself too intricate to
iv PREE'ACE.

be mastered by men of ordinary abilities in their short

course of two years at Haileybury ; that too many other Sub
jects are forced upon their attention to admit of their gaining
any satisfactory insight into the literature of the language ;
that they pass their examinations by a mere forced effort of
memory ; and that the little they learn is as rapidly forgotten
as it was rapidly acGuired, and only Serves to disgust, without
leawing behind any solid or permanent advantage.
It is with the especial wiew of answering this latter class of
objectors that the following short work has been Composed.
It was thought that any system of grammar, however excel
lent in itself, founded upon the esoteric method of teaching
adopted by the Pandits of India, was certainly amenable to
these objections. An elementary work has, therefore, been
written, which rests its claim of adaptation to the wants of
beginners on its opposition to the Indian scheme of gram
matical tuition. For it Should be bOrne in mind that in India,
we have presented to us the curious phenomenon of a litera
ture elucidating grammar, rather than a grammar elucidating
literature. The better to understand this, it may here be
Observed that the literature Of the Hindus is referrible to
three distinct phases, the natural, the philological, and the
artificial. As the first and last of these are diametrically
opposed to each other, So it may be shewn that the cause of
this Sudden transition from the One extreme to the Other was
the intervention of a rage for philological inguiry.
Nothing can exceed the simplicity and beauty of the writ
ings which fall under the early period of Hindu literature.
Witness some of the episodes of the two epic poems of the
Rāmāyana and Mahābhārata ; Witness SOme of the Purānas ;
witness the short specimens of the fables of the Hitopadesha.
and of the Laws of Manu, given at the end of this wolume.
The style in all of these is plain, unaffected, and in perfect
good taste ; and the amount of grammatical knowledge re
Guired for their perusal might have been compressed into
 PRBH'ACE. W

much less Space than the two hundred pages which follow
these prefatory remarks.
But at some period or other not very far anterior to the
Christian era, a passion for philological disguisition seems
tO have taken possession of the Hindu mind. The appear
ance of the Pāniniya Stitras created an appetite for abstract
Speculation into the nature and capabilities of language, and
caused a total revulsion in the character of literary Composi
tion. Numerous grammarians arose, whose laboured trea
tises were not intended to elucidate the national literature of
the age, but rather had in wiew the formation of a distinct
grammatical literature, existing solely for its own sake.
Then Succeeded the era of artificial composition, when
poems were written, either with the avowed object ofillus
trating grammar, or with the ill-concealed motive of pom
pously exhibiting the depth of the author’s philological
research.
It cannot be wondered if, under these circumstances, when
all the subtlety of Indian intellect wasted itself upon a sub
ject such as this, the science of grammar Should have been
refined and elaborated to a degree wholly unknown in the
other languages of the world.
The highly artificial literature, therefore, of later times,
which resulted from such an elaboration, and was closely
interwowen with it, Cannot oertainly be oultivated by the ad
wanced Scholar without the aid of a grammar, moulded in strict
conformity with the native model. But, on the other hand,
it may be Suspected that a treatise of this character will
always be unpalatable, and may even prove a stumbling
। block rather than an aid, to the Common Class of students,
who, with n0 extraordinary powers of mind, and with neither
the time nor the inclination for mere abstract research into
the capabilities of language, will certainly be content with
Such an amount ofgrammatical knowledge as may enable them
to comprehend the earlier and purer Specimens of Sanscrit
wi PREE'A C B.

composition. Indeed, it would almost appear as if the Pan

dits of the East had designed to shut out the knowledge of
their language from the minds of the uninitiated vulgar.
They reguire that the young student shall devote ten years
to the grammar alone, and they have certainly contrived to
provide him with ample occupation during this tedious pe
riod of his nowitiate. The arrangement adopted in the best
of their grammatical treatises would seem to have been made
with the express purpose Ofexaggerating difficulties. Doubt
less there are many real difficulties, but there are also many
obvious parts of the Subject the Simplicity of which has been
carefully concealed behind a tissue of mysticism. A com
plicated machinery of technical Schemes and Symbolical letters
is constructed, which may be well Calculated to aid the me
mory of the initiated natives themselves, Or th0Se who have
become familiar with the mative system by a long course of
reading in the country, but only serves to bewilder the Eu
ropean tyr0. The young English student has enough to do
in Conguering the difficulties of a strange character, and mas
tering the rules of combination, without puZZling himself in
a labyrinth of servile, Substituted, and rejected letters, and।
perplexing himself in his efforts to gain, by this indirect pro
ceSS, knowledge which is attainable more easily by the usual
direct means.
It is enough to say of the present wolume that it is the
first really elementary Sanscrit Grammar ever published. Its
defects will, therefore, it is hoped, not be too critically judged
by those who prop0Se to themselves a higher aim than the
mere assistance of beginnerS. To administer to the wants of
the earliest students has been the one object kept steadily in
view ; and Subordinately an attempt has been made to ex
hibit the peculiarities which distinguish the study of this lan
guage from that of Latin and Greek. The plan adopted will।
sufficiently explain itself It has been deemed desirable not.
to embarrass the student with too much at Once. Types of
 PREFACE. wii।

two different siZes have therefore been employed ; the larger

attracts his eye to that which is of first importance : the
smaller generally Contains such matter as possesses no press
ing claim to his immediate consideration. The Roman Cha
racter has been applied to the expression of the Devanāgari।
throughout the greater part of the Grammar, especially in
treating of the rules which regulate the combination and
permutation of vowels and Consonants. There can be no
doubt that the false opinion which prewails of the difficulty
of Sanscrit may be traced to the labour imposed of thoroughly
mastering these rules at the first entrance upon the study of
the language. They form, as it were, a mountain of difficulty
to be passed at the very commencement of the journey, and
the learner cannot be convinced that, when once surmounted,
the ground beyond may be more Smooth than in other lan
guages, the ingress to which is comparatively easy. .
To simplify, as much as possible, this division of the sub
ject has been the main object; and as an accurate acguaint
ance with the Devanāgari letters is not here indispensable,
they have not been introduced, except in cases where any
doubt is likely to arise in the learner’s mind. As he ad
vances, he will find a more sparing use of the Roman cha
racter, and towards the end of the wolume it has been
entirely abandoned. For let it not be supposed that, by the
mixed method of printing here adopted, any loose or inaccu
rate knowledge of the Sanscrit character is tacitly encouraged.
Such inaccuracy is a too common obstacle to the sound
acGuisition of this language. The student satisfies himself
at first with an imperfect knowledge of the Devanāgari
alphabet, and, having newer Conguered this difficulty at the
outset, is ever after hampered by its perpetual recurrence.
The tabular views which have been given throughout this
work, especially in the chapter on Werbs, will, it is hoped,
conduce to the ready comprehension of the more Complex
parts of the subject. They contain some nowelties, which
wiii PREFA CE.

might reguire an apology, had they not been Suggested by a

strong belief in the falsity of the native method of proposing,
as the general scheme, a system of terminations which applies
rather to the exceptions, and then, by a meedless process of
derivation and substitution, forcing it into universal appli
cation.
In the chapter on Syntax, the laws which determine
the coalition of vowels have not been observed, as being out
of place in a portion of the subject which aims only at the
clear exhibition of inflectional cl.anges.
The Selections which have been appended to the gram
matical part of this book offer the greatest facilities to the
early student in his first effort at translation. Those in prose
are of the simplest character, and ewery word is explained
either by notes or by references to the preceding pages of
the grammar. Those in verse contain some few difficulties,
but the style is plain, and an English translation has been
Subjoined, which may aid the text, as well as tend to shew
that the matter contained in Sanscrit literature may not be
so unprofitable as some have ignorantly assumed. The sepa
ration of each Word from the next, and the use of a mark to
indicate the division when the blending of wowels makes
such separation impossible, will offend the eye of the ad
vanced Oriental Scholar ; but the beginner can scarcely be
expected to know which is the final or which the initial letter
of a word which he newer Saw before. Why, therefore,
refuse to give the Only clue which is to guide him in his
search for the word in the Dictionary ; and why, by uniting
those parts of the Sentence which admit of separation, super
add this unneceSSary source of perplexity to the necessary
difficulty, unknown in other languages, resulting from the
blending of vowels and the composition of words ? The
natives of the East ought, in this particular, t0 Conform to a
Custom which the art of printing has'made universally preva
lent amongst civiliZed nations, if, at least, they desire their
 PREFACE. ix

languages to be generally cultivated by the people of Europe.

Nor does there seem any reason in the theory which would
make such a conformity incompatible with the laws of
euphony.
It only remains to add, that in a work, small and unpre
tending though it be, in which so many minute points and
marks have been employed to represent the Sanscrit character
by the Roman, the correction of the press has been a task
of no small labour. In this labour Professor Johnson, an
Oriental Scholar of whose waried attainments the East-India
College has reason to be proud, has cheerfully c0-operated,
and in other matters also has freely given the benefit of his
valuable adwice and great experience. But whilst to him
much of the merit is due that may belong to this book on
the score of accuracy, it must be distinctly understood that
he is entirely free from the responsibility of its nowel struo
ture and arrangement. It is also fair to state that some of
the detail of the following pages has been Suggested by a
careful perusal of Professor Bopp's Sanscrit Grammar, printed
at Berlin.

EAST-INDIA COLLEGE,
Jaly l846.
 CONTENTS.

CHAP. I.-I)etters - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Pronunciation __ _ __ _ _ _ _ ____

CHAP. II.-Combination and Permutation of Letters __ __

Sect. I. Combination of Wowels - _ _ - ' - -

Sect. II. Combination of Consonants _ _ _ __

CHAP. III.-Sanscrit Roots, and the Crude Form of Nouns - -

Formation of the Crude by Affixes to Roots and Nouns __

CHAP. IW.-Declension ofCrude Nouns, Substantive and Adjective, 28

Sect. I. Declension of Crudes ending in Wowels - ___

Sect. II. IDeclension of Crudes ending in Consonants - -

Sect. III. Adjectives. Degrees of Comparison - - -
Sect. IW. Numeral Adjectives - _ _ __ __ _

CHAP. W.–Pronouns - _ _ _ _ __ __ ___

CHAP. WI.–Werbs. General Observations

Formation of the Base in the Conjugational Tenses :
Of Regular Primitive Werbs, Ist,4th, and 6th Conjugations,
Of Irregular Primitive Werbs, 2d, Bd, āth, 7th, 8th, and
9th Conjugations _ _

Formation of the Base in the Non-conjugational Tenses of

Regular and Irregular Primitive Werbs of all nine Con
jugations - __ _

Formation of the Base of Passive Werbs

__ _

Formation of the Base of Causal Werbs, I0th Conjugation -

_
_

-
__
_

_
_
__

_
___
_

__
।
Inflection of the Base of Regular and Irregular Primitives -
Inflection of the Base of Causals _ __ _ _ __

Inflection of the Base of Passives - _ _ _ ___

Auxiliary Werbs conjugated at full - - - - - 10I

Examples of Primitive, Causal, and Passive Worbs conjugated
at full - _ _ _ _ _ __ __ ___ 104
Formation of Desiderative Werbs __ __ __ __ _ 129
Formation of Intensive or Fro(juentative Werhs - - - 131
Formation of Nominal Werbs - _ __ _ _ _ 138
 CONTENTS.

CHAP. WII.-Participles - ' - _ _ _ _ - - 185

Participial Nouns of Agency - - - - - - l48

CHAP. WIII.-Indeclinable words. Adverbs _ _ - - 150

Prepositions in government with Nouns - - - - 1ं

CHAP. Ix.-Compound Words - - - - - - - l57

Sect. I. Simply Compounded Nouns - - - - - lछै9

Complexly Compounded Nouns - - - - 170
_

Sect. II. Compound Werbs formed with Prepositions and

Adwerbs - _ _ _ _ _ _ - ' - 178

Sect. III. Compound Adwerbs - _ ___ - - 177

CHAP. K.-Syntax - _ __ _ _ __ _ _ - 178

Exeroises in Translation and Parsing - _ _ - - 206
SBLECTIONs in Prose and Werse _ _ _ _ __ - १

Story of Wedagarbha and his Pupils - _ _ - - २

Selections from the Institutes of Manu। _ __ _ - १६
English Translation of the Selections from Manu - - - :95
SANSORIT G RAM[MAR.
 WOWEI,S.

अ a इ । उ a ऋ ri लट्र !ri।ण e अी o
____

Imitial { अा ।a ई । ऊ। ऋ rरं स्ट् ८/ ऐ ai अो aa

Not Iinitial
{ 'ा a
f;
?
?८

?८
_
.**
/*? __
c2 lri।
/r?_
२ 62

८८ _
`ी
ो
0

८?८

GN _ c2 ’

SIMPLE OONSONANTS.

Gutturals, क /ं ख /k/ गg घ g/ डः n. ह/
Palatals, च ch छ c// ज.j भक.j/ , ञ /ं श्ा ४/ य /
Cerebrals, ट८ ठ ८/ डd ढ d/ ण a ष s/ रr
IDentals, त । य / ट् d ध d/ नn स४ ल/
Labials, पp प' ;)/ ब () भ )/ म ma व।। "

THE MOST CO'MMON OE THE CO'MPOUNID CONSONANTS.

घं ksh, द्य dy, च tr, त्व tir, क्त !, ज्ञ nn, द्द da, क्त #८ त्क tk,
क् Kn, क् Khp, ज्ञ.jn, व्य ry, स्य श्y, ष्य ४//, भ्य Wy, ध्य dhy,
पय py, चय try, त्य ८y, न्य ny, श्य s/y, ख्य kky, चय c//, रूय !y,
घट्य ks/y, ग्ध gd/, ब्ध 'dh, ड ddh, ज्ञ db/, ड dir, ज्ञ dg, द्र dgr,
झ pt, ष्म pm, प्र pr, श्र shr, च shc/, श्व 8//o, श्व s/in, य gr,
गृ gn, क Kr, द्र dr, छ् c//ir, कं ?”/ं, ममं ?*772??2, झे ?”t;a), यये "%/, ङ्क */ं,
ह्ल m//, ङ्ग ng, ङ्ग dg, ञ्च ic/, ञ्छ् ic//, ञ्ज ?ij, ण्ट at, ण्ठ ht/ं,
ण्ड ad, न्त n८ नि tn, ण्य py, एम् pg, घटं &//, घ sht/, ष्ट्र s/tr,
छ् 8//m), घटय sht/, घट्य 8/t/y, ष्ण 8/in, स्व sic, स्त st, स्व str, स्म sw८,
स्ज्ञ। 8%, स्य st/, स्न sm, नत्व n//c, न्व mtr, नय ?aty, नन्य ?atry,
च chch, सञ्छ chch/, ज्ज.jj, त्थ ///ः, क्व ttio, ह्य /y, झ /m, ह्रुतः। /ः:a,
हू /in, हू /ir, झ din, क्तः Kn', ' ङ्, k', ग्ल g', झ k/ं, ज्व.jp, झय db//,
ड्य ddhy, ग्यgry, ध्व din, ब्ज % व्भ //, भ dhn, न्ध ndh, छ्ण ksha.
घस्म kshm, ऋतः /k/r, क्य /k//, ङ्य nsky, तस्य /s/, तस्य ////, इय dity,

अद्य di/, रझि /// छ्य ch//, व्य /// इय dd/, इ //, स्ब ४//.
 }

SANSORIT GRAMIMAR.

O HA P TER, I.

LETTERS.

THE Sanscrit language is written in the character called Deva

nāgari. The following are the Devanāgar letters, with their
eguivalents in the Roman character.

WOWELS, DIPHTHONGS, AND SEMI-VOWELS.

SHORT ILONG IMPR0PIER DIPHTH0NGS PRoPBR DIPHTHONGS STEMI

VOWEI,S. W0WEI,S. CALLED GUNA. 0ALLED WRIFOD'HI. W0WELS.
•, •_, Not .. Not ____ Not; _-__ Not;
Imitial f्रal. | Init. f्रं Imitial rā्रं,l. Imitial, Tiतेि ँ,
|
| अ d | अा 'ा ? A ।
- _ __ *S. _

इ f a | ईं 'ी ] | ट ` .८८ ४ | श्ट् di | य /

_ __। A _३ x
उ , ४ | ऊ . ā | स्रो `ो !ं 0 | औी ौ aa| व 9 or ºp
च . ri| च्छ् .. ??| अर् d?” | अाय d?” | ग् ?’

ल /

CONSONANTS.

CORRE- CORRE- NASAL SWM=

cosं ‘ंभुं" _

SP0NDING SPONDING* 'े AND B0I, CALLED

* _ _ NASAI,S. | SIBILANTS. "*** | ANणेsw)्A.

Initial Final
Or called
Medial. Wisargah. |
Gutturals,|कः /ं ख /k/ |ग g घ g/| ङं ??’ ह/ : / | * ?? Or’ ??2
Palatals, | च c/ छ् ch/|ज j झ.j/ | जन ? श।। 8/ य /
Cerebrals,|ठ ! ठ ८/ |ड d ढ d/| ण p ष 8/ र ?” |
Dentals, |त ८ य ८/ |द d ध d/| न ?a स S ल/ |
Labials, पp फp/ |ब ८ भ b/ | म m च ºorn।
2 LB'ITERS.

Observe that ar and ar are not distinct letters, but have been
inserted amongst the diphthongs for reasons that will be after
wards apparent. That the semi-vowels have been placed in both
Tables, as falling under the first, in their relation to i, a, ?i, Iri ;
under the second, in their relation to.j, d, d, b. That / at the end
of a word stands for Wisargah (:). That when n is found before
the semi-vowels y, p, r, !, the Sibilants sh, 8/, &, and the aspirate /
in the middle of a word, it represents the symbol Anuswāra ;
and that ?m at the end of a word always represents the Same
symbol. That the vowels च and ऋ will be represented by ri।
and r, as distinguished from ग् िri and री rं, which represent the
consonant r combined with the vowels i and a, Lastly, that
the palatal sibilant शा will be represented by sh, as distinguished
from sh, which represents the cerebral Sibilant ष.
ON THE METHOD OP W RITING THE VOWELS.

The vowels assume two forms, according as they are initial or

not initial, Thus, ik is written इक्, but ki is written कि; short
i, when not initial, being always written Ugfore the consonant
dfºer which it is pronounced. Short a is never written, unless it
begin a word, because it is Supposed to be inherent in every
consOnant. अक्, but Ka is written क; the
ThuS, a/% is written
mark ऽ under the final k being used to shew that it has no a
inherent in it. The vowels a८, ā, and ?i, rā, not initial, are written
under the consonants after which they are pronounced ; as कु, कू,
kia kā ; कृ, कृ, kri, Kr.*
The Sanscrit is Said to p0SSess another wowel, wiZ. ल्ठ lri, which has not been
given, as it Only occurs in one word in the language. The only use of introducing
it in a Table like the above, is to shew the perfection of the Devamāgari alphabet ;
for without it, we have no correSponding vowels or diphthongs to the semi-wowel
ल !; but, with it, the last line of the Table may be filled up thus,
SHORT. I,ONG. GUNA. WRIIDD'HI. STEMI-WOWEL.

ल lri | लृ ? | अल a! | साल ! | ल ।

* When, however, u follows र it is written thus, स्ऽ ?ru ; and when ? follows र्,
thus, रू ?’77.
 LB'T TER.S. 3

ON THE CO MPOUND CONSONANTS.

Every consonant is Supposed to have short a inherent in it, So

that it is never necessary to write short a except at the beginning
of a word. Hence, when any of the above simple consonants
are Seen standing alone in any word, Short a must always be
pronounced after them ; but when they are written in conjunction
with any other vowel, this vowel of course takes the place of
short a. Thus, Such a word as कलानतया would be pronounced
76alāmataya. The guestion then arises, how are we to know when
consonants have to be pronounced together, without the inter
vention of any wowel ; as, for instance, /d and ?24y in the word
klāndyā ? This occasions the necessity for compound conSOnants :
*l and ?aty must then be combined together thus, झा, नय, and the
word is written ङ्खानया. And here we have illustrated the two
methods of compounding consonants, viZ. Ist, by writing them one
above the other ; 2dly, by placing them side by side, omitting in
all, except the last, the perpendicular line which lies to the right.
Almost all Compound letters are in this way resolvable into
their component parts. There are two, however, which are not
SO, viZ. छ् ksha and ज्ञ jma. The last is Commonly pronounced gya,
and may therefore be represented by these letters. The following
compound letters, being of very freguent occurrence, and not
always obviously resolvable into their parts, are given with a
view to attract the first attemtiom of the student. He may after
wards study the list in Prof. Wilson's Grammar.
क्ा /ंta, as in the word उक्तं ।aktam ; मै rma, as in the word कूमै
/cārma. And here remark, that when र् r is the first letter of a
cOmpound consonant, it is written above in the form of a semi
circle ; when it is the dast letter, it is written below in the form
of a Small stroke, as क्र Kra in the word क्रमेण /kramena. Again,
`च 8/2c/ंd, as in ततश्र tatas/ic/ia. Here remark, that शा Sometimes
changes its form to श्र, when combined with another consonant.
च tra, as in तच tadra ; च chcha, as in अन्यच anyachcha ; ष्ट shta, as
in वृष्ट /krishta ; द्य dya, as in अद्य adya ; ड ddha, as in बुडि buddhi;
भ्य /ंya, as in तेभ्य: tebhya/ ; त //a, as in सुहृत्तमा: sa/irillama/; ; व्य gya,
as in व्याध tyādha ; द्व diga, as in द्वाग् dipāra ; स्य &ya, as in तस्य
4a&/o ; स्त std ; मय ?myd ; ज्ञ d0/d ; ख्य /k/%/d ; झ ?a/%d ; ङ्गः ?ago ;
च ficha ; ण्ड nda ; न्त mta.
4 LET TER.S.

PRONUNOIATION OR' THE WOWELS.

The following English words, written in the Sanscrit character,

will furnish the best clue to the pronunciation of the vowels.
A as in रोमन् , “ Roman"; a as in लास्त् , “ last "; i and i as in
the first and last syllables of इन् वलीद् , “ invalid"; a as in पुष् ,
“ push "; ā as in रूद्, “ rude '; ri as in ऋल्, “ rill "; rā as in शगृन् ,
“ chagrin'; e as in एर् , “ ere'; o as in सो, ‘‘ SO'; ai as in ऐल् ,
“ aisle'; aa८ as ou in और्, “ Our'; ar and ār as in the words “ in
ward,” “ regard.”
Since short a is inherent in every consonant, the student
should be careful to acguire the correct pronunciation of this
letter. There are a few words in English which will afford ex
amples of its Sound, Such as Bomam, temperance, /iasbamdmam,
tolerable. But in English this Sound is often represented by a,
as in fam, 8adm ; Or by o, as in dome, som ; Or even by the other
vowels ; as by e in her, permal ; by i in bird, sir. The per
fection of the Devanāgar alphabet, as compared with the Roman,
is at once apparent. Every wowel in Sanscrit has one invariable
( sound, and the beginner can never be in doubt what pronuncia
tion to give it, as in English, or whether to pronounce it long
or Short, as in Latin.

PRONUNCIATION OE THE CONSONANTS.

The consonants are in general pronounced as in English. But

g is always pronounced hard, as in gibe : 4/ is not pronounced as
in English, but is only t aspirated, and, when rapidly enunciated,
hardly distinguishable from t. The same remark applies to the
other aspirated letters. The true Sound of t/ is exemplified by
the word amthill; So also p/, by a/phill, which might be written
उफिल् . The .cerebral class of consonants only differs from the
dental in being pronounced with a duller and deeper Sound. Each
class of consonants has its own nasal ; thus the SOund ink would
be written in Sanscrit इङ्; the Sound ijac/ं, इच् ; the word adjader

अण्डर् ; the dental n would be written in the word country, pro

nounced as in Ireland ; the sound imp would be written ड्म्य् . So,
also, three of the classes have sibilants peculiar to them. Thus
the final sibilant of the word ततस् datas, when combined with the
word च c/ia, must be written ततश्व /atashc/ia ; when combined with
 I,ET TERS. 5

टीका tikā, must be written ततष्टीका datashtikā ; when combined

with तं dam, must be retained ततस्तं tatastam. So also each of the
letters, /, /, r, !, o, is plainly referrible to its particular class.
The ह h is pronounced from the throat, and therefore allied to
the guttural class. The य y belongs to the palatal class, and in
Bengali is always corrupted into j. The ग् is allied to the cerebral
letters ड and ढ', and in Bengali these letters are often hardly
distinguishable from r in sound. The ल ! is evidently a dental.
The व', although partly dental, belongs to the labial class ; and is
so allied to ब ।), that, in Bengali, it is always pronounced like ८,
and, in Sanscrit, is often interchanged with it.*
* It may here be remarked, that although the column of nasals in the Table of
Consonants (p. 1) has reference to the sibilants, aspirate, and Semi-wowels, as well
as to the other cons0nants; yet the mark Anuswāra (*) is the proper nasal of these
letters, and must always take the place of any other nasal that may be combined
with them in the same word. Thus the preposition सम् and the participle स्मृत,
whem united in one word, are written सँस्मृत; सम् and हार् , संहार्; सम and रागः,
सँराग :f and so on. But in every one of these cases the Anuswāra takes the Sound
of the nasal of the class to which the following letter belongs. Thus संस्मृत is
sounded as if written सन् स्मृत; संहार् as if written सङ्ग् हार्; संलाप as if written
सन् लाप. For the sake of brewity, howewer, the Anuswāra is, in many books,
written as the representative of the nasal of any letter, and not merely of the
aspirate, Semi-wowels, and Sibilants.

* In Sanscrit, however, the letter व is always pronounced either like tº or to s

like g when it stands by itself or as the first member of a compound consonant,
as in वा 0a, व्याध tgadha ; like u', when it forms the last member of a compound
consonant, as in द्वार्.८ludra.

f सम्राज्, “an universal monarch,” and सम्यक्, “ properly,” are the only
words which wiolate this rule.
 OHAPTER, II.

Spor. I.-OO'MBINATION AND PERMUTATION OR I,ETTERS.

WE are accustomed in Greek and Latin to certain euphonic

changes of letters. Thus in, combined with rogo, becomes irrogo ;
rego makes, in the perfect, not regsi but reksi, contracted into re:cā ;
ueho becomes beksi or ueai ; oruy with "yv6an becomes oruryyv ं,an ; āv
with ?\८,umro, 6?\A4,umro. These laws for the combination of letters
are applied very extensively throughout the Sanscrit language ;
and that, too, not only in combining two parts of one word, but
in combining all the words in the same sentence. Thus the
Sentence “ Bara agis in terris' would reguire, by the laws of
combination (called, in Sanscrit, Sandhi) to be written thus,
Jºarāgir ins terri/; ; and would, moreover, be written without
separating the words, Earāpirinsterrih. The learner must not
be discouraged if he is not able thoroughly to understand all the
numerous laws of combination at first. He is recommended, after
reading them over with attention, to pass at once to the declension
of nouns and conjugation of verbs : for to oblige him to learn by
heart a number of rules, the use of which is not fully seen till he
comes to read and construct semtemces, must Only lead to a waste
of time and labour.

CHANGES OP WOWELS.

I. Nevertheless, there are some changes of letters which Come

into immediate application in the formation and declension of
nouns, and the conjugation of verbs ; and amongst these, the
changes of vowels called Guna and Wriddhi should be impressed
on the memory of the student, before he takes a single step in
the study of the Grammar. When the vowels i and º are changed
to e, this is called the Guna change, or a change in 7adality ; when
i and ? are changed to ai, this is called the Wriddhi change, or an
increase. Similarly, a८ and i are often changed to their Guna o,
and Wriddhi aa ; ri and rā to their Guna ar, and Wriddhi ār ; and
 COMBINATION AND PBRMUTATION OR LETTER.S. ?

a, though it have no corresponding Guna change, has a Wriddhi

Substitute in a.

2. Let the Student, therefore, never forget the following rule,

or he will be confused at every step. There is no Guna sub
stitute for a, but a is the Wriddhi substitute for d ; e is the Guna,
and di the Wriddhi Substitute for i and ? ; o is the Guna, and aa८
the Wriddhi Substitute for a८ and ā ; dr is the Guna, and ar the
Wriddhi substitute for ri and ?.
Again, let him never forget that y is the semi-vowel of i and क;
o is the semi-vowel of a and ā ; r is the semi-vowel of ri and ??.
3. Lastly let him bear in mind that the Guna dipthong e is
Supposed to be made up of a and i, and the Guna o, of a and a *
So that a and i may often coalesce into e, and a and a into o.
He will now understand the reason for the arrangement of
vowels and semi-vowels given in the first Table. This Table is
here repeated in the Roman character.

SHORT. 1,0NG. GUNA. WRIDD'HI. STEMI-W0WELS,

८ 67 ā

? ? 62 dā 3/
12८ 17 00८ ??

?i। ?? 6.}* 7?”

R.ULES FOR. THE CO MBINATION OE' WOWELS.

4. If a word end with a or a, when the next begins with a or

a, the two vowels are contracted into one long Similar vowel.
Thus ?ad dsti become ?māsti.
A Similar rule applies to the other vowels i, 1ं, ?i, short or
long. Thus, adhā ishioara, adhāshmpara ; Kinfu upāya, kintipaya ;
pitri riddhi/; (पितृ च्छूडि), pitrºddhi/; (पितृडि:).
5. If a word end with a or a, when º the next begins with i, 1ं,
?ri, short or long, then a and i coalesce into e; a and a into o ;

* In the Same way the Wriddhi diphthong ai is supposed to be made up of a or d

and e, and the Wriddhi au of a or di and 0.
; " ॰ ? _ ु ,। *

21. .. . .T ं _ का' —--- .. . . . . . . * / ~~~ ॰*** - *

./
• । ५ । ४.’
८. २. ८. .. *' ं । । _
• .८ /
५ x’,% 4ः । । */ %' / । ८ ।
*
_ _____

2*
*,। 2 । /ं ? * । `५ ।।
_
* _*
A’ __
१। -*
* . ८४ । । . . ६.५ ’ `** * *५-*t. ?
_ /
A*4-’, ‘ā-e-॰' ं । ८. _

-____
ॐ ~～～~ * श्, *. , ं, // ..
_ A ' ं । *" , " " ’ (* * *,॰ं *
’ ’ ।
.**
।
`॰--
{ं ..
* ; ;
_

’ ॰~-* _ / _ • A 'ं ।।'

 8 CO'MBINATION AND PBRMUTATION OP LETT BRS.

a and ri into ar. Thus, parama ishioara become parameshipara ;

hita upades/ia, hit0padeshd ; gangā tadakam, gangodakam ; taba
?iddhi/ (तव चसृडि:), tacarddhi/% (तवडैिः),
6. If a word end with a or a, when the next begins with the
Guna letters c, o, or the Wriddhi di, au, then a or a with e or ai,
ooalesce into the Wriddhi di ; d or a with o or au, into aa८ : as,
depa dishmoaryam become depaishroaryam ; oidyā epa become oidyaā
od ; alpa ojas, dlpdagjas ; tat/ं7 dushadhdma, tat/taashadhdjm.
7. If a word end with i, a, ri, short or long, when the next
begins with any other dissimilar vowel, i and ? are changed to the
। corresponding semi-vowel y ; a or ā to g ; ?’i or r? to r : as, pratā
upācha become pratyupācha ; tu idānām, tioidāmim ; matri ananda
(मातृ आनन्दं) become mātrananda (माचानन्द),
8. If a word end with the diphthongs di or aa, when the next
begins with any wowel, ai is changed to āy, and aa८ to ag. Thus,
tasmai aakta/% becomes tasmāyukta/% ; dadda८ ammam, dddāga????a??2.
9. If a word end in e or o, when the next begins with a short,
then e and o remain unchanged, and the initial a is cut off.
Thus, te api are written te pi (ते-पि); so api are written so pi (सो-पि).
I0. If a word end in e, when the mext begins with any other
vowel except a short, then e is supposed to be first changed to ay ;
but the y is usually dropped, leaving the a uninfluenced by the
following vowel. Thus, te āgatā/ becomes ta āgata/), (त स्रागता:),
* It so happens that o, as the final of a complete word, is newer likely to come
in c0alition with any initial wowel but Short a. But in the case ofe or o, as the
finals of roots or crude forms, when the termination to be annexed begins with
any wowel, whether d, d, i, or any other, then e is changed to dg/, and o to au.
Thus,.je ati become jagati, bh0 ati become bhaoati.

The following Table exhibits all the combinations of vowels at

one view. Supposing a word to end in ii, and the next word to
begin with aa, the student must carry his eye down the first
column (headed “ final vowels ') till he comes to छ्, and then along
the top horiZontal line of “ initial vowels," till he comes to aa. At
the junction of the perpendicular column under da८ and the hori
Zontal line beginning ā, will be the reguired combination, wiZ. o aa८.
??'?7
??
207 6ा72८ं
0,
W0WELS.
INITIAI,
?८
८2
O 7
67
62
669
6८
0
d?*
6८2
८?
८८2८
672८
7?* dā
Z
ā
7८?*
0
62
022
02८
672८
??1ं/
2?
छ??
67
17
८८
?८
0
।
d6८ा7?८a|g/ ?2ा
/
?’i|
07?|.्/
|2
?८.े/
d?|g/
17
?८
८
?
62
0 ८2८ ?17
o
??'
१
|
67
17
Z|
।2
d 4’ā|o
x।9ं;
1८८2
|e
19
।।
0??
?८
८72८ ध2
|
?ā
१;
?|9
??|
117
| 46.?|o
्;
द्रॆः
6
0799
1d2८
|1d?
|
0
1x ??
ā|
|r
?
|
?
67
?dr
|
?्
|
0 "
”*?*
??*
८१८
62
d
.
?*? ??|
|
ā
|r
?ā
??
?dā
|
??’
67
|d
८
?* ”*|”*?
?d?८
|0
?८ |
ā
?a
d
ri
?|८
'|८
?|
d
e
d
|
८0
Z
?
a ८|d
ā
662
८
|7?८ ād?7y '|at)
t८|ā/
?|āy
|?|7/
e
??|7/
'्/
?i|
at८
o|āy
di|āy
?ढ़/
d|āy
āyā/ aa८
o|ao
di|do
e|do
??|dg
dध्;
?”ā|
ā|at;
a८|at)
?|ao
छ्|do
0 aa८
o|āg
di|āp
e|āg
r?|āc
?i|āt;
a|āp
१८|āg
?|āp
?|āg
Z|āt;
a|āt;
āt
6t?ं ; But
#
initial
from
Separate
clearness,
greater
for
printed,
been
has
state,
changed
its
letter,
final
the
table
this
in
that
Observe, imemtemce
this
made
vowels
two
of
blending
where
lines),
third
and
second
the
(in
cases
those
sexcept
a
in
pos ible.

Separation,
any
without
written
be
must
they
page.
opposite
the
in
seen
already
as

WOWEILS.
FINAL
10 CO'MEINATION AND PBRMUTATION OF I,ETTERS.

Spop. II.–CO'MBINATION OF CONSONANTS.

11. Before proceeding to the rules for the combination of con

sonants, let the alphabet be regarded attentively as divided into
two grand classes, as exhibited in the following Table.
HARD 0R SUBD. S0FT OR S0NANT.

/% /%/। g g/ ?? /

ch c// | 8/ || .j jh।
t t/ | 8/ || d d/ all the vowelS.
८
1)
/ |
;p/
8 || d
८)
d/
O/ ।;
12. If any surd letter end a word when any sonant begins the
next, the hard is changed to its own unaspirated soft ; thus,
karmakrit Ghapati becomes karmakrid 0/doati ; ba/% asti, cāg asti ;
chifralikh ast', chitralig asti.
* It may be proper here to remark, that in writing a Sanscrit sentence, when
the words have undergone th0se changes which the laws of combination demand,
they may either be written separately, as in the examples.just given, or often more
correctly without any separation ; as, karmakridbhaoati। (कमैकृङ्गवति); tyāgasti।
(वागस्ति), The student is therefore to observe, that although in the following
examples, each word will, for greater clearness, be printed separately from the
next, it would accord more with the practice of the natives of India to
print them without any separation. There are two cases, howewer, in which
there remains no option, but in which words must always be written together
without separation, Ist, when a final and initial wowel blend togather into one
sound (see examples, r.4-8) ; 2dly, when either crude forms or adverbs arejoined
with other words to form compounds (see Chap. Ix. on Compound words).
13. If any sonant letter end a word when any surd begins the
next the soft is changed to its own unaspirated hard.* Thus,

* If the final be an aspirated sonant letter, and belong to a root whose initial
is ga d, or ", the aspirate, which is suppressed in the final, is transferrod back to
the initial letter of the root. Thus, tedabudh asti bocomos rodabhad ax#.
 00MBINATI0N 0F 00NS0NANTS. 11

tad karoti becomes tat karoti; b7g pati/, 9ak pati/; ; kshudh pā
pāsā, kshat pipāsā. But as very few words in Sanscrit end
in any other consonants than t and d, the nasals, Wisargah, the
dental Sibilant s, and r, it will be sufficient for all practical
purposes that the attention be confined to the changes of these
consonants. To begin, therefore, with t and d.
CHANGES OR FINAL t AND d.

Gemeral racle.

l4. T becomes d before g, gh, d, dh, b, bh, /, /, r, 't', and all

vowels.* See example, rule l2.
D becomes d before K, k/), 6, th, p, ph, 8. See example,
rule l3.
Before the masals, palatals, and the letter l, final t and d
undergo a change in form as well as guality, as in the following
Special rules.

C/arge 0f t or d to m, before n or m.
15. If ८ or d end a word when the next begins with a masal,
the d or d is usually changed to its own nasal, Thus, tasmāt ma
beCOmes tasmām ?aa ; tasmād mārkha, tasmām mirk/2a.

f A final k is subject to a similar rnle Thus, pāk nama (वाक् मम्) would
bec0me tyāim-mama (वाङ्म), _

4ssimilatiom 0f t or d foith c/, j, !.

I0. If t or d end a word when the next begins with c/, j, or ।।,
the d or d assimilates with these letters. Thus, Ghagyā८ /o८/āt c/a
becomes bhayāl lobhāc/ cha; tad.jiodndm, ddji.jiodmam.

Combimatiom 0f t or d foit/ 8/.

17. If ८ or d end a word when the next begins with श ४/, then

* Before the wowels of terminations t remains unchanged ; thus, the accusative

case of Harit is Haritam, not Haridam ; and the third person singular of the verl)
yat is yutute, not yadate.
 12 COMBINATION AND PBRMUT ATION OP LE TTERS.

t or d are changed to ch, and the initial श sh to छ् ch/. Thus,

dat shrateं (तत् श्रुत्वा) becomes tach chhrutcā (तच्छुत्वं)
Combimatiom 0f f or d ?oit/ /.
18. If a word end in t or d when the next begins with ह् /,
the final t is changed to d (by rule l2), and the initial ह् to थ् dh.
Thus, tad Warati (तद् हति) is written tad dharati (तडरति).
+ By a Similar rule, and on the Same principle, are written words ending in k
followed by initial ह्; as gākharati (वाक् हरति), tāggharati (वाग्घरति).

CHANGES O F THE NASALS.

Changes of final न् n before corcels and before ८ c/, s/, !.

19. If the letter न् n, preceded by a short vowel, end a word
when the next begins with any vowel, the m is doubled. Thus,
āsam adra becomeS ।।78amm atra ; tasmin epa, tasminn epa.
20. If n end a word when the next begins with t, ch, or their
aspirates, a Sibilant is inserted between the two words, according
to the class of these last initial letters; and the न n is then
expressed by Anuswāra, according to rule (p. 5, f), Thus, asmin
fa८ becomes asminsta८ (अस्मिंस्तु); 76a8min child becOmeS kasimim8/ichi८

(कस्मिंश्चित्).
* Ir न n end a word when the next begins with श् sh, they may either remain
unchanged, or they may be combined in either one of the two following ways.
Ist, the final न् may be changed to जन् i: ; as, भवान्। शूर: is written भवाञ्शूरः.
2dly, the श् may also be changed to छ् ; as, भवाञ्छूर:
_

If न् end a word when the next begins with /, the m assimilates with the !, and

the mark `” is placed ower the preceding vowel. As, pakshān lumāti is written
। पछ्रचुनाति.
If the crude form of a word end in m, this m is rejected in forming a com
pound word, or before any affix. Thus, rājan purusha is compounded into rāja
pu?”u&hu s and खामिन् अयं into खाम्यर्थं; and dhamin, with the affix tud, becomes
dhamitupa.

Change 0f न n, ?a0८ final, to ण् p, dffer ri, r, 8/, preceding in the same

?gord.

21. The letters र् r, म्।। 8/, are cerebrals, and the vowel rā is allied
to the cerebral r. Hence, if the letter m (nof fima/) should follow
 00MBINATI0N 0F OONSONANTS. 13
_
"

?i, r, or &/, in the same foord, the nasal must be written in the
cerebral form ण् p, even though K, g, p, ) (or their aspirates), /, 9,
o, or m, should intervene. Thus, the English word carbomic would
be written in the Sanscrit character thus, काबैणिक् ; and the accu
Sative case of ब्रह्महन् is ब्रह्महणं ; and the nominative plural of वमैन्
is वमॆाणि ; and the imperative mood of fछ्प, छ्पिाणि.* But the
intervention of a dental, palatal, Or cerebral, or of any letter
whatever, if compounded with the nasal, prevents the operation of
this rule, and reguires the dental m to follow. Thus, the instru
mental case of शृगाल is शृगालेन ; the nominative plural of वामैन् ,
वत्सॆानि ; and in further illustration of the same law, may be taken
the words सजैनं, क्रीडनं, प्राप्नोति, राज्ञा.

Changes 0f final m.
22. If the letter म् m end a word when the next begins with
८my consonant, it may be represented by Anuswāra (') ; Or it may,
optionally, before those consonants which have a corresponding
nasal, be changed to this corresponding nasal. Thus, griham
gachchhati is written either गृहं गच्छति or गृहङ्गच्छति.
23. When the mext word begins with a vowel, the letter म् is
always written. Thus, griham āpnoti, गृहमाप्नोति.

CHANGES OP WISARGAH OR FINAL h.

Almost every nominative case, and nearly half the remaining

cases of nouns in Sanscrit, besides many persons of the verb, end
in Wisargah (:), or the symbol used to denote the aspirate when
final. And this final / is liable to remain unchanged, to be
Changed to s, to s/, to o, to r, or to be dropped altogether, accord
ing to the nature of the initial letter following. At every step,
therefore, these changes will meet the student's eye. Thergfore
let him master the follorging fice rales before he attempts to read a
single sematence 0f Samscrit, or he cam meoer hope to make any rea!
progress in the ac7a८iremem८ 0f ८/ःis ldnga८dge.

* The letter घञ् is, properly, a compound of क् k and म् sh; although, in this
Grammar, it is considered as a simple letter, and represented by ksh.
14 CO'MBINATION AND PERMUTATION OP LET TERS.

RULE A.- WHEN Is wISARGAH OR FINAL h UNCHANGED?

24. a. Before K, p (and their aspirates), and before the sibilants

स् &, श sh.
0. Before a pause, i. e. at the end of a Sentence, or when a
word stands by itself.

RULE B.- WHEN IS WISARGAH CHANGED TO म् 8 AND शत् sh ?

25. a. Before ८ (and its aspirate) it is changed to the dental sibi

lant स् s ; before ch (and its aspirate), to the palatal sibi
lant शम् ४/.*
८. Also in some books, before the sibilants सं, शा, Wisargah
is allowed to aSSimilate with these letters.

RULE C.-WHEN IS wISARGAH CHANGED To o?

26. d. Final a/% is changed to o before all Sonant consonants.

८. Also before short a (this a being then cut off),
RULE D.-wHEN IS wISARGAH CHANGED TO r?

27. a, II, /, ah, āh, el), aih, oh, aul, before any somant (consonant
or vowel), change the final h to r ;
८. Unless r itself be the sonant following, in which case, to
avoid the coalition of two r's, final / is dropped, and
the vowel preceding it (if short) is lengthened.
RULE B.-WHEN Is wISARGAH DROPPED ALTOGETHER?

28. a. Final a/), before any other vowel except short a, drops the
Wisargah, and leaves the remaining a opening on the
initial vowel of the next word without coalition.f
८. Final ah, before any sonant (consonant or vowel), drops
the Wisargah ; and, if the initial letter of the next word
be a vowel, the remaining a is allowed to open upon it
without coalition.

* So, also, before ढ, ठ, Visargah is changed to the cerebral sibilant ष्; as,
रविष् टीकते.
f By a Special rule स:, “ he," and ख्रष:, “ this,' the nominative cases of the
pronouns तद् and एतद्, drop their visargah before any consonant.
N_
 00MBINATION 0F 00NSONANTS. 15

In the following Table the nominative cases Narah, “ a man,"

JWarāh, “ men,' and Hari/, “ Wishnu," joined with verbs, illustrate
these rules at One view.

WISARGAH IBEFORE SU RD LET TERs. WISARGAH BEFORE SONANT LETTERS.

Before hard consomants. Before sibilants. Before Soft consomant8 Before vowels.

Nodrah kar0ti। Nardh sa?rati। Nar0 0achchhati C. a. JNaro 'tti। C. b.

N८८rāh kurbamti
\ IVarāh sardrati। ' .. Nara gachchhamti B. b. TVarā addrati। E. U.
H7८८?”i/% karoti। j* 0. Harih sarati J Harir gachchhati D. a. HId;rir dddā ID• 6'-

Woºrah pachati IVurah shakm0ti। War0.jag/afi Nara āpm0ti E. ८.

Varāh pachamti। '.. IVarāh shakmuuamti। A• ८८ Nara.jayamti E. b. JNarā āpmubamti E. b.

BWarih pachati J Harih shakm0ti
0r
} Harir.jagati 1D. ८. Harir apm0ti D. 6E.

Varas tarati \ ]Varas sarati JNaro dddādi। O. ८. JNara ikshate E. ८.

V८?’aZs dardrati। B. ८. IVarās saramti। \ B. b. JNarā dadatā TVa?rā ?kshdrate E. b.

7aris darali। J HWaris sdrati। J Hari?” dadāti। ID. ८. Harir7ikshate JD• ८•

Warash charati Narash shakm0ti JNajro Urdt7ati। C. 2Vara edhate E. ८•

Varāsh charamti। J B. ८• IVarāsh shakmutganti। । B b. Nara brutgamti E. b. IVara edhamte E. b.

*

7arāsh charati Harish shakm0ti। J Harir bratjiti। ID. ८. Harir edhate JD. ८•

Similarly before kh, Naro gachati C• ८

Similarly before the
7a, th, chh. Nara gāchanti। 1E.
other wowels and diph
Harir gachati। IO. ८.
th0ngs.

Similarly before the

Visargah before
naSals, and before h, ८, a pauSe.
0: and before r, except
in the last case ; as, Atti marah) \
IVar0 rakshati। C. ८. 4dunti marāh J A. b.

IVa?’ā ?’akshamati E. ८). 444i Harih।

Haj't rakshati D. b.

OHANGES OR FINAIL स् 8

29. The rules for the changes of Wisargah apply egually to

final Sibilants. ThuS, ?mdmas hara becomes ?mamohara (as in C. d.);
and chaks/us gishdyd, chakshadr gis/idya (as in D. a) ;* and chedas,
standing alone, is written cheta/ (A. B.)

* In a few compound words a final sibilant takes the cerebral form beforo k,
as prādus kritu become prāduglikrita. Similarly, a final r bofore k or ;) : as, mir
with krdnta, mi.Jakrinta ; with putra, nishputra. See also r. 42, 48, and 181. I.
16 00MBINATION AND PBRMUTATION 0F LET TERS.

30. स् s is changed to म् sh when any other vowel except a or

ā immediately precedes in the Same word. Thus, Ghagasi, “ thou
art "; but Karoshi, not Karosi, “ thou doest."*

CHANGES OR FINAL ?”,

31. Again, rules A, B, D, apply egually to final r. Thus, prātar

kāla becomes prāta/ Kala ; prādar chd, prātas/ chd ; and the pre
position mir before akta remains unchanged, and before rasa is
changed to m7; thus, ?mirukta, nirasa.
32. But final ar, unlike ah, remains unchanged before any
sonant (consonant or vowel); as, prātar āsha : and before the
SOnant r itself, drops the r and lengthens the preceding a ; as,
;pumdr rakshati becomes pumā rakshati.
33. It is to be observed further of r, that it may optionally double
any consonant (except ह्) that immediately follows it. Thus, निर् दय।
may be written निहॆय.

Hence it appears that the symbol Wisargah (:) may be considered

as much a representative of final s and r, when these letters are
imperceptible, as of final /. Indeed, all those inflections of nouns
and persons of verbs which are said to end in Wisargah, might
be said to end in s ; Only that, in Such cases, the s is silent, or
pronounced with an imperceptible breathing, as in the French Ves,
or the English, island, piscount. So again, in many French words,
Such as parler, the final r is silent; and in some English, such as
card, the Sound of r is very indistinct ; and in all these cases, s and
r would be represented in Sanscrit by Wisargah (ले: पालॆ: &c.),
The following Table exhibits the more common combinations
of consonants at one view. Observe, that in the top line of initial
letters the aspirated consonants have been omitted, because it is
am universal rule, that whatever change takes place before any
consonant, the same holds good before its aspirate. Final s has
also been omitted, as undergoing precisely the same changes with.
final /.

* Also when k precedes : as, cid with &u is ritsw ; but Dhuk, lhukshu. Cf. r. II2. c.
 -ः

dh।
d h।
ma h।
0 h।
ā h।
ur h।
?”
h।
/
ij’
S
u/a
ih।
chh।
ch sh)
?? sh।
ri। chh
ri sh।
ah sh
ā/a sh।
ih sh।
uh h।
sh
sh। Or 0r

u;

?८?*

1८?"

cm
|
g
|d
dj
|.j
ch
८
a
1
८,
??|h
d) ā||
g
a
|
k
t
j|ās
|a
|ch
m
|d|ā
८
ā
p|a/।
sh
āh
/ā
१āh।
८
८ाः a m
|ir
p
iā
l
a
|ig
|
ch
is
j|
ih
ir
sh
rruh,
i?”
ir
ij”
क h ग्ढ़/h। jp
u.j
d
rur
।m
|
a
k
ul
ua|
i
|lg/
?/
urch
th
ur
sh
rs
ःe/h.
dih।
a८7*
fefore.j
A
bf
n
m
न
form
palatal
the
in
written
rarely
very
is
inal
.
ps
h
|
m
r??"j*?”/।
by
preceded
r,
|a
.sgā
ch
?’|jh/’

}|“a|:|
dन
nn
|
ch
msh
ns
j|
n
f|
p
n
|
m
7े,
??,
7?
70

*
ं,ं
ch)
d
८)
.}
67AND
??
3/C0NS0NANTS.
??
???
ihort
m
S*
a
by
preceded
if
doubled
only
vowel.
s
'
|0
k
al
aa|
ag
j
|0
dch
m
o
|
jp
sh
hs0a
d/ः
0
0

i,
ā,
VOWELS
INITIAL,
-
&c. &c. &c. &c. &c.&e.0h,
|
&c. au/ vowel.
ang/
&c.

CONSONANTS.
FINAL

कh
ih,
*
 CHAPTER, III.

ON SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS.

35. Before treating of Sanscrit nouns, it will be advisable to

point out in what respect the peculiar System adopted in their
formation reguires an arrangement of the subject different from
that to which we are accustomed in other languages.
In Sanscrit nouns, then, there is this great peculiarity, that
every one of them has two distinct states prior to the formation
of the nominative case : wiZ. Ist, a root ; 2dly, a crude form,
coming from this root. _

In the first place, therefore, let us inguire, what is the root.

There are, in Sanscrit, a number of monosyllabic Sounds, which
are called roots. These are mere artificial inventions, having
only an ideal existence ; mere blocks, So to speak, of themselves
guite useless;* from which, however, are carved out and fashioned
all the varieties of nouns and verbs which exist in the language.
Every one of these roots conveys some simple idea, which appears
under different mOdifications in the derivatives from it. Thus,
to mention a few of the most common : the root kship conveys
the idea of “ throwing "; Kri of “ doing," “ making "; hri of.
“ seiZing'; /agj, “ joining"; as, prit, “ being "; bhā, “ becoming ';
.jZo, “ living '; ???, “ leading '; ji, “ conguering '; gam, Gyā, char,
Kram, i, &ri, “ going "; gad, cac/, Grā, “ speaking "; bud/, ८yā (ज्ञा),
“ knowing "; drish (दृश्), "seeing "; i8/, kam, “ wishing "; miri,
“ dying "; da, “giving"; jan, “ producing "; dhā, “ placing "; ad,
bhaks/, bhaj, “ eating '; pā, " drinking "; pach, " cooking '; hdia,
“ killing"; pat, “ falling"; bas, “ dwelling "; oish (विश्), “ entering ";
st/ia, “ standing "; shra (श्रु), “ hearing "; sprish (स्पृशा), “ touching ";
sid/, sād/, “ accomplishing ''; Krā (क्री), “ buying "; Kaºp, kraddh, "being

* Except in a few cases, where they are used by themselves as nouns.

 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDB FORM OR NOUNS. I9

angry"; chi, “ collecting"; ghrā, “ smelling"; k/yā, “ relating";

nash (नश्), “ perishing"; tyaj rah, “५uitting"; digis/ (द्विष्),
"hating'; ?aind, "blaming'; dra८, “ running'; dyud, dip, ८//a, s/ha/),
“ shining"; pā, “ purifying"; prachchh (प्रच्द्) “asking"; āp, lab/,
“ obtaining'; sta, shams, “ praising'; /ad, “ striving'; /am, “ re
Straining'; sha/% (शक्) “ being able'; tap, “ heating"; da/), “ burn- A*

ing"; mach, “ liberating'; ?mah, “ being foolish"; /udh, “ fighting";-त्र॰.•ं ।

ra/), “growing"; has, laughing"; sicap, “sleeping"; /krish (ढ्प्), *

nand, hlād, “ being glad"; smā, “ bathing"; rab/, “ beginning";

sioar, “ sounding'; 8a/), ca/), “ bearing'; smari, “ remembering."
The student is recommended to commit to memory the com
monest of these roots or elementary Sounds, as here given. For
it will appear in the Seguel, that from each of them may be drawn
out, with great regularity, Ist, a set of simple Substantives ; 2dly, of
simple adjectives; 3dly, of simple verbs. To take, for example,
the root Dadh, “ to know.`* From this root are formed, on fixed
principles, the following Substantives and adjectives ; bod/ia or
८odhama, “knowledge"; buddhi, '' intellect"; bodhaka, “an informer";
८aaddha, “ a Buddhist"; Uudha, “ wise '; buddhimat, “ intellectual'';
and the verbs, bodhati, “ he , knows'; bodhayati, “ he informs';
८ud/kyate, “ it is known'; bubhutsate, Or Gubodhishati, “ he wishes
to know"; Gobadkyate, “ he knows well." And the simple idea
contained in the root may be endlessly extended by the prefix
ing of prepositions ; as, prabodha, “ vigilance'; ;prabaddhyade, “ he
awakes.'
36. In the second place, it has been Said that the Sanscrit noun,
Substantive and adjective, makes its first appearance in a state
called d/he crude form." The Same may be Said of the pronouns,

* It will be convenient, in the following pages, to express the idea contained in

the root by prefixing to it the infinitive sign to. But the Student must not suppose
_
.that the Sound budh denotes any thing more than the mere ided of “ knowing''; mor
must he imagine that in deriving nouns from it, we are deriving them from the
infinitive, or from any part of the verb, but rather from a Simple original Sound,
a mere imaginary word, which is the common Source of both nouns and verbs.
__ f This state of the noun will, in the following pages, be called the crude.
20 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDB FORM OR NOUNS.

numerals, and participles. Thus, Godha, bodhana, tad, parichan,

८//acad, are the crudes of the nominative cases bodha/, bodhanam,
sa/), paiicha, Dhagan, respectively. The student should endeavour
to understand, at the outset, the meaning and use of this crude
form. It is an intermediate state between the root and nomi
native case, the naked form of the noun, which serves as the
basis on which to construct its eight cases, beginning with the
nominative. In a Greek or Latin dictionary we look for the noun
under the nominative case, but in Sanscrit we look for it under
its crude state ; as, for example, sah, “he,' is found under tad.
And here let it be distinctly understood, that the orude form of a
noun is very far from having a mere ideal existence, like the root.
It is of the utmost practical utility. It is that form of the noun
which is always used in the formation of compound words ; and
as every Sanscrit sentence contains, perhaps, more compound
words than simple ones, it may with truth be said, that the crude
state of the noun is not only that form under which it appears in
the dictionary, but is also the most usual form under which it
appears in books.
We may conceive it guite possible that Greek and Latin gram
marians might have proceeded on a Similar plan, and that they
might have Supposed a root ?\ey, from which was drawn out the
nouns A68ts, ?\e5tkºs, Aekrāg, Korrot?\oy), āAAoyog, and the verbs ?\6ryoo,
korroं?\6yo, 6?\\ory6o: So also, a root og, from which was derived the
nouns dgmen, actio, dctus ; and the verbs ago, perago : or a root moru,
from which would come mauta, nauis, nauticus, natpalis, mauigo. Again,
they might have Supposed a crude form to each of these nouns, as
well as a root; as, for instaince, ?\egtko of Ae8akāc, and maui of nauis ;
and they might have reguired the student to look for the noun macis
under mati, and the verb mauigo under mau. Further than this,
they might have shewn that this crude form was the form used in
the formation of compound words, as in Ae8akoypंpos, motiger. But
Greek and Latin are too uncertain in their construction to admit;
of Such a method of arrangement being extensively applied : Such,
however, is the artificial character of the Sanscrit language, that
here it has been done throughout with great regularity and pre
CIS1OI1_
 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS. 2I

PORMATION OR THE CR.UIDES OR SIMPLE NOUNS.

37. Nouns substantive and adjective are of two kinds, Simple

and compound. Simple nouns are those which stand alone, and
uncompounded with any other. Compoumd, are those made up
of two or more nouns, the last only receiving inflection.*
It may be easily understood, from the preceding remarks, that
the consideration of simple nouns divides itself into two heads :
Ist, The formation of their crudes ; 2dly, The formation of their
cases ; Or, in other words, the enumeration of the different systems
of declension which belong to each variety of crude form.
Observe, that it is not intended that the student should dwell
long, at first, on the following pages, printed in small type. It
will be essential for him, however, to read them over with atten
tion, as a necessary introduction to the subject of declension in
Chapter IW. Their importance will not be fully appreciated till
he arrives at a more advanced period of his studies.
The crudes of nouns are formed in two ways, either by adding certain affixes
to the R00T, the wowel of which is liable, at the same time, to be changed to its
Guna or Wriddhi Substitute, or by adding certain affixes to oRumEs or NOUNS
already formed. It must be remembered, however, that, although every Single
word in the Sanscrit language is derived from some root, there are many in which
the connection between the noun and its source, either in sense or form, is by no
means obwious.f With the derivation of all Such we Shall not concern ourselves ;
and the following rules have only reference to th0se classes of nouns whose
formation proceeds on clear and intelligible principles.

38. FIRST CLAss.– Crudes in a, IMasculine and Neuter ; in a and ?,

Femimime.

Formed by adding to R00Ts–

J. d, forming, Ist (nom. -al), after the Wriddhi of medial a of a r00t, and the
Guna of any other vowel, a large class of substantives masculine : as, from the
root dio, * to sport,” deua, “ a deity.” If a root end in ch or .j, these letters

* Compound nouns are treated of in Chapter Ix. on Compound Words.

f Thus, पुरूषः, *a man,” is Said to come from pur, “ to precede "; shrigala,
**a jackal,” from srij, “ to create”; shioa, “ the god Shiva,” from shi, “ to sleep.”
22 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUIDE FORM OT NOUNS.

are changed to k and g respectively : as, from pach, ** to cook,' paka, ** cooking ";
from /uj, ** to join,' /oga, **.joining.”
Forming, 2dly (nom. masc. -ah, fem. -a, neut. -am*), after Guna of a final, and
sometimes Guna of a medial vowel, nouns of agency : as, from ptu, “ to swim,"placa,
** what swims ”; from s?”ip, ** to creep,” sana, * what creeps” (see r. 181. 1.).
Forming, 8dly (nom. -ah -ā -um), adjectivesः । as, from shabh, ** to shine,' shubha,
* beautiful.” Sometimes there is great change of the root : as in shiod, “ pro
pitious,'' sundara, “ beautiful ; and sometimes the feminine may be formed in । :
as, Sundarā. There are very few adjectives formed with this affix.
II. ८ka (nom. -akah,-akā or -ikā, -akam), after Wriddhi of a final wowel or medial

a, and Guna of any other vowel. Still more common than a to form adjectives
and nouns of agency : .as, from tap, “ to burn,' tāpaka, “ inflammatory ''; from kri,
* to do,” kāraka, **a doer” (r. 181.8. b.) ; OBS. -akā is the feminine of the adjec
tives, and -ikā of the agents: as, tāpaka, kārika.
III. gng (nom. -anam), after Guna ofthe root, forming, Ist, a large class of neuter
Substantives: as, from mं, “ to guide,” mag/ama, “ guidance "; from da, “ to give,”
dima, ‘*a gift.”
Forming, 2dly (nom. -amah, -amā, -amam), nouns of agency and adjectives : as,
from mrit, “ to dance,” martama, “a dancer” (r. 181. 8. c.) ; from shubh, “ to shine,''
shobhama, “bright.” The feminine of the agents may be in ami.
rv. tra (nom. -tram), after Guna of the root : as, from pā, “ to drink,"pātra,
११ a vक्ष्al ”; from shru, “ to hear,” shrotra, “ the organ of hearing.” This affix is

used to form neuter nouns denoting some instrument or organ, and corresponds
to the Latin trum in aratrum, plectrum, &c.
v. There are other uncommon affixes to roots to form adjectives in o (nom.
-ah, -ā, -am) : as, ala, oara, ra, ntra, ira, uka, tra, ma, āka. The following are
examples of adjectives formed with these affixes; chapala,.jituara, namra, bhidura,
ruchira, oarghuka, chitra, bhama,.jagaraka.
Formed by adding to NoUNS,
VI. .tua (nom. -ttodm), forming neuterabstract substantives from any noun in
the language : as, from puruंha, “ a man,” purushatuia, “ manliness.” In adding
this affix to crudes ending in nasals, the nasal is rejected : as, from dhamin, “ rich,”
dhamitupa, “ the state of being rich.”

* OBS. When there are three genders, it will be Sufficiont, in future, to place
the hyphen between them.
 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDB FORM OR NOUNS. 23

vm..yn, forming, Ist (nom. -9am), neuter abstract substantives and a few col
lectives, the first syllable of the noun taking vriddhiः as, from suhrid, “a friend,”
sauhridya, “ friendship.” When the crude ends in a vowel, this vowel is rejected
before ga is affixed : as, from gichitra, “ various,' oaichitrya, “ variety.”
Forming, 2dly (nom.-9a,-yā,-9am),adjectives expressing some relationship to the
noun : as, from dhama, “ wealth,” dhamga, “ wealthy.” Sometimes Wriddhi takes
place : as, from soma, “ the moon,” 8aumya, **lunar.” In this case the fem. is -yi.
vm. a (nom.-ah,-ः,-am), after Wriddhi of the first syllable of the noun, forming
innumerable adjectives expressing some relationship to the noun. When the
crude ends in a, no further affix is reguired, and the only change is the Wriddhi
of the first syllable : as, from purugha, “ a man,” paurugha, “ manly.” When in
ā or i, this a or i must be rejected : as, from sikata, ** Sand,' 8aikatu, ** Sandy.”
When in a, this u is changed to au before this and the three following affixes :
as, from Wiºhnu, “ the god Wishnu,” Waighnada, “ a worshipper of Wishnu.”
Sometimes the neuter form of this adjective is taken as an abstract substantive :
as, nominative case, puurughum, “ manliness '; Or, as a collective : as, kshaitram,
**fields,” collectively, from kshetra. This applies to the two next affixes.
rx. ika (nom. -ikah, -ikā, -ikam), after Wriddhi of the first syllable of the noun,
forming numerous adjectives. Before this affix is added, the final wowel of the
crude must be rejected : as, from dharma, “ religion,” dhārmika, “ religious.”
x. e)a (nom. -eyah, -6.ji, -eyum), after Wriddhi of the first syllable of the noun,
forming Imany adjectives. The final wowel of the crude must be rejected: as, from
purugha, “ a man,” paurushe/a, “ manly "; from dgmi, “ fire,” āgmega, “fiery.”
xI. ।।ja (nom. -1/ah, -1/ā, -1/um), without any change of the noun, except the
rejection of final a : as, from purouta, **a mountain,'' parbatiya, “ mountainous.”
Sometimes there is Wriddhi : as, from sukha, “ pleasure,” samukhāya, **pleasurable.”
When the final of the crude remains, k is prefixed to the last two affixes.
xII. There are other uncommon affixes to nouns forming adjectives in a (nom.
-dh, -ā, -am) : aS, ?na, Uala, tand ; forming, from grtima, ‘*a village,' gramima,
“ rustic''; from shikha, “a crest,'' shikhaoala, “ crested'; from shtgas, “ t0-morrow,''
&hurastama, “ future.' This last correSponds to the Latin timus, and has reference
to time-- Ka is Sometimes added to words to form adjectives and collective nouns,
” and is often redundant. Maya (nom. -mag/ah, -magi, -magyam) is a common affix
added to any word to denote made of': as, from Joha, “ iron,” lohamag/u, “ made of
iron ''; from tejus, “ light,'' tejomaga, “ consisting of light,” “ full of light.''
By adding t0 It00TS,
xurं (nom. -ā), with n0 change of the r00t, forming feminine substantives: as,

`२ ।
24 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OR NOUNS.

from.jio, “ to live,”.jioa, “ life.” This affix is freguently added to the desiderative

form of a root : as, from pipās, ** to desire to drink," pipāsi, “ thirst "; and rarely
to the intensive: as, from lolig/, “ to cut much," l0lāga, “ cutting much.”
By adding to NOUNS,
xIW. । !a (nom. -tā), forming feminine abstract Substantives : as, from purusha,

* a man,” purughata, “ manliness.” This affix may be added to any moun in the
language, and corresponds to the Latin tas in celeritas, &c.
xv•ं (nom. -ग्), forming a large class of feminine Substantives, usually derived
from masculines in a, by changing d to । : as, from mada, **a river,” fem. mada ;
from putra, **a Son," fem. putr। ; from martaka, ** a dancer,” fem. martaka.

39. SECOND CLASS.-Crudes in i, IMasculime, Femimime, amd Neuter.

Formed by adding to ROOTs,
r. i, forming, Ist (nom. -ih), a few masculine Substantives, often not connected
with their roots either in form or Sense : as, from umrk, “ to mark”, ggmi, “ fire.”
When this affix is added to the root dhi, क is dropped, and various prepo
sitions are prefixed ; as gandhi, oidhi, midhi.
Forming, 2dly (nom. -i), one or two neuter Substantives : as, from ori, “ to sur
round ”; oari, ** water.”
Forming, 8dly (nom. -ih,-ih,-i), a few adjectives : as, from shuch, “ to be pure ”;
&huchi, “ pure.” _ "

m. ऽti (nom. -tih), forming an useful class of abstract Substantives feminine.

This affix bears a great analogy to the passive participle (r. I25.). The same
changes of the root are reguired before it as before this participle ; and, in fact,
prowided the passive participle does not insert i, this substantive may always be
formed from it, by changing ta into ti. But if i is inserted before ta, no such
Substantive can be formed. Thus, from oach, “ to speak,'' ukta, * Spoken,” tuktā,
* Speech "; from mam, “ to imagine,” mata, “ imagined,” mati, * the mind.” And
where ma is Substituted for ta of the passive participle, mi is Substituted for ti ;
as, from glai, “ to be weary,' glima, “ wearied,'' glimi, “ weariness.' This affix
corresponds to the tio of the Latin, added, in the same way, to passive participles :
as actus, acti0.

40. THIRD CLASS.– Crudes im u, Masculime, Feminine, and Neuter.

Formed by adding to RooTS,
r. ma, forming, Ist (nom. -uh), often with considerable change of the root, a few
 A.
SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDB FORM OR NOUNS. 25

Substantives of the masculine, and one or two of the feminine gender : as, from
bhā, “ to shine," bhānu, m. “ the sun”; from dhe, “ to drink," dhemu, f. “ a cow."
Forming, 2dly (nom. -u), one or two neuter Substantives : as, mudhu, ** honey."
Forming, 8dly (nom. -uh-uh or -ti-u), a few adjectives: as, from tam, “ to stretch,"
tamu, “ thin ” (fem. tamuh or tamui). This affix is often added to desiderative
roots to form adjectives : as, from pipās, “ to desire to drink,"pipāsu, ** thirsty.”
II. ighmu (nom. -ighmuh, -ishnuh, -ishmau), with Guna of the root, forming adjec
tives : as, from kshi, “ to perish,” kshajrishnu, “ perishing.”
III. There are many other affixes to roots, forming nouns in u (nom. -uh,-mh,-u) :
as, ru, mmt, alu, smu, tiru, itmu, tu. The following adjectives afford examples of
these affixes: bhiru, trasmu, shag/mlu, sthasmu, shdriru, gadagitmu ; and the Sub
stantive gumtu.

41. FoURTH CLAss.–Crudes in tri (तृ), Masculine, Feminine, and

IVeuter.

Formed by adding to RooTs,

_tri, forming Ist (nom. -ta, -tri, -tri), nouns .of agency of three genders, the same
change of the root being reguired which takes place in the first futuro (r. 181. 2.).
Thus, from kship, “ to throw,” ksheptri, “ a thrower; from da, *toºgive,”,aātri,
*a giver.” This corresponds to the Latin affix tor. _

Forming 2dly (nom. -ta), a few nouns of relationship, masculine and feminine :
as, pitri, *a father,” mātri, **a mother.”

42. FIFTH CLASS.-Crudes in t and d, Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Formed by adding to Roors,
* (nom--', in all genders), if the root end in a ahort ooapag: forming nouns of
agency of three genders: as, from kri, “ to do,” krit, “a doer"; from ji, *to
conguer,".jit, “ a congueror.” This class of nouns are never used, except as the
last member of a compound: thus, kurmakrit, “ a doer of work.” Roots already
ending in t or d, taken to form nouns of agency, fall under this class: as, from
trid, “ to know,"dharmauid, “*one who knows his duty-T There are also afew nouns
falling under this class, formed by prefixing prepositions to roots ending in t or d :
as, from dyut, “ to shine,” uidyut, “lightning”; from pad, “ to go,"sumpad, **success.
_
E
26 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDR FORM OR NOUNS.

By adding to NOUNS,
I. out (nom. -tam, -bati, -bat), if the crude end in a or ā,* forming innumerable
adjectives : as, from dhama, ‘* wealth," dhamabat, “ possessed of wealth.” This and
the next affix are universally applicable, and are of the utmost utility to form
adjectives of p0SSession. Sometimes oat is added to crudesin s and ८: as in tejastoat,
oidyutulat (violating r. 26. 29. and 14.).
II. mat (nom.-mam, -mati, -mat), if the crude end in i, ?, or u, to form adjectives
like the preceding : as, from dhi, “ wisdom,” dhāmat, ** wise”; from amshu, ‘*a ray,”
umshumat, ** radiant.''

43. SIxTH CLASS.-Crudes im an and in, IMasculime, Feminime, and

Neuter.

Formed by adding to R00TS,

r. mam (nom. -ma), after Guna of the root, forming Substantives of the neuter
gender: as, from kri, “ to do"; karmam, “a deed.” This affix corresponds to the
Latin mem, in regimem, stamem, &c. One or two nouns in mam are masculine : as,
ātmam, “ soul” (nom. -mā) ; and a few masculine nouns are formed with am instead
of mam : as, rājam, **a king” (nom. -ja), from rāj, “ to shine.' A few adjectives are
formed with oam s as, drishuium, ** Seeing' (nom. -ba, -Ua, -ba).
By adding to NOUNS,
II. imam (nom. -imā), forming masculine abstract SubstantiveS. If the noun
ends in d or u, these wowels are rejected : as, from kāla, “ black,” kalimam, “black
ness''; from laghu, “ light,' laghimam, “ lightneSS'; from mridu, “ Soft,'' maradimam.f
If it end in a consonant, this consonant, with its preceding vowel, is rejected : as,
from mahat, “ great,' mahimam, “ greatnesS.''
By adding to R00TS,
III. in (nom. -ः, -imi, -i), after Wriddhi of a final wowel and medial a, and Guna of
\

* Wat is not often found added to feminine crude formS. It occurS, howewer,
occasionally; as, कान्तावत् , “having a wife," शिखावत् , **crested.”
f A medial ri before a Simple consonant is changed to ra, but not before a double
consonant : as, from कृष्ण, **black,” कृष्णिमन् , “ blackneSS.' This affix, imum, is
generally added to adjectioes, and the Same changes take place before it, that take
place before the affixes iyus and islatha (See r. 71. f). Thus, gurinaam, premam,
drighimam, bhāmam, &c.
 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUTOB FORM OR' NOUNS. 27

any other medial wowel, forming nouns of agency of three genders (r. 181. 8.) : as,
from kri, “ to do,'' kārim, *a doer.”
By adding to NOUNS,
Iv- in (nom. -', -inl, -i), forming innumerable adjectives of possession. The final
ofacrude is rejected before thisaffix : as, from dhama, *wealth,” dhamin,* wealthy '' ;
from mtiki, “ a garland,” mālin, “garlanded"; from orāhi, *rice,” orāhin, *having
IP1069.

v- Uin (nom. -U, -oini, -bi), if the crude end in a or as, forming a few adjectives :
as, from medhā, “ intellect,'' medhāoin, * intellectual”; from tejas, “ Splendour,'' tgjas
toin, “ Splendid.' This last example violates r. 26. and 29.

44. SBWENTH CLASS.-Crudes in as, Masculime, Femimine, and Neuter.

Formed by adding to R00rs,
ds (nom. -ah), after Guna, forming neuter Substantives : as, from mam, “ to think,'
mamas, “ the mind''; from &ri, “ to go,” saras, “ water.” But in oedhas, “ Brahmā,'
and chandramas, ** the moon,” maSc., and apsuras, “ a mymph,' fem., the nominative
is -āh. In place of as, the neuter affixes is or us are occasionally added : as, from
hu, “ to offer,' hagis, “ ghee''; from chaksh, “ to speak,' chakshus, “ the eye.''

45. EIGHTH CLASS.-Crudes in any Consonant, except t, d, n, S,

Musculine, Femimime, dmd Neuter.
Formed by using ROOTS as nouns of agency.
Any r00t may be used to form a noun of agency, prowided it be compounded
with another word. Thus, from shak, “ to be able,” sarbashak, “omnipotent.”
Those roots which end in t or d, or in a Short vowel, having t affixed, have been
already noticed as falling under the fifth claSS. This eighth class is intended to
comprise all other rootS, ending in amgy comsomamt : as, bhuj (nom. bhuk) ; rāj (nom.
श्राद्) ; ;prachchh (nom. प्राद्) ; budh (nom. bhut); pur (nom. piah) ; gir (nom. gih) ;
diU (nom. djauh) ; &prish (nom. sprik) ; trish (nom. oit) ; turish (nom. विट्) ; lih।
(nom. लिद् ) ; duh (nom. dhuk) ; pipaksh (nom. pipuk). There are also one or
two other nouns derived from roots falling under this class : as, तृष्णजन्
८
, * thirsty ”
(nom. तृष्णक्); ऋत्विजन्, “ a priest” (nom. ऋत्विक्); वाच् , f “ speech” (nom.
वाक्); अमृजन् , n. blood” (nom. असूक्).
 CHAPTER IW.

IDECLENSION.

THE ARTICLE.

40. There is no indefinite article in Sanscrit.* Thus, “ a

man' can only be expressed by the simple noun पुरूष: puracsha/.
The definite article is usually expressed by the pronoun sa,
as स पुरुप: sa purasha/, “ the man." The indefinite pronoun कश्चित्
kas/chit may be used like the English expression " a certain ';
thus, कश्चित् पुरूषः “ a certain man."
Ge??era८ OUseragatioms.

As, in the last chapter, nouns substantive and adjective were

arranged under eight classes, according to the final of their crudes
(the first four classes comprising those ending in vowels, the last
four those ending in consonants), so it will be the object of the
present chapter to give the eight systems of declension arising
out of this arrangement. Moreover, as every class of crudes
Comprised adjectives as well as substantives, SO it is intended
that the examples of a masculine, feminine, and neuter Substan
tive, exhibited under each system of declension, shall serve as the
model for the masculine, feminine, and neuter of adjectives
coming under the same class.
The learner will have already gathered that the noun has three
genders, and that the gender is, in many cases, determinable
from the termination of the crude. Thus, all crudes in a, ?, and
those formed with the affix ti (r. 39.), are feminine : nearly all
nouns whose crudes end in ama, tiod, /a, tra, as, is, us, and 222८?a,
are neuter ; all in imam are masculine ; but those in a, i, १८, and
ri, are not reducible to rule. The nominative case is, however,
in the first of these instances a guide to the gender : as, deoa/),

* In modern Sanscrit cka is very commonly used as an indefinite article, as

rkal puruslial, “a man."
 DBCLENSION 0F ORUDES BNDING IN WOWBL,S. 29

“ a deity," is masculine ; but dānam, “ a gift," neuter, And in

other cases the meaning of the word : as, pitri, “ a father,'' is
masculine ; and matri, “ a mother," feminine.
। In Sanscrit, all the relations between the words in a sentence
are expressed by inflections. A great many prepositions exist
in the language, but these are very rarely used alone in govern
ment with any case, their chief use being as prefixes to verbs
and nouns. This absence of Syntactical auxiliaries leads to the
necessity for eight cases. These are called, I. nominative ; 2. ao
cusative ; 3. instrumental ; 4. dative ; 5. ablative ; 6. genitive ;
7. locative ; 8. vocative.* Of these, the third and seventh are
new to the classical student. The instrumental denotes generally
the instrument by which a thing is done ; as, tema kritam, “ done
by him." The locatioe generally refers to the place or time in
which any thing is done ; as, -4yodhyāyām "in -4yodhyā'; ;piruakale,
“ in former time'; bhiimau, “ on the ground." Hence it follows

that the ablatice is restricted to the sense from, and cannot be

used, as in Latin and Greek, to express by, ?oith, in, at, om, &c.
The noun has three numbers, Singular, dual, and plural.

SRCr. I.-DECLENSION OF CRUTOES ENDING IN WOWELS,

OR OE' THE FIRST FOUR OLASSBS OE' NOUNS.
FIRST CLASS.-CRUDES IN d, MASCULINE AND NEUTER. ; IN 7 AND ?,
FEMININE,

Declined like देव depa, mas. “ a deity "; जीवा jica, fem. “iif४";
नदी ?2ad, fem. “ a rāper"; and दान dāma, neuter, “a gifº."
47. By far the greatest number of masculine and neuter nouns,
in Sanscrit, end in a in the crude form ; and by far the greatest
number of feminine nouns end in either a Or ?. These we have
arranged under the first Class, and the examples we are about to
give will serve as the model, not only for Substantives, but also

* OBS. That these cases will sometimes be denoted by their initial letters.
Thus, N. will denote nominative, I. instrumental.
f Both these cases are used to denote various other relations. See the Chapter
on Syntax.
 30 DBCLENSION OP CRUDES BNDING IN vOWELS,

for all the adjectives given at r. 38. as falling under this class.
For all adjectives which make a in the crude form of the mas
culine and neuter make a or ? in the feminine. Thus, taking the
adjective sandara, “ beautiful.' The masculine is declined like
deca (nom. sundara/); the feminine like jipā or nadi (nom.
sandarā or sundar); the neuter like dāma (nom. sundaram),
So great is the importance of this first class of nouns, that, to
make its declension clearer, it will be advisable to give, in the
first place, the following general Scheme of its terminations.

MASCU LIN E. THE TWO FEMININE FORMS.

2— –\
SING. DUAL. P LUER. SING. DUAL. \ PILUR..

Nom. d/। 612८ ā/ || ? ? 62 3/da८ 67/; g/a/%

Acc. am | da८ 677a || 67??? ???? |e 3/da८ 7/% ?/

Ins. ema |ab//ām | di/ | dyā /ā |āb/kyām ?b/iyām |abhi/ ?bhi/%

Dat. āya | – | eb//a/% |āyai gai। ___ – |āb//a/। ?b//a/%
Abl. ā# | -– || āyā/ /ā/ | – ___ _______

Gen. asya | dyo/ | āmām | - - | dyo/ १/0/ d7ati/m? ???????

LOc. e ________ esha८ || ऴ/āma gyām | - _____ 678?८ ?8/।a८
Woc. a 0,2८ ā/ || e ? 62 g/da८ 7/% g/a/%

NBUTER..

2–ा––िx
SING. IDUALa. PLUR..

Nom. ___ The rest of the meuter terminations are

Ace. {an 69 “ | like the masculine.
Woc. a 62 ā???

। The classical student will recognise in this scheme many

reSemblances to the terminations of nouns in Latin and Greek,
when it is remembered that the Sanscrit a corresponds to the
Latin ad and the Greek o ; the Sanscrit ?m to the Latin wia and the
Greek v ; the Sanscirt a or ? to the Latin a and the Geek १, or
gen. plur. co ; the Sanscrit )/ or , ८// to the
etoं, Or oं, Or in the

Latin ) ; and that the Sanscrit Wisargah, or final /, is eguivalent to s.

 v
OR OE' THE FIRST FOUR OLASSBS OR' N0UNS. 31

In the application of the above terminations, the finals of the

crudes must first be rejected. Thus, taking dega, and rejecting
the final, we have deo ; and adding the terminations, we have the
nom. depa/), &c. The four examples are now declined in full.

48. Mascaline Crudes in a, like देव, “ a deity" (deus).

N. देव: deba/), देवी debaa८, देवा: decāh.
Ac. देवै depam, - debaa८, देवान् depān. `4
~ I. देवेन depend, देवाभ्यां depab/yām, देवैः depai/. ------
D. देवाय degāya, - decabkyām, . : debeb/%/a/.
Ab. देवात्। det;Z८, - debab//ām, 1
G. देवस्य depasya, देवयो: depayo/, *%
देवानां depānām/ं
L. देवे depe, - debay0/, देवेषु depegha.
W. देव depa, देवी debda८, । देवा: deoa/.
In accordance with r. 2I, Such words as नग्, “a man," पुरूष, “a
man," मृग, “ a deer," are written in the ins. sing. नरेण, पुरूषेण, मृगेण,
and in the gen. plur. नराणां, पुरूषाणां, मृगाणां, the cerebral naSal
taking the place of the dental.
49. Temimime Crades im ā amd I, /i/%e जीवाः, “ life," and नदी, “ a ricer."
जीवे jice, जीवाः.jāga/.
–.jioe,
८$Ac. जीवां
/ jicām, – jpā/. xट्
जीवया jioayā, जीवाभ्यां jicab//ām, जीवाभि: jioabhi/. ~_
- ND. जीवाये jāpāyai, - .jityāb/kyām, जीवाभ्य: jigab/kya/.
_/Ab. जीवाया:.jicāyā/, - jibab/%/ām, - .j?oabhya/.
_७.G. – jigāyā/, जीवयो:.j7bayoh, जीवानां jigānām.
८ D. जीवायां jpāyām, - jibay0/, जीवासु.jicāsa.
? (Wः ँ .jice, जीवे jioe, जीवाः.jpā/.
/ ~N. नदी nadi, नद्यी ?addyda८, नद्य: ?madyah.
(?ं नदीं ?madām, - ?madyda८, नदी: ?nadi/. ~ं
I. नद्या hadyā, नदीभ्यां ?aadabhyām, नदीभि: ?nadabhi/..----
D. नद्यै nadyai, - ?nadab/%/ām, नदीभ्य: ?madab/iya/.
_ Ab. नद्या: ??ddyā/।, - madab//ām, - , ?aadab//a/.
G. - ?madya/), नद्यो: ?nadyo/।, नदीनां ??adāmām.
/* Lः ।
नद्यां ?addyām, - madyoh, नदीषु nadisha.
-? `. W. नदि madi, नद्यौ nadyau, नद्य: ?aadya/.
32 DBCLENSION OP CRUDBS BNDING IN wOWELS,

50. Weader Crudes in a, like दानं, “ a gift " (donum, )apow).

`ः ;दाने dd?2a???, दाने dāme, दानानि dā??????.

Woc. दान dāma, दाने dāme, दानानि dānāni.

The rest like the masculine dega.
Observe, that Since the voc. dual and plural of the Sanscrit
noun COincides with the nom., it will, in future, be omitted.

* When a feminine noun, like.jiod, is taken to form the last member of a com
pound adjective, it is declined like deoa for the masculine, and ddina for the nenter.
Thus, taking the feminine noun oidya, “learning ;' from this is formed the
compound alpatjidji, “ little learning:'' and when this is used as a compound adjec
tive it becomes, in the nom. masc. fem. and neut., alpauidyah, alpaoidyā, alpatridyum,
* p0SSessed of little learning.' On the same principle, a masculine noun takes the
feminine and neuter terminations when forming the last member of a compound
adjective ; and a neuter noun, the maSculine and feminine.

To convince the student of the absolute necessity of studying

attentively the declension of this first class of nouns, he is recom
mended to turn back to r. 38. He will there find given, under
fifteen heads, the various forms of nouns, Substantive and adjec
tive, which follow this declension. All the masculine substantives
in this list are declined like depa ; all the feminine either like jācā
or ?aadā ; all the neuter like dāma. Again, all the adjectives in this
list follow the same three examples for their three genders.
Again, according to depa masculine,.jica feminine, and dand neuter,
are declined all regular comparative and superlative degrees of
the form panyatara, pujiyatama (r. 71.); all irregular Superlatives
of the form 0alightha (r. 7I.); all present participles of the forms
Karcāna, kriyamāna (r. l24); all passive past participles of the
form krita, &c., which are the most common and useful of all
verbal derivatives (r. l25. 1. 2. 3. 4.) ; all indefinite future participles,
which are of constant occurrence, of the forms kārya, karapāya,
kartatya (r. l29.); all participles of the second future, of the form
karishyamana (r. l30); many ordinals, like prathama (r. 14).
Lastly, according to mada feminine, are also declined thefemā?????es of
adjectives like tama (r. 40.); the feminines of innumerable adjectives
 OR OE' THE H'IRST F0UR OLASSBS OT NOUNS. 83

like dhanapat, dhāmat (r. 42.), dhanin, and medhārin (r. 43.) ; the
.feminines of nouns of ageney like kārin (r. l8l..3); the feminines
of nouns of ageney like kartri (r. l3l. 2.) ; the feminines of irre
gular comparative degrees like baliyas (r. m2. 60.*) ; the femā
?tines of present participles like Karcat (r. l28. and 63.); the
। feminines of active participles of the third preterite like Kritacat
(r. l27. and 62.) ; the feminimes of active participles of the second
preterite like cicidicas (r. l27. and 60.*) ; the feminimes of many
ordinals like paichama (r. 74.)
Hence it is evident, that although we have arranged Sanscrit
nouns under eight classes, the last seven claSSes COntain but a
small proportion of nouns and participles Compared with the
almost innumerable number embraced by the first. The student,
therefore, ought not to advance a step further in the Grammar
till he has made himself thoroughly master of this declension.
There are a few useful words (originally feminine, and not derived from masculines
like mada and putri,ं in r. 88. xv.), such as श्री, “ prosperity,” भी, “ fear,” ह्री,
“ shame,' which wary from the declension of नदी mad? ; thus, Sing. mom. श्री:,
- acc. श्रियं, ins. श्रिया, dat. श्रिये or श्रियै, abl. and gen. श्रियः or प्रिया:, loc. श्रियि।
or fश्रयां. So again, स्त्री, “a woman,” nom. sing. dual and plur. स्त्री, fस्त्रयौ,
स्त्रिय:, acc. स्त्रियं or स्त्री', स्त्रियी, स्त्रिय: or स्त्री:, ins. स्त्रिया, स्त्रीभ्यां, स्त्रीभि:,
dat. स्त्रियै, &c., abl. and gen. स्त्रियाः &c., loc. स्त्रियां &c, voc. स्त्रि &c. लप्ट्मो, “ for
tune,” agrees with श्री &c. in making its nom. ठ्ष्मीः .

SECOND CLASS.-- OR.UDES IN i, MASCUI,INE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER..

Declined like कवि kuoi, maSc. *a poet'' ; मति mati, fem. “ the mind' ;
वाग् िDiri, neut. “ ulater.”
pl. Mascaline Crades in i, like कवि, “ a poe/."
N. कविः kauih, कवी kao7, कवयः katjagyuh. ---
Ac. कविं kabim, – kat;?, कवीन् ka????a.
I. कविना kauinā, कविभ्यां kagibhyam, कविभिः katibhih. --
D. कवये kauage, – kagibhg/7m, कविभ्य: kat;ibhāyah.
~-'Ab. कवे: kacch, - kn1’ibhyām, - ka gibhgah.
०-4-G. – katjeh, कव्यो: kau/ol।, कवीनां kaoinim.
L. कवो katauं, - katyoh, कविषु kauishu.
W. कवे kat' ं,
 34 DBCLENSION OF CRUDBS ENDING IN WOWELS,

So also, agmi, “ fire'' (igmis) ; and nouns formed from dhā, “ to hold' ; as, sandhi,
** union.''

52. Femaimime Crades in i, like मति, “ the mind.'

'ं ॰ं N. मतिः ?mati/, 9-१/भ्4-मती mat?, मतय: ?mataya/.
--4--*1-१-v~o-- Ac. मतिं ?mati/m, %Artra.८ - ?mat?, मती: ma/?/. ---*

?ं'ं t? ?*Z}-u
। `*–I.
४*---
मत्या matyā, }५}}}.ुमतिभ्यां matib//ām,
* _ _"____
मतिभि: matibhi/.
_

_ D. मतये mataye,?५ ॥४) - matib/.yām, मतिभ्य: ?matib/.yah.

{ःa ।। " *ं
* । (C Ab. मते: mate/,*xx' श्यं-7atibhyāma – matibhyah.
',... . / G. - mate/,}५ .५, मतयो: ?matyo/, मतीनां ?matāmām.
{ 4 ..?, /. L. मतौ malau,"%ं,:, - matyo/, मतिषु matisha.
**.. *e~ W. मते mate, ?`-८१-t.८_

53. Neuter Crudes in i, like वारि , “ foater " (mare),

N. वाग् ि५:airi, वारिणी oirin?, वारीणि oarini.
. Ac. -- ofiri, – cārini, – tptirimai. -
I. वारिणा ।yārindi, वाग्भ्यिां utiriblgam, वारिभि: oaribhih.
D. वारिणे cārine, - tytiribhg/tim, वाग्भ्यिः otiriblig/uh.
Ab. वारिण: ofirinalu, - otiriblig/tim, – otiribhJah.
G. - Utirinalt, वारिणो: oarimoh, वारीणां cārānām.
| L. वारिणि uarini, – odiriraoh, वारिषु tgirishu.
W. वाग् ि?’arior वाग् utire,

Although there are few substantives declined like kagi and pārā,
yet adjectives like shuchi (r. 39.), and compound adjectives ending
in i, are declined like Kagā in the masc. ; like ???atā in the fem. ;
and like apārā in the neuter.

f When a feminine noun ending in i is taken to form thelast member of a com

pound adjective, it must be declined like knoi in the masc., and tpāri in the neut.
Thus the compound adjective alpamati in the acc. plur. masc. would be alpamatin ;

* The dat. may also be matyai ; the ab. and gen. matyāh ; the loc. mat/tim.
 0R OE' THE FIRST F0UR 0]LASSBS 0F NOUNS. 35

fem. alpamatih s neut. alpamatimi. The same holds g00d if a masc. or neut. moun
be taken to form the last member of a compound.

The declension of the neuter of this class follows the analogy

of nouns in im. Hence, pāri Serves also as the model for the .
neuters of adjectives and nouns of agency in in, like dhamim and
/kārin (r. 66.); and the neuters of nouns of agency in ८ri, like
/kartri। (r. 57.),

+ Thereare two useful irregular masculine nouns in i ; wiZ. सखि sakhi, “afriend,”
nom. Sing. dual and plur. sakha, sukhtiyau, sakhdiyah ; acc. sakhāyam, sakhāgau,
sakhām ; ins. sakhya, sukhibha/tim, sakhibhih s dat. 8akhg/e, &c. ; abl. and gen.
sakhguh, &c. ; loc. sakhyau, &c. s woc. sakhe, &C. And पति pati, “a master,” which,
when not used in a compound word, follows sakhā in the five last cases sing. (thus,
ins. patya, &c.) : in the other cases, kuoi. But this word is almost always found as
the last member of a compound, and is then regularly declined like kaui ; thus,
ins. bhāpatima, “ by the king.” The noun अस्यि asthi, neut. “ a bone,” drops the
final wowel in some of its cases ; as, ins. Sing. asthmā ; dat. asthme s abl. asthmah, &c.

THIRD CLASS.-CR.U DES IN tt, MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER..

Declined like भानु bhāmu, masc. ** the sun'; धेनु dhemu, fem. “ a milch couं ";
मधु madhu, neut. “hone).”
54. Mascaline Crudes in u, like भानु bhamuं, “the sum.'
N. भानुः Ghana/), भान् Ghānā, भानवः b/177adapah.
Ac. भानुं bhānum, - 0/17???ं, भान्तून् bhānān.
I. भानुना Ghanana, भानुभ्यां bhanubhyām, भानुभि: bhanubhih.
D. भानवे Ghāmaue, – bhānubhyām, भानुभ्य: bhānubhya/.
Ab. भानोः bhāmo/, – 0hāmubhyām, – bhāmubhyah.
G. – 0hām0/, भान्वो: ८//āmmooh, भान्तूनां Ghānānām.
L. भानौ bhānauं, - 0/17?1790/ः, भानुषु bhānusha.
W. भानो bhāmo,
36 DBCLENSION OP CRU DBS BNDING IN WOW BLS,

55. F'e????????ae Craddes im u, /ike धेनु dhena, " a milch corc.'

N. धेनुः dhemuh, धेनू dhenn, धनव: dhemauah.

Ac. धेनुं dhenum, - dhemi, धेनु: dlienāh.
I. धेन्वा dhamunā, धेनुभ्यां dhenubhyām, धेनुभि: dhemubhih.
D. धेनवे dhemapg,* - dhenubhyttm, धेनुभ्य: dhemubhyal..
Ab. धेनो: dhemoh,* - dhemublig/tim, - dhenubhJ/uh.
G. - dhemoh,* धेन्वो: dhenuioh, धेनूनां dhemi7mtim.
L. धेनी dhemaa८,* - dhentp0l।, धेनुषु dhemttshu.
W. धनो dhemo,

56. Veater Crades in u, like मधु madha, " honey," " ?cine " (५४6u).
N. मधु madhu, मधुनी mudhum7, मधूनि madhi7mi.
Ac. - madhu, - maudhum?, - mudhāmi.

I. मधुना madhatmā, मधुभ्यां madhubl.J/tim, मधुभि: mudhubhih.

ID. मधुने madhume, - madhubhg/tim, मधुभ्य: madhub//ah.
Ab. मधुन: mudhumah, - madhublijjim, – madhubkyah.
G. - madhumah, मधुनो: mudhum0h, मधूनां madhānām.
L. मधुनि madhuni, - mddhum0h, मधुषु madhushu.
W. मधु madhu or मधो madho.

Although there are but few substantives declined like d/exaa

and madhad, yet it is important to study their declension, as well
as that of the masc. noun bhāmac ; for all simple adjectives like
danu, and all like pipāsu (r. 40.), and all other Simple adjectives ia a,
and all Compound adjectives ending in a८, are declined like ८/%a??a
in the maSc. ; dhema in the fem. ; and madha in the neut. Many
adjectives in ad, however, Optionally follow the declension of ?aadतः,
in the fem. ; aS, damad makes its nom. fem. either tamah Or da227297.

f There are one or two feminine nouns in । long, whose declension must be
noticed here : as, वघू, “a wife,' declined analogously to madi. Nom. sing. dual.
and plur. oadhāth, badhtouu, tyudhuldh s acc. oadhim, oudhucau, tyadhāh ; ins. oadharā,
oadhābhyām, cadhābhih g dat. cadhuai, oadhābhyām, cadhāibhyah; abl. oadhucā7a, &c.;
*

* The dat. may also be dhemulai ; the ab. and gen. dhentral ; the loc. dhcra toarn.
 OR OF THE FIRST FOUR OLASSBS OT NOUNS. 37

gem. oadhucah, cadhtooh, oadhānām ; loc. cadhtpām, oadhuoh, oadh78hu s voc. cadhu.
So again, भू, “ the earth,” declined analogously to श्री. Nom. sing. dual. and plur.
bhāh, bhurana, bhucah ; acc. bhucam, bhucau, bhucah ; ins. bhattrfi, bhaibha/tim, Gli7Whih ;
dat. bhuce or bha८cai, Sc. ; abl. and gen. bha८bah or bhuptih, &c. s loc. bhubi or bhtt
ctim, &C.

FoURTH CLAss.–CRUDEs IN ८ri तृ, MAscULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

Declined like दातृ ditri, m. f n. “a girer, पितृ pitri, m. **a.father.''
57. Mascaline forw of Crades in tri, like दातृ (dator, porip), and पितृ
(pater),
N {" d67ft7, दातारो dārāraa, दातार: dārāra/.
' Uपिता pi/ā, पितरौ pitaraa, पितर: ;pitara/.
AC. {रृं” - d7/7rda८, . दातॄन् datrin.
पितरँ pitaram, – pitarda, पितॄन् pitrin, &c.
I. दाचा datra, दातृभ्यां datri/yām, दातृभि: dātribhih.
D. दात्रे dā/re, – da८ribhyām, दातृभ्य: dātrib//a/.
Ab. दातु: data/), – dātribhyām, – dātribhya/.
G. — diifu/।, दाचो: datro/।, दातॄणां dātrānām.
L. दातरि datari, - dā7froh, दातृषु dātrishu.
W. दातर् datar,

OBS. Nouns of relationship like pitri only differ from nouns

of .agency like dātri in the nom. dual and plural, and the
acc. sing. and dual, where the former has the penultimate short,
the latter, long. Feminine nouns of relationship like mātri, “ a
mother,' are declined like pitri, except in the acc. plural मातॄः.
+ नृ mri, *a man,” is declined like pitri (nom. mā, &c.), but usually makes
नृणां in the gen. plural. _

The feminine form of nouns of agency in tri is declined like

nadā ; as, nom. दाची, &c. (see r. 49.),
The neuter form follows the declension of a97ri ; as, nom. acc.
दातृ, दातॄणी, दातृणि (see r. 53.),
 38 DBCLENSION OP CRUDES BNDING IN CONSONANTS,

Spor. II.–IDECI,ENSION OP CRU DES ENIDING IN CONSO

NANTS, OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS.
General Obsercafions.

58. The first four classes of nouns, whose declension has just
been considered, comprise nearly all the substantives in the lan
guage. If we except substantives ending in mam and as, the
last four classes of nouns consist almost entirely of adjectives,
participles, and roots, taken to form the last member of compound
words. There is one general Scheme of terminations applicable
to all nouns ending in consonants. It is as follows :-
SING. | IDUTAL. । P LU RAL. |
Nom. | ८८८ । d/ |
Acc 67772 । ______ ________

Inst. 67 | ///// ८)/ i/

Dat. | ____ b//ah
Abl. d/ | _____ ___

Gen. ____ | 0/ . 67??? ।

LOc. i। । ____ | S?८

Woc. 61?/ । d/

This Scheme applies without exception to the few substantives,

and to the masculine of the many adjectives and participles,
whose crudes end in consonants. It also applies, with the excep
tion of the nom. and acc. cases, to the neuter of these same adjec
tives and participles; but their feminine generally follows the
declension of nada (r. 49.), The nominative singular admits of
so much variation, that no one termination is general enough
to be inserted in the Scheme.
Many of the terminations will be already familiar to the
learner, eSpecially those of the dual and plural. Indeed, certain
terminations prevail, with various modifications, in all Sanscrit
nouns : and this prevalence of certain Sounds, as characteristic
of certain cases, has led native grammarians into the error of
constructing a technical Scheme of terminations, which they apply
universally in the declension of erery moum in the language.
N~ । This technical Scheme does, in point of fact, correspond with the
 OR OR THE LAST FOUR CLASSBS OR NOUNS. 39

scheme we have given above, as applicable to the last four classes ;

but when, on Comparing this with the scheme belonging to the
first class (r. 47.), it is seen how very great is the dissimilarity
between the two ; and when it is remembered that the first class
embraces a much larger number of nouns than all the other Seven
Classes combined, there seems but little reason for any such
process of generaliZation. For Surely if any general scheme is
given at all, it should be that which is most universally applicable;
and if any system of adaptation is to be adopted, it Should consist
in an adaptation of the smaller number to the larger, rather than
the larger to the smaller ; or we are led into endless alteration
and Substitution, and very unneceSSary perplexity and confusion.

* There are two or three useful words in the language ending in ai, 0, and au,
which conform to the Scheme of nouns ending in consonants. Thus, rai, m.
** wealth.' N. rāh, rāyau, rtiyah ; A. rāyam, rājau, rājah ; I. rāyā, rabhgām,
?’tibhih, &c. (cf. ?’ebus). Go, m. f. **an ox or cow.' N. gauh, gaoau,gāpah ; ac. gam,
gtioau, gtih s ins. gupti, g0bha/tim, gobhih, &C. And mau, f. *a Ship.” N. mauh,
māpuu, ndiual s acc. ntioam, mātuta, ntiuan ; ins. māpā, &C. (Of wa0ं, magis).

FIFTH CLASS.-CRUDES IN t AND d, MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

Declined like कर्मकृत्। karnamakrit, m. f n. ** a doer of toork”; धर्ममेविट् dharmmaoid,

~९

m. f n. **ome tcho kmous his duti/”; धनवत् dhanarat, m. f. n. “ urealthg/.”

59. Mascadine and Teminime form 0f Crudes in t and d, dec/ined
like कम्मैकृत् and धर्मविद् .
N. कमैकृत् karmakri',* कर्ममैकृतौ karmakrita, कर्ममैकृत: karmakrital.
Ac. कर्ममैकृतं karmakritam, - ' । -- ____ ___

I. कर्म्मैकृता karmakrita, कम्मैकृह्णां karmakridbhyām, कर्म्मैकृद्भिः karmakridbhih.

]D. कमैकृते karmakrite, ___ ____ _ कर्मकृत्य: karmakridbhyah.
Ab. कर्म्मैकृत: karmakritah, _ ___ _ ___

G. ____ ____ कर्ममैकृतो: karmakritoh, कम्मैकृतां karmakritām.

L. कम्मैकृति karmakriti, - karmaakritoh, कम्मैकृत्सु karmakritsu.
W. Like the nominative.

* Although r has the effect of doubling the letter immediately under it in the
Sanscrit character (r. 83.), it is unnecessary always to double the letter in the
Roman type. Strictly, however, this word should be written karmmakrit.
40 DECLENSION OR CRUDBS BNDING IN CONSONANTS,

N. धम्मेविद dhdrmaajid, धर्ममेविदी dharmotuidauं, धर्ममेविदः dharmatridah.

Ac. धर्ममेविदं dharmatidam, &c.
Loc. plur. धर्ममेवित्सु dhdrmauitsu, by r. 14.
The neuter form of nouns like karmakrit and dharmagid is,
in the nom. and acc. कर्ममैकृत् , कर्मकृती, कर्ममैकृन्ति, धम्मैविद्, धर्मविदी,
धर्ममेविन्दि. In the other Cases it resembles the masc. and fem.
60. All substantives like मरूत् marut, m. “ wind," सम्पदु 8ampad, f.
“ success," and कुमुद् kumad, n. “ a lotus," follow the declension of
karmakrit and dharmacid : thus, nom. marut, marutau, maradah ;
sampad, sampadau, sampada/। ; kumud, kumud?, kumaoadi, &c.
6l. The masculine form of crudes formed with the affixes gaf
and ?ma/, is declimed like धनवत् .

N. धनवान्। d/ºd?aduptima, धनवन्ती dhanauantaa, धनवन्त: dhanauanta/.

AC. धनवन्ते dhamagantama, – dhamdoa?adda८, धनवत: d/lamauata/.
Woc. धनवन् dhanaran,
The other cases are like karmakrit; as, inS. धनवता dhamagatā, &c.
The feminine form of nouns like dhamagad is declined like ?mada :
thus, nom. dhamapatं, dhanagatyau, dhamapatya/, &c. (see r. 49.),
The neuter form iS, in the nom. and ac., dhamabad, dhamagad?,
dhamagamti ; and in the Other cases like the maseuline.
62. So, also, all adjectives like धीमत्। d/7ma/, “ wise,' and all
active past participles like कृतवत् kritagat, “ he did " (r. l27) : thus,
nom. mase. dhimām, &c., kritacin, &e, ; acc. dhimantam, &c., /krita
oamtam, &c. ; voc. dhāmam, &c. So, alsO, the nom. fem. d/limat?, &C.,
%ritapatā, &c. ; and nom. neut. dhāmat, &c., kritaga/, &c.
03. After dhamagat may also be declined present participles like
पचत् pachat, “ cooking " (r. 123.), except in the nom. sing., which
is pacham instead of pachām. Many of these participles also differ
from dhamagad, by inserting a maSal throughout all the cases of
the feminine. Thus, nom. pac/ldnt?, pachamtyand, pachamtya/) ; acc.
pachamtām, pacham८/dad, pachdmti/; ; inS. pachdmtyā, &c.
The adjective महत् maha/, “ great," is declined like dhanara८,
but makes the penultimate long before the nasal ; thus, nom.
?mahām, ?nd/7mtaad, ?ma/timld/ ; acc. ?md/āimtdm, ?mdhāinddm८, ?ma/tata/% :
nom. fem. ?/ad/ia/2, 8८C. : nOm. meut. ?m(//ःd/, ??ad/adt7, ??2dhā?adi.
 0R OR' THE LAST F0UR 0 LASSBS 0F NOUNS. 41

fiं SIxTH CLASS.-CRUDES IN am AND im, MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND

NEU'TER..

IDeclined likeस्रात्मन् ditmum, m. **80ul";

_ _ __ ** .
राजन्। ?’dijum, m. ** a king ';
____ 6% 2• 7~4aa•• ** •
कर्मन् karmam,
n. “a deed”; नामन् naman, n. “a name”; and धनिन् dhamim, m. f. n. “ rich.”
।'
64. Mascalime and Feminime form 0f Crades im an, declimed like
अात्मन् and राजन् . (Cf. re:r, regis),
सात्मानौ atmānaad, अात्मानः 1fi?2771a/%.
Nं { राजा rāja, णजानी rājamaad, राजान: rājāma/.
AC. { अ'ात्मानं कdmāmam, - 747727??d2८, सामनः ?//??d?1a/%.
राजानं rājanam, - rājamaa८, राज्ञ: rājna/.*
अ'ात्मभ्याँ admabhyām, सात्मभिः ढ///2abhi/%.
{नः। āpana,
rājabhyām, राजभि: rājabhi/.
D. - ८itmab/iyām, स्रात्मभ्य: atmab/%/a/%.
|| { - rājabhyām, राजभ्य: rājab//a/.
।।' - Gitmab/iyām, - ātmabhya/.
Ab.
{ राज्ञ: rājma/), - rājab/iyām, - rājab/%/a/%.
G.
{ - ā/???d??a/%, स्रात्मनो: atmamoh, स्रात्मनाँ ळ//?2a?mājm.
- rājma/), राज्ञो: rājmo/।, राज्ञां rājmām.
सात्मनि admami, ___ ā477ad?20/2, आात्मसु atmasu.
L.
{ एहि rājni," ____ ?”ढ्jmo/, राजसु rājasa.
{
65. Observe, that it is necessary to give two examples of nouns
in am, because if aja be preceded by ?m or o, and this m or o be
conjunct with a preceding consonant, the noun is then declined
like ad72d?2. Hence, अध्वन adhicam, m. “ a road,' and दृश्वन dris/-
?odn, m. “ a looker," make in the ins. adhioamā, drishioamā. But
if this ?m or p be not conjunct, then the noun follows rājam ; as,
Zoºg/्imam, m. “ lightness ' ; ins. laghi/mmā. And if am be preceded
by any other consonant than m or o, even although it be Conjunct,

* As remarked in p. 8., this word is usually pronounced rāg/uh ; but, for the
, better illustration of the present Subject, झ् is represented by.jm throughout the
declension of this noun.

f Or rājami.
42 I)ECLENSION OP CRI’ I)Es ENDIN(; IN CONSONANTS,

the noun . then also follows rājam ; as, मूर्डन् /nārddham, m. “ the
head"; ins. मुद्वै mārddhna.
There are no simple feminine nouns in an ; but when masculine
nouns are taken to form the last member of a compound adjective
they take a feminine and neuter form ; as in ma/ā/man, “ magna
nimous.”* The feminine form, however, is declined precisely
like the masculine, and the neuter follows the declension of kar
?mam below.

66. Neater Crades in man, declined like कर्ममैन् and नामन् (??oower),
In the former the in is conjunct, in the latter, not.
N.
d कर्ममे karma, कम्मेणी karman?, कर्ममेाणि karmānā.
8aII। - ' - - -
A नाम ??67???d नाग्नी ?aām???, नामानि ?nāmānā.
C.

I
INS.
{े। /karmanā । The other cases like the mase. ; as, gen. plur.
- - ' _ ___ __

नाग्वा ?1a///?107. /karmanām, ?aāmmām ; loc. karmasa८, ?aān2८sa.

So also the neuter nouns, jamman, ceshmam, ashmam, parman,
odrtmam, c/drman, c//admdm, follow the declension of kotroadm ;
but dāmadm, stimam, dhāmam, tyomam, romam, premam, that of ?māman.
.When neuters in an compose the last member of compound adjeo
tives, they may take the mase. or fem. form."
* An0malies in am : च्वन् , m. (cf kua), “a dog.” Nom. श्वा, श्वानी, श्वानः;
acc. श्वानं, श्वानो, शुनः. In all these anomalies the acc. c. plur. is generally the
clue to the form assumed by the noun before the terminations beginning with
wowel8. ThuS, instr. is शुना, श्वभ्यां, &c. So again, युवन् , m. f. n. (cf. .7atoemis)
* young” ; nom.J/uUti,guptindu, /urānal ; acc. 1/uptindm, /urānau, /imah s inst.grānā,
guoabhyām, &c. ब्रझहन् , “a Brahmicide' ; nom. -हा, -हणी, -हण: ; acc. -हणे,
-हणी, -प्ा: ; instr. मा &c. अहन्, n. “a day"; nom. and acc. अह:, अही, or
अहनी, अहानि ; instr. अहा, अहोभ्यां, अहोभि: ; dat. अहे &c.

* When rājum is taken to form a c0mpound of this kind, it is declined like aara
(r. 48.) ; as, nom. malārājah ; acc. mahārājon, &e.
f As in the sentence, Wedugarbliamttma Brilimaila asit, “ There was a Brahmin
named Wedagarbha.”
 OR OE' 'THE LAST FOUR OLASSES 0F' NOUNS. 43

07. Masculine form 0f Craddes in in, declimed like धनिन्, ** ?’jc/.''

N. धनी dha???, धनिनी dhamimaaं, धनिनः dhamima/.

AC. धनिनं d/dmimam, - d/id?????da८, - d/id?????d/.

I. धनिना d/aminā, धनिभ्यां dhamibhyām, धनिभि: dhajaib/%i/%.

D. धनिने dhajaime, - dhamib//ām, धनिभ्य: dhamib/iya/%.
Ab. धनिन: dhamima/), - dhamibhyām, – dhamib/ya/.
G. — dhamima/, धनिनो: dhamimo/, धनिनां dhamimā/72.
L. धनिनि dhamimi, - d/d?????0/, धनिषु dhanisha.
W. धनिन् d/%d?????,

So also nouns of agency like kārin. The fem. form of nouns

in in is declined like madā ; as, nom. dhamin?, kārip? (see r. 49.).
The neuter form follows the declension of cārā ; as, nom. धनि,
धनिनी, धनीनि (see r. 53.).
+ Pathim, m. **a path,” is declined irregularly ; thus, Sing. pamthill, pdmthāmam,
pdthā, pathe, pathah, pathi, pathiny dual, pamthāmau, pathibha/tim, pathoh s plur. pdm
thinah, pathah, pathibhih, pathiblijjah, pathim, pathishu.

SEVENTH CLASS.-CRUDES IN ds, MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

IDeclined like चन्द्रमस् chandramas, m. ** the m00m ''; and मनम् manas, n. ** the maimd.

68. Mascalime and Teminime form 0f Crades in as, declimed like चन्द्रमस् .
N. चन्द्रमा: chandramih, चन्द्रमसी chandrumasdu, चन्द्रमस: chamdramasah.
Ac. चन्द्रमसं chandramasam, - chamdramasau, - chdmdramasah.

I. चन्द्रमसा chamdramasā, चन्द्रमोभ्यां chandramobhyām, चन्द्रमोभि:chandramobhih.

ID. चन्द्रमसे chandramase, &c.
The other cases are like the neuter below, excepting the w0c. dual and plur. (r. 50.).

69. Neuter Crades in as, declined like मनस् (A6vos, mens).

N. W. मनः ???dma/), मनसी mamas?, मनांसि 7mamāmsi.
AC. - ?mama/), - ???d??dsZ, - ???d?????8i.
I मनसा ?mamasā, मनीभ्यां ?mamob//ām, मनोभि: mamobhi/.
D. मनसे ?mamase, – ?mamob//ām, मनोभ्य: mdmob//a/%.
Ab. मनसं: ???amasa/, - ?madmob/%/7m, - mamob//a/.
G – ?mamasa/), मनसो: ?mamaso/, मनसां ?mamasām.
L. मनसि ?mamasi, - ?madjmd80/ं, मनस्सु manassa (or -:मु),
44 DECLBNSION OR ORUDES ENDING IN CONSONANTS,

Observe, that the masculine noun chandramas is also the model

for the fem. noun opsaras, “ a nymph,' and for the fem. form of
compound adjectives, and that it only difers from the neuter in
the nom. and acc. cases.
Nearly all simple substantives in as are neuter ; but when these
Substantives are taken to form a compound adjective, they are
declinable also in the masculine and feminine like chandramas.
Thus, when mamas is taken to form the compound adjective
mahāmanas, “ magnanimous," it makes in the nom. (masc. and
fem.) mahāmanāh, mahāmanasau, mahāmanasah. In the same way
is formed darmanas, “ evil-minded " (nom. durmamāh, &c.), to
which a very remarkable analogy is presented by the Greek
0uouew)s, m. and f, making in the neut. puoracv6ं, derived from
|५6vos. (Prof. Eastwick's transl. of Bopp's Comp. Gram. S. 146.).
+ There are a few neuter nouns in is and us, which are declined exactly like
mamas, Substituting i and t८ for d throughout, and therefore sh for s, and ?” for o
(r. 80. 27.). Thus, Hauis, “ ghee”; nom. and acc. Harih, Hacishi, Hao77ashi ;
ins. Harishā, Hagirbhgjim, Hapirbhih, &c. ; and chakshus, “ the eye”; nom. and
acc. chakshuh, chakshushं, chakshamshi ; ins. chakshushā, chakshurbhyām, chakshur
bhih, &c. Zishis, f. “a blessing," makes in the nom. āshāh, ishishau, tishishal s acc.
āshishttm, āshishatt, ashishah, &c. Similarly, dos, m. “ the arm”; but this last is
in the ins. either doshā or doshnā ; dat. doshe or doshne, &c. Puns, “a male” ;
nom. pttinfin, pttinfinsuu, pumānsah s acc. pumāmsam, pumamsau, pumsah ; ins.pacmsā
pumbha/tim, &c.
Adjectives in the comparative degree, formed by the affix छूjas (r. 71.), follow the
declension of nands, except in the nom. and acc. Thus, balājas, “ more power.
ful"; nom• 9aWytin, baliyansatº, bali/insal s acc. baliyāmsam, bali/insau, balāyasah :
ins. buliyasti, bu//0bha/tim, &c. The voc. Sing is baliyam. The fem. form is declined
like nadi (r. 49.). The neut. form isdeclinedlike mamas throughout.
Participles of the 2d preterite (r.127.), like ciniduas (from oid, * to know”) and
jugmiods (from gam, “ to go') are declined in some of their cases as if they were
written oioidus, Jagmyus s and in others as if written cioiducat, jagmioat. Thus,
nom. oioidutin,-utinsuu,-urānsah s acc. oiciduransam, -utāmsau, oioidushah ; ins. cāpā
dusha, tioiduddbhyām, riciduadbhih. The root cid,* to know,” hasan irregular pres.
part. "iduds, used often as an adjective (“learned"), and declined oxactly liko
ripiduds. These participles are declined like mada in the fem. (r.40.), and in the
 OR OR' THE LAST FOUR OI,ASSBS 0F NOUNS. 46

ncut. like the masc., except in the nom. and acc., which are oioidupuh, Uioidush?,
१:āoidupansi. The advanced student will here obServe, that as the 2d preterite of
१:id, “to know,' is used as a present tense, So the participle of the 2d preterite is
used as a present participle, the reduplicated syllable only being rejected.

EIGHTH CLASS.-CRUDES IN amg/ C0ms0mant e:rcept t, n, s, MASCULINE,

FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

70. This class consists principally of roots taken to form the

last member of compound words. They are not of very common
occurrence, except as ending in t or d (See karmakrit, r. 59.). The
only difficulty in their declension arises from their combination
with those terminations in the scheme at r. 58., which begin with
consonants, viZ. three cases in the dual, and four in the plural.
Whatever change, however, takes place in the nominative, is pre
served before these consOnantal terminations. ThuS, masc. and
fem. bhaj, “ an eater '': nom. bhak ; ins. dual bhagbhyām ; ins. plur.
८hagbhi/; ; loc. bhaksha. So again sprish, nom. sprikं * and in
the other cases, Sprigbhyām, sprigbhih, spriksha. So again rāj,
nom. rāt (एद्); and the other cases, rādb/yām, rādbhih, rātsa.
(लिद्); and the other cases, lidbhyām,
And li/, “ a licker,'' nom. lit
८idbhi/, litsa. And du/, nom. dhu} * and the other cases, dhag
bhyām, dhagbhi/, dhukshat. Before the terminations which begin
with vowels, the final consonant of the root, whatever it may
be, is always preserved. Thus, acc. ८/iujuma, sprisham, rājam, liham,
duham, &c. ; inS. ८/iagja, sprishā, rājछ्, lihā, dadhā, &c. The neuter

is as follows : nom., acc., voc. (sing., dual, and plur), bhak, bhajं,
८)hufiji ; rāt, ?rāj?, rāiji ; lit, lih?, limhā ; dhuk, duhā, dam/hi.
* The few Simple nouns which fall under this class are declined on a Similar
principle. But asrij, n. “ blood” (nom. asrik), makes in the ins. asrija or asmā ;
dat. asrije or dsme s acc. pl. asriiiji or asāni : ap, f “ water,” is declined in the
plural Only ; thus, Gpah, opah, adbhih, adbhyah, apām, apsu, apah : dia', f. ** the sky,”
Sing. nom. di/duh s acc. diuum or dyām s ins. diua, & c. s dual. diodu, dyubligam,
diooh g plur. nom. acc. dicah ; ins. dyubhih, &c.

* श sh ह् h appear to be nearly allied tok, and often pass intok in Greek and
and

Latin words. Thu8, from ddsha, “ ten,' Jeka, “ decem '' ; from हृदय, kopoia, “ c0r.”
46 AJD J B CTIW IBS.

SECT. III.–AID.JECTIWES.

The declension of Substantives involves that of adjectives ;

and, as already Seen, the three examples of substantives, given
under each class, Serve as the model for the three genders of
adjectives falling under the same class. Adjectives, in their
simplest form, not derived from substantives, are very rarely found
in Sanscrit. Such as do occur belong chiefly to the first and
third classes of nouns; as, priya, “ dear" (nom. m. f n. priyah,
priyā, priyam,* r. 48. 49. 50); sādha, " good " (nom. m. f n. sādhah,
sādhul or 8adhioं, sādhu, r. 54. 55. 49. 56.).
Adjectives formed from substamtiges are very numerouS, as may
be seen by a reference to r. 38. 42. and 43. Iv. They belong
chiefly to the first, fifth, and sixth classes of nouns. The following
examples may be added to those already given ; māmushd, “ human''
(nom. m. f n. mānusha/, mānushi, Imānusham, r. 48. 49. 50); shrimat,
“ prosperous" (nom. m. f n. shrāmān, shrimatā shrāmat, r. 62.); balin,
“ strong ” (nom. m. f n. balº, balimº, bali, r. 67.).
Compoadmd adjectices are most abundant. The following are ex
amples : p/kalopeda, “ possessed-of-fruit ''; darbuddhi, “ evil-minded ';
alpadama, “ Small-bodied '; 8arodjit, “ all-conguering '; 8agjammam,
“ well-born '; gatachedas, “ bereft-of-sense '; which are thus refer
rible to their respective classes.

IST CLASS. | 2D CLASS. | 3D CIASS. | 6TH CIASS. | 6TH CIASS.| 7TH CIASS.

Nom. m.|phalopetah |durbuddhih| alpatamuh | sargajit | sujammā | 7atachetāh

Nom. f. | phalopetā |durbuddhih| alpalamuh | sarudjit | sujammā | 7adachetāh।
Nom. n. |phal0petam| durbuddhi | alpatamu | sdrudjit | sujamma | galachetah।

71. The degrees of comparison are formed in two ways ;

Ist, by adding to the crude तर् dara (nom. -tara/), -tarā, -daram,
cf Greek repog) for the comparative ; and तम tama (nom. -tama/),

* When it is remembered that final h often becomes s, and that d is eguivalent

in pronunciation to a, the three genders of this adjective might be written priyas
pri/ā, pri/um ; thus offering a perfect Similarity to I,atin adjectives in us.
 AI).JE0TIW IBS. 47

-ramā, -tamam, of Greek Torrog) for the Superlative. Thus, pujaya,

“ holy," पुण्यतर् punyatara, “ more holy," पुण्यतम panyatama, “ most
holy,'' declined like nouns of the first class (r. 48. 49. 50). . So,
also, dhamaoat, “ wealthy,' dhamagattara, “ more wealthy,'' dhama
oattama, "most wealthy"; and dhamin, dhamitara, dhamitama (r. 20.1).
2dly, by adding ईयस् /as (nom. -छृ/ān, -छृ/as?, -āyah, Cf. Greek toy)
for the comparative, and इष्ठ ishtha (nom. -i8/tha/% -isht/tā, -is/tham,
of Greek torrog) for the Superlative. In general, the only change
that takes place before these affixes is the rejection of a final
vowel, or of an affix. Thus, Galim, “ strong,' becomes bal, making
बलीयस् Galiyas, “ stronger " (see r. 69.f), बलिष्ठ ८alishtha “strongest "
(declined like nouns of the first class); lagha, “ light," becomes
lagh, making lag/āyas, “ lighter,' laghishtha, " lightest." Observe,
however, that these affixes do not often imply comparison, but
Simply e:ccess : thus, balāyas and Golishthd more usually Signify
“ very strong."
* But besides the rejection of the final, the crude often undergoes considerable
change, as in Greek; and its place is Sometimes Supplied by a Substitute. Thus,
mridu, “ Soft,” becomes mrad, making mradijas, maradightha ; guru, “ heavy,"
gar, making gariyas (cf. Latin gragius), garishtha g priya, *dear," pra, making
1yreyus, preshtha ; bahu, “ many,' bhā, making bhaiyas, bhuyightha y dirgha, “ long,''
drāgh g dira, “ far,' dat; ; dndikd, “ mear,' med s kshudra, “ small,' kshod ; guoum,
“ young;' /ao s prashasya, *good,' shra ; * alptt, “ Small," kaa g uru (eipts), “ large,''
oar, making oari/as, oarishtha (Faptoros). Sce Prof. Eastwick's translation of
Bopp's Comp. Gram. S. 298.

SECT. IW.-NUMERAI, ADJECTIWES.

72. Cardimals.
एक eka, I ; द्वि dioi, 2 ; चि tri, 3; चतुर् chatur, 4 ; which are thuS
declimed.
Eka, “ one " (singular only), follows the declension of prono
minals : nom. m. eka/। ; dat. m. ekasmai ; nom. f. ekā ; dat- f
ekasyai; nom. n. ekam (see sarca, r. S7.),

* Prof. Bopp derives shregas and shreshtha from shrimat, “ fortunate," the
affix being rejected.
 48 NIUMERAL AID JBOTIWES.

Dici, “ two" (dual only), is declined as if the crude were dica :

nom., acc., voc. m. dioaad, f n. dice ; ins., dat., ab. m. f n. dipab/yām ;
gen., loc. dipayoh.
Tri, “ three," and chatur, “ four `' (plural only), declined–
1MASC. 1FEM_ NEUT. MASC. FEM_ NEUT.
2
N. W. traya/), disrah, trājai, I chaticārah, chatasrah, chatioāri.
Ac. trām, ___ - | c/ada८rd/।, ____ _____

I. tribhi/, disribhi/।, chatarbhi/, chatasribhi/,

D. A. trib/ya/), tisrib/ya/), chadarb//a/, chatasrib/kya/),
G. trayānām, disrinām, chatarmām, chatasrinām,
L. frishad, tisrisha, chatur8/ia, chatasris/a८,
The neuter only differs from the masc. in the nom., voc., and
8a00. CaS69S.

पचन् panchan, 5; षम् shash, 6; सप्मन् saptam, 7; स्रष्टन् ashtam, 8;

नवन् napam, 9; दशन्। das/id?m, 10.
73. Paicham, “ five '; 8/as/, “ Six'; ashtam, “ eight '' (plural
only); declimed
M, F. N. M. F. N_ M. P. N.

N. Ac. W. paiic/ia, 8/ंat, a8/hta Or ashtau.

Ins. paichabhi/, 87adbhi/%, ashtabhi/; Or ashtabhi/.
D. Ab. paichab/ं9a/), shadb/.ya/), ashtab/kya/% or ashtab/ंya/.
Gen. paichānām, shanjaām, a8/tānām.
Loc. paic/asad, 8hatsuं, ashtasa८ Or d8/!āsa८.

Soptam, ?maoam, and dasham, and all other numerals ending in

dm, follow the declension of paiicham.
JEkādasham, II ; dioadasham, l2; tray0dasham, l3 ; chaturdashdia,
I4; pafichadasham, l5 ; 8hodasham (षोडशन्), 16 ; 8dptadashd?a, I7 ;
a8/itādashan, I8; ?tdoadashan or ānatinshati, 19; pinshati। (र्विशति), 20 ;
trinshat (त्रिंशत्), 30; chaticārinshat (चत्वारिंशत्), 40; panchashat
(पञ्चाशत्), 50 ; shashti (षष्टि), 60; saptati (सप्तति), 70; ashāti (अशीति), 80;
nacati (नवति), 90; shata, n. (शत), I00; sahasra, n. (सहस्र), l000. As
from dasham, “ ten,' are formed ekādasham, dicadasham, tray0dashdia,
&c., So from oimshati, “ twenty,' are formed ekagimshati, “ twenty
one'; dicācimshati, “ twenty-two '; frayooimshati, “ twenty-three,' &C.
But due regard must be paid to the laws of combination; thus,
 NUMERAL AD JEOTIW IBS. 49

shadoinshati। (षडूिंशति), 26 ; trdyastrins/bad, 33 ; 8hadfrimsha/, 36 ; c/%a-

tushchaticārinsha८ 44; chatu/paichāshat (चतुःपञ्चाशत्), 54 ; traya/-
soptati (चयःसप्तति), 73 ; tryashādi। (त्र्यशीति), 83 ; panchāshiti, 85 ; 8hanjaa
cati (षणवति), 96.
7inshati (20), and trinshat (80), are declined like fem. nouns of
the third and fifth classes, usually in the Singular. AS,
विंशतिं निचखान, “ he infixed twenty arrows." Shata (I00), sa/)asra
(I000), are neut. nouns of the first class, usually declined in the
sing.; as, सहस्रं पितर:, “ a thousand ancestors': or they may govern
a genitive Case ; as, सहस्रं पितॄणां (ef the use of the Latin mille),
74. Ordima/s.

Prathama, “ first "; dipiti/a, “ Second '; tritāya, “ third "; are de
clined as pronominals (see r. 87.),
Chaturtha, “ fourth " (of r6roprog); panchama, “ fifth "; shas///a
(षष्ट), “ sixth "; saptama, " seventh "; ashtama, “ eighth "; nagama,
* ninth '; dashama, “ tenth "; like nouns of the first class (nom.
-al, - -am).
The ordinals from “ eleventh " to “ twentieth,' are formed from
the cardinals, by rejecting the final m; thus, ekādasha (nom. -dh,
-2, -am),
“ Twentieth" is formed, either by adding the superlative affix
'Vama to the cardinal, as pinshatitama ; Or by rojecting the final,
and leawing cinsha (nom. -al, -, -am). So also trinshattama or
८rāns/ia, “ thirtieth.' Similarly “ fortieth ' and “ fiftieth.' The
other decimal cardinals form the ordinals either by adding tama,
or by changing ti to ta ; as, saptatitamd or saptata, " Seventieth.'
Numerical Symbols.
१ २ ३ ४ ५ ६ ७ ६ ९ १०
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

H
 OHAPTER W.

PRONOUNS.

FORMATION OF THE CRUDE.

PRONOUNS have no crude state analogous to that of nouns, that

is, no state distinct from all inflexion, serving as the basis on
which all the cases are constructed.
The guestion then arises, what form of the pronoun is used in
the formation of compound words. In the pronouns of the first
and Second persons, the ablative cases, Singular and plural, and in
the other pronouns, the nominative and accusative cases neuter,
are considered as expressive of the most general and comprehen
sive state of the pronoun. These cases, therefore, discharge the
office of a crude, and are constantly found at the commencement
of compound words.
IDECLENSION OR THE PERISONAL PRONOUNS.

75. मत् mat, “ I," is taken for the crude of the sing. ; and अस्मत्।
asmat, “ we," for the crude of the plur. of the first personal
pronoun.

N. स्रहं aham, “ I.” सावां atām, “ we two,” वयं 0agam, “ we.”

Ac. माँ mim, ‘* me,” * - ācām, “ us two,” * सस्मान् asmān, १% us.***
I. मया maga, अ'ावाभ्यां छंutibhgam, अस्माभिः asmabhih.
D. मह्यं malijjam,* - ātjabligam,* स्रस्मभ्यं asmallyam.*
Ab. मत् mat, - ātpābhyām, अस्मत् asmat.
G. मम mama,* स्रावयोः ।oajoh,* अस्माकं asmākam.*
L. मयि mayi, - auagoh, अस्मासु asmāsu.
"
"
_

76. त्वत् tioat, “ thou," is taken for the crude of the sing, ; and ।
युष्मत् /ashmat, “ you," for the crude of the plural of the second | ।

personal pronoun. ।

* The acc. sing. may also be मा ; the dat.,gen. मे ; the acc., dat., gen. dual नौ
the acc., dat., gen. plur. न: (cf Lat. n0s),
 PRONOUNS. 5]

N. त्वं tuam, *thou,” युवां gutpām, **you two,” यूयं gigam, “you.”
Ac. बिाँ turām,* - gyuUdim, युष्मान् gyughmām.*
I- बिया turagā, युवाभ्यां gyubabhgām, युष्माभि: yushmabhin.
D. तुभ्यं tullgam,* - guodibhgām,* युष्मभ्यं gyughmabhgum.*
Ab. त्वत् tuat, - 3/uUtibhg/ām, गुष्मत् gughmat.
G. तव tatya,* युवयोःguagol,* युष्माकं yughmakam.*
L. त्वयि tuagi, - 3/uudg/oh, युष्मासु gyughmāsu.

77. तत् tat or तद् tad, “ he," is taken as the crude of the sing.
and plur. of the third personal pronoun. With this pronoun cf.
the Greek article.

MASOULINE.

* N. स: sah, “ he,” ती tau, “ they two,” ते te, “ they.”

Ac, तँ tam, - tau, तान्। tām.
I. तेन tema, ताभ्यां tabhyām, ते: taih.
D. तस्मे tasmai, - tabhgām, तेभ्य: tebhgah.
Ab. तस्मात् tasmāt, - tabligām, - tebhgah.
G. तस्य tasga, तयो: tajol, तेषां teghām.
L. तस्मिन् tusmim, - tag/oh, तेष।
`*
teghtt.
`# .
FEMININE.
*

N. सा sa, **she, ताः tah.

Ac. ताँ tām, - tāh.

I. तया tagā, ताभ्यां tabligām, ताभिः tabhih.

D. तस्यै tas)ai, - taibhgām, ताभ्यः tabhyah.
Ab. तस्याः tasyāh, - tabligām, - tābhgah.
G. - tus:/tih, तयो: tagoh, तासां tāsām.
L. तस्यां tus:/tim, - tdg0h, तासु tāsu..

Neuter, nom. acc. तत् tal, ते te, तानि tāni ; the rest like the
masculine.
This pronoun is sometimes used emphatically with the other
pronouns, like ille and ipse. Thus, सो-हं, “ ille ego '; ते वर्यं , “ illā
nos"; स त्वं, “ ille ta"; ते यूयं, “ illi cos "; स एष:, “ ille ipse "; तद् टतत्,
“ ād ipsum.'

* The acc. sing. may also be त्वा ; the dat. gen, ते ; the acc., data gen. dual व' ;
the acc., dat., gen. plur. वः (cf Lat. tos),
 PRONOUNS.

REFLExIWE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

78. The obligue cases of स्रात्मन् , “ soul," “ self " (declined p. 4I.),
are used reflexively in place of the three personal pronouns, like
the Latin ipse. Thus, ātmānam (me ipsum) amahārena hanis/yāmi,
“ I will kill myself by fasting `'; ātmānam (te ipsum) maritarad dar
shaya, “ show thyself as if dead ''; ātmānam (se ipsum) ?aindadi,
“ he blames himself.'

DEMONSTRATIWE PRONOUNS IDEOLINED.

79. The third personal pronoun तत् tat, “ he," declined above,
is constantly used in a demonstrative sense, to signify “ that T or
“ this'; and by prefixing e to it, another common pronoun is
formed still more strongly demonstrative ; as, nom. एष: es7a/
(r. 30.), एतौ etau, एते ete'; acc. टतं etam, &c. ; ins. टतेन etema, &c.
There is another very common demonstrative pronoun, of
which इदं idam, “ this,” the nom. case neuter, is considered to be
the crude, but is never used as Such.

MASCULINE.

N. अयं agam, “ this,” इमी imau, **these two,” इमे ime, “ these.''
Ac. ड्मं imam,* - imau, इमान् imām.
I. अनेन amema, अ'ाभ्यां Gibhyām, टभि: ebhih.f
D. अस्मे asmai, - dibhg/tim, खटभ्यः ebhyah.
Ab. अस्मात् asmāt, - abhyām, - ebliguh.
G. अस्य ds:/u, अनयो: anayoh, श्टषां eंhāna.
L. अस्मिन् usmin,
- dmagoh, एषु eghu.
FEMININE.

N. इयं iyam, इमे ime, इमा: imāh.

Ac. इमां imam,* - ime, - imāh.

I.अनया amag/ā, अ'ाभ्यां abhyām, अाभिः ।abhih.

D. अस्ये us:/ui, - ibhyam, अाभ्यः abhyah.
Ab. अस्याः osyāh, - ibhydim, – dibhyah.
G. - dsyāh, अनयो: dndyoh, अासाँ āsām.
L. अस्यां asyām, - dmogyoh, स्रामु dist८.

* The acc. m. may be खटनं , the acc. f. ट्नां.

f This pronoun affords the only example of the old form for the instr. plur. of
maSculine
 *

PRONOUNS. _ 53

Neut., nom. acc. इदं idam, इमे ime, इमानि imāni ; the rest like the
masculine.
There is another demonstrative pronoun rarely used except in the nom., of which
ddas is taken as the crude : , nom. m. dsau, “ this' or “ he,' amin, amā ; acc. amum ;
inS. dinumā, &c.
RELATIVE PRONOUN-“ 1Uho,' ** १bhāch.''

80. The relative may be formed by simply substituting y for

s and t, in the pronoun tad. Thus, crude form yad: nom. m. य:
?/ah, “ who," यौ /aa, ये /e ; acc. र्य /am, “ whom," &c.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN-** adho?' ** १chout ?'

8l. As the relative is formed by substituting y, so the inter

rogative by substituting % for s and t, in the pronoun tad. Thus,
nom. m. क: /6ah, “ who ?" कौ kau, के ke. In the nom. neut., how
ever, the interrogative is किं kim and not kad.* Him is also the
orude, and occurs in a few oompounds ; as, किमर्थं, “ on what
account ?'

POSSESSIWE PRONOUNS.

82. These are formed by adding the affix छू/a (r. 38. xI.) to the
Crude of the personal pronouns; as, madāya, “ mine " (nom. -ah,
-ā, -am); tioadiya, “ thine "; asmadiya, “our." Observe, however,
that the gen. case of the personal pronouns is more usually taken
to express the possessive ; as, तस्य पुच:, “ his son."
REFLExIWE POSSESSIWE PRONOUNS,

83. ख spa (of suus), declined like sarpa, r. 87. (nom. ख:, खौ, खे'),
is used reflexively, in reference to all three persons, and may
** ८८
stand for “ my own,' “ thy own,'' “ his own,'' “ our own,' &c.
It often occupies the first place in a compound ; thus, खगृहं गच्छति,

masculine nouns of the first class. This form is still preserved in the Wedas, and in
accordance with this, the instr. plur. of deca (r. 48.) would be depebhih.
*. Kad, however, was the old form, and is retaimed in a few words ; Such as
hachchit, “ perhaps”; kadartha, “ useless” (* of what use?'') ; hadadhulam, “ a bad
road” (* what a r0ad !'').
f But the abl. and loc. sing. m., and nom. pl. m. may follow deod, r. 48.
54 PR0N0UNS.

“ he goes to his own house."* The gen. case of atman (p. 41.), or
often the crude, is used with the same signification ; as, चात्मनो गृहं
or चात्मगृहं गच्छति."
HONORIFIC PRONOUN.

84. भवत् bharat, “ your honour," reguiring the ad person of the

verb, is declined like dhanacat (r. 6l.). Thus, nom. ८/apān, ८7a
oantaa, Dharantah. It is used respectfully in place of the second
personal pronoun ; as, Ghapām dharmam karotu, "let your honour
practise virtue."
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

85. The indeclinable affixes chit, api, and chama, added to the
several cases of the interrogative pronoun, give them an indefinite
signification. Thus, nom. sing. mase. कश्चित् kashchi८ “ somebody,"
“ any body "; acc. कश्चित् kanchit ; ins. kenachit ; dat. kasmaichāt ;
loc. कस्मिंश्चित् kasminshchit (r. 20); nom. plur. masc. kechit. So also
nom. को-पि ko'pi, कश्चन kashchama, “ Somebody "; ins. kemāpā, &c.
By prefixing न, is formed the megative न कश्चित् , “ nobody."
# In the same way interrogative adwerbs are made indefinite. Thus, from
kati, “ how many ?” katichit, **a few'; from kada, “ when?” kadachit, “ at some
time '; from hatham, ** how ?' 7athanchama, “ some how.'

WHOSOEWER, WHATSOEVER.

86. This is expressed by prefixing the relative pronoun to the

interrogative. Thus, य: कश्चित् , “ whosoever "; यत् किञ्चित् , “ what
soever.' Or by repeating the relative ; as, यो यः, यद् यद्.
1PRONO'MINALS.

87. There are certain common adjectives which partake of the

nature of pronouns, and follow the declension of tad (r. 77.). Thus,

* In modern Sanscrit māja often takes the place of sura ; as, निजगृहं गच्छति .
f Prof. Lassen cites a remarkable example from the Rāmāyama, in which
आात्मन् refers to the dual number. Putram ātmanah sprishtua mipetatah, * they
two fell down after touching their Son.' Anthol. p. 171.
 WERBS,-GBNBRAL 0BSBRWATIONS. 55

सङ्घै sarpa, "all ': nom. masc. sarrah, sarpaa, sarce; dat. sarcasmai ;
nom. fem. sargā, &c. ; dat. sarpasyai, &c. But the nom. neut. is
sarpam, &c., not sarpad. The following are the most useful of
these pronominals. Eka, “ one'; prathama, “ first'; dipitāya,
“ second"; tritāya, “ third''; alpa, “ few"; abha, “ both"; anya,
“ other"; itara, “ other"; katara, “ which of the two?" (the three
last also follow tad in the nom. and acc. neut. anyat, itarat, katara)
But some of these are optionally declined like nouns of the first
class ; thus, alpa, nom. plur, alpā/ or alpe.

OHAPTER, WI.

WERBS.

Gemeral Obseroatioms.

ALTHOUGH the Sanscrit verb will be found somewhat intricate

by one who follows it through all its windings, yet such a general
view of its structure as will be Sufficient to answer the practical
wants of the general reader may be easily given, and as easily
apprehended. There is no part of the grammar So capable as
this of plain exoteric explanation, whilst there is none so obscured
by the esoteric and mystical teaching of native grammarians ;
none, of which the general principles are so few and so close to
the surface, whilst the abstruser truths, the niceties and refine
ments, are multiplied to an extent that tends to discourage, or
even disgust the uninitiated learner. Hence it happens that the
expounder of Sanscrit Grammar, who wishes to exhaust his subject,
is here not Only compelled to embarass and perplex an otherwise
simple statement, by the diffuse exhibition of various forms, and
tenses, and exceptions, which are of little utility to the ordinary
student, but is forced, moreover, to bewilder the beginner by a
56 W BRBS.-GENBRAL 0BSBRWATIONS.

complication of technical phrases, conventional abbreviations, and

symbolical letters, which are as puZZling at the first stage of his
studies, as they may be useful in assisting his memory at a later
period. And thus it is that a very false impression is formed
of the difficulty of a language, the broad and useful principles of
which lie wholly within the reach of the most moderate capacity.
It will be the aim of the following pages to disentangle the
Subject, as much as possible, from this superabundant weight of
mystical Symbols and unusual tenses and forms, many of which
exist more in the theory of grammarians than in the practice of
approved writers; and although no part of the verb will be left
unnoticed, the larger print will serve to attract the eye of the
student to those points which are of general utility and real
importance, whilst the smaller will indicate those portions of the
Subject which are to be reserved for after-consideration.
Although the Sanscrit verb offers the most striking and inter
esting analogies to the Greek, nevertheless, So peculiar and artificial
is the process by which it is formed, that it would be impossible,
in treating of it, to adopt an arrangement which would be likely
to fall in with the preconceived notions of the classical student.
There are ten tenseS. Seven of them are of common occur
rence ; viZ. I. the present, 2. the first preterite, 3. the potential,
4. the imperative, p. the second preterite, 6. the first future, 7. the
Second future. Three are of rare occurrence ; viZ. 8. the third
preterite, 9. the benedictive, I0. the conditional. There is also
an infinitive mood, and several participles. Of these tenses the
present, the three preterites, and the two futures, belong properly
to the indicative mood ; and the imperative, potential, benedictive,
and conditional, are more properly moods than tenseS. Since,
however, these moods do not comprehend other tenses under them,
but are Susceptible of all times, present, past, and future, it can
lead to no embaraSSment to COnsider them as tenses, and to
arrange them indiscriminately with the others in the manner
proposed above.

* Although the three preterites are used without much distinction, yet it Should
be observed that they properly express different degrees of past time. The first pre
 WERBS.-GBNERAL 0BSBRWATIONS. 57

terite corresponds to the imperfect of Greek and Latin verbs, and properly has
reference to an event doing at some time past, and not ended. Thesecond preterito
has reference to an ewent done and past at some definite period. The third pre
terite, to an event done and past at S0me indefinite period, thus corresponding to the
Greek aorist. S0, als0, the tw0 futures properly express, the first definite, the
second indefinite futurity. The potential may generally be rendered in English by.
some one of the auxiliaries “ may,” “ can,” “would,” “should,” “ought." The
conditional is used after the conjunction /adi, “ if”ः it occurs, however, but very
rarely, and the potential usually Supplies its place in conditional Sentences. The
benedictive is a tense Sometimes used in praying and bleSSing.
The infinitive mood generally hasan active, but is capable of a passive signification.

Every tense has three numbers, Singular, dual, and plural.

There are two voices or systems of inflection, the one called
Parasmaipada, the other Atmanepada.* The former is supposed
to convey a transitive sense, the action passing parasmai, “ to
another "; the latter, a reflexive sense, corresponding to that con
veyed by the Greek middle voice, the action reverting atmame,
“ to one's self."f This distinction, however, is very rarely pre
served ; and we find verbS, transitive or intransitive, conjugated
indifferently in the parasmaipada or ātmanepada, or both. When,
however, the verb is conjugated in both, the ātmane may then
sometimes yield its appropriate meaning, and give a kind of
reflexive sense, or a sense directing the action in some way to
the advantage of the agent.
Passive verbs are invariably conjugated in the ātmanepada.
From every root five kinds of verbs may, in theory, be elicited—
a primitive, a cauSal, a paSSive, a desiderative, and intensive.

* If the term ooice has reference to the system of inflection, it is obvious that
there can only be two voices in Sanscrit; and although the atmamepada, in one or
two instances, has a middle sense, yet it cann0t be Said to correspond with the
Greek middle voice, the chief characteristic of which is, that it takes a middle

inflection, partly active, partly passive.

f The words parasmaipada and ditmamepada will often be contracted into
;pdr., dtm.
ā)8 W IBRBS.--(GENERAI, OBSBRWATIONS,

Of these, the two last forms are very rarely met with, except in
the nouns and participles derived from them ; and will therefore
be but slightly noticed in these pages, So, also, from every
noun,. certain nominal verbs may, in theory, be elicited. Wery
few of these, however, are in freguent use. There are ten conjuga
tions. Primitive verbs may belong to any one of the first nine
conjugations, but by far the greatest number belong either to the
ISt, 4th, Or 6th, the Other Six conjugations comprising So few
verbs that they may be regarded rather as exceptions. These
nine conjugations apply to the first four tenses only. The
other tenses of the primitive are formed according to One
rule. Causal verbs form the I0th conjugation. Every root has
a passive form, entirely independent of the conjugational form
assumed by the root ; and the student will observe, that the
paSSive cannot, in Sanscrit, be considered a roice, according to the
usual acceptation of the term. For, in that case, he would expect
a verb in the passive voice to correspond in form with a verb in
the active, in the way that audior Corresponds with audio, and
dkogouott with dikogo, the terminations or System of inflection only
being changed. But, in Sanscrit, the passive often varies entirely
in form from the active verb, whilst the terminations may in both
cases be the Same, viZ. those of the ātmanepada. It is rather a
distinct derivative from the root, formed on one invariable prin
ciple, without the least community with the conjugational structure
of the active verb. Thus, the root D/id, “ to divide,' is of the
7th conjugation, and makes Ghinatti or ८/in/e, “ he divides'; diois/,
" to hate,” is of the 2d conjugation, and makes diceshti or dioishte,
“ he hates'; but the passive of both is formed according to one
invariable rule, by the simple insertion of y, without the least
reference to the conjugational form of the active : thus, bhidyate,
“ he is divided '; digis//are, “ he is hated.''
From these observations it is evident that the difficulty of the
Sanscrit verb is as nothing when compared with the Greek. The
Greek verb has three voices, and about ninety tenses and moods : the
Sanscrit has only two voices, and not more than twenty-One tenses
and moods. Besides which, a far greater number of verbs are sus
ceptible of the three voices in Greek, than of the two in Sanscrit.
 METHOD 0F' DBRIW ING WERBS F R0M ROOTS. 59

MOreover, in Sanscrit, there are no contracted verbS, and no

difficulties resulting from difference of dialect ; and although there
are ten conjugations, yet these have reference to four tenses only,
and, under some of these conjugations, Only two or three common
verbS are contained.
Werbs primitive, causal, and passive, may, like nounS, be divided
into simple and Compound. Simple perbs may be regarded as
falling under two heads, either as derived from uncompounded
rootS, Or as derived from nounS. Compoumd perbs are those formed
by combining roots with prepositions or other adverbial prefixes.*
SIMPI,E WERBS DERIWED FROM ROOTS.

It has been already shown that there are a large number of

monosyllabic sounds in Sanscrit, called roots, which, having a mere
ideal existence, are the source of verbs as well as nouns. These
roots are in number about two thousand, and the theory of
grammarians is, that each of them may serve as the basis on
which to construct five kinds of verbs ; l. a primitive, transitive
or intransitive ; 2. a causal, having often a causal and often
merely a transitive signification ; 3. a passive ; 4. a desiderative,
giving a Sense of wishing to the root ; and 5. an intensive (or
freguentative), heightening the idea contained in the root. It
will be found, however, in practice, that the greater number of
these two thouSand roots never occur at all in the form of verbs,
nor, indeed, in any other form but that of the nouns to which
they give origin ; and that the roots in real use as the source of
verbs are comparatively very few. Of these few, moreover,
certain particular roots (such, for example, as Kri, “ to do '), as if
to compensate for the inactivity of the others, are kept in constant
employment, and, by Compounding them with prepositions and
other prefixes, applied to the expression of the most various and
Opposite ideas.
Nevertheless, theoretically, from every root in the language
may be elicited five kinds of verbs. The first, or primitive verb,

* Compound verbs will be treated of in the chapter on compound words.

60 METHOD OR DERIW ING W IERBS FRO'M ROOTS.

is formed from the root, according to the nine different rules for
the changes of the root, reguired by the first nine conjugations ;
the second, or causal, is formed according to the rule for the
change of the root, reguired by the I0th conjugation ; viZ. the
addition of ay to the root, the vowel of which has taken the Guna
change. The third, or passive, is formed according to the rule
for the change of the root, reguired by the 4th conjugation, wiZ.
the addition of y in the first four tenses. The fourth, or deside
rative, is formed by the addition of is/ or s, the root also
undergoing reduplication. The fifth, or intensive, is formed like
the passive, according to the rule reguired by the 4th conjugation,
and is, in fact, a reduplicated passive verb. It may also be
formed analogously to the rule for the 3d conjugation. Thus,
take the root shabh, conveying the idea of " shining '-from
this are elicited, I. the primitive, shobh, ‘‘ to shine'; 2. the causal,
shobhay, “ to cause to shine" or “ illuminate'; 3. the passive,
shub//, " to be bright "; 4. the desiderative, shashobhish, “ to desire
to shine "; 5. the intensive, shoshuby, “ to shine very brightly.'
See also p. l9.
Of these five forms of verbs, the primitive, causal, and passive,
are the only three used by the best writers, and to these alone
the attention of the reader will now be directed. The Subject,
therefore, will divide itself into two heads. In the first place,
the formation of the base : lst, of primitive ; 2dly, of causal ;
3dly, of passive verbs. In the second place, the inflection of the
base of these Same forms respectively. But here it may be
asked, what is the base ?

THE BASID OR' THE WERB.

The base of the verb is that changed form of the root to which
the terminations are immediately affixed, and holds exactly that
intermediate position between the root and the inflected verb
itSelf, which the crude form holds between the root and the
inflected noun. This great peculiarity, therefore, cannot be too
often or too forcibly impressed upon the attention of the learner,
that, in the treatment of Sanscrit verbs, two perfectly distinet
Subjects offer themselves for consideration : Ist, the formation of
 REMARKS 0N 'THE 00NJUGATI0NS. 61

the base, or, in other words, an investigation into the changes

which the root undergoes before the terminations are affixed ;
2dly, the inflection of the base, or the union of the base with its
terminationS.

The first of these two subjects of inguiry will be found to be

that in which consists all the difficulty of the subject ; for, as far
as the terminations are concerned, no dead language conforms
more systematically to one general scheme, than the one with
which we are concerned.

There are ten rules or conjugations, according to which the

bases of verbs may be formed. But in these we have already
noted a great peculiarity, and one which has much weight in a
comparison between the difficulties of a Greek and Sanscrit verb.
Of these ten conjugations, the first mine have reference only to
the first four tenses ; viZ. the present, first preterite, potential, and
imperative. Hence these are called the conjugational tenses.
After passing these four tenses the conjugational structure of the
base is entirely forgotten ; and in the formation of the bases of
the six remaining tenses all roots conform to one general rtile,
and are as if they belonged to one general conjugation. Hence
these tenses are called non-conjugational. The tenth alone retains
the conjugational structure of the base throughout all the temses
of the verb ; but as this conjugation has no reference to primi
tives, but to causals only, no confusion can arise from this
apparent inconsistency. Of the 2000 roots, about one half follow
the Ist conjugation, about l30 follow the 4th, and about l40 the
6th. Of the remaining roots, not more than 20 in common ase
follow the 2d ; not more than 5 follow the 3d; not more than 6 the
7th ; not more than 4 the 5th ; not mOre than l the 8th ; not more
than l2 the 9th.
Primitive verbs, therefore, which COnstitute the first mine
conjugations, will be divided into tioo grand classes, according as
they fall under one or other of these nine conjugations. Regular
primitive verbs will be those of the lst, 4th, and 6th conjugations.
Irregular primitives those of the 2d, 3d, pth, 7th, 8th, and 9th con
jugations. The first class we call regular, because under it are
contained nearly all the common verbs in the language ; the
62 REMARKS ON THE 00N.JUGATIONS.

second irregular, as Comprehending only fifty or Sixty useful

verbs in all.

All causal verbs follow the I0th conjugation, and, in point of

fact, Constitute this conjugation ; for all those primitive verbs
which are said by grammarians to belong to the I0th conjugation,
may be regarded as causal verbs.
All passive verbs are ātmanepada verbs of the 4th conjugation.
The parasmaipada of the 4th conjugation is constituted of certain
primitive verbs, which have a neuter Signification.

+ There seems no necessity for creating a tenth conjugation as distinct from the
causal. So that it would greatly Simplify the Subject, if this conjugation were
expunged altogether from the Grammar, and the addition of aj/ to the root con
sidered, in all cases, as the mark of a causal verb. And it is plain that a।/ is not
the sign of a Separate conjugation, in the way that mu is the sign of the 5th con
jugation, or in the way of any other conjugational sign, for it is retained throughout
the other tenses of the verb, not only in the first four, just as the desiderative igh is
retained throughout. And although there are many werbs given under the
10th conjugation, which have rather a transitive than a causal signification, yet
there are also many cauSal verbs which are used only in a transitive Sense. It will
therefore make the Subject less complex to consider that the affix ay is always the
sign of the causal form, merely bearing in mind that cau8al forms do not necessarily
imply cauSality.
It may also be guestioned whether there be any necessity for creating a 4th con
jugation as distinct from the passive. For Since it is found that either aneuter or
passive signification attaches to nearly all the verbs placed under the 4th conju
gation, and that passive verbs are identical with its titmamepada inflection, it may
with reason be Suspected that the occasional aSSumption of a neuter Signification
and a parasmaipuda inflection by a passive verb, was the Only cause which gave
rise to the creation of this conjugation. And this theory is Supported by the fact
that many passive verbs (as, for example,.jāyate, “ he is born,'' from the root.7am ;
and piryate, “ he is filled,' from the root pr) are confounded with verbs of this
conjugation. So that it Seems not umlikely, that, by making this 4th conjugation,
Grammarians only meant to say that the passive form of verbs, or the addition of /
to the root, is also the form that may be used to express a neuter or intransitive
signification ; the only difference reguisite to be made between the two forms
bcing exactly that which might be expected to exist between them ; viZ. that
 R BG.ULAR PRIMITIW E W BR BS. 63

the ome Should take the ditmamepada ; the other, the pdrasmdipddd inflection.
At any rate this fact is clear that the par. of the 4th conjugation is the form used
in numerous roots toyield a neuter Signification ; and that the ditm. is identical with
the form used to yield a passive Sense. Hence it arises, that many r00ts appear
in the 4th conjugation as neuter werbs, which als0 appear in some one of the
other mine as transitive. For example, /uj, “ to join,” when used in an active sense
is conjugated either in the 7th conjugation, or in the causal ; when in a neuter,
in the 4th. So als0, push, “ to nourish'; hshubh, “ to agitate"; klish, “ t0 wex';
sidh, “ to accomplish.”

SEcr. I.–REGULAR. PRIMITIWES, OR WERBS OR THE

Ist, 4th, AND 6th CONJUGATIONS.

TERMINATIONS OE' THE CON.JUGATIONAL TENSES.

Presemt Temse.
PARASMAIPADA. ATMAN1EPADA.

Sing. IDual Plur. Sing. Dual Plur.

Z???? ātpa/ | , ढ772a/% 62 āapahe | ???2a/%e

dsā a//ia/% d//ad 6186} et/Be dd/%?ge
ddā ddd/% d?adā ८८८e e८e d224e

First Prete?’ite.
62772 t7a9d āh2a ८ āodhā ।। 7ma/ः?
a/% 60/d??? ८८८८ ddhā/ | e/hā??? | dd/%?od???
d८ dddim? 6470) d/d e/777a d?a८d

P0temtia/.
eyam 6%90, 6%?20, eyd et;a/%ā | e???d/%?
e/% edd??? e८८८ ethā/ |eyāthām | edhioam
e८ edt/?? e/a८/। ddd eyātām | eram
Jmperatioe.
ā??? ā19a 11?ad dā āt;a/ºdā | 77?2d/2d?
८ d८d??? d/८८ 6087470, et/21772 | ad/27od???
d८a८ ddti/ma d??4a८ dddim ettZ??? ८t??८djm?

Obs., the terminations read downward ; thuS, āmā

is the lst pers. sing. ; asi the 2d sing. ; ati the 3d.
64 R B(GULAR PRIMITIW B W BRBS.

FORMATION OF THE BASE OP THE CON.JUGATIONAL TENSES O F

REGULAR PRIMITIWE WERBS.

88. Obs., that it is an universal rule in every conjugation that

the augment a is prefixed to the base of the first pret. ; and that
when this is prefixed to bases beginning with the vowels i, ad, and
;ri, short or long, it blends with them into ai, au, ār (instead of
e, o, ar, by r. 5.). Thus the base इच्द् becomes in the first pret.
aichchham, and ridhmo, dirdhnot.
First Conjugatiom.
a. If a root be of the lst conjugation, the rule for the
formation of the base in the conjugational tenses is, that the
Guna be substituted for the vowel of the root throughout ecery
person of epery tense. Thus, from बुध् budh, “ to know," is formed
the base बोध्। Dodh* (बोधामि, bodhami, &c.), From bhā, “ to be,"
८ho (Ghagami, &c., r. l0.f), From mi, " to lead," ne (ndyāmi, &e.,
r. 10.f), From grip, sarp ; from klrip, kalp (p. 2.f), In the first
preterite the only difference in the base will be that a is pre
fixed ; thus, abodh, abh0, ame (abodham, &c., abhauam, &c., andyam,
&c.). In the potential and imperative the base is exactly the
same as in the present (bodheyam, &c., bodhāni &e),
८. Since there is no Guna of a, roots like पच् pach, “ to cook,'
do not change (pachami, &c.), Nor does any change take place if
the root ends in two consonants ; as, ?mind, “ to blame ': nor if
the root contain a long vowel, not fimal ; as, jºu, " to live.''
OBS. It will be hereafter Seen that this prohibition of Guna
extends to the other tenses as well as to the conjugational."
c. Some roots of the Ist conjugation form their bases in the first four tenses by
a change peculiar to themselves, which change is of course discarded in the other
tenses. Thus,from स्यां sthā, “ to stand,' comes the base तिर् tishth (tishthdmi, &c.);
from गम् gam, * to go,'' गच्छ् gachchh ; from सद् sad, ātm. “ to sink,' sād s from

* Bopp has shewn that an’ analogous change takes place in Greek. Thus,
the r00t puy (ंpuryov) becomes petrya in the present.
f Thus, mind is in the 2d pret. mininda ; in the Ist fut. minditā ; in the
8d pret. amindit ; in the causal, mindog/uti.
 CON JUG ATIONAL TENSBS. 6ā)

घा ghrā, ** to smell,' जिम्। .ji/hr; from pā, “to drink,"pin; and from दृश् drish,
“ to see,” the substituted base पश्य् paslg ; from gum, “to restrain," gachchh ; from
gup, “ to protect"; goptig/.

Fourt/ Corijagation.
80. If a root be of the 4th conjugation, no Guna takes place,
but the base is formed by the .Simple addition of y to the root.
Thus, from सिध् sidh, “ to succeed," is formed the base sidhy
(sid/yānai, &c.); from नृत् nrit, “ to dance," the base mrity. “ , “ - ‘

d. The following are anomalous changes. From जृं, “ to grow old,” is formed the
base,.jirg/ ; from dit', “ to sport,' dirg/ ; from kram, “ to go," krāmg/ ; from bhram,
** to whirl,' bhrāmg/ ; from भ्रंशं bhramsh, “ to fall," भ्रश्य bhrash।/ ; from.jam, ātm.
“ to be born,".jiy ; from ºgyadh, par. “ to pierce," cidhy. See the remarks, p. 62.*.

Sia:th Cojijagatiom.
90. If a root be of the 6th conjugation, the general rule is, that
no change at all takes place, and that the root stands also for
the base. Thus, the root kship, “ to throw,' is also the base
(kshipāmi, &c.). So also दिशं dis/, “ to point out " (dishami, &c.).*
a. Some roots, howewer, take a change peculiar to themselves ; as, from इम् iglt,
“to wish,” the base इच्छ्; from प्रच्छ्, ** to ask,'' पृच्छ् ; and a final at or ia is changed
to ut', and ri to ri/ s and r? to ir. As, from dhā, ** to shake,'dhut; ; from मृ mri,ātm.
* to die,” mriy (श्चिये, &e); from धृ dhri, कtm. “ to exist,'' dhri) ; from कृ kri, “ to
scatter," kir (kirāmi, &c.).
b. Some insert a nasal ; as, from much, ** to let go,' the base muiach (मुच्चामि, &c.);
from lip, “ to anoint,' /imp ; from sich, ** to sprinkle,' siiach ; from वृत् , “ to out,'
कृन् _

Having thus explained the formation of the base in the con

jugational tenses of the regular primitive, it will be necessary to
exhibit the irregularities presented in these same tenses by about

* Roots ending in consonants in the 6th conj. generally contain either i, u, Or

ri ; and these wowels would have taken Guna had the root fallen under the Ist.
K
66 IRRB(GUI, AR PRIMITIW B W BRBS.

fifty common roots belonging to the 2d , 3d, 6th, 7th, Sth, and
9th conjugations, before we proceed to the remaining six tenses
of the verb, the rules for the formation of which are common to all.
The student, however, who wishes for a continuous Survey
of all the tenses of the verb will pass over the next section, and
proceed at once to Sect. III.
Spor. II.–CERTAIN IRREGULAR PRIMITIWES, OR WERBS
OF THE 2d, 8d, छth, 7th, 8th, AND 9th CON.JUGATIONS.

TERMINATIONS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL TENSES.*

PARASMAIPAIDA. ATMANEPAIDA.
Presemt Temse.

?mi P lpah ?ma/ . |e ??a/te 'mahe

8i or shi P|tha/ |thd। se or she |āthe ldhice
fi P ta/% |d?ati Or dti || te 7fe | ate
_ First Preterite.

6177? ?? 1262 77267 ? ba/hā ?ma/%ā

h P /d??? |८d //hāi/% āi//17??? dhmod??2
} * ८1??? |d?a Or a८/ || /a titām ddd

Potemtiul.

gyāma gyāud |/tima दृ/a ?ud/ ? ?ma/tā

?/āi/% yātam |/āta ?//ā/ः ?/āt/tām |?dhrod???
?/ā८ yātām |/u/। ?/d। ?yatām |?rdia
Imperatitle.
ā?ai P 67apo८ ?” | ८Z???d P di P āpahai *lamahaā =
/ः? Or d/ः? |८d??? | fa smoa Or 8/foa|ādhāj?? dhipama
fa८ º tt1jpg | d?afuं Or dtuं || dtim 747??? d८7???

OBS. The terminations read downwards ; thus, ???ā is the

Ist pers. sing., si the 2d sing., di the 3d. The mark P
placed after certain terminations indicates that certain pecu
liar changes, to be afterwards explained, take place in the
root before these terminations.

* This irregular Scheme of terminations corresponds to the technical scheme

given by native Grammarians, as applicable to all verbs. Let the reader compare
ं ।
this
 IRREGULAR PRIMITIWE W BRBS. 67

FORMATION OR THE BASE OE' THE CON.JUGATIONAL TENSES.

These irregular primitives cause the chief difficulty of Sanscrit

Conjugation ; for they not Only present an ever-varying form of
base throughout the different persons of each tense, but also
reguire a scheme of terminations which differs, in many impor
tant points from the regular Scheme, and more eSpecially in this,
that the terminations begin generally with comsomants instead of
vOwels.
In this last respect the above scheme resembles that of the
first and second future, p. 73, and all the other non-conjugational
tenses, p. 8l. Hence the combination of the final consonants of a
base with the initial s or t of these terminations, and of those
of the non-conjugational tenses, reguires an acguaintance with
the following rules.
Combinatiom 0f fimal ch and j, foith t, th, and S.
9I. Final c/ and j, before d, th, and s, are changed to k, the k
blending with s into छ् ksh (r. 30. note); thus, Jacl with ti, cakti ;
with thah, baktha/ ; with 8i, uakshā : m0c/ with syāmi, mokshyāmi ;
???ac/ with ta, ?mukta : tydj with ta, tyakta ; with &yāmai, {yaks//āmi.
But a final palatal is, in a few cases, changed to म्।। 8/ः before d, //। ;
and º, dh then become ट्, ट् : thus, mārj with ti, मार्ष्टि ; मृजन् with
tha/), मृष्ट:; मृजन्। with td, मृष्ट; प्रच्छ् with tā, प्रष्टा.

Combimation of fimal dh and bh, ?cith t, th, and S.

a. Final ध् dh and भर् ८/, before d and t/, are changed, the one
to d, the other to b, and both ८ and th then become dh. Thus,

this with the regular scheme at p. 68, and observe how essentially they differ. Let
him also bear in mind that the total number of verbs, primitive and derivative
(exclusive of Intensives and innumerable Nominals), that follow the regular Scheme,
would amount to about eight thousand, whilst the total number that follow this
irregular scheme would hardly exceed two hundred ; he will then understand that
if any general scheme is to be propounded at all, it should rather be that at p. 68.
This is another proof that native Grammarians are alt0gether wanting in clear
logical arrangement of their Subject.
68 RULBS FOR THE CO'MBINATION OF CONSONANTS.

rand/ with tah or tha/ becomes egually runddha/ं (रून्डः); lab/ with
tā/ie, labdhāhe (लभाहे).
८. Final dh and ८/, before s, are changed (by r. l3.), the one
to d the other to p. Thus, rundd/ with si becomes ranatsi ; sed/%
with &yāmi, se/syāmi ; lab/ with sye, lapsye. And if the initial of
the root be d or D, the aspirate, which has been rejected in the
final, is thrown back on the initial ; as, God/। with &/e, /0tsye.*

Combination of final श sh, प् sh, स् s, nit/ t, th, s, dh.

c. Final श sh, before d and th, is changed to प् ४/ ; and the
८ th, take the cerebral form ट्, ठ् : thus, ईश् with te, ईष्टे ; and ऐशर्
with tha/), टेष्ठाः.
d. Similarly, final ष् 8/, before t and th, reguires the change
of ८ th, to ट् ट्. Thus, द्वेम् with ti, द्वेष्टि ; and द्विम् with tha/), द्विष्ठ:.
८. Final श ४/ or प् ४/, before s, are changed to f, the s then
becoming s/ (r. 30. note) : thus, वश with si, वट् ि; द्वेष् with si,
द्वेष् ि; द्रश with syāmai, द्रक्ष्यामि . _

। f Final श or ष् , before the termination dhi of the imperat., are

changed to ड् d, the dhā becoming ढि dhi. Thus, द्विष् with dhi,
द्विड्ढि. Similarly with dhnam, द्विड्ढुं .
g. Final स् s, before the termination dhā of the imperat., is
either dropped, or changed to d. Thus, chakās with dhi, either
cha/ādhi or chakaddhi ; शाम् with dhi, शाधि ; हिंस् with dhi, हिंडि .
Combination of final ह् h mit/ t, th, and s.
h. Final ह् h, before d and th, is changed to g, and both t and
// then become ध् dh. Thus, dah (दुह) with tah or tha/ becomes
egually dagdha/% ; da/ (दह्) with tāsmā, dagdhāsmā. But if the
root begin with any other letter but d or m, then its final ह।
coalesces with the t or th of the termination into ढ् dh ; and the
radical vowel, if short, is lengthened : as, मुह with ta, मूढ ; रूह् with।
८a, रूढ ; /eh। (लेह्) with ti, ledhi (लेढि); and रोह् with tāshai, रोढास्मि .
Similarly the final of दुह्, before the termination dhi of the imperat.,

* There is a very remarkable parallel to this in the Greek rpcipo, making in the
future 0pe.Jo, noticed by Prof. Bopp.
 CON.JUGATIONAL TENSES. 69

becomes dagdhi (दुग्धि); and the final of fलह् blends with the same
termination into d/} (लीढि). `

i. Final ह h before s, follows the analogy of final श १nd म्।,

and is changed to %, which blends with s into झ /ksh. Thus, Je/
with sā becomes /ekshā ; रो ह् with syāmi, रोष्ठ्यामि. And if the
initial of the root be d or g, the aspirate which has been changed
to k is thrown back on the initial, Thus, do/ (दोह्) with si,
dhokshi ; दह with &yami, धष्यामि ; स्रगुह् with sam, अघुष् .

Secomd Corijagation.
92. If the root be of the 2d conjugation, the base is formed
by substituting the Guna vowel for the vowel of the root, before
those terminations only that are marked with P : before all the
other terminations the original vowel of the root is retained.*
Thus, from rid, “ to know," is formed the base of the singular
present, ped (cedmi, &c.), the base of the dual and plur. cia/
(cidicah, &e) : from dinish, “ to hate," the bases dicesh and dicis/्' ः
from i, “ to go," the bases e and i (Ist sing. emi, of cia' ; Ist pl.
imah, cf tite); from जागृ, “ to awake,".jāgar and jigri (3d sing.
du. pl.jigarti, jigrita/),.jigratit r. 7.),
a. Those roots of this and the 3d and 7th conj. whose bases
end in consonants reject the terminations of the 2d and 3d pers.
sing. Ist pret. (excepting ad, “ to eat,” which inserts a before /
and ). But the final of the base is changed analogously to
crudes of the Sth class in the nom. case (see p. 27. r. 45). Thus,
sing. acedam, are’, aget. 4dicesham, adicet (अद्वेट्) &c. They also
take dhā for hi in the imperative.$
* Bopp has noticed a corresponding lengthening of the vowel of the root before
certain terminations in Greek. Cf. 6foout, 6t6o५ev, eijat, /uev.
f The other forms of the base of durish are Seen in r. 91. e..f:
मू Roots of more than one syllable, and.jaksh, “ to eat,” and shās, “ to rule," and
all roots of the 8d conjugation, necessarily reject the nasal of the Bd plur-s of the
pres, and imp. paras., and take uh for an in the 8d plur. Ist pret. Some other roots
in the 2d conj. optionally take ad for dm s as, cid, durish, p67, /6-
& Dhi was originally the on// form. Hence in the Wedas श्रुधि। (KNu0a).
70 IR RB0{ULAR PRIMITIW B WERBS.

b. Roots like ad, “ to eat" ; pā, “ to protect " ; /ti, “ to go," having no Guna
substitute, do not change at all (admi, &c. ; ptimi, &c. ; /tinai, &c.). But daridra,
par. “ to be poor,' makes its base daridri before the consonantal terminations not
marked with P, and daridr before ati, uh, atu (8d pers.'sing. dual, plur. daridriti,
daridritah, daridrati), see note mfarked t, p. 69.
c. The root stu, “ to praise,” and some others in u, take Wriddhi before the cons0
nantal P terminations,* changing at to uu before the wowel terminations. Hence, the
three bases, stau, stu, stut (stauti, stutah, stutamti). Similarly, si, ātm. ** to bring
forth," makes suu before the wowel terminations (snte, sutyāte, sutate) ; ब्रू Gra, “ to
speak,' makes brutं before the consonantal P terminations,and brun before the vowel
terminations. Hence, in the par., the three bases, bratº, bria, brut) (braciti, brºtah,
brutyamti) ; and in the atm. the two bases brii, brut) (briate, brutyāte, brucate).
d. Rud, ** to weep,” besides the usual Guna change, adds i to the root before all
the consonantal terminations except /. Hence the three bases rodi, ra८di, rud
(roditi, ruditah, rudamti). Similarly, but without Guna, the roots sucap, “ to sleop,"
shulus and am, “ to breathe,'.juksh, “ to eat.'' Ham, ** to kill,'' makes its base ha
before t or th ; ghn before anti, am, dntu s and.ju before hi (hamti, hatah, Ghmamti ;
2d pers. imp..7ahi).
e. शास् , “to rule,'' makes its base शिम् before t, th (which then become t, th)
and J), and changes its final to t in the 2d and 8d Sing. Ist pret. (ashāt).
Jः स्रस्as, “ to be,” rejects its initial a, except in the Ist pret., and except before
the P terminations of the other tenses.

दुह् , “ to milk,” and लिह् , ** to lick,'' form their bases as seen at r. 9I. h, ā.

Third Conjugation.
93. If a root be of the 3d conjugation, the base is formed by
the reduplication of the initial consOnant and vowel of the root,
a being the reduplicated vowel for ā, i for । or ri, and a for ः;
and in the reduplication of the consonant, an unaspirated letter
being substituted for an aspirated, and j for h. Besides the
reduplication of the root, the radical syllable is Subjected to the
Guna change, but only before the e terminations, as in the 2d Conj.

* By ** the cons0nantal * terminations' is meant th0se terminations marked

with P which begin with cons0nants.
 00NJUGATIONAL TENSBS. 71।।

Thus, from भृ bkri, “ to bear," are formed the two bases bibhar
and bibkri (3d sing. du. pl. Gibharti, bibhritah, bibhrati, r. 7.); from
7a, " to Sacrifice,' the two bases juho and jaha८ (jahoti, jahata/),
.juhicati, r. 7.); from bhā, “ to fear," bibhe and bibhā (bibheti, bibhita/),
Gibkyati), The 3d conj. is the only one which ingarially drops
the naSal in the 3d pl. of the pres. and imp. par., and takes a/। for
am in the 3d pl. of the Ist pret. Before this ad/ Guna is reguired.
a. दा, “ to give,' in the par. drops the a before all except the P terminations,
making its base dad, changeable to dat (dudati, dattah, dadati), and de before the hā
of the imperat. Similarly, धा, “ to place,' makes its base dadh before o, m, /, or
a wowel, and dhe before hā ; but dhat before t, th, or s (dudhāti, dhattah, dadhati).

Fifth Corgjugatiom.
94. If a root be of the 5th conjugation, the base is formed by
adding na to the root, which is converted to the Guna mo before
the e terminations. Thus, from chi, “ to gather," are formed the
two bases chino and chinu* (chinoti, chinata/), chinfoanti r. 7.) In
roots ending in vowels, the ad of nad may be dropped before o
and m. The roots āp, “ to obtain "; शक् , “ to be able '; तृप् , “ to
satisfy "; and ऋध् , “ to increase "; ending in consonants, add nut;
instead of na८ before the vowel terminations (shakmoti, shaknuta/),
shaknucanti), श्रु shru, “ to hear " (sometimes placed under the
Ist conj), substitutes शृ skr for the root (शृणोति, r. 21., शृणुत: शृण्वन्ति)
Roots ending in vowels reject the termination hi of the impe
rative : as, skrina, “ do thou hear "; but āpnahi, “ do thou obtain."

Secemat/ Corgjugation.
96. If a root be of the 7th conjugation, the base is formed by in
serting na between the vowel and final consonant of the root, before

* This change of mu to mo is supplied in the corresponding Greek affix vu, by

lengthening the U, as in tetryyuut, tethyvuuev ; )eikvuat, )etkvunew. Bopp.
f All the roots in this conjugation end in consonants.
 ?2 IRRB(GULAR PRIMIT [WE WERBS.

the P terminations, and n before all the other terminations.* Thus,

from )/lid, " to divide,' are formed the two bases Dhinad and
८/aind, Changeable to ८/int (Ghinatti, ८/aintrah," bhindanti); from
rud/, “ to restrain," ratadd/ and rund/, changeable to rand (rupadd/ai,
runddha/, r. 9l. a., randhanti); from /ins, “ to injure,” /inas and
/tins ; from )/itj, " to eat,' Ghundj, changeable to bhunak, and bhaijj,
changeable to U/ian% (r. 9l.). Similarly gyagj, “ to join."
. Bhai.j, “ to break,” rejects its nasal before ma is inserted. Hence the bases bhandj
and bhai.j (bhamakti, bhamsktah, bhaijanti).

/Eig/// Corijugation.
96. The base in this conjugation is formed by the addition of a८
to the root, Converted to the Guna o before the ºr terminations.
There are only ten roots in this conjugation, nine of which are
not in Common use. Moreover, these nine all end in ?a, and
therefore the addition of o and a८ will have the Same effect as the
addition of no and na in the 5th conjugation. Thus, damo and
danad, from dan,•“ to extend '' (Ist sing. pl. tanomi, tamumah, cf rdvupu,
T4vupteg). But the tenth root in this class is कृ kri, “ to do,' by
far the most common and useful root in the language. This
root not only converts the conjugational affix ४ to the Guna o
before the º terminations, but also changes the radical vowel ri।
to the Guna ar before these Same terminations, and before the
other terminations to ar (karoti, karata/), Karcanti), and rejects the
conjugational a before c, m, / (lst plur. kurmah),

IWimt/ Conjugatiom.
97. If a root be of the 9th conjugation, the base is formed by

* Similarly, n is inserted in certain Greek and Latin roots; as, Jud0, aav0avo ; ?\०,3,
?\aju/3avo ; 0ry, 0ayyava) ; scid, scindo s fid,.find0 ; tag, tang0 ; /i/], linju0, &c.
f The final t of the base may be dropped, bhintal ; S0, also, rumdhah for
rumddhah.
 NON-CON.JUGATIONAL TENSES. 73

adding na to the root before the º terminations, and ? before all

the others, excepting those beginning with vowels, where only ja
is added. Thus, from pā, “ to purify," are formed the three bases
punā, punं, and pun (pamati, pumādah, pumanti). This root, with
some others ending in long vowels (as, dhā, “ to shake "; lii, “ to
out ''; स्तॄ, “ to spread '), shortens its vowel in forming the base.
यह् , “ to take," makes its bases गृह्मा, गृह्मती, गृह्म (r. 2l.*); and ज्ञा,
“ to know "; जाना, जानी, जान् (janati, janāta/।, jamanti),
Roots ending in consonants substitute ama for māhi, the proper
termination of the 2d pers. of the imperat. As, गृहाण, “take
thou "; and अशान, “ eat thou,” from अश् , “ to eat.”
SPon, III.–PRIMITIWE WERIBS OR AILI, CONJUGATIONS
IN THE NONLCON.JUGATIONAI, TENSBS.

TERMINATIONS OR THE NON-CON.JU; GATIONAL TENSIES.

PABAS1MAIPA !} A. ATMANEIPAIDA.

Sec0md Preterite.
* _ * . ! % _ * _
८८ 2090।, 22720।। | |
62 ātrd/ंe i/ma/%e
_ * _ __ *_
i//ād Or d/ंd | dt/ia// | d | ” ishe | athe id/17be
। _ _

6८ dfu/ a८/ | e ८८e | are

* The roots श्रु, तु, दुः; बु, कृ, भृ, मृ, वृ reject the initial i from
these terminationS.
Fi?’st F'a८dat?*८.

/āsmā | dasica/ ।। tāsma/ | tāhe | tāsroa/te |tasma/te

Z78? | dastha/ः । tāstha l fase | dasathe | tādhice
/7 | lāraa l tara/ । fº7 ttiraa८ f1ra/%

Sec0mad F'uture.

&yāmi। &yāt9a/% | syāma/ || sye &yāpa/te | &/āmnd/le

&yasi syatha/ | 8yat/ta syase | syethe | &yad/irce
&yati &yata/ः | &yanti। syate | syete | &yante
Observe, that by reason of r. 30. (with mote), the
most freguent form of the terminations of the second
future is shyāmi, &c.

* The letter ह although compounded with the nasal does not prevent the opera
I, tion
74 SBCOND PRET BRITE.

FORMATION OP THE BASE OP THE NON-CONJUGATIONAI, TENSES•

Second Preferite.

98. The first step in the formation of the base of this tense
is the reduplication of the initial consonant of the root with its
vowel, or of the initial vowel : thus, from Uudh, “ to know,' bubud/ ;
and if the root end in a consonant, the radical vowel takes Guna
before the terminations of the sing. par., but before all the other
terminations reverts to its original form ; hence, the two bases
0abodh, bubudh (Gubodha, bubodhitha, Uubodha, dual Gubudhica,
0ubudhathuh, &c., ātm. bubudhe, &c.) : if in a vowel, this vowel
takes Wriddhi in the lst* and 3d sing. par., and Guna in the 2d,
and before all the other terminations, both par. and ātm., reverts
to its original form : thus, from mā, “ to lead,' the bases minai, mine,
nini (aināya, r. S., ninayillia r. I0. or minetha, nināya, ninyica"
ninyatha/), &e., ātm. minye, &e); so also from Kri, the bases
chakār, chakar, chakri, (chakāra, chakartha, dual chakrica); and from
d/ā, the bases dudhau, dudho, but in dual, plur. &c. dadhu्' (dudhāra,
r. 8., dudharitha r. l0. Or dad/0//a, dadhāpa, dud/iatrictt, &c., ātm.
dudhure, &c.). Bhā, “ to be," is anomalous, making its base babhāp
before all the terminations.

Observe, that all the terminations of this tense begin with vowels.
It is indicated, hOwever, in the Scheme, that an initial i is SOme
times rejected in the 2d pers. sing. This i may be optionally
rejected in those roots only in which (as we shall afterwards see)

tion of r. 2I., and according to the same rule, kri, “ to buy,” 9th conj., makes its
bases krānā, krini, kri a (क्रीणाति, क्रीणीत:, क्रीणन्ति).
* All Grammarians assert that there is an optional change to Guna in the Ist
pers., but this is never found.
f IBy a Special rule, the ? of the base is here changed to the Semi-vowel instead of
following r. 4. But r00ts ending in i or ?, of which the initial consonant is double,
change i or ? to i/ before these same vowel terminations, that is,before all excepting
the sing. par. ; hence, from श्रि come the three bases shishrai, shishre, and shishri/.
! 4// roots ending in a८ or i change ad or ? to au before these vowel torminations ;
excepting, of course, the r00ts श्रु, तु, दुः, खुः, in the persons marked with *.
 SECOND PRETERIT R. 76

it is necessarily rejected in the futures.* In the other persons

the i marked with * is retained in every root in the language,
except eight, viZ. कृ, “ to do `; भृ, “ to bear "; श्रु, “ to hear "; स्तु, “ to
praise," मृ, “ to go," &c., all ending in vowels. Hence it happens
that consonants can never Come into coalition, except in the 2d pers.
sing. of this tense. Its formation, therefore, is not attended with
any difficulties of consonantal combination. There are certain
rules, however, to be acguired, relative to the reduplication of an
initial COnsomant with its vOwel, and an initial vowel. With।
regard to the vowel belonging to the initial consonant, a is redu
plicated for a, ā, ri, or ?? ; । for i, ?, or e ; a for a, ā, or o : as,
from dā, dadaa८ ; from tri, datāra ; from sep, si8/teca ; from pā, pap7co.

99. Eules for the Beduplication of am Imitial Consomamt.

a. If a root begin with an aspirated consonant, its corresponding
unaSpirated form is reduplicated ; as, from 0/id, bibheda (बिभेट्).f
८. If with % or kh, the reduplicated letter is c/ : as, from Kri,
c/2akāra (चकाग्) ; from Kham, c/ंak/āma (चखान).
c. If with g, g/, Or /, the reduplicated letter is.j: aS, from gam,
?ogāma ; from ghrā, jag/iraa (जघौ); from /ri, jahāra (जहाग्).
d. If with a double consonant, the first only is reduplicated : as,
from tyaj, tatyāja (तत्याज); from kship, chikshepa (चिक्षेपं)
e. If with a double conSOnant, whose first is a Sibilant and the
second a hard Consonant, the Second Only is reduplicated : as,
from sprish, pasparsha (पस्पशै) ; from skamd, chaskanda (चस्कन्द्).
Reduplicatiom of am Imitial Wouel.
.fः If a root ending in a single consonant begin with a, i, or t/, these wowels are
repeated, and the two similar vowels lylend into one long one. Thus, /isa from a
and as, ** to be'; 7pd from a and ºp, r. 4. ; the dual ishatuh from i and ish ; ākhatndh।
from u and ukh : but in the sing. of the last two cases, the radical i or m/ taking

* Thus, pach, “ to cook,' forbids i in the future ; therefore the 2d sing. is oither
popakthd or pechitha. So also m?, ** to load,' minnyithd or mimethor, as above.
f So in the Greek, T60aTrat from 0aTrra) ; Trejºt?\jka from ptAca.
# Grammarians assert that the short d is optionally retained in the first porson.
76 SBCONTD PRE TERIT B.

Guna, the reduplicated i becomes iy before e (iyesha), and uu before o (uookha).

If a r00t ending in a d0uble consonant hegin with a, or, ending in a Single consonant,
begin with ri, the reduplicated syllable is am : thus, स्रानर्चे, 8d sing. of अर्चे ;
ānardha, ofridh. The root इ i is in the sing. iyāya, iyayitha, &c., dual छृ/ica, &c.
Am0malous Modes of forming the Second Preterite.
There are many anomalous ways of forming the base of the 2d pret.
a. Roots ending in a (as, da, “ to give'; sthā, “ to stand'; /ti, “ to go,' &c.)
drop the a before all the terminations, except tha, and Substitute au for that of the
Ist and 8d sing. par. Hence, the bases dad, tasth, /dg/ (ददी dadau, तस्यौ tasthau,
ययो 9ayaus dual, dadica, tasthira, gayira). Similarly roots in ai, as gai (jugau)-
b. R00ts ending in the vowel ri, in accordance with r. 98, change ri to dir in the
1st and 8d Sing., and to ar in the 2d Sing., and before the other terminations retain
the vowel ri changeable to ?” ; but roots in which ?”i is preceded by a double con
Sonant, and m0st r0ots in long ri, instead of retaining this vowel, change it to dr in
the dual and plur. par., and conseguently throughout the ātm. Thus, from smri,
sing- susmāra, sasmaritha, sasmdra, dual susmarica, &c. ; ātm. sasmare, & c.
c. Roots beginning with any consonant, and ending with a Single consonant, and
inclosing a Short d, lengthen the d in the lst and 8d Sing. : as, from pach, “ to cook,''
pupāch s from t/tij, “ to guit,' tatyāj (tatyāju, tatydjitha, tatyāja, tati/gjipa, &c.).
Moreower, before itlla and in the dual and plur. par., and all the pers0ns of the atm.,
if the initial as well as the final consonant of the root be Single, the a is changed to
e, and, to compensate for this, the reduplication Suppressed. Thus, from pach come
the two bases puptich and pech (papāchd, pechithd or papaktha,pdpāclud, pechioo८; ātm.
peche, &c.); from labh, ātm. “ to obtain '' (cf. ?\aa3avo, dAd/3ov), the base lebh through
out (lebhe, lebhishe, lebhe, lebhiuahe, &c.).*
d, Roots of this last kind, that reguire a substituted consonant in the reduplication,
are excepted from the rule (but not bhdj and phal). So, also, certain roots begin
ning with g are excepted. These reguire that the reduplicated syllable be a, or
the correSponding vowel of the Semi-vowel, and change od of the root to u before
every termination, except those of the Sing. par., the two u's then blending into one
long one. Thus, from oacll, “ to speak,'' come the two bases upāch and icl (uoacha,
āchatuh, āchul). A Similar rule is applied in /nj, “ to sacrifice” (i/āja, ?jatuh, /uh).

* The roots trap, and grath, and shrath, and नॄ, “ to pass'' (tatiru, teratuh, teruh,
as if the root were tar), and bliram, sulam, rtij, ridh, blirāj (bhrgje, blirgjite, bhrejire),
Uhrāsh, and pam may follow this rule, although not answering the above conditions.
 FIIRST AND SBCOND FUTURB. _ तृतः।

e. Gam, “ to go ''; ham, “ to kill” (which forms its 2d pret. as if the root were
gham) ; .jum, “ to be born''; and kham, “ to dig ''; drop the medial a before all the
terminations except those of the sing. par. Hence, from gam come the two bases
.jugām,.jugm (jugāma,.7agmatul,.jagmuh).
.fः यह्।, * to siege,'' and प्रच्छ्, “to ask,'' make their bases जयाह् and जगृहं, पप्रच्छ्
and पपृच्छ् (जयाह, जगृहतुः, जगृहुः); स्वप् , “ to sleep,” makes मुष्वाप्। and मुमुप् ;

हे, “to call," forms its base like roots in u (juhāpa,.juhupatuh,.juhuruh) ; जि,
** to conguer,' forms its base as if from gi (7i7āya,.7igi/utuh, &c.).
gy. Roots which begin with a vowel, long by nature or position,* and all roots of
more than one syllable, form their bases by adding dim to the root, and affixing the
2d pret. of some one of the auxiliaries, as, “ to be'; bhh, “ to become ''; कृ #ri, “ to
do.” Thus, from ईशत् c0mes the base ईशां (ईशामास, or ईशाम्बभूव, 0r ईशाच्वकार्),

100. The First dmd Second F'uture.

The first future (as noticed by Bopp) results from the union
of the nom. case of the noun of agency (formed with the affix तृ tri,
r. 4l.) with the present tense of the verb, as, “ to be.' Thus,
taking datri, “a giver '' (declined P. 37.), and combining its nom.
case with asmi and he, we have datāsmi and datahe, “ I am a giver,"
identical with the lst perS. Sing. par. and ātm. of the lst fut., “ I
will give." So also datāsi and datāse, “ thou art a giver," or
“ thou wilt give.' In the Ist and 2d persons dual and plur. the
sing. of the noun is joined with the dual and plur. of the auxiliary.
In the 3d person the auxiliary is omitted, and the 3d pers. sing. dual
and plur. of the Ist future in both voices is then identical with
the nom. case sing. dual and plur. of the noun of agency. Thus,
data, “ a giver," or “ he will give "; datāraa, “ two givers," or
“ they two will give," &c.f
The second future, in its terminations, Stands in close relation
ship with the present tense, the only difference being that sy is
prefixed.

* Except āp, “ to obtain,'' and roots having an initial a before two consonants.
f The future signification inherent in the noun of agency data, Seems implied in
Latin by the relation of dator to daturus.
78 FIRST AND SECOND RUTURE.

The invariable rule for the formation Of the base of both

future tenses is, that the Guna be Substituted for the vOwel of
the root*: thus, from.ji, “ to conguer," the base.je (jetāsmi.jes/yāmi);
from shra, “ to hear," the base shro (श्रोतास्मि, श्रोष्यामि). And the
general rule, moreover, is, that if the root end in a comsomant,
the vowel a be inserted between the base and terminations. Thus,
from Dudh comes the base bodhā (वोधितास्मि ८odhātasmā, &c. ; बोधिष्यामि
00dhishyāmi, &c.). This insertion of i, the manifest object of which
is to prevent the coalition of consonants, is unfortunately, how
ever, forbidden in about One hundred roots, Some of which are of
very common occurrence ; and the combination of the radical
consonant with the initial t and s of the terminations, will reguire
an acguaintance with the rules already laid down at p. 67. When
these rules are acguired, there will be no difficulty in the forma
tion of these tenses. The only guestion is, how are we to
distinguish between those roots which insert i, and those which
do not P
The laws about to be laid down will determine this point, and
it is of the utmost importance that the attention of the student
be directed towards them, as the assumption or rejection of this
inserted vowel is not confined to the two futures, but extends tO
many other parts of the verb ; insomuch, that if the first future
reject i, it is, as a mecessary conseguence, rejected in the third
preterite, the ātm. of the benedictive, the conditional, the infinitive
mood, the passive past participle, the indeclinable past participle,
the future participle formed with the affix tatya, and the noun of
agency formed with the affix tri ; and is, moreover, optionally
rejected in the 2d pers. sing. of the 2d pret., and decides the
formation of the desiderative form of the root by s instead of is/.
So that the learner, if he know the first future, will pass on with
great ease to the formation of these other parts of the verb, and
should always look to this tense as his guide. For example,
taking the root kship, “ to throw," and finding the Ist fut. to be
/ksheptāsmi, he knows that i is rejected. Therefore he knows the

* Unless such substitution be forbidden according to r. 88. a.

 FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. 79

2d future to be kshepsyāmā ; the 3d pret. to be akshaipsam ; the

ātm. of the benedictive, kshipsāya ; the conditional, akshepsyam ;
the infinitive, ksheptum ; the passive past participle, kshipta ; the
indeclinable part. ksheptioā; the future part. %sheptatya ; the noun
of agency, ksheptri ; the 2d pers. sing. of the 2d pret. optionally
chiksheptha ; the desiderative, chikshipsami. On the other hand,
taking the root yāch, “ to ask," and finding the lst future to be
3/āchitā, he knows that i is inserted, and therefore the Same parts
of the verb will be yāchis//āmi, ayāchisham, ?/āchishāya, dyāchi8//am,
3/tichitum, /tichita, /āchiticā, /āchitatya, /āchitri, /ayāchitha, /dyā
chishāmi respectively.
It is evident that roots ending in vowels do not reguire i, and
it may be taken as a general rule that they do not insert it :
’ there are only a few exceptions, as follows :

I0]. Boots ending in 70pels, inserting i in the Primitice.

OBS. In the following lists the 3d pers. sing. of the lst and
2d future is given after each root.
a. Roots ending in ā ; as, bhā, “ to be " (bhapitā, bhaciskyati),
८. Roots ending in r, as, तृ ८r, “ to pass" (tarita, tari8//ati) :
and in these, inserted i is optioially lengthemed (taritā, tarishyati).
c. Roots ending in rā short insert i in the 2d future, although
rejecting it in the first ; as, कृ (kariskyāmi) ड् (hariskyām).

Jºoots ending in Comsomants, inserting i in the Primitioe.

d, All roots, without exception, ending in K/, g, g/, t, 1/, d, p, ं,
८/%, ८, ?/, r, , o, insert ? ; in % there is one exception ; in ch, four ; in
c//, One ; in j, ten common exceptions ; in d, eight ; in d/, eleven ;
in m, two ; in p, twelve ; in bh, three ; in ?m, five ; in शर् sh, seven ;
in म् ि8/, nine ; in s, one ; in ह् /, twelve.

Jºoots ending in 7ofoels, rejecting i in the Primitice.

e. All roots in a reject i ; as, da (data, disyati): all common
roots in i and º ; as, je (jeta, jeskyati),
। f All common roots in a ; as, shra (shrota, shroskyati): all in ri
reject i in the lst future ; as, ड् /ri (/kartā, harislyati),
80 I'IRST AND SECOND H'UBURB.

102. Boots ending in Consomants, rejecting i in the Primitice.

Of roots ending in K, शक् (shakta, shakshyati, r. 9l.). In CH,
pach (pakrā, pakshyati) so iach ; sich (sekfa, sekshyati) nuc/
(moktā, mokskyati), In CHH, प्रब् (prashtā, r. 9l., prakshyati), In
J, tydj (tyaktā, tyakshyati), so bhdj; yaj (yashtā, r. 91-, ?/akshyati);
रच् (डूिा, यति) so also bhaij, saij; /uj (yokā, /okshyati), so bhaj;
सृजत्। &ं;" (स्रष्टा, स्रष्यति); मृन् (marshtā," mārks/ंyati), In D, ad (atta,
atंyati), So pad, sad ; Ohid (Ohettā, bhetsyati), so chhid, khid ; tad
(dotra, tof&yati), so nad, In DFº, bandh ()anddha, r. 91. a., ८/antsyati,
r. 9l. ), ध्/adh (oyaddha, tyatsyati) sādh (sāddhā, satsyati), so
rādh; sidh (8eddha, setsyati), budh," 4th conj. (Goddhā, 0/1otsyate,
r. 9l. ७.); /udh (yoddhā, /otsyate); so rud/, krudh, kshud/, shudh.
In N, man" (mantā, mans/ate), ham (hantā, but hamiskyati). In P,
top (fopta, topsyati), so cap shop, sicap ; āp (āptā, āpsyati), kship
(kshoptā, kshepsyati) so lip ; tup (optā, lopsyali); मृप् &rip (sarpta
or 8raptā,* sarpsyati or sraps:/ati), so trip' drip ;f klrip (kalpta," ka/p-
gyati), In BH, lab/ (labdhā, r. 9l, a., lapsyate, cf. ?MAJºerca, r. 9l. U.),
so rali/; ; labh (lobdhā,' but labhishyati), In M, gam (gantā, but
gamis/yati), nam (mantā, nansyati) so yam ; ram (rantā, ransyate),
so Kram." In श SH, damsh (दंष्टा, दंष्ट्यति), oish (वेष्टा, r. 91. c., वेच्यति,
r. 9l. e.), so dis/ ; दृशं drish। (द्रष्टा,* द्रष्यति), so sprish, mrish ; Krus/
(क्रोष्टा, क्रोष्ठ्यति), In ष् इतः, daks/ (tashtā' taksyati) is/ (es/gā," but
eshi8/yati), dicish (द्वेष्टा, द्वेष्यति), so shlis/, pi8/ ; dash (दोष्टा, दोप्यति);
So pash, 8/hush, tu8/। ; Krish। (kra8/ga* Or karshtā, kraks/yati or kark
s/yati), In s, cas (castā, ca/&yati), In ह् H, dah (dagdhā, r. 9l. /.,
dhakshyati, r. 9l. i.); ca/% (वोढा, r. 9l. h., a being changed to o,
वष्यति), sa/। (सोढा,' but sahishyate), nah (naddha, natsyati, as if from
nad/), gāh (गाढा, घाट्यते), li/ (लढा, लेष्यति), dih (degdhā, dhekskyati,
r. 9l. i), snih (snegdhā," snekshyati), ruh (रोढा, रोष्यति), mah (मोढा' or
मोग्धा, मोघ्यति), dah (dogdhā, dhokshyati), drah" (द्रोढा or द्रोग्धा, भोट्यति),
gah" (गोढा, घोष्यति).

* In certain roots containing the vowel ri, the vowel passes into ra and rā,
instead of the Guna dr or Wriddhi ar. Thus, the Ist future of srjj is स्रष्टा for सर्छा ;
and the 8d pret. सस्राष्ट्रं for स्रंसां.
f All these roots may optionally take i in the futures.
 THIRD PRETERI'I'B. 81

THIRID PRETERITE TENSE.

TERMINATIONS OR THE THIRID PRETERITE.

PARASMAIPADA FoRM I. ATMANEPAIDA.

Terminatioms of Werbs inserting i.

igham ishtpa ighmnd || ighi। ighuruhā |ighmahā
ih |ishtam |ishta | ishthan ishāthām|idhuram or idhuram
Z८ ightām ighuh। | ishta ishatām |ishata

FORM II.

Terminatioms of Werbs rejecting i.

80771 |St00, 87010, si। ।surahā 8mahā

sih। stam or tam|sta or ta | sthāh.or thāh |sāthām |dhuram or dhucam

&Z८ &ttima Or ८d7m| suh। । &td or ८८ 867८67??? l Sottoः

OBs. By reason of r.80. (with note) the initial sibilant almost always
takes the cerebral form sh.

FORM III.

Terminatioms correspomding to the First Preterite.

0772 diud |āma | e Or ? 67apahi। dimahā

ol। dtum ८tta athtih ethām or tithtimladhulam

d८ dtāma 677।।' ouddः ettim 0r titam |amta

108. Formatiom 0f the Base 0f the Third Preterite.

This complex and “ multiform” tense, the most troublesome and intricate in the
whole Sanscrit werb, is not S0 much one tense, as an aggregation of Seweral tenses, all
more or less allied to each other, all bearing a manifest resemblance to the first;
preterite, but mone of them exactly assignable to that tense, and none of them S0
distinct in its character or S0 universal in its application as to admit of segregation
from the general group, under any Separate title ofits own.
Fortunately for the study of Sanscrit, the third preterite very rarely occurs in the
earlier and better Specimens of Hindu composition ; and the student who contents
himself with the Rāmāyana, Mahābhārata, Hitopadesha, and Laws of Manu, and
av0ids the grammatical Poem of Bhatti, and the extrawagant writings of more
modern authors, will lose nothing by an almost total ignorance of this tense, or, at
least, may satisfy himself with a very cursory Survey of its character and functions.
M
A
82 THIRD PRET BRITE.

All the varieties of this tense are reducible to three distinct forms, adapted to the
three Schemes of terminations given in the table above. The first form is that
which belongs to those roots which insert i before the terminations of the non-con
jugational tenses : the second belongs to th0se which reject i : and the third, which
most nearly approximates to the Ist pret., belongs, in the first place, to certain
r00ts, wh0Se bases in the first pret.present some important variation from the root ;
in the second, to certain r00ts ending in श् sh, म्ि &h, or ह्। h, which have i, 1८, Or ri।
for their radical wowel ; and, in the third, to causals, or verbs of the I0th conjugation.
In all the modifications of this tense, the first step in the formation of the base
is the prefixing of the augment a, a further indication of its community of character
with the first preterite. But besides this there are changes of the base peculiar to
each form.

Form 1. Formatiom of the Base.

u. In the first form, if a root end in a vowel, the base must be formed in the
par. by the Wriddhi change, and in the ātm. by the Guna : thus, from pā, “ to pu
rify,” come the two bases opau and opo (अपाविर्ष apācigham, &c. r. 8., अपविषि
opdtrishi, &c., r. 10.f). Wery few roots ending in oouoels take the inserted i, and
therefore very few follow this form.
b. If a r00t end in a Single consonant, Guna is reguired in both par. and ātm.
(r.88.b.). Thus, frombudh,abodh (अबोधिषंabodhisham,&c., स्रबोधिषि abodhishi,&c.).
Almost all roots ending in consonants, which insert i, follow this form.
C. A medial d is Sometimes lengthened ; as, from oad, atyād (doādisham, &c.).
d, A few roots in 7, e, o, and di, with three in m, wiZ. gam, ?”am, nam, inSert s
hefore the terminations of this form, the finale, 0, andai,being changed to ā. Thus,
from ?/ti, ti/tis (dyāsisham, &c.) ; from so, dsds (asāsigham, &c.) ; from /am, dg/ams
(dyunsiंham, &c.). In the ātm. they follow form 2. (ayāsi, &c., aramsi, &c.).

Form 2. Formatiom 0f the Base.

e. The greater number of r00ts rejecting i follow this form.

Observe that the initial s may often be rejected from those terminations in which
it is compounded with t, th. This takes place when the base ends in any Consonant
except a nasal or a Semi-wowel, or in any short wowel; and dhuram (द्वं) takes
the place of dhulam when the base ends in any other wowel than (Z.
.f If a root end in either a consonant or a vowel, Wriddhi takes placein the par. ; as,
from kri, akair (अकार्षे akārsham, &c.), from gngj, agagj (स्रयीं agaukshdm, &e.}
dual ajauksliua, agauktam, &c.) ; from ?’udh (arautsam, &c., dual arautsua,
 THIRD PRETERITE. 83

uruuddham, r. 01. d. b.) ; from dah (adhaksham, &c., dual adhakshtna, adāgdham,
r. 01. h. i.).
9. But in the ātm. ifa root end in any other wowel than ri, Guna takes place; as,
from chi, ache (अवेषि acheshi, &c.); and ifin ri, or any consonant, then the wowel
is unchanged ; as, from kri, akri (akrishi, akrithāh, &c.); from gngj, aggj (agukshi,
ogyukthāh, &c.); from rudh, arudh (arutsi, aruddhāh, aruddha, r. 9I. a. b.).

Form 8.* Formatiom of the Base.

h. Roots of any conjugation, making use of this form, in general attach the ter
minations directly to the root : thus, from gam, agam (agamam, &c.) ; from bhid,
abhid (अभिदं abhidam, &c.). And no confusion can arise from this apparent identity
with the Ist pret., as in all cases where these terminations are used for the 8d pret.,
the Ist pret. presents Some difference in the form of its base ; as in agnchchham,
abhinadam. So again, the sixth conjugation, which alone can ever shew a perfect
identity of root and base, newer makes use of this form for its 8d pret., unless by
some special rule the base of its Ist pret. is made to differ from the root. Thus,
lip, “ to smear' (cf. dAe{pa), which is alipam in the 8d pret., is alimpam in the first.
i. Certain roots ending in long wowels, as da, ** to give,'f make use of the termi
nations of this form, but reject the initial wowel throughout (adām, adah, adat ;
dual, adāpa ; 8d pl. aduh s atm. adishi, &c., form 2.t). So bha, “ to be,” except in
the Istsing. and 8d plur. (अभूर्वं abhiiuam, abhill, &c. ; 8d plur. abhāuam ; in the ātm.
abhaoishi, &c. form 2.)-
.j. The roots cach, “ to speak,"and pat, “ to fall,” follow this form ; but, in contra
distinction to the Ist pret., make their bases atioch, apapt (atrocham, apaptam,
of. drrrrov). As, “ to throw,' makes isth s shās, ashish s nash, amesh.
k. Certain roots ending in शत् sh, म् िsh, ह् h, inclosing a medial i, u, or ri, form their
3d pret. according to this third Scheme; but whenewer confusion is likely to arise

* Bopp has noticed that this form of the 8d pret. corresponds very clearly with
the 2d aorist of the Greek (cf asthām, asthās, asthāt with gorrmv, āorrnc, āirrn), and
that the first two forms are more or less analogous to the Ist aorist.
f Bopp remarks that the Ist pret. of this root adadām bears the same relation
to its 8d preterite adām, that gof6av does to goov. So also the relation of adhām
(8d pret. of dhā) to adadhām (Ist pret.) corresponds to that of ātiny to grithiv.
Cf. also abhatyah and abhāh with āpues and āpus.
# Roots like da, in the itm., change the radical a to i, and follow form 2. : thus,
adishā, udithāh, adita, adightodhi, &c.
 84 BENEDICTIW E.-CON D1TIONAL.

between the Ist and 8d preterites, the base is formed by the addition of sh to the
root, the final of the root being at the same time changed to k (r. 9I. e.).
Thus from दिशा dish, “ to point out,” cornes the base adiksh। (खदिक्षं ०diksham, &c.,
cf c2e45a, Ist pret. ८dishana); fron durish, “ to hate,” aduriksh (aduriksham, &c.) ;
from duh, ** to milk,T ddhuksh (adhuksham, &c., r. 91. i.). But this class of roots
'substitutes i for e, the termination of the Ist pers. sing. ātm. (adikshi, adikshathāh,
&८.), and atham, atām, for ethām, etām, in the 2d and :}d dual (adikshāthām).*
CauBal werbs make use of the terminations of this form, but the base assumes
a very peculiar reduplication (analogous to the Greek pluperfect), to be afterwards
explained. Thus, from budh, al ibudh (alibudham, &c.).

BENEDICTIVE AND CON DITIONAL TENSES.

TERMINATIONS.

Bemedictice.
PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

'/tisdm | /disura ' /disma || si/a &7aruhiः | s7mohi।

। ।
J//ih | /tistam । /dista | s?ंhthal | si/tisthām sºdhuram (dhuram)
_

'/ti८ 3/tisttim । gdisul || sishta | sijjastam । sZruma

Comditiomal.

*/um | &/tica syāma || s/e | sya cahi | syāmahi

&g/u/ | & /utum ' syata || syathal। | syetham s:/adhudma
&]/ut &/attima । &/dru &g/uto८ | syetām &yumta

OB8. The initial Sibilant, in the terminations of both these

tenses, almost always takes the cerebral form sh.

Formation of the Base 0f the Bemedictiue or Precatice.

104, In forming the base of this tense the parasmaipada newer admits inserted i,
but those roots which take inserted i in the futures (See p. 79.) take it also in the
ātmanepada of this tense ; as from bhā, “ to be,'' the two bases bha and bhaci।
(भूयासं Ghāyasam, &c., भविषीय bharishiya, &c.).
_

* A few roots of this kind optionally follow form 2. in the atm. ; as, लिह्। may be
अfछवि, अलीढा:, अलीढ, &ca and ठुह, अधुक्षि, अटुग्धा:, अटुग्ध, &c., r.91. . .
 BENEDICTIWF.-OONIDITIONAL.-INFINITIW B. 85

a, If a root end in a, this wowel is changed to e in the par.; as, from dā,de (देयासं
deyāsam, &c.), but not in the itm. (दासीय dasiya, &c.). _

b. Ifin i or u, these wowels are lengthened in the par. ; as, from chi, chā ; from hu,
h7 (chiyāsam, &c., hiiyāsam, Ac.), and changed to Guna in the ātm. (cheshija,
hoshiya). Similarly हे and वे (हूयासं, ञ्जयार्स).
c. Ifin चतृ ?’i, this vowel ischanged to Uिri in the par.,but retained in the ātm.; thus,
from वृ, the bases क्रि and कृ (क्रियासं, कृषीय) After a double consonant ri becomes
or in the par. As also before inserted i (staryāsam, starishāya from stri).
d, Ifin चमूं ?ं, this wowel is changed to ir, in both woices ; as, from तॄ the base तीर्
(tiryāsam, tirshiya) ; but before inserted i in the ātm. to ar (tarishāya or tarāshāja).
e. If in a consonant, there is no change in the par., and no change in the ātm.,
unless the root take the inserted i, when Guna is reguired ; as, from budh the
bases budh and bodhi (budhyāsam, Godhishiyu) ; from duish, the base dicish (duish
yāsam, duikshi/a). But in the par. cortain roots undergo changes analogous to
those in the 2d pret. (r. 99. d.Jr) and in the passive (r. I12. d..f). Thus, from
grall, grikytisam, Gºc. ; from pach, ucha/tisum, & c. ; from suup, supyāsam ; from gdj,
ā7a/tisdm, &’c.
It is to be remarked of this tense, that the changes of the base before the y of the
par. terminations are analogous to thosebefore the ?/ which is the Sign of neuter and
passive verbs (r. 89. l12.). Observe, more0ver, that the terminations resemble
those of the potential ofirregular primitives (p. 66.) ; the only difference being, that
in most cases a sibilant, and in some, two sibilants, are either prefixed or inserted.
Formatiom of the Base of the Comditional.
105. This tense, in its formation, lies half way between the first preterite and
the second future. It resembles the Ist pret. in prefixing the augment a to the
base, and in the latter part of its terminations : it resembles the second future in
inserting i in exactly those roots in which the future inserts i, and in the first
part of its terminations. Thus, from budh comes the base abodhi (अबोधिष्यं
abodhishyam, &c.) ; from kship, the base akshep (अक्षेप्स्यं ukshepsyum, &’c.).

IN FINITIWE MOOD.

Termination tum (cf the Latin Supine).

Formatiom 0f the base.
106. The base of the’ infinitive is identical with the base of the
first future, and where one inserts i, the other does also. Thus
from Dud/, ८odhā (बोधितुं bodhitam); from Kship kshep (क्षेमुं ksheptum),
Moreover, all the rules for the change of the final consonant of a
root before the f of the future terminations apply e५ually before
86 CAUSAL W IERBS.

the t of the infinitive. Hence, by substituting an for the final a of

the 3d pers. sing. of the Ist future, the infinitive is at once obtained.
See p. 50. Thus, ८yakta, tyaktum; prashta, prashtum (प्रष्टुं); sodia,
sodhum (सोढुं) &c. &c.

CAUSALS, OR WERBS OF THE 10rm CON.JUGATION.

I07. Every root in the language may, in theory, take what is

called a causal form ; and, moreover, practically, this is a most
useful form of the root, that may be used to give either a causal
or active sense to a primitive verb. Thus the primitive verb
८odhati, “ he knows,' becomes in the Causal बोधयति Dodhayati, “ he
causes to know,' or “ informs"; and the primitive kshub/kyati, “ he
is shaken,'' becomes kshobhayati, “ he shakes." This form, also,
may sometimes give the sense of allowing or permitting, as
/lārayati, “ he allows to take ''; ?māshayati, “ he Suffers to perish."

The Terminatioms 0f Causals.

a. These, in the conjugational tenses, are precisely those of
regular primitive verbs, p. 63. Of the non-conjugational tenses,
the second preterite necessarily conforms to the general scheme
in its terminations, inasmuch as the tense itSelf reSults from
the annexation of the 2d preterite of some one of the auxiliaries ।
as, Ghil or Kri, to a particular form of the causal base. In the
two futures, the bemedictive and conditional, the terminations are
precisely those of the general Scheme. In the third preterite
they are those of the third form (p. 8l.),
Formatiom 0f the Base of Causals.
८. The first Step in the formation of the base is the addition
of ay to the root ; and this affix is retained throughout all the
tenses, conjugational and non-conjugational, excepting only the
third preterite, and excepting the benedictive par.

Co?gjagational Temses.
c. If a root end in a vowel, Wriddhi is reguired : as, from mā,
?nai, forming, with the affix dy, the base māyay, r. 8. (pres. नाययामि
 CAUSAL WER BS. 87

nāyayāmi, &e, ; lst pret. amāyatyam, &e); from kri, the base kāray
(कारयामि kārayāmi, &e),
d. Anomalies.-Roots in d or in e, di, changeable to ā, cannot take Wriddhi, but
insert p, or Sometimes g/, between the root and the affix og/. Thus, from da, the
base dāpag/ ; from pā, “ to drink,” pāyug/ ; from hue, hurāyag/. But pā, “ to pre
serve,” inserts l (pālag/timi, & c.). The r00ts i, “ to go"; .ji, “ to conguer'; 8mi,
*to smile"; chi, “to collect”; and bhā, “ to fear"; form their bases, āpag/ ;*.jāpag/ ;
smāpag/ s chāpogy or chopag/ ; bhāpog/, ātm., or bh?shdg/, ātm., reSpectively. Hrं,
“ to be ashamed,' and ri, “ to g0," take Guna, and form their bases hrepag/ and
drpdg/.

e. If a root end in a COnSOnant and Contain the vOwel a, this

a is generally lengthened ; as, from pach, pāchay (पाचयामि, &c.) :
but not alwayS; as from gam, gamay' (गमयामि, &c.). If it contain
any other vowel, Guna takes place (unless as prohibited, r. 88. b.):
thus, from Dudh, Godhay (bodhdyāmi, &c); from srip, sarpay.
.f Anomalies.-Ruh, “ to grow,' forms ropag/ ; dush, ** to pollute,'' diishag/ ; hām,
“ to kill,'' ghātug/ ; shad, “ to perish,' shātug/ ; sphur (स्फुर्),
_N।
“ to guiver,' sphārag/ ;
sphti/ (स्फाय्), “ to increase,” sphāudg/.

JWon-conjagational Temses.
The changes of the root reguisite to form the base of the
conjugational tenses are continued in all of these, the ay only
being rejected in the 3d pret. and in the benedictive parasmai.

Second Prederite 0f Caasals.

I08. The second preterite is formed (according to r. 99. g) by
adding am to the base of the conjugational tenses, and affixing to
this the Second preterite of SOme one of the auxiliaries as, bhā
or kri ; thus, from Dudh, bodhdyām (बोधयामास bodhayāmāsa or
८odhayāmbabhāca* or bodhayānchakāra),

* Thus, from adhi, ** to go ower” or “ read,' comes adhyāpagati, **he causes to

read ” or ** teaches.' _

f Few r00ts in m lengthen the ८. Some, howewer, optionally do s0.

# It may be guestionod whether bh7 is ever found added to causals.
88 0AUSAI, W IBRBS.

T/e First and Second Fature 0f Causals.

In these tenses the inserted i is invariably assumed between
the base, as formed in the conjugational tenses, and the usual
terminations. Thus, from Dad/, bodhayi (Godhdyitāsmi, &c. ; bod/a-
yishyāmi, &c),
The Third Preterite of Causals.
109. In the formation of the base of this tense, the affix a।/ is rejected ; but any
other change that may take place in the conjugational tenses, Such as the insertion
of p or ?/, is preserved. The base is a reduplicated form of this change, and to this
reduplication the augment a is prefixed. Thus, taking the bases bodhay and.jāpog/
(caus. bases of budh, “ to know,” and.ji, “ to conguer"), and rejecting dy, we have
bodh and.jip ; and from these are formed the bases of the 8d pret., ababudh and
gjijap (स्रब्रुबुधं abibudham, &c.) अजीजपं djijapum, & c., cf the Greek pluperfect).
The rule for this reduplication is as follows:-The initial consonant of the root,
with its wowel, are reduplicated, and the reduplicated consonant follows the rules
given at r. 99. ; but the reduplication of the wowel is peculiar.
Rules.fbr the Reduplicatiom of the Wouel of the Imitial Comsomamt.
Causal bases, after rejecting dj), will end either in di/, āp, ār, or a cons0nant pre
ceded by a, ā, e, o, or ar. The usual reduplicated vowel for all these vowels except
o, is i. But u is reduplicated for o, and sometimes als0 for in, In general, this
reduplicated wowel is made long, and to compensate for this, the long wowel of the
causal base Shortened, or, ifit be Guna, changed t0 its cognate Short wowel. Thus,
the causal base māy (from mi, rejecting dg/) makes the base of the 8d pret. amºnag/
(aminajam, &c.) ; the causal base bhdu (from bhii) makes abibhat; ; the causal base
kār (from kri), achikar ; gum (from gam), djigam ; pāch (from pach), apāpach ; pā!
(from pā), apipal ; oed (from trid), ariuids oart (from urit), auiurit. But bodh।
(from budh), abibudh; and sā" (from su), asishat). Sometimes the reduplicated
vowel is only long by p0sition before two consonants, the radical wowel being still
made short ; as, shrāt) (from shru) makes ashushrat; ; drāt) (from dru), adudrao ;
Bhrāj, abibhraj. Sometimes the reduplicated vowel remains short, whilst the wowel
of the cau8al base, which must be long either by nature or p0sition, remains
unchanged. Thus, the causal base.jip (from.ji) may make gjijio ; chint, achā
chint; kalp, achikalp. In Such cases a may be reduplicated for a or ā ; as, laksh
makes alalaksh s ?/āch, dg/dg/dich s oart (from orit) abuoart, & c.f

f The following bases of the 8d preterite are formed anomalously from causal
 PASSIW B W BRBS. 89

Rules.for the Reduplication of an Imitial Pouel.

If a root begin with a vowel this wowel is not reduplicated, only coalescing with
the augment a according to the rule, p. 64. ; but the reduplicated form of the final
consonant, with the vowel i, is inserted between the augment and vowel thus
coalescing, and the final consonant. Thus the root oksh makes ichiksh p. 75. b.
(achisham, ४c) ; ar, arjih; āp, apin ; id(दैद्), aidid; al), agjih ; ridh, ardidh.
The Bemedictioe and C0mditiomal 0f Cau8als.
110. The base of these tenses does not differ from that of the non-conjugational
tenses ; dy is retained, and after it the inserted i invariably aSSumed ; excepting in
the benedictive paras., where both ay and i are rejected. Thus, from budh, the bases
bodh, bodhdji, abodhag/i (bodhāyāsam, &c. ; bodhdyishi/d, Ac. ; abodhdg/iंliyam, &c.),

PASSIWE WERBS.

Every root in the language may take a passive form. It is

º form, however, little used, except in the 3d person sing. and
plural of the present and imperative ; for although a passive
construction is exceedingly common in Sanscrit syntax, yet almost
all the tenses of the passive verb are expressed by participles.
Our reasons for denominating the passive a distinct derivative
from the root rather than a voice of the primitive, and for
considering that the 4th conjugation of primitives results from
the occasional assumption of a parasmaipada form* by this passive
verb, have been already given" (see pp. 58. 62.),
I11. Passive verbs are conjugated with the regular ātmanepada

bases, Gºpiyy from pā/ (pā, “ to drink”); atishthip from stkāp (sthā, “ to staud") ;
odhydjigap from odhyāp (i, “ to go,” with adhi) ; djighrip from ghrāp.
* The 4th conjugation can hardly be said to possess an ātmanepada ; or if sox
then its atmanepada is identical with the passive. And it seems probable that those
ātmanepada verbs, Such as pad, “ to go,” and badh, “ to know," which are placed
omder the 4th conjugation, are in reality passive verbs; at any rate, the forms given
for their 8d preterites (opādi, abodhi) can only bolong to passives.
* That the passive does occasionally take the terminations of the parasmaipada
is corroborated by Bopp, who gives several instances ; as, chhidjet for ch"idye’6-
*, *

Nal. xiv. 6. ; mokshgfasi for mokshyase, “ thou shalt be liberatedi. Other instances,
may be found in Westergaard ; as, ritiyati for oidyttte.
N
90 PASSIWE W BRBS.

inflections ; that is, in the conjugational tenses they conform to

the scheme for the ātm. at p. 03., and in the non-conjugational
tenses to the general Schemes at p. 73., p. 8I., and p. 84.
In the third preterite they take the first two forms (p. 81.)
according as the root may admit the inserted i or not ; but

reguire that, in the 3d pers. sing. of both forms, the termination

be invariably i (ड्) in place of ishta and sta.
Cofijagational Temses.
112. In the formation of these the passive verb is to be treated
like a regular primitive of the 4th conjugation ; that is, in general
the only change made in the root is the affixing of y; but before
this affix Certain changes of a final vowel may take place, Some
of which are analogous to those of the 4th conj. A final a, e,
ai, or o are changed to ?: as, from da, the base dāy (3d Sing.
दीयते); so also dhā, pā, stha, hā, mā ; so also gai, “ to sing," (giy),
a. If in i or u, or a semi-vowel preceded by i or a, these vowels
are lengthened : as, from ji, jiy ; from had, hāy ; from dio, dity.
0. If in ऋ?i, this vowel becomes f ri; as, from कृ, the base kriy
(क्रियते); but ar, if two consonants precede ; as from स्मृ smari, smary,
c. If in चसृ ??, this vowel becomes ºr : as, from कृ krं, “ to scatter,'
/ंāry (कीय्यैते, &c.). But from prā, pāry.
d. Roots ending in two consomants, of which the first is a naSal,
usually reject the naSal : aS, from bamdh, bad// ; from stambh,
stab// ; from saij (सन्), saiy, From शास् comes शिष्य् (p. 70, e),
e. Jam, Kham, and tam, may optionally reject the final nasal, but
the a is then lengthened : as, from jam, jay or jajay (जायते or जन्यते),
.f From cac/, cad, pdp, cas, Siodp, come the bases achy, ady, up/,
ushy, 8apy : from grah, prac//, and gyadh, the bases griky (गृह्यते, &c.)
pric///, cid// : from /dj, hice, ce, come iy, hiy, āy.
Non-cortjagational Temses.-Second Preteride 0f Passioes.
The base of this tense in the passive verb is identical with
that of all primitive verbs. The bases, therefore, as formed at
p. 74., will serve egually well for the 2d preterite of the passive,
provided only that they be restricted to the ātmanepada inflection.
The First and Second Fature 0f Passioes.
113. In these and the remaining tenses no variation can occur
 PASSIWE WBRBS. 9I

from the bases of the Same tenses in the primitive, unless the
root end in a vowel. In that case the insertion of a may take
place in the passive, although prohibited in the primitive, provided
the final vowel of the root be first changed to its Wriddhi sub
Stitute. Thus, from chā, to gather," may come the base of the
Ist and 2d fut. pass. chāyi (chāyitāhe, &c., chāyis//e, &c.), although
the base of the same tenses in the primitive is che (cherāhe, &c.,
cheskye, &c.). Similarly from hu and Kri may come hāci and Karā
(hācitāhe, kāritāhe), although the bases in the primitive are ho and
76ar. In like manner i may be inserted when the root ends in
long ā, provided that, instead of a change to Wriddhi (which is
impossible), / be interposed between the final a and inserted i.
Thus, from da, “ to give," may come the base of the fut. pass.
dāyi (dāyitāhe, &c.), although the base of the same tenses in the
primitive is dā (datāhe, &c.). But in all these cases it is per
mitted to take the base of the primitive for that of the passive,
and chetāhe or chāyitāhe may egually stand for the lst fut. pass.*
In the case of roots ending in consonants, the base of the two
futures in the passive will be identical with that of the same
tenses in the primitive," the inflection being that of the ātm.
'The Third Preterite of Passices.
I14. In this tense, also, variation from the primitive may occur when the r00t
ends in a vowel. For in that case the insertion ofi may take place, although for
bidden in the primitive, provided the final of the root be changed to Wriddhi.
Thus, from chi may come the base of the 8d pret. pass, achdyi (achājishi, &c.,form I.
p. 81.) although the base in the ātm. of the primitive is ache (acheshi, &c., form 2.).
So also, from hu and kri may come dhāti and akāri (ahātishi, akārishi, form I.),
although the bases in the ātm. of the primitive are dho and akri (alloshi, akrishi,
form 2.). Again, i may be inserted when the r00t ends in long d, prowided that /
be interposed between final a and inserted i. Thus, from da may come addiyi
(adāyighi, &c.), although the base in the ātm. of the primitive is adi (adishi, &c.)-

* This explanation of the passive, although at variance with that of Wilkins and
Bopp, rests on the authority of Pānini (6.4. 62.), and the Siddhānta kaumudi.
f The root; दृश , howewer, in the passive, may be दर्शिताहे, दशेिष्ये, as well as
द्रष्टाहे, द्रध्ये ; and हन् may be घानिताहे, घानिष्ये, as well as हन्ताहे, हनिष्ये; and
यह् may be याहिताहे, माहिष्ये, as well as महीताहे, यहीष्ये.
92 PASSIWE WERBS.

But in all these cases it is permitted to take the base of the primitive for that of the
passive (so that the passive ofchi may be either achāyishi or acheshi), except in the
8d pers.sing. where the terminations ishta and sta being rejected, the base, as formed
by Wriddhi and the inserted i, must always stand alone ; thus, achāyi, “it was
gathered''; ahāri, “ it was sacrificed''; akāri, **it was done"; adāyi, “ it was.given."
If the root end in a consonant, the base of the 8d pret. pass. will always be
identical with that of the 8d pret. ātm.of the primitive, except in the 8d pers. sing.,
where ? (ड्) being substituted for the terminations ishta of the Ist form and sta of

the 2d form, invariably reguires before it the lengthening of a medial a, and the
Guna of any other medial wowel.* Hence, from tam, the form of the Ist, 2d, and
8d sing. 8d pret. will be atanishi, atamishthāh, atāni ; from kship, akshipsi, akship
thāh, akshepi ; from trid, apedighi, acedighthāh, atedi. This 8d pers, Sing. of the
8d pret. passive is not unfreguently found, even in the simplest writings.
The Bemedictitle and Comditiomal of Passines.
In these tenses the same variation is permitted in the case of roots ending in
wowels as in the last; that is, the insertion of i is allowed, prowided that, before it,
Wriddhi take place in a final wowel capable of such a change, and / be interposed
after final G. Thus, from chi may come the bases chāyi and achāyi (chāyishāga,
adhāyishg/e) ; from hu, hātri and ahaui; from kri, kāri and akāri ; from da, dāyi
and adtiyi. But cheshiya, acheghge, hoshiya, ahoshye, &c., the forms belonging to
the atm. of the primitive, are egually admissible in the passive.
Passice Infinitioe Mood.
There is no passive infinitive mood in Sanscrit distinct in form from the active.
But although the affix tum has generally an active, it is capable of a passive sense,
when.joined with certain verbs, ospecially with shak, “ to be able:" In the Hitopa
desha it is also used passively, in connection with the participles arabdha and mirāpita.
Passice Werbs.from Causal Bases.
I15. In forming a passive verb from a causal base, the affix ay is rejected, but the
other changes of the root are retained. Thus, from the causal base pātag/ (root pat,
“ to fall') is formed the passive causal base pāti/ (pātye, “ I am caused to fall''); so
also, from sthāpaj/ (sthā, “ to stand"), sthāpg/ (sthāpg/e, “ I am made to stand ");
from pathay (path, “ to read"), pathy (pathye, “ I am taught to read '') from
ज्ञपय् (ज्ञा “ to know"), ज्ञप्य् (ज्ञप्पे “ I am caused to know.")

* This rests on the authority of Panini, the Siddhānta kaumudi, and the Bhatti
kāvya (15. 64, 65.).
 eis
to
passing
iBefore
the
full
pin
cof
each
under
sverbs
a
here
oanxynopsis
rfhjtliuebgciatuiloanr,Ist,
inflection, ;
given
roots,
nine
forms
passive
3dly,
causal;
2dly,
primitive;
the
of cवpoint
lst
the
of दo?trit,
tनबुध्
“
know,''nिशत्।
jिद्
ृत्
ugoao
tdance,''
“
dis/,
6th
out,''
4th badh,
apid, tion break,"
“हacrh;
hu,
sknow,”
chi,
चि
3d;
t
८/ia,
भिद्
5th;
tgather,”
T
the
of
“
;
2d
the
of
tan,obase,
iofoiुce," purify,"
tतन्
“
pā,
पू
and
8th;
stretch,"
in tconjuhe
inflection
exhibited
is
page
this
In
9th.
the
of ;
regular
called
have
we
primitives
those
of
tenses
throughout
same
the
always
is
whichgationaIn
the nations.base,
talermill
of
left
to
being
persons,
in
inflection
exhibited
is
this,
follow
which
pages
two cornijmuhe
pthe
those
of
ttenses
;
irregular
called
have
we
different
in
varies
which giatiovneaslis
tpeoiersons,
aboue
dbeing
all
this,
cAfter
of
which।
pages
the
in
and
away,
done
rnsmjtiungatcitoinosn.and
iSornucceed,
roots
pnine
of
tenses
passive,
causal
the
in -ifcomlniejutcgaitvioena,nl t";
the
withminationsDodhe,
united
be
to
is
base
The
kOBs.
I
“
bodhāmi,
par.
pres.
pers.
lst
thus,
sing.
2d
ernow tomdhou
hbodhosi,
“
bodhuti,
sing.
3d
";
bknowest
dual,
lst
'';
Aknows
So
&c.
bodhase,
ahnāetepyadha,
।
ID,
S.
P.
D.
S,
P.
D.
S.
TO. lauahi।
a|
(
Budh|bodh
earahe
| uah
ud.
dbodh
I.
|
b0dh
I.
etrahi।
bodh
1.
atyahoti।
ud Zmdhā eta
emahā
ema
amahe
āmnh
Zmudhoi।
āmd _ dtd
|
odhucam
edhucam
adhuce
athd
adhubum
uto
।
PAR.
BASB.
R00T.
PAR..
BASE.
1BASTE.
ATM.
ATMT.
ATIM_
AT1M.
PA.R._
1BASTE_ eyāthām
)etam
mrity
4.
4mrit/
a|
(
dnrity
ethe
athal
|mrity)
Nrit
ethām
\atam
tam
. eram
eyuh
dmte
dmti
dmtām
dmtu
dmtd
dm
|
d(Itu
|
=
dtoः
dtāmt
et
dte
dti
etd d।
| eg/ātām
etām
dish।
6.
6dish
|
|dish
aDish
(
odish
ete
etām
tah
tām
.
|
PRETERITE.
Ist POTENTIAL.
PRESTENT.
E.
PERATIV
IM
di।
āni
e
āmā।eh
eyd
eydm
69
017/] ethāh।
।
athāh
dh
dsi
dse
0,S100,
6।, dance,”
I
“
mritgami,
amrityam,
also
So
abodhāto,
abodhal,
abodhah,
abodham,
pret.
Ist
&c.
mrityasi,
8

PRIMITIWES,
IRREGUIAR
AND
REGULAR
BASE
THE
OF
INFLECTION

CON.JU0%ATI0NS,
NINB
FIRST
THE
0F
WERBS
0R

exhibited,
is
order.
regular
in
other,
the
below
one
३
|8.
|ajuhu'
|५juhu
|djuhu chghiimnauttnlypau|gochc,aincm0uhlंjaichdniun”, |abhimat
u|a|achinu
uchinu
|achim0
c5.
0hi।
djuhat)|djuh |ajuhachintu
|djuha८
|djuho
|djuh0
djuhat)
|djuhto
|djuhu
|ojuhat
djuhto |aub7.
ha।inbtW|mahdbibnadhi|adnbnhi|ambdthitbnadh|tulibahnhidtiatamu
abhimt
|abhimd
Bhid n|atanu
dorm1८tdma८tdm0
2—–~2
~—~~—~ऽ
x_A–~-—२
–

|ra
|ria 7ia
oaxid
|
arid
|arid
|apit
१yād
१xid
id
t;id
१xid
१;i८
*
१ped
१yā८
|8.|chimu'
liuhu
१;ā८
?;ef
]7ः//
2.
[juhu
|juhu
iuhu
|juhu)
juhu
|juha
[juht८
juh0
.juh0
Ha/
himu |bhind
||chimu!
|८hima८
|८himu
|chimu
|chima८
|chimo
cCchim0
|himu”
hinto
Chā
5. D7.
|bhimat
bbhimad
|
|८)hint
||bhind
|bhimd
|bhimt
|bhim८
|bhānt
|८)hind
Bhid
himat
hind ८|tnma८
t८drato
|
|fotratu
|tdma८
tdma८
|tamu
tdmu!
t||
tdm0
tum0
८dm0
Tor??
8.
draa८
otma८
ama८
dmu;
dmat
dmtp
amu
Pa
9.
|pun
pum
|pun?
|pum
|pum?
|pumā
pumā gsi।
te
ahehe
mayahe
|
āte
ate
dhule
tah)
thah
odh
Termina-
dithe
tā
?mā
e
||
dmti
tha
?mdh |agia
|arid
'acid
ddayād
|
|acid
duit
|darid
|dapid
dapid
atcid
apit
axit
apid
|dipet
doed
dapit
7?d
2.
८??e८
abit
Huं |atunu'
|atam1८
|atamu
|dtdm0
dtamtut;
TVr?a
d8.
|dtumat
t|dtdmu
d
| |arin
"puni
|ormi
|9.
|dpum?
|dpumā
opumā
|apum
|apum?
|opumā
dpum
|dpum
|dpumi
dpum?
P?dpum |
mtā
|
ātām
dithām
tpahi
ata
dhuram
Termina-
ahi
h।
t८
to7???
८d?7a
८a
to८
hāh
;८
???८
0[???
८17?
tenow”;
the
with
united
be
to
is
base
The
kOPs.
I
“
redmi,
pres.
pers.
thus,
&०.,
riduah,
dual
1st
oetti,
8d
retsi,
sing.
2d
rminations
gather,"
chinomi,
also,
So
Ar.
doidud,
aret,
aaredam,
;
४c.
pchinoshi,
I
“
pumāmi,
am).
with
(apunā
apunām
pret.
Ist
";urify
nd
R_
PILU
TDUAL
IDUAIL
SING.
PI,UR.

APTAMRASNMEAPIAPIDA.

{ in8.5.8.
7.
2.
in
the
of
tions
8.

PRETERITE.
FIRST
PRESENTP
shi
IPRESBNT
८ati।
862 ।
{ 8.
in
omit.
the
of
tions
7.
2.
in
PRET.
Ist.
ul।
 ॐ
hāma८ |८himd
D7.
|
|bhāmd
|bhānd
bhānd
|८/hind
|८)hānd
-|८/himd
|८)hind
|blind
bhind
||
|८/himd
|bhind
|८)himd
himd ं; |bhimat
|bhind
|bhāmad
bhimd
|bhimad
|bhimt
|bhimd
bhiānmad|}bhinmdt८ Tama
nmatg;)|"c|hcinmtagu८ Bhād
7. ualon the
Aoiduia,
t*
“
oid,
root
pret.
2d
of
form
danomalous
;
oeda
oettha,
oeda,
Sing.
Thus,
present.
the
for
used
Sometimes
is
know,'' praslur.
;
oidatuh
Euidathuh,
Prof
Gr.
Comp.
Bopp,
by
noticed
(as
Cf.
oiduh.
oida,
tcidma,
root
from
Foiaa
or
of)a
Greek
ntswlaitciko'ns)
;
axid
tyād
१xid
oid
1xid
ujid
|axid
?yād
7?d
2.
tpid
।xid
?*ād
Uid
juhu |chinuं
[iuhto
।
Hu
8.
|jultu)
|juha८
[juhu
|jultu
|juhu
ijuhu)
[7uhto |5.
,
|chinu
|chima८
chimu]
||
|china८
c|chint८
|
|chimu”
|chinu)
|chimu
|chimu;
chima८
hina८
hinto
himu)
Chā Bhid d|tamtu
tdma८
|tdrat८
८dma८
८dmu”
t||
|dratu
drato
ama८
dm1८
umtU
amto
dmu
Taja
8.
tamto
८dmt८
८८८ma८
amtU
amu 9.|pum
||pura
|pun?
|pumā
|pum?
|punā
pumā
pt८m?
pum?
P?pura
|pum
pum
jpt41a Term.?i/āthām
?ā८
|
?ta
?thā/
।/८८
||
?/uh
ilātu
।/āma
?/ātām|
/ātam
āram
?dhuram
?mahā
āi/ātām|
/āca
oahā
āla
dim
atped
|oid
toed
|
Ued
0ed
|ayā८
;it
xit
1xid
7ād
2.
ayād
१xid
१yā८
?9ā८
Ued
ayid
?9etः
[juhu।
[juhu)
|juhat)
|juhau
|juhul
|juhdu
[juhu
[juhat;
[juh0
|juhu
iuhau
Hu।
3.
hchhimuj
८himat)
(|८him0
|
chinu
|chindul
|chimu
chinuः
|||chindul
5.|chimu]
|chimu;
Chā iimu 8.
ttdmtU
८d?adt)
८८1auः
८८८7at८
८८८८m८t;
८८८ra८८१;
d८drato
|
८drada?
८८८???८
||
|tdmat;
८dm८८U
tdm0
८८???८
otmt८
amu)
um1८
dmt८
|pum?
||pum
|pum
|pumā
pumā
9.
P?
atam
dhulum
|timahai
ātām
dithām
|ātyahai
tām
8huld
di।
dhā
ddimā
|
tdima
tum
āud
td
८८7a८८८
८a८
im८८"*
_

piresent
a
used
sFia,
tor0..
oiddhā
and
irre,
Uittha
tºuey,
with
oidmal
also
Cf.
gnification.

'ं
9.
7.
2.
in
10\tions
8. the
of

POTENTIAI), IMPERATIWE.
८८८t८
in
omit.
8000,

3/
POTENTIAI,
%/
g/
3/

IMPERATrv8
5B .

Termina-
_
_
_
 $

FUTURB
Ist . FUTURB
2d .
B.
PRETIER
SECONDIT

sing.
p.
3d PI..
and ATM_
PAIR_
PAR.
sing.
p.
lst sing.
p.
2d DUAI, ATM. _ATM_
PAR.

८)a८b0a/% 0a८bod/। ८)a८८)a८d/% a/a

daswai
५92/?|
!. ८)od/ः?
l.
8/ं/e
8/ं/ām ā
८. )a८८)od/ 62
|d
1pātped १;iced १yātped 1?iapād |pedi
"2.क्रॊs;
८7se
skyase
|shyas
r*e’ः i
?//%d
ishe
..ju/tāt) .ju/lab .ju/tāt; .juhat; /ंo
3.
८7
77
|shyat
"shyate
*० i
८" 2

?a८?adr८ ??८८?2८८?*८ ?2d72८?*८ |...,

?*adrtrit ?āsipah
dasma/
******| e shyāra
s//apa
** ****| hhe
āga/%e
chichāy /c/tich८ chic/āy )//a/,
a०/?c"y ?asāahe
\tāstha
०*/e / ४/yeth
०)shyat
**e eha/
ād/ie
dides/ dides/% dides/ fa८/
,|didis/ rāraa
|/araa
ºe*/
"ः &//ete
“|shyar
"e* ah
८7/e
८)ā9/ed ८)iU/ied ८)ā0/1ed ८)i0/2?d tasmah
asmahe
|d५”/e’ ४//am /
/yamaahe
s५|*/e’
āma ima/ie
८• ८८07?? te?? ८ddं7?? ८e?? ॐd/ice astha
*dad//ce
|d**** 8//adh
s*|****/yathaice
0/
1)upāt; pupaU jpºpāt; , %
|P५jp५t" arah।
ara/%
|Pºp#
/9- pati।
9.
8/k/dm/
8/k/amatie
2?*e

desh)
of
s/
The
OBS. ter
the
८//ःed
After
OBS.
thus,
termin
the
with
united
is
base
The
OBS. ations
dual, (tinitial
the
त्) s
change &e.
syāmi,
be
will
minations
I;bubodh
d,
st idha
3Dubodh
2;८abodh
Sing.
lst aa
tto
termin
the
of ations suc
the
all
in
applie
This s
&c.
८)u0a८d/ंica, &c.
Dubaddh
Gubadh
Atm, e, ishe, When
vary.
will
bases
the
sing.
2d
of d.
9l.
r.
(द्), tenses.
ceeding
termin
the
is
tha ation
P
RTH
IR TD
ETERITE_
FORM
l.
FORM
2.
FORM
3.
PAR.
ATM_
1PAR,_
ATM.
1PAR__A"M.
1.
८abodh।
isham
ishā
ahat८
gham
ºhi }
ā८772
2.
dued
ah।
ightha/
ātm.
aho
|sghthāh
hil।
ah
athāh.
chai
6.4.
dmart
ishta
1८
;aa8hta
|adiksh
;
&hāt
८८to८
5
##
7.ishud
ishurahā
|कabhid
ॆoa
&humahā
shtpa dtāra
diudhā
}#
#
ātm.
aan
)**“
ishāthā
ghtam
u,ंंm
ghāthāfollows
८atam m
āthdima
ishtam
ishātām
shātāmhus,
|st;ātm.
htām
form
in
2.
|atām
ditām
#'#si,
'g'ं-|
काळ
काङ्गः
ishma
ishmahā
the
ātm.
|d
tha/), ima
dimahā
iºnabhitta,
{o• paU _

ishta
idhuldm
8hta
dhuram
tm.
apao
५६८bhitsuc
'h'
d८d ahi,&c.,
८dh,0001701
) shuh
ishata
83.
p.
ig.
ंhuh
'shata
dmta
८73

BENEDIOTIWE.
1DITIONA
CON
FINITIW
IN IL_
E.
1*AR_
A"M_
"PAR_
A"M.
८)0d/2?
l.1.
budhN
gāsam
DodhiºN
&ltāya
८abodhi
1.
8Nhgyam
shāye
g2.
|oidāh।
soediः
, uedi
hishthā
‘ U603
2. h
dapedi।
2.
&hyah
shyathti h
8.3.
/ं0
?|ht८
yāt
ho
&hāshta
८aho
8.
&hāyu!
8hydta
s4.4.
??d*dā
gmrit
।।८a८???
Or
|marti
amarti
4.
ghyāoah?Uahā
ghyāoah
dsura ā
tam5.
chā
)gāstam
after
8/।, 5.
che
s)che
८che
5.
*&shyatam
lºgyethā
hāyāsthmāma
6.
dish
|gyāsta
dik
8
6.
r|desh
9l.
॥d. hāyāstā
.
ade/ं
6.
&hgatā
ghgetām mm m
7.
/|bhid
sbhit
&|7. āsma
7.
bhef
himahā
८abhet
&hgdmah
hgāmai।
8.tam
/āsta
8tami
?|८d???
8.
atami
&|8. hāyata
shgadhu
hādhularam m
9.
pi।
9.āsuh
pabi
s/hāram
apatyi
8“pabi।
2hāyum
8hyamta
5।।
 CONJ
10th
THE
OF
WERB UGAT
S
OR ALS,
CAUS
*2
ION.
OF
BASE
THE
FILEC
IN TION
TIWE_
IMPETRAIAL,
POTENT
PRETER
PHERST ITE_
ATM.
PAR.
PRE8BN T. ATM.
PAR._
ATM.
PAR.
ag
क???
"od/dy
ala, ATM.
PAR.
",८abod/i N
dy
1. Ieya
क???eyam
•od/6्y)
a?•Godhdy
|a/)
2. |2.
a/%ढ/ oeddy
a//,a/%
|a/% ं,
ase
|as apeddy
2.edity ८87270८
r•reday
arā//a
|ara
/
*
/idogy
3.
aa
|a?
6/ārdy
3.|2; 7rdy
are
|aAg
/•ेitºdy e८८८
āpa/a?
*८rtdy
4-epa/ā
(c**क,क।GrºGrº oa
Grºdy
oa/%ā
ca dy|āca
4-
āpa/he pa/%
?6"८८%/
P.adhawa
?|a•)aram
०/EPºy
gyādhām
“)eram
/arax)a
cWiody
८**7Pºy
*ethe a
araja )a//a/,
hāptiy
c•e//a}}a rām
"~～es
|aām
des/dy
0.
erāya
a/ळ}}a
Gdes/6
0.
"dy|a
e/e ra/%
|ad•eyatāmes/63/9|
axma/)a
e7a7?
५/eda
7.
क7a7ः ः
|a}/aa
y|ama
५/e५५yºylā7
a/ted a
|āma/
५amahe
• /edं/ ad//ga wa
|ada
edhipay
*%*
|e*
adhipa**५y
ra
7*५y
ra
a|‘****५y
9- a
ya
ajarawa adhipe
% dha
|a• 7*6}/
Janda
Pºpºy
eraja
)ePººy
9.9. yu/
a;ara
a)6PGody
am/e
Ja%Ai
P 9.ja
• 7udy

RE,
F
D UTU
SBCON
FUTURE .
FIRST
RETERI TE.
P
D
SE00N ATM.
PAR.
ATM.
1PAR.
"04/्y
",s/ye ATM.
PAR.
ः)४//a mā
rāhe
Pasmā
"od/6y
",
,
bodhdy
I. i)
āmās)
62
2.bedayā
2.
8/k/dse
्कa;
8/k/asi
|?oedayi
gs/ंa
|?//a
८7se mās
oeddyā
2.
s/wave
||४/yar
/ala िं#"yं
|क/lācayi
3.
hārayā
3.* 17
inās
martayi
(r4.
*Grºdy
4. ashpah
|8/ं/āta
8/ं/ācd
?9a/)aंa /te
।?tāsicah
।e
i/।
ndridy
4. āmās
)s/iyat
/?“yi
“*४//eth
fasāthe
/āstha
c*/āp4y?
क#he
)a/%a/%
eha/
/%
c/tāpd
5. yāmās
es"dyf
º४//ara
?araa
fढ?aes"6्yi
8/iyete
fºtāraa
|aa,/
/ ||
āmās
deshdy
0.
५****y
7.४//ळ7a
tāsmah
|t५/eddy
7.
i/;aa/,a
7a
e
#*|ghyā ma/
|}}}aa
asma/%yāmās
9/tedd
7.
||४/iya
*ghyddh “y*
radhige
|?tāndy*
ig/;pa
|a
ipe
tha
astha nās
tāndyā
8.8.
9. pāpayā
?ara}
?J
Pºpayi
8/kyamt
8/}}/dmti
), ।e
ara/% āmās
,)pārdy
9.ire
।
 -ता
काम्,
INFINITIWE,
,cos"ं"
BENEDI0TIWE,
1.atabadhN
}"
*ौ7a
?"
#
#
?ं,a
1. M.
abodhayi।
bodhayi
l. 1.
aंa 2.
aं2yं
2.
ānānihān
bed
2.
athāh।
uh।
uedagyi
shyah
s/ं/athā/।
gāh
ueddyā
2.
?ंa५7t/taU
3.
,
8. ;
dhāpay#
्,a
|hiण
'|,ङ्गa
|ata_
haudāyā
8/gata
/lāgdyā
3.
# 4. 4.
ल77ळ्नाः
angryं
4.
āapahā
ndrt
ङ्क-
|,asana
Tibd
httrttiyi
8ha/tio८८
?mardayā
4.
||:
;)ं”
|
%ं)an' ं;)ं”
##||ं#'|ं” ं”
ं;
ं
'～~।
ºn desh)
6.
gºः
garः_
gyāstām
# 6.dshāyāstām
eshdyā
0?bhād
## "ed
ºgः 7.
abhedaayā
āma
imahā
7.
8hāyamd
s/ं/āma/ti।
gyāsma
#।८/iedayi।
7.8hāmahā_

tin
ghyataddhulam
8.
shyadhucam
?/tista
shādhucam
’jःºny
tāmayā
8.
८upipdU
9.
2/9.dmta
piण
āsaa
Pºwdyf
*/*
supāuagyi
2 hyam
??
8//amta
shiran।
pāodyā
9.

INIRI,ECTION
OR
THE
BASE
0F
PASSIWES.
"_

PRESBNT.
FIRST
PRETERITE.
POTENTIAL_
ERATIW1E_
IMP
SECON
D
P RETERITE.
1•
abud/k/)
Gadd/ं/)
८a८d//
1..
bud/ं7ी
1.
aI,;
bubaddh
|2l. eं/d
Goidy
2.
|a?7a/
|ar7a/
oidyse
a|tººdy
sica
apitpād
2.
ishe
d/ki//
9-
|a/े//
3. re
/tii/
|ara
/Wy
a
|a rāma
3..ju/tut
_

ā|4.?ंं?i//
ditri4/
।firiं/
epa/%;
****/
??tarkrit
।4. pa/)a
pahā
ca/।aā
aa/)a
c"/ dc/ंy
5.
)८//a
)aaja;a
)ayādhā//a
c/ंy
)ethā7a
5.c/tic/ky
)क5.
?,a
adis/y
6.
dis/k/
|aुक;a
disky
|ayāaWara
0.adis/}/
|0.
didis/
6.
|ā pā,a
a
abhidy
7.
|ङ्ग7ः_
Ohidy ळ9/idy
|ā7a?कं
a7.
7. ु,aahe
xma/%ā
|८/tidy
|)i)/kid ं,aaja
a८/67.9
|3. ºdhiy
le{*a/%9a/%
dhipe
d?ंy
dhipama
8.
%***y
dh;pa;a
de??
8.
ād/?ge
6PWy
9.
Ja???a
)apiy
???e
Jeraja
PWy
Da;aaya
puptatº
9.
J
} a

३3
 PASSI
OR
BASB
THE
FILEO
IN WES.
TION
=
P
D
IR
THRETERITE_
RE.
FUTU
FIRST FUTURE
SEOOND.
sing
pers.
3d
८od/%?
l.
Uodhā
l.
s/%/e
/ं7/le
abodh
abodhā
1.
apedi।
2.
ayedi।
2.
8/ं/ase &hi।
८7Se *man
ated
auedi।
2.
|ho
or
s/āri//aa
ā
,|ho
or
hāpi
8.3.
*|ahao
aho
or
ahāayi
8.
?mdrfi
4.
8/yāca
..
4?adrfi।
।८7879ahhee ं
che
or
c/tāyā
5.
)?āsāA
c/te
or
8/ं/et/B
c/2yi
5. %a
e ५*५”’
amarti।
shapahā
4.

d)|a,
9l.
(r.
desh
6.de/% aa
6.
8/ं/ete
*fic"/
ache
or
āahām
dchdayi
5.
--- “
a
*
_ _____ ८)/ºe/
7.
8/ं/āma
b/e/
7. /te *
८dik:
6.
dāsma/he
8.
da??? ifoe
87%/ad/
fa?aā
8. ५//ed
shmahi
८abhi८*
7.
dād/17ge
s//ant
par)
or
pāri
9.
JAतः,a/
pati
or
pāti e,
9. ºn
utāmं
८utamā
8.

apaoi
or
dptiu)
aptici
9.
&hata

OONTDITIONAL_
BENEDICTIWE,
ab0dhā
ter
the
of
sh
initial
ttAfter
BS.
O*he
ंhg/e
८bodhā
&hiya the
In
s.
form
dental
takes
minations
uuedi।
&hgathāh
uedi। āh।
&hāghth sibilant
the
reject
abhit
and
adik
aho
pret.,
8d
or
ahāui
,#.,a,
॰ho-
shyata
|or
"doi *abhid
and
adig
become
shthah,
from
dra८८?”tiः
&hāyātra
?adrtā hā adikthā
shiurahā adikshi,
Thus,
dhuram.
before h,
or
ache
८chāyi
&hgethā
che
or
chāyi m adiksh āthām,
adikshāa/ti,
adikshto
&hāyāsthām adeshi,
adek
8hgetām
dik:
adikshat
adigdhu
adikshma.
ahi,
tām, cam,
8hāyāst ām
*
abhct abhitsu
abhedi,
abhittha
abhitsi,
And ca /),
shyāma
*
bhiं hā
&ltāmahā
abhitsm
abhitsāt
abhitsā
hi, ahā
āna,
thām,
atamā ram
8hyadhu
tami।
shidhul am
gh,ana
upati/
dpirior e.),
82.
(p.
abhitsa acam,
abhiddhta
?,ः,an
pati)
or
ptioi
 ( I0l )
AUxILIARW WERBS.

116. There are three auxiliary verbs of constant occurrence :

as, “ to be ''; Krā, “ to do '; and bhā, “ to become.' The first
belongs to the 2d conjugation, the second to the 8th, and the
third to the lst. The first two, however, are too irregular to be
placed under any conjugation, and their inflection is therefore
exhibited here. The third, bhii, will follow in its proper place at
the head of the examples under the Ist conjugation.
Root सस् as, “ to be.'

(R. 92. d. Cf. the Latin sum, es, est, and the Greek Guui, doroi, dorrt.)
Presemt.-“ I am.'' First Preferite.-** I was.''

PTERS. SING. DUAL. "LURA1_ SING. IDUAIA. TP",URAIL_

Ist, अस्मि asmi, ख: stoa/), स्मः 8ma/ः. अ'ासं āsam, स्रास्ब āsupa, अास्म āsma.
2d, असि asi, स्यः sthah, स्य stha. स्रासीः āsih, स्रास्तं" astam, स्रास्त āsta.
3d, अस्ति asti, स्तः sta/), सन्ति samti. स्रासीत् āsit, स्रास्तां astām, स्रासन् āsan.
Potemtial.-“ I may be,'' &c. Jmperatice.-“ Let me be.'

स्याँ syām, स्याव syāca, स्याम syāma. | असानि asāni, स्रसाव asāca, स्रखाम asāma.
स्या: syāh, स्यातं syātam, स्यात syāta. | एधि edhi, स्तं stam, स्त std.

स्यात् श्giit, स्यातां &/ātām, स्युः syu/.. स्रस्तु astu, स्तां stām, सन्तु santu.

Second Preterite.*-“ I was,' &c.

अास disd, अ'ासिव āsica, स्रासिम asima.
स्रासिय asitha, स्रासयुः āsathuh, च्छ्वास āsa.

चवास āsa, अ'ासतः āsatuh, स्रासुः āsuh.

_

*) Cf. ?trroo, #orrm), and pl. ?oraew, ?wre.

* This tense is never found by itself but is of great use in
forming the 2d pret. of causals, &c., see p. 77. 7. and r. l08.

Root कृ Kri. Infin. कर्त्तुं kartam, “ to do " (r. 96.).

PARASMAIPADA.

Presemt Temse.-** I do.''

करोमि karomi, कुवैः।' kurua/), कुमैः ku/rma/%.

करोषि" karoghi, कुरूय: kurutha/), कुरूय kurutha.
करोति karoti, कुरूत: kuruta/, कुवॆति’ kurudrati.
 102 AUKILIARW WERBS.

First Preterite.–“ I was doing," &c.

अकर्व' akaratam, स्रकुट्टै dkurba, चकुम्मै akurna.
स्रक्रो: akaroh, अकुरूर्तं akurutam, अकुरूत ८ukuruta.
अकरोत् akarot, स्रकुरूतां akurutam, चकुचैन् ukuruam.
Potemtial.-* I may do," &c.

कुप्यैीं *ºryi/; कुग्यैाव *युः कुर्य्यैाम ?ं

कुय्यैा: kuryā/।, कुर्य्यैर्तिं kuryātam, कुय्यैात kuryāta.
कुर्य्यैात् kuryāt, कुर्य्यैीतां kuryātām, कुर्मुः kuryuh.
Jmperatipe.-“ Let me do,’ &c.
करवाणि' karatāni, कण्वाव karutyā0a, करवाम karaayāma.
कुरू' kuru, कुरूर्तं kurutam, कुरूत kuruta.
करोतु karotu, कुरूतां kurutam, कुवॆन्तु ku?rayamtu.
Second Preterite.-** I did.”

चका" chakāru, चकृव" chakriba, चकृम chakrima.

चकयै chakartha, चक्रयु: chakruthuh, चक्र chakrd.
चकार dhakāru, चक्रतुः chukrutuh, चक्रुः chakru/～.

First Future.-** I will do.’’

कर्त्तेस्मि' kartasmi, कर्त्रास्वः kartāsurah, कर्त्रास्म: kartāsmah.

कर्ह्रासि kartāsi, कर्त्ते'ास्य: kartāsthah, क्वॆास्य kartāstha.
कर्त्रा kartā, क्लॆारी kartārau, कर्त्तेीार: kartārah.

Second Future.-“ I shall d0.”

करिष्यामि" karighyāmi, करिष्यावः karishgāoah, करिष्याम: kariskyāmah.

करिष्यसि karighyasi, करिष्ययः karighgathah, करिष्यय karishgatha.
करिष्यति harishgati, करिष्यतः karishyatah, करिष्यन्ति karishyanti.
Third Preferife.-‘# I did.’’
अकार्षॆ' akārsham, स्रकाष्वै akārshaca, अकार्षमे akārghma.
अकार्षीः akārshā/।, अकार्ष्ट akārshtam, अकार्ष्ट akārshta.
अकार्षीत्। akārshāt, अकार्ष्टाँ akārghtām, अकार्षुः akār8hu/।.

The other tenses are, bemed. क्रियासॆ", क्रिया:, fक्रयात्, &c., cond.
अकरिष्यं", अकरिष्य:, अकरिष्यत्, &c.
 AUxILIAIRW WERBS. 103

*) r. 80. ") See p. 89. note. *) r. 7. ) r. 10. f. e) r. 21. ') The

eighth conjugation rejects the hi of the imperative, in conformity with the fifth
conjugation, Ir. 94. 8) p. 75. b. ") See the scheme for the 2d pret. p.78.
") r. 7. !) p. 79..fः *) p. 79. c. ') p.82.Jः ") p.85. c. ") r.105.

ATMANEPADA.

Presemat Temse.

कुवॆ" katrape, कुचैहे kuruahe, कुमैहे kurmahe.

कुरूषे b kurughe,
कुरूध्वे #adrudhmue.
कुवॆाये kurtyāt/te,
कुरुते #urute, कुचैतेि kadrapāte, कुचैते kurudte.
F'??’sf Preferāfe.

अकुट्टैि akurbi, स्रकुवॆहि akurbahi, स्रकुमैहि akurmahā.

स्रकुरूया: akurutha/।, अकुवॆायां akurbāthām, स्रकुरुध्वं akurudhmbam.
अकुरुत akuruta, स्रकुचैीतां akuroitām, स्रकुश्चैत akur0ata.
Potentia/.

कुष्वयि kuruiya, कुष्वविहि hurujiodhi, कुष्वीमहि /*14?”ayāma/tā.

कुष्ठीया: kurujithāh, कुर्व्वीयायां kurujiyāthām, कुर्व्रध्वं ku?*a??dhaodm.
कुव्रत। kurgāta, कुर्व्वायातां kurgāyātām, कुर्व्वीरन्। kurapāram.
7imperatioe.
कवे e karabai,
करवामहे karatyāmahai.
करवावहै karabiiuahai,
कुरुष्व' kurushmca, कुर्थॆायां kurayāt/hām, * कुरूध्वं kurudhmudim.
कुरूतां kura८tām, कुचैातां #uroatām, कुवैतां ku?”uatām.
Second Preferife.

चक्रे।' chahre, चकृवहे chakrityahe, चकृमहे chakrimahe.

चर्वृषे' chairisha चक्राये chajarathe, चकृष्बे द्वे chakridhnce.
0r

चक्रे chakre, चक्राते chakrate, चक्रिरे chakrire.

The other tenses are lst fut. कर्ह्राहे', 2d fut. करिष्ये", 3d pret., ISt,
2d, 3d Sing. अकृषि', चकृया:, अकृत, bened. वृषीय', cond. सकरिष्ये".

*) r. 7. b) r. 80. १) r. 10.f. १) r.80. *) r. 98. and r. 7. ') See the

scheme for the 2d pret. p. 73. 8) p. 79..f: ") p. 79. c. ') p. 88. g. !) p. 85. c.
*) r. 105.
 104

ExAMPILES OR REOGULAR. PRIMITIWE WERBS OR' THE FIRST

CON.JUGATION (r.88.)

Root भ्रु bhā. Infin. भविॐ bhapitum, “ to become " or “ be."

PARASMAIPADA. Presemt Temse.-“ I become' or ** I am.'
P ER.S. SING_ _ IDUAL_ "PLURAL_

ISt, भवामि" bhaudimi, भवावः bhatºdiuah, भवामः bhaudimah.

2d, भवसि bhapasi, भवयः bhaoathah, भवच्य bhauatha.
8d, भवति bhaoati, भवतः bhaudtah, भवन्ति bhacanti.

First Preterite.–“ I was becoming'' or “ I was.”

स्रभर्वं abharam, अभवाव abhaarāpa, स्रभवाम abhatyāma.
चभवः ।abhatyah, अभवत abhdayatam, अभवत abhatyata.
अभवत्। ubhatyat, अभवतां abhaoatām, सभवन्। abhatyam.

Potential.–“ I may become” or “ I māy be.”

भवेर्यं bhapgyam, भवेव bhaueca, भवेम bhacema.
भवे: bhabel, भवेतं bhaoetam, भवेत bhaoeta.
भवेत्। bhabet, भवेतां bhaoetām, भवेयुः bhabeyu/～.
Imperatioe.-** Let me become ” or **let me be.''
भवानि bhatāmi, भवाव bhatpāca, भवाम bhatyāma.
भव bhaud, भवतें blauatam, भवत bhabata.
_ भवतु bhattatu, भवतां bhacatām, भवन्तु bhauantu.

Second Preterite.–“ I became,'' or “ I was.”

बभूव' babhiZooं, बभूविव babhātica, बभूविम babhicima.
बभूविश्य ५ahiritha, बभूवयु: 9abhānathuh, बभूव babhāpa.
बभूव। babhiiud, बभूवतुः babhiiuatu/।, बभ्रुवुः babhiiuruh. _

First Fature.–“ I will become,” &c.

भवितास्मि' bhaitasmi, भविताखः bhapitāsicah, भवितास्मः bhatitāsma/.
भवितासि bhabitāsi, भवितास्यः bhacitāstha/), भवितास्य bhacitāstha.
भविता bhaoitā, भवितारी bhapitārau, भवितार: bhaaritairah.

Second Future.-“ I shall become,'' &c.

भविष्यामि bhaoishyāmi, भविष्यावः bhapishyāpah, भविष्याम: bhauishyāmah.
भविष्यसि /arishyasi, भविष्पय: Gharishyathah, भविष्यय bhacishyatha.
भविष्यति bhatishyati, भविष्यत: bhacishyata/), भविष्यन्ति bhaoishyanti.
 ExAMPI,BS OT W RRBS OT THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 106

The other tenses are, ad pret. स्रभूवं, स्रभू:, अभूत् ', &c. ; bened.
भ्रूयासॆ', &e, ; cond. अभविष्यं, &e, ; pass. part. भूत',
*) r. 88. a. ") r. 08. e) p. 79. a. 4) p. 83. i. e) p.85. b. f) This is
given in anticipation of r. 125. as being the most useful of all the participles.

Root स्मि smi. Infin. स्मेतुं smetum, “ to smile."

ATMANEPADA. Presemt Temse.-“ I smile.”

स्मये smdye", स्मयावहे smdyātura/te, स्मयामहे smot/tima/te.

स्मयसे smayase, स्मयेये sma/ethe, स्मयध्वे smayadhuce.
स्मयते smag/ate, स्मयेते smag/ete, स्मयन्ते smagyumte.

First Preterite.-“ I was Smiling.”

अस्मये asmaye, अस्मयावहि asmag/apahi, स्रस्मयामहि asmayāmahi.
अस्मयष्याः dsmogyatha/), अस्मयेयां asmag/ethām, अस्मयध्वं asma।/adhucam.
अस्मयत dsmogyato, अरमयेतां dsmag/etām, अस्मयन्त dsmuJamta.

Potemtiol.-** I may Smile."

स्मयेय smag/e/a, स्मयेवहि smogyeca/ti, स्मयेमहि smogyemahi.
स्मयेयाः smag/ethāh, स्मयेयायां smu।/gyāthām, स्मयेध्वं smayedhuam.
स्मयेत 8indgetd, स्मयेयातां smdye्/titām, स्मयेरन् smoi/eram.

Imperatice.-“ Let me Smile.''

स्मये smag/di, स्मयावहे smogyātyahai, स्मयामहे smogyāma/tai.
स्मयख smagyasuda, स्मयेयां sma/ethām, स्मयध्वं smag/adhuram.
स्मयतां smag/atām, स्मयेतां sma/etām, मयन्तीँ smayamtam.
Pratorie.–“ I smiled.”
Sec0md

fसfमये" sishmiye, सिfमयिबह sishmiyioahe, झिष्मियिमहे sishmiyimahe.

सिष्मियिषे sighmi/ishe, सिष्मियाये sishmiyāt/te, सिfमयिध्वे sishmiyidhace.
सिष्मिये sishmi/e, सिष्मियाते sishmi/āte, सिष्मियिग् sishmiyire.
First Future.–“ I will Smile."
स्मेताहे' smetāhe, स्मेताखहे smetāsucahe, स्मेतास्महे smetasmalle.
स्मेतासे smetāse, स्मेतासाये smetāsāthe, स्मेताध्वे smetadhace.
स्मेता &metā, स्मेतारौ smetārau, स्मेताग्: smetārah.
Second Future.–“ I shall Smile.”
स्मेष्ये' snes//e, स्मेष्यावहे। sine8//tioalle, स्मेष्यामहे smes/k/āmahe.
स्मेष्पसे sneshyase, स्मेष्येये smes//ethe, स्मेष्यध्वे smeshyadlace.
स्मेष्यते smes/gyate. स्मेष्येते smeshyefe, स्मेष्यन्ति। sineshyante.
P
 106 ExAMPLBS OR W IERBS OF' THE FIRST CONJUGATION.

3d pret. अस्मेषि', bened. स्मेषीयं', cond. सस्मेष्ये, pass. part. स्मित.

a) r.88.d. ") p.74. note f and r. 80. १) p. 79. e. ") p. 88. g. *) p. 85. b.

OBS. By 2 pr. I sin., is meant the Ist person sing. of the 2d

preterite ; by 2 pr. l du., the Ist person dual of the 2d pret ; by
pass. part., the passive past participle (r. l25.),
Root
00
{ .ji, par. | dru, par. | hri, par. | //५/, par. | lab/,ātm. | shubh, ātm.
* conguer.”| “run.” । “ seiZe.” । “ guit.” । “ obtain.”| “ shine."
Pres. ज्ञयामि" |ट्रवामि |हणमि | त्यजामि | लभे। शोभे।
lst pret. |अजर्य अट्रर्वं अहर् अत्यज्ञं अलभे अशोभे।
Pot. जयेर्य ट्रिवेर्य |हरेयं त्यजेर्य | लभेय | शोभेय
Imp. जयानि |ट्रवाणि |हणणि | त्यजानि | लभे |शोभै
2 pr. I sin. |जिगाय' दुद्राव' जहाण' तत्याज' | लेभे" | शुशुभे'
४pr, 1 du. |जिग्यिव' इंदुव' .|जह्वि । | तत्यजिव | लेभिवहे |शुशुभिवृहे
1st fut. |जेतास्मि" |ंद्रीताfम"|हत्वारिम' | त्यक्तास्मि" । लभाहे" |शोभिताहे
2d fut. |जेष्यामि" |ट्रोष्यामि" |हरिष्यामि' | त्यक्ष्यामि" | लप्स्ये” |शोभिष्ये
Infin. जेतुं’ द्रोतुं हंतुं यितुं शोभितुं
Pass. part.|जित दुत हृत। तयक्तःि दुः।" |शोभित
*) r. 88. a. ") p. 77..f p. 75. c. “) p.74. note f. ") p. 79. e. e) r. 106.
, ) r. 98. s) See the scheme for the 2d pret. p. 73. ") p. T0..f: !) r. 98. and 90. c.
J) p. 79..f k) p. 70. c. !) p. 76. c. ") p. 80. ") p.76. c. ") p. 80.
P) r. 106. ५) r. 125. i. ") p. 74.

Root { rrit, ātm. |a/tich, par. | .jit', par. | edh, तिtm. | arh, par. | mind, par.
। *be, exist.” । “ ask.'' * live.'' |**flourish.”|१* deserve.''| ** blame.''

Pres. वज्ञे' याचामि। ज्ञीवामि |ट्धे सहैमि |fनन्द्ामि’

Ist pret. |अवर्त्ते अयाच्वं अज्ञीवं |ंध स्राहिं अनिन्दं
Pot. वर्चेय यावेर्यं जीवेर्य |यधेय |अहेयं |निन्देयं
Imp. वंते' याच्वानि जीवानि |ट्घे अहॆाणि |निन्द्ानि
d
2 pr. l Sin. ववृते' ययाच |'जिञ्जीव' |एधाच्चक्रे |सानहॆ" |fननिन्द्'
2 pr. l du. |ववृतिवहे |ययाविव |जिजीविव |टधाञ्चकृवहे|अ'ानहैिव |निनिन्दिव
1st fut. |वर्त्तेिताहे |यावितास्मि जीवितास्मि |ख्टधिताहे | सर्हितास्मि |fनन्दितास्मि।
2d fut. |वज्ञैिष्ये |याविष्यामि जीविष्यामि |यधिष्ये |सहैिष्यामि |निन्दिष्यामि।
Infin. |वह्नेितुं याचितुं जीवितुं |टधितुं |अहैितुं |निन्दितुं
Pass.part.|वृत्त यान्वित |जीवित |यधित स्रहेित निन्दित।
*) r. 98. ") r.88. b with note. “) p. 77.g. ") p. 75..f *) r.88. b. ') r. 88. B. note.
 ExAMPLES OP W BRBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 107

Root { sad, par. |gam, par. |sthd, par. |drish, par.| da/t, par. | oa/), par.
“ sink.” | ‘*go.'' |“ remain.”| “ see.” |** burn.” | “ bear.”
Pres. सीदामि" |गच्छामि" |fतष्ठामि" |पश्यामि" |दहामि |वहामि'
Ist pret. |असीदं |अगच्छं |अतिष्ठं |अपश्यं
Pot. सीदेर्य |गलेर्य |fतष्ठेर्य' |पश्येर्य |दहेर्यं |वहेयं
Imp. सीदानि |गद्धानि |ंतिष्ठानि |पश्यानि
2 pr. I sin.|ससाद |जगाम' |तस्यो' ददर्शी ददाह |उवाह
2 pr. l du. |ंसेदिव' |जग्मिव' |तस्थिव |ददृशिव
Ist fut. |सन्तास्मि |गन्तास्मि' |स्यातास्मि'|ट्रष्टास्मि' |दग्धास्मि'|वोढास्मि'
2d fut. |सल्यामि |गमिष्यामि'|स्यास्यामि |ट्रच्यामि’ |धष्यामि"|वष्यामि’
Infin. |सहुं |गन्तुं |स्याहुं |द्रष्टुं" |दग्धुं" |वोदुं।'
Pass. part.|सन्न* |गत* स्थित' |दृष्ट" दग्ध" |ऊढ"
*) p. 64. c. b) p.70. c. १) r. 125..j. ") p. 75. c. e) p. 77. e. f) p.80.
*) r. 125. o. ') p. 64. c. cf torrnat. ') cf forratnt', and Lat. stem. ) p. 75. e.
and 76. a. See the 2d pret. of the root da, given at full under the 8d conjugation.
*) p. 79. e. ') r. I25. c. ") r. 106. ") r. 125. i. ") p. 76. c. and 68. h.
") p. 80. and 69. i. १) Cf. the Lat. ce/ho. ') p. 70. d. *) p. 80. Whenewer
the final ह blends with the initial of the termination int0 ढः, the medial a of the

root, instead of being lengthened by r. 91. h., is changed to o. Thus in the 8d pret.
par. अवाप्ं, अवाप्ली:, अवाष्ट्रीत् , अवाल्ब, अवोढं, अवोढां, अवाप्ट्म, अवोढ।,
अवाक्षुः; atm. अवाक्छ्,ि अवोढा:, अवोढ, अवाक्बहि, &c. See p. 82..f p. Simi
larly sah, “ to bear.” With acākshit, cf the Lat. cerit. !) r. I06. ") r. 125. m.

Root. { pti, par. |glirā, par. |dhmd, par. | /ace, par. |gai, par.|oas, par.
“ drink.”| “ smell.” | “ blow.” | “ call.” । “ sing.” |**dwell.”
Pres. |पिवामि"|जिघ्रामि" |धमामि' |ङ्कयामि” |गायामि'|वसामि।
lst pret. |अपिवं |अजिघ्रं |अधर्मः अड्र्य |अगार्य |अवसै।
Pot. पिवेर्य |जिघ्रेर्य |धनेर्यं ह्रयेर्य |गायेर्य |वसेयँ।
Imp. पिवानि | जिघ्राणि |धमानि |ङ्खयानि |गायानि |श्वसानि
2 pr. I sin.|पपौ जघ्रो' दध्मी" जुहाव' जगी" |उवास*
2 pr. l du. |पपिव |जघिव |दध्मिव |जुहुविव |जगिव |जषिव'
Ist fut. |पातास्मि |घातास्मि |घमातास्मि |ड्ातास्मि'|गाताfस्म'|वस्ताfस्म ।'
2d fut. |पास्यामि |घास्यामि |घमास्यामि |हास्यामि'|गास्यामि'|वत्स्यामि'
Infin. |पालुं |घातुं |ध्मातुं |हातुं' |गातुं’ |वस्तुं
Pass. part.|पीत * |घात घमात हूत" गीत' |उषित"
s) p. 64. c. Cf Latin bibo, bibis, &c. ") p.76. a, See the tense at full under
da, 8d conjugation. *) r. 125. c. ") This root substitutes dham for dhmā.
 108 BxAMP LBS OP WERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.

e) r. 10. *. ') p. 77. f Other roots in e follow the analogy of th0se in a

(p. 70. a.); as dhe, dadhau. s) Roots ending in the diphthongs e and ai change
these letters to a before the t and s of a termination. Hence, gai in the 8d pret.
is agāsam, &c. Hice may follow Form III. in the 8d pret. rejecting its final ; thus,
dhacam, ahapah, &c. Atm. alace, ahaoatha/), &c., or Form II. ८।/apāsi, &c.
") r. I25. e. !) r.8. ) r. 125.Jr. *) p. 76. d. !) p. 80. ") r. 125. m.

ExAMPILES OR REOUI,AR. PRIMITIWE WERBS OR THE

FOURTH CON.JUGATION (r. 89.).
Root मुह्, ma/. Infin. मोहितुं, “ to be troubled."
PAIRASMAIPADA. Presemt Temse.-“ I am troubled.''

मुह्मामि mulyāmi, मुह्माव: mukyapah, मुह्माम: mulyāmah.

मुह्मसि mu/～/asi, मुह्मय: mukyathah, मुह्मय mulgatha.
मुह्मति mu/्/ati, मुह्मत: mukyatah, मुह्यन्ति mu/gyamti.
First Preterite.-“ I was tr0ubled.''

अमुह्यं amuhyam, अमुह्माव amahyāna, अमुह्माम amukyāma.

समुद्य: amuhyah, अमुह्मतं amuhyatam, अमुह्मत amulyata.
अमुह्मत्। amu/gyat, अमुह्मतां dmu/kāyatām, अमुह्मन् dmu/ं/dm.
Potential.-** I may be troubled.''
मुह्येयं mu/्/eyam, मुह्येव mu/्/eud, मुह्येम mu/ं/em८.
मुह्मे: mu/gyeh, मुह्येतं mu/ं/etam, मुह्येत mu/ं/eta.
मुह्येत् mu/ं/et, मुह्येतां ?mu/gyetām, मुह्येयुः mu/ं/eyu/ः.
Imperatiue.-“ Let me be troubled.'
मुह्मानि mu/्//ini, मुह्माव mu/ं/ं7od, मुह्माम ?mu/gyāma.
मुह्म mulya, मुह्मतं mulgatam, “ मुह्मत mulyata.
मुद्यतु mulyatuं, मुह्मतां muhyatām, मुह्यनु mulyantu.
Second Preterite.–“ I became troubled.'

मुमोह mum0hd, मुमुहिव muma/tiod, मुमुहिम ima८ma/tima.

मुमोहिय mumohithd, मुमुहयुः mumuhathu/।, मुमुह mumu/t८.
मुमोह mum0/d, मुमुहतुः mumuhatuh, मुमुहुः ?mumuhuh.
Fij’st Future.

मोहितास्मि" mohitasmi, मोहिताखः mohitāsicah, मोहितास्म: mohitāsmah.

मोहितासि mohitāsi, मोहितास्य: mohitāsthah, मोहितास्य mohitāstha.
मोहिता mohitā, मोहितारी mohitārau, मोहितार: mohitārah.
 ExAMPLBS OR W BRBS OR THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 109

Secomd Future.

मोहिष्यामि mohishyāmi, मोहिष्पाव: mohishyāpa/, मोहिष्याम: mohishyamah.

मोहिष्यसि। ?mohis/gyusi, मोहिष्यय: mohishyathah, मोहिष्यय mohishyatha.
मोहिष्यति mohishyati, मोहिष्यत: mohishyatah, मोहिष्पन्ति mohishyanti.
3d pret. अमुहं', bemed. मुह्मासं', cond. अमोहिष्पं, p. part. मूढ or मुग्ध',
a) Or मोढास्मि or मोग्धास्मि, p. 80. ") p. 88. k. १) p. 85. e. 4) r. 125. .

Root { ds, par.

* throw.”
mash, par. |pud,atm.|sham, par.| sidh, par.
“ perish." | “go.” |“be calm."| “succeed.” |“bepleased.”
trip, par.

Pres. अस्यामि" नश्यामि” |पद्ये' |शाम्यामि"|सिध्यामि' |तृप्यामि"

Ist pret. चास्यै अनशर्य |अपद्ये |अशाम्यं |अखिध्यं अतृप्ये
Pot. स्रस्येयं नश्येयै |पद्येय |शाम्येर्यं |सिध्येयं तृप्येयं
Imp. अस्यानि नश्यानि |पद्यै |शाम्यानि |सिध्यानि तृप्याणि
च्छ्वासः b
2 pr. l Sin. ननाश* |पेदे' |शशाम' |fसषेध। ततवै'*
2 pr. l du. अ'ासिव। नेशिवं’ |पेदिवहे |शेमिव |सिषिधिव |ततृपिव।
Ist fut. असितास्मि नशितास्मि'|पक्वाहे' |शमितास्मि |सेडास्मि' |तर्नैिमि
2d fut. असिष्यामि। नशिष्यामि |पत्ये |शमिष्यामि |सेत्स्यामि तप्स्यामि।
Infin. नशितुं |पहुं
असितुं शमितुं |सेदुं । तभुं
Pass. part. अस्त नष्ट पत्र' |शान्त' |सिङ्घ' | तृप्न
*) Many of thesa roots of the 4th conjugation follow the 8d Form for the8d pret.
See p. 83. k. b) p. 75..fः १) p. 76. c.
") This root may optionally reject i,
andinsert a nasal in the futures; thus, नंष्टास्मि, नंष्यामि . *) p. 89. note marked *.
') p. 80. #) r.125..j. ") There are seven other useful roots which lengthon
the medial a after the manner of sham ; wiZ. kram, bhram (r. 89. a.) dam, klam,
/*sham, shram, mad. ') r.125. p. J) r. 125. i. *) Of rāproua।, TerapTrdiumv.
|
80, par.
Root. | (tyaba) bhramsh, tyudh, par.|gnadh,ātm. tush, par. /trigh, par.
। par. “ fall.” “ pierce.” | *fight.” “becontent.”|“
| rejoice.”
** strive.”

Pres. विध्यामि’ |युध्ये तुष्यामि | हृष्यामि

lst pret. अजुष्य
Pot.
Imp.
2 pr. l Sin.
2 pr. l du.
lst fut.
ā विध्येयॆ
विध्यानि |युध्ये
विव्याध' |युयुधे

व्यडामि' योडाहे'
|युध्येय
तुष्येयं
तुष्याणि
तुतोष
विविधिब |युयुधिवहे तुलुषिव
तोष्टास्मि'
2d fut.
Infin.
*ः
सातु
व्यत्यामि

यजुं,
|योत्ये'

योद्धुं
तोष्यामि'
तोटुं
PasS. part. |सित" विड़। युड तुष्ट"
 110 ExAMPLES OF WERBS OF THE SINTH CONJUGATION.

*) There are three other uncommon roots which follow so ; wiZ. sh0, chho, do.
") Roots ending in e or o follow the analogy of those in a and ai in the 2d pret.,
see p. 76. ८. e) Roots ending in o change o to a before the t and s of a termina
tion. ") r.125. 7. e) r. 89. a. ') p. 75. a. and 64. b. s) p. 78. note *.
") r. 125. m. i) p. 75. d. !) p. 80. *) r. 125. i. ') p. 75. c. ") Or ढुष्ट .

ExAMPILES OR REG.ULAR PRIMITIWE WERBS OR THE

SIxTH CONJUGATION (r. 90.).

Root मृजन् &ri), Infin. स्रष्टुं srashtum, “ to create," or “ let go.”
PARASMAIPADA only.
Presemt Temse.-“ I create.”

सृजामि’ srijami, मृजाव: srijapah, सृजाम: srijāmah.

सृजसि srijasi, मृजय: srijatha/), मृजय srijatha.
सृजति &rijati, सृजत: 8rijata/), मृजन्ति srijanti.
First Preterite.-* I was creating.”
अमृजं ८srā7ain, अमृजाव dsrijapa, अमृजाम dsri/ām८८.
असृजः dsrā7a/ं, अमृजतं dsri7atdm, अमृजत asrijata.
असृजत् asriyat, असृजतां dsri7atām, असृजन् asrijan.
_

Potemtial.-“ I may create.”

मृजेर्ये srijeyam, मृजेव srijeUd, मृजेम &rijema.
सृजेः 8rije/।, मृजेतं 8rijetam, सृजेत srijeta.
सृजेत्। Srije८, मृजेतां 8rijetām, सृजेयुः sri/gyu/..
Jmperatice.-** Let me create.”
सृजानि 8rijini, मृजाव srājioa, मृजाम srijama.
सृज srija, मृजतं srijatam, मृजत srijata.
सृजतु srijatu, _ मृजतां 8rijatām, सृजनु srijantu.
Second Preterite.

ससजे sasarja,
b __
समृजिश्व sasrijion,
__
समृजिम sasrijima.
__

ससंज्ञेिय sasarjithd, ससृजयुः sasrjjathuh, ससृज &dsri/d.

ससजे sasarja, ससृजतुः sdsrājatu/।, संमृजुः sasriju/।.
 ENAMPLBS OP WERBS 0F THE SIxTH CON JUGATION. ] 11

Fij’st F'uture.

स्रष्टास्मि' srashtasmi, स्रष्टास्वः srashtāstod/।, स्रष्टास्मः &rughtāsmah.

स्रष्टासि 8rashtāsi, स्रष्टास्यः srashtāsthah, स्वष्टास्य 8rashtastha.
स्रष्टा sraghtā, स्रष्टारी 8raghtārau, स्वष्टार: srughttirah.

Secomd Future.

खच्यामि' srakshyāmi, स्वष्यावः srakshyāuah, स्रष्ट्यामः srakshyāma/।.

स्रच्ठ्यसि। srakshgasi, स्वप्ययः sraks/gyatha/।, स्वप्यय &rakshgatha.
स्रष्ट्यति srakshpati, स्वध्यतः sraks/g/dta/), स्रष्यन्ति sraksh.jjanti.

The other tenses are, 3d pret. स्रस्राष्ट्रं ', bened. मृज्यासं', cond. अस्रष्ट्यै'
paSS. part. सृष्ट'
*) p. 65. note *. ") or सस्रष्ठः. See p. 80. note *, and r. 91. १) p. 80. note *.
") p. 85. e. e) r. 105. ') r. 125. i.

Root { mri, ātm’ | prachchh, |masj. par.| ish, par. |kship, par.|much, par.
( * die.” |par. “ask."| “ dive.” । “ wish.” | * throw.” । “let go."

Pres. |चिये' |पृच्छामि" |मज्जामि' |इच्छामि' |fक्षपामि' |मुञ्चामि"

Ist pret. |अचिये |अपृच्छं |अमचनं |ऐच्छै' |अक्षिपं |अमुञ्चं
Pot. चियेय |पृच्छेयं |मज्ञेयं |इच्छेयं |fछ्पेर्ये |मुचेर्यं
Imp. चियै |पृच्छानि |मज्जानि |इच्छानि |fष्पाणि |मुञ्चानि
2 pr. I sin.|ममार् |पेप्रच्छ |ममज्ज’ |झ्येष* |विक्षेप" |मुंमोच
2 pr. l du. |मविव |पपृच्छिव' |ममञ्जिव। ईषिव* |चिक्षिपिव |मुमुचिव
Ist fut. |मज्ञैस्मि |प्रष्टास्मि' |मंक्ास्मि" |एषितास्मि|क्षेप्नारिम" |मोक्ास्मि'
2d fut. |मरिष्यामि"|प्रच्यामि |मंष्यामि |ख्टfषष्यामि|ंक्षेप्स्यामि |मोघ्यामि।
Infin. |मप्तुं प्रष्टुं मज्जितुं |एषितुं |छेतुं मोत्तुं
Pass. part.|मृत पृष्टं मग्न' |इष्ट fक्षप्त” |मुक्तः
e) r. 90. a. ") p. 79. c. *) p. 77..f With the 2d pers. sing. पप्रसिद्धय,
cf. the Latin poposcisti. So also with तुतोदिश्य (from tud), tutodisti. ") p. 80.
e) r.125. i. ) So lajjami from lasj. But these roots are sometimes written
mgji and ldjj. s) p. 64. b. ") This root inserts a masal in the futures.
") r. 125. k. !) r. 88. *) p. 75..fः ') p. 65. note *. ") p. 75. d. ") r. 90. B.
 ( II2 )
ExAMPI,ES OR IRREGUI,AR PRIMITIWE WERBS OF THE
SECOND CONJUGATION (r. 92.).
Root या. Infin. याहुं, “ to go." Root झ. Infin. एतुं, “ to go."
PARASMAIPADA only. PARASMAIPADA.

Presemt.-“ I go. Presemt.–“ I go.”

यामि /āmi, याव: ?/āpah, यामः ?/tima/।. टमि' emi, इव: ioah, इम: imah.
यासि ?/āsi, यायः ।/āthah, याच्य /ātha. यषि eshi, इय: itha/), इय ?tha.

याति ?/ati, यातः ?/āta/।, यान्ति /inti. खटति eti, इत: itah, श्यन्ति" 3/dnti.

Fij’st Prefe;*ide. First Preterite.

_ ___ __ h - _ _

अयाँ dyam, अंयाव dyaud, अश्याम dyāma. अ'ार्यं dg/dm, येव dabd, येम 0८277267.

अयाः ayāh, अयातं dyātam, अयात ayāta. ऐ:' aih, ऐतं aitam, ऐत aita.
अयात्। di/āt, अयाताँ ayatām, स्रयान्" dg/tin. ऐत्। dit, टेतां ditām, सायन् diyan.

P0te??fia/. Potemtial.

यायाँ /āyām, यायाव gāyāpa, यायाम ?/āyāma. इयां i/tim, इयाव iyāpa, इयाम ॐ/āmd.
यायाः /āyāh, यायातं ?/āyātam, यायात। ?/āyāta. |ञ्या: iyāh, इयातं iyātam, इयात iyāta.
यायात् /āyāt, यायातां ।/āyātām, यायुः /āyah. |ञ्यात् iyat, इयातां iyātām, ञ्युः iyuh.
Imperatioe. 7mperatioe.

यानि /āni, याव ?/āca, याम ?/āmd. अयानि'ayāni, अंयाव ayāpa, अयाम ayāmd.
याहि ?/āhi, यातं ?/titam, यात ?/āta. इहि ihi, इतं itam, इत ita.
यातु /ātu, याताँ ?/atām, यान्तु /anta. एतु etu, इतीं itām, यन्तु” 3/tuntu.

2d pret. ययौ', &c. ; Ist fut. यातास्मि',| 2d pret. इयाय', ड्ययिय or इयेय,
&c. ; 2d fut. यास्यामि', &c. ; 3d pret.|ड्याय, ईयिव, &c. ; Ist fut. यतारिम' ;
स्रयासिर्ष' ; bened. यायासं ; cond. अयास्यं ;|2d fut. यष्यामि ; 3d pret. स्रगाम् (from
p. part. यात. root गा'); bened. ईयासं'; cond. टेषं;
p. part. इत.
*) p. 70. b. ") or स्रयु:, p. 69. note !. ॰) p.76. ८. ") p. 79. ४. *) p. 82. d.
)ि r.92. s) r. 7. ") ८ with e= di, r. 6., di with am=āyam, r. 8. ") a with
ā=ai, r.88. ) e with ami=ayāmi. *) p. 75. #. !) p. 85. b.

The above root इ i, “ to go," is constantly compounded with pre

positions,* in accordance with the usual rules of combination.
* It is desirable to introduce the inflection of these compound verbs here,
although the Subject properly belongs to the chapter on compound words.
 ExAMPLBS OE' W IERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. II3

Thus, with the prep. ā, “ to ;' pres. ऐमि, ऐषि, येति ; dual टवः, &c. ;
lst pret. स्रार्य, ऐ:, &e, ; pot. टयां, &c. ; imp. स्रायानि, एहि, ऐतु, &c.
Again with apa prefixed to ऐमि, &c. ; pres. अपेमि, &c. ; lst pret.
अपार्यं, &c. ; pot. सपेयीं, &c. ; imp. अपायानि, अपेहि. The preposition
adhi prefixed to the root इं gives the sense of “ to read," and झ् ।
then blends with adhā into adhāy before the vowel, and adhā before
the consonantal terminations. Hence the pres. (ātm. only) अधीये,
सधीषे, अधीते, स्रधीवहे, &c. ; lst pret. अध्यायि (adhā + a = ad/ya ; adhya
+ i = ad//ai, r. 88; ad//ai + i = ad//āyi, r. 8.), अध्यैया:, अध्येत ; dual
अध्येवहि, अध्यायायौ, &c. ; pot. अधीयीय, &c. ; imp. अध्यये (adhā + e=
ad/ye ; adhye + ai =adhyaya), अधीष्व, &c. In the 2d pret. the root
is changed to ग् ; thus, अधिजगे, अधिजगिषे, अधिजगे, अधिजगिवहे, &c.
In the 3d preterite the root becomes गी, and takes Form II. ; thus,
अध्यगीfषः, अध्यगीष्ठाः, अध्यगीष्ट, &o.

Root शी. Infः शयितुं, “ to lie down,” “ to sleep." ATMANEPADA.

This root takes Guna before a// the terminations, and inserts
r in the 3d plur. of the pres. Ist pret. and imp.
Prese?a८. F'??”8/ P?”e/e?*?/e.
शये' शेवहे शेमुहे | अशपि अशेवहि अशेमहि
शेषे शायाये शेध्वे | अशेया: अंशायायां अशेध्वं

P0fem/ia/. Imperatipe.
शायीय शायीवहि शयीमहि | शये शयावहे शयामहे

2d pret. शिश्ये', Ist fut. शायिताहे', 2d fut. शयिष्ये, 3d pret. स्रशायिषि ,

bened. शायिर्षीयं', cond. अशयिष्ये, pass. part. शायित".
*) r. 10. +, Cf ke0aat, kciºrat, kcirat, ketac0a, &c., and see note, p. 4ं. ") r. 98.
*) This is an exception to r. 101. e. d) p.85. b. “) r. I25. b. note.

Root स्तु. Inf. स्तोतुं , “ to praise." PARASMAIPADA.

JPresem८. । F'?)’s/ Preferife.

स्तीमि" स्तुव: स्तुम: | अस्तुवं अस्तुव अस्तुम

स्तीषि स्तुय: स्तुय | अस्ती: अस्तुतं स्रस्तुत

0
114 ExAMPI,ES OP W BRBS OE THE SBCOND CONJUGATION.

Pot. स्तुर्या, &c. ; Imp. स्तुवानि (in the Vedas स्तवानि), स्तुहि, स्तौतु,
&c. ; 2d pret. तुष्टाव' ; dual तुष्टुव' ; lst fut. स्तोतास्मि'; 2d fut. स्तोष्यामि ;
3d pret. स्रस्ताविर्ष' ; ātm. pres. स्तुवे, &c.
*) p. 70. c. स्तु may also make स्तवी before the consonantal * terminations; thus,
स्तवीमि, स्तवीfष,&c., after the analogy of झ्. It makes stuu and rarely stat; before
the wowel P terminations. ") p. 75. e. *) See the table, p.78. ") p. 79..fः
*) p. 82. a.

Root ब्रूं (p. 70. c), Inf. वसुं”, “to say."

PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.
Presemt.
ब्रमि, ब्रूवः, चूमः ब्रुवे ब्रूवहे
त्रंीपं
ब्रवीति
ब्रूपं
ब्रूत:
ब्रूय ,
ब्रुवन्ति
| ब्रूते
ब्रूरे बुवाये
ब्रुवात।
First Preterife.
अब्रुवं सबूव अबूम अब्रुवि। स्रब्रूवतःिह् स्रब्रूमहि
सब्रवी: स्रबूतं स्रचूत अब्रूया: अब्रुवायां अबूश्वं

Imperatiue.
ब्रवाणि' ब्रवाव ब्रवाम ब्रुवै' ब्रुवावहै ब्रुवामहैं
ब्रूहि ब्रूतं ब्रूत बूव ब्रुवायां ब्रूर्ध्वं

Pot. par. ब्रूयां , छूया:, हूयात्, &c. ; ātm. त्रुवीय, ब्रुवीया:, ब्रुवीत, &c.
Thie other tenses are from the root वच् ; as, 2d pret. उवाच , du.
जचिव', Ist.fut. वक्तास्मि, 2d fut. वक्ष्यामि , 3d pret. अवोचं', p. part. उक्तः'.
") Borrowed from वच्. ") For these are sometimes substituted the termina
tion of the 2d pret. of a defective root अह् with a present signification : thus,
2d sing. अात्य ; 8d sing. स्राह ; 2d dual साहयुः; 8d dual आहतुः; 8d plur. आहुः.
*) The radical wowel is here changed to au instead of ag. Pamimi, 7. 8. 88.
In the Wedas abraoam occurs. d) r. I0. +. *) p. 76. d. !) p. 83..j. #) r. I25. m.

Root हन् (p. 70. d) Inf. हतुं, “ to kill."

PAR.ASMAIPAIDA.
Present. First Prelerile.
हन्मि हन्व: हन्म: अहनं" अहन्व अह्न्म
र्हसि। हयः हय अहन्' अहतं अहत।
हन्ति हत: प्वन्ति अहन् अहतां स्रवन्।
 ExAMPLBS OF WERBS OF THE SEOOND CONJUGATION. I 15

Imperatire. Pot. हन्यां, &c. ; 2d pret. जघान।,

हनानि हनाव हनाम जघनिय or जघन्यं, dual जfह्मव' ; lst
जहि हतं हत fut. हन्तास्मि', &c.; 2d fut. हनिष्यामि,
हन्तु हतां मन्तु &c. ; 3d pret. अबधिर्षं', &c. ; p.
part. हत'
*) Or सप्तँ. ") p. 69. a. *) p. 77. e. ") p. 80. *) Substituted from बध् ।
p.82. c. ) r. 125. o.

Root शास् (p. 70, e.), Infin. शासितुं, “ to rule."

Prese?a८. Firsf Preferite.

शामि शाखः शास्मः । आशासं, अशाख्ब अशास्म

शास्सि शिष्ट: शिष्टं | अशात् स्रशिष्टं स्रशिष्टं
शास्ति शिष्ट: शासति' । अशात् स्रशिष्टां सशामु:

7hiperatioe. Pot. शिष्यां, &c.; 2d pret. शशास ;

शासानि शासाव। शासाम Ist future, शासितास्मि ; 2d future,
शाधि' शिष्टं शिष्टं शासिष्यामि ; 3d pret. स्रशिर्षं '; p.
शास्तु शिष्टां शासतु" part. शिष्ट".
*) p. 69. note #. ") Or स्रशा:, the final being changed to Wisargah instead of t.
*) Or शाड़ि, p. 68. g. The termination dhi (corresponding to the Greek th) belongs
to roots ending in consonants, but was originally applicable to roots ending in wowels.
See Prof.Johnson's Mahābhārata Selections, p.107. अपाकृधि. ") p. 83.7. e)r.125. m.

Root द्विम् (r. 92.) Infin. द्वेष्टुं , ** tO hate.''

PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPAIDA.

Presem८.

द्विष्वः द्विषमः द्विषे द्विष्वहे

fद्वष्ठः द्विष्ठं द्विश्ले" द्विषाथे
fद्वष्ट: द्विषन्ति द्विष्ट्रै' द्विषाते

First Preferāte.

खद्विष्व अfद्वषम अद्विषि अद्विष्वहि।

अद्विष्टं अद्विष्टं अद्विष्ठा:
# अद्विष्टं सद्विषन् ' | अद्विष्ट
_
स्रद्विषाताँ
.1l6 BNAMPLES OP W BRBS OB' THE SECONID CON.JUGATION.

/miperatige.
द्वेषाणि द्वेषाव द्वेषाम । द्वेषे द्वेषावहे द्वषामहे
द्विढि* द्विष्टं द्विष्ट | द्विावि” द्विपायां द्विड्ढुं"
द्वेष्टुं द्विष्टां द्विपलु | द्विष्टं द्विषातां द्विषतेीं
Pot. par. द्विष्याँ, द्विष्पा:, &c. ; ātm. द्विषीय, द्विषीया:, &c. ; 2d pret.
par. दिद्वेष ; ātm. दिद्विषे ; lst fut. द्वेष्टामि', द्वेष्टाहे ; 2d fut. द्वेष्यामि', द्वेष्ट्य ;
3d pret. सद्विष्ट्', सद्विछ् ि; bened. द्विष्यासं', द्विप्ोय' ; cond. अद्वेष्ठ्यं, अद्वेष्ये ;
p. part. द्विष्ट'
*) p. 08. e. ") p. 68. d. *) p. 60. a. d) Or अद्विषुः, p. (}9. note {. *) p. 08..f:
') p. 80. s) p. 88. k. ") p. 85. e. ) r. I25. i.

Root रुद्. Inf. रोदितुं, “ to weep" (p. 70. d),

JPresem/. F'irst Preferife.

Imperatice. Pot. रूद्यां, 2d pret. रुरोद, Ist fut.

रोदानि रोदाव रोदाम रोदिताfस्म, 2d fut. रोदिष्यामि, 3d pret.
रूदिहि रुदितं रूदित अरूदं', bened. रुद्यासं, cond. अरोदिष्पं,
रोदितु रूदिताँ रुदन्तु p. part. रूदित.
*) Bopp compares the terminations of this tense to the Latin terminations in legi,
") Or अरोदी:. १) Or अरोदीत् . ") p.83. h.
legisti, legit, legimus, legitis, legunt.

Root दुह्. Inf. दोग्धुं, “ to milk.”

JPresem८.

शेषिः इग्धः इग्ध् धुछ् ठुहाये धुग्ध्वे।'

दोग्धि' दुग्ध:' हुहन्ति दुग्धे द्रुहाते दुहते
F'??’sf Preferi/e.

सोहं अदुह्, अदृच जहि , षड् िस्टुचिह्।ि

अधोक्' अहुग्धं' अटुग्ध अदुग्धा:ं स्रद्रुहायां अधुग्ध्वं
अधोक्' अङुग्धां' अद्रुहन् | अदुग्ध स्रद्दुहातां अहुहत
 ExAMPLBS OP W BRBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 11T

Imperatire.

दोग्धु दुग्धा द्वहन्तुः दुग्धा द्रुहाता द्वहता

Pot. par. हृद्यां, ātm. नुहीय; 2d pret. par. द्रुदोह, ātm. द्रुद्वहे; lst fut.
दोग्धास्मि, ātm. दोग्धाहे' ; । 2d fut. धोष्यामि", ātm. धोष्ये ; bened. दुद्यासं,
ātm. धुक्षीय ; 3d pret. अधुर्न्न', ātm. अधुझि'; bened. टुह्यासं, ātm. धुष्ट्रीय' ;
cond. अधोक्ये', ātm. अधोष्ये ; p. part. दुग्ध.
*) p. 69. i. ") p. 68. h. ) p. 69. a. ") ध्वं and ध्वे, like terminations
beginning with a sibilant, have the effect of throwing back the aspirate (which has
been changed to g) on the initial of the root. *) p.88. k. ') p. 84. note.

ExAMPILES OR IRREG.UI,AR. PRIMITIWES OR THE THIRID

CONJUGATION (r. 98.).
Root भृ. Infin. भर्त्तुं , “ to support," “ bear."
PARASMAIPADA.

Presemt Temse.-“ I support " or “ bear.''

बिभर्मि bibharmi, बिभृव: bibhricah, बिभृम: bibhrimah.
बिभfवॆ" Dibharshi, बिभृय: bibhrithah, बिभृय ८)ibhritha.
बिभर्त्तेि" bibharti, बिभृत: bibhrita/।, बिभ्रति Uibhrati.
Fij’st Prefe?’ite.

अबिभरँ abibharam, अबिभृव। abibhrica, अबिभृम abibhrima.

अबिभर्' abibhar, अबिभृतं abibhritam, अबिभृत abibhrita.
अबिभर्' abibhar, अबिभृतां ahibhritam, अबिभरु:' abibharuh.
Jmperatioe.

बिभराणि" bibharāmi, बिभणव bibharāua, बिभणम bibharāma.

बिभृहि Dibhrihi, बिभृतं Gibh,itam, बिभृत bibhrita.
बिभर्त्तुं ८)ibha?’ta८, बिभृतां bibhritām, बिभ्रतु bibhratu.

। Pot. बिभृयां Dib/iriyām, बिभृया:, &e, ; pres. ātm. बिभे , बिभृषे, &c. ;
Ist pret. अबिभ्रि', खबिभृयाः, &c. ; pot. बिभ्रीय ; imp. बिभरे, बिभृष्व, &c. ;
2d pret. par. बभार', dual बभृव, ātm. बभे ; lst fut. भज्ञैस्मि', ātm. भज्ञैहेि ;
2d fut. भरिष्यामि", ātm. भरिष्ये ; p. part. भृत ; 3d pret. संभाषॆ। ', ātm.
स्रभृषि', अभृया:, &e.
I18 ExAMPLBS OF WERBS OR THE THIRD CONJUGATION.

*) Cf. the Latin fers, Jrart,.ferimus,.fartis,.farunt. ") Or अबिभ:. Since the

vowel ri is changed to ar, the rule at p. 69. ८. applies to this verb. e) r. 98. last
sentence. ") r. 2I. *) r. 7. !) p. 75. a. s) p. 79..f ") p. 79. c. ') p. 82..fः
) p. 83. 7.

Root दा. Infin. दातुं, “ to give." (p. 7l. a.)

PARASMAIPADA.

Present Temse.–“ I give.”

हृदामि" dadāmi, दद्ध: dadica/), दद्म: dadmah.
ददासि dadāsi, दत्यः dattha/।, दत्य dattha.

ददाति dadāti, दत्त: datta/), ददति dadati.

First Preterite.-“ I was giving.”
खट्द्र' adadām, स्रदद्व adadua, सदद्म adadma.
स्रददाः ddadāh, स्रदत्तं adattam, अदत्तः adatta.
अददात्। ddadāt, स्रदत्तां adattam, अददुः adaduh.

Imperatiue.-** Let me give.''

ददानि dadani, ददाव dadāpa, ददाम dadāma.
देह्’ि de/hi, दत्तं dattam, दत्त datta.
ददातु dadātu, दत्तां dattam, ददतु dadatu.

Pot. दद्यां, &c. ; pres. tिm. ददे, दासे, दज्ञे, &c.; lst pret. अददि;
imp. ददे ; pot. ददीय .
Second Preterite.-* I gave.”

ट्दी" daduuं, ददिव dadica, ददिम dadima.

ददिश्य' daditha, ददयु: dadathuh, दद dada.
ददौ dadau, ददतु: dadatu/, ददुः daduh.

2d pret. ātm. ददे, ददिषे', ददे, ददिवहे, &c. ; 1st fut. par. दाताf्म' ;
2d fut. दास्यामि' ; 3d pret. स्रदॉ"; bened. देयासं' ; cond. अदास्यं ;
p. part. दत्त',
*) Cf. of8apu, p. 69. note *. ") p. 83. note f. *) p. 71. a.. ") p. 76. a.
*) Or ददाय. Cf the Latin dedisti. ) Or ददासे. s) p. 79. e. ") p. 83. i.
') p. 85. a. !) r. 125. c.
 ExAMPLBS OP WERBS OF THE THIRID CONJUGATION. 119

Root धा. Inf. धातुं, “ to place," &c. (p. 71. a.)

Prese??८. F'irsf Preferāde.
a • b

Pot. दध्यां, &e, ; imp. दधानि, धेहि', दधातु, दधाव, धत्तं, धत्तो , दधाम, धत्त,
दधतु ; pres. ātm. दधे, धत्से, धत्ते, दध्वहे, &c. ; lst pret. अदधि, अधत्या:, &c.;
pot. दधीय ; imp. दधै, धत्खः, &c. ; 2d pret. par. दधौ' ; ātm. दधे ; lst
fut. धातास्मि ; 2d fut. धास्यामि ; 3d pret. अर्धा' ; bened. धेयासं'; cond.
अधास्यं ; p. part. हित'.
*) Of rttlmut, rttink, Trfthort. ") p. 88. note f. ") p. 71. a. *) p. 76. a.
*) p. 83. i. ") p. 85. a. *) r. l25. c.
_

Root हा. Inf. हातुं, “ to guit."

JPrese??८. F'17’s P?”efej*2fe.
जहामि' जहीव:' जहीम: स्रजहाँ अजहीव' अजहीम
b *

जहाति जहीत: जहति। अजहात् अजहीताँ अजहुः

Pot. जह्मीं, &c. ; imp. जहानि, जहीहि', जहातु, &c. ; 2d pret. जही' ;
Ist fut. हातास्मि ; 2d fut. हास्यामि ; 3d pret. स्रहासिषॆ' ; bened. हेयासं';
cond. अहास्यं ; p. part. हीन'.
*) r. 98. ") This root changes a to ? before the consonantal terminations not
marked with P, and drops a altogether before the wowel terminations. १) Or जहिहि .
*) p. 76. a. *) p. 82. d. ") p. 85. a. #) r. 125. c.

Root भी. Inf. भेतुं, “ to fear.”

Prese??८. | F'ir8f Preferife.
बिभेमि बिभीवः" बिभीमः | अबिभयं अबिभीव अबिभीम
बिभेषि बिभीय: बिभीयः | स्रबिभे: अबिभीतं अबिभीतं
बिभेति बिभीत: बिभ्यति | अबिभेत् खबिभीतां अबिभयुः"
Pot. बिभीयौ, &c.; imp. बिभयानि, बिभीहि, बिभेतु, &c. ; 2d pret. बिभाय' ;
du. बिभ्यिव; lst fut. भेतास्मि ; 2d fut. भेष्यामि ; 3d pret. अभेर्ष'; p. part. भीत.
*) The radical vowel may be optionally shortened (बिभिवः) before a consonant,
whenever Guna does not take place. ") r. 98. last Sentence. “) r. 98. ") p. 82..fः
 ( I20 )

ExAMPILES 0F IRREG.UI,AR. PRIMITIWES 0F THE FIFTH

CONJUGATION (r.94.).
ROOt साप्. Infin. आामुं, ‘' to obtain.'

* PARASMAIPADA.
_

Present Temse.–“ I obtain.'' ,

झाप्नोमि। dpm0mi, सामुव: āpmupa/), आामुम: āpmuma/.
अ'ाप्नोषि dipmoshi, आामुय: āpnuthu/।, अोमुय āpnutha.
अ'ाप्नोति āpmoti, सामुत: 67pnuta/।, अामुवन्ति dipmucumti.
First Preterite.–“ I was obtaining.”
अ'ाप्मवं āpmapam, स्रामुव āpnuta, सामुम āpnuma.
साप्नो: dipmoh, अामुतँ वँonutam, अामुत āpnuta.
आाप्नोत् dipm0t, आाभुतां dipnutām, स्रामुवन् āpnupan.
Imperatioe.-** Let me obtain.”
अ'ाप्रवानि āpmaoāmi, अाष्पवाव dipndoāca, स्राष्पवाम dipmacāma.
अ'ामुहि dipnu/ti, अ'ामुतं 67pnutam, आामुत। (Wpmuta.
अ'ाप्नोतु dipm0tu, अाप्रतां āpnutām,
७*
स्रामुवन्तु apnupantu.
Pot. सामुयां āpnadyām, स्रामुया: āpnadyā/, आामुयात् āpn५/ā/, &c. ;
2d pret. स्राप"; dual सापिव ; Ist fut. अाप्नास्मि'; 2d pret. साप्स्यामि' ;
3d pret. अापं' ; bened. अाप्यासं ; cond. आाप्यं ; p. part. अTR.
*) p. 75..f ") p. 80. e) p. 83. 7.

ROOt अश। . Infin. अशितुं, “ to pervade," “ obtain," “ enjoy."

ATMANEPADA.

Prese१.८. | Fir’st Proferāt०.

अश्नुवाये अश्रुष्व् | जाश्रुपाः शाश्रुवां जानुभ्यं

Pot. अश्नुवीय ; imp. अश्नवै, अश्नुष्व, अश्नुतां, अश्ववावहे, &c. ; 2d pret.
स्रानशे", सानशिषे, &c.; 1st fut. अशिताहे"; 2d fut. अशिष्ये'; 3d pret.
आाशिषि', स्राशिष्ठा:, &c. ; bened. अशिपीय ; cond. अाशिष्ये ; p. part. अष्ट .
*) This root, although not ending in a double consonant, reguires that the redu
plicated Syllable be ān, see p. 75..f ") Or स्रष्टाहे. “) Or अप्स्ये . ") p. 82. a.
 ExAMPI,ES OP WERBS OE' THE SBWENTH CONJUGATION. 12I

Root शक् , Infin. शकुं, “ to be able."

Presont. First Preterite.

शक्नोमि। शक्रुवः शङ्कुम: अशक्नर्वे अशक्रुव अशक्नुम

शक्ोपि शङ्कुय: शकुय सशक्नो: अशङ्कुतं स्रशङ्कृत

Pot. शङ्कुयां, &e, ; imp. शङ्कवानि, &c. ; 2d pret. शशाक'; dual, शकिव',
&c. ; lst fut. शक्तास्मि'; 2d fut. शष्यामि'; 3d pret. अशकं', p. part. शक्.
*) p. 76. c. ") p. 80. १) p. 83. h.

Root श्रुः Infin. श्रोतुं , “ tO hear.''

Pre8e??t. F'27*8f Prefej*?fe.

8. b e _

शृणोमि पृणु * ८ NGO : अशृणव _ शृणु *' शृणु

शृणोति शृणुत: शृण्वन्ति स्रशृणोत्। अशृणुतां सशृण्वन्

Pot. शुणुयां ; imp, शृणवानि, शृणु, शृणोतु, शृणवाव, &e, ; 2d pret. शुश्राव ,
dual शुश्रुव' ; Ist futः श्रोतास्मि' ; 2d fut. श्रोष्यामि' ; 3d pret. अश्रीर्घ';
pass. part. श्रुत.
*) r.21. ') Or शृण्वः. e) Or शृण्म:, *) See the scheme of terminations,
p. 78. १) p. 79..f ') p. 82..f:

ExAMPILES OR IRREG.ULAR. PRIMITIWES OR THE

SBWENTH CONJUGATION (r.95.).

Root छिद्. Infin. छेत्तुं, “ to cut."

Presemt.-“ I cut.''

छिनद्मि chhinadmi, fछ्न्द्वः chhinducah, छिन्द्मः chhindma/..

fछनत्सि chhinatsi, छ्न्यि:" chhinthah, लिन्य" chhintha.
छिनत्ति chhimatti, fछ्न्त:" chinta/), fछ्न्दन्ति chhindanti.
First Preterite.–“ I was cutting.'
अछिनदं" dchhimadam, अनििन्द्व achhindica, अलिन्द्य achhindma.
अछिनत्।' ८chhimat, अश्छिन्तं achhintam, अग्छिन्ति achhintd.
अछिनत्। dchhimat, अद्भिन्तां achhintām, अछिन्दन् dchhindam.

Pot. छिन्द्याँ, &e. ; imp. छिनदानि, छिन्द्धि', छिननु, &c. ; ātm. pres.
R.
122 ExAMPLES OF WERBS OF THE SBW IENTH CONJUGATION.

छिन्दे, छिन्से, छिने, &c. ; lst pret. अछिन्द्;ि pot. छिन्दीय ; imp. छिनदै,
छिन्त्ख, &c. ; 2d pret. par. विच्छेद ; ātm. विछिदे ; Ist fut. छेत्तास्मि' ; 2d
fut. छेत्यामि' ; 3d pret. par. स्रचैत्सं'; ātm. अछिसि", स्रंछित्या:, अछित्त,
&c. ; paSS. part. छित्र".
*) R00ts ending in t or d may reject these letters before th and t, when m imme
diately precedes. ) Or स्रसिद्धनदं, &c. १) p. 69. a. or स्रंछिन:. १) Or छिन्घि.
*) p.80. ') p. 82..f s) p. 83. g. ") r. 125..j.

Root रूध्. Infin. ऐडुं , “ to hinder.'

Prese?at. F'ir8# Preferife.
रूणध्मि' रुन्ध्व: रुन्ध्म: अरूणधं सरून्ध्व अरून्
रूणत्सि' रुन्डः' रून्ड' सरूणत्' अरून्डं अरून्ड
रूणडि* रून्डः' रुन्धन्ति | अरुणत् स्ररून्डां अरुन्धन्
Pot. रून्ध्याँ; imp. रूणधानि, रून्डि', रूणडु, &c. ; ātm. pres. रून्धे, &c. ;
Ist pret. अरून्धि, स्ररून्डा:, &c. ; pot. रून्धीय ; imp. रूणधै ; 2d pret. par.
रुरोध; ātm. रूरूधे ; lst fut. ऐड़ास्मि' ; 2d fut. रोत्स्यामि' ; 3d pret. par.
अरौत्सं'; ātm. स्ररूतििस'; p. part. रूड़.
*) R.95. ") p. 68. b. १) p. 67. a. ") p. 69. a., or स्ररूण:. *) p. 80.
') p. 82..f: 5) p. 88. g. _

Root युजन्. Infin. योनुं, “ to join."

PARASMAIPADA. . Presemt. ATMANEPADA. Presemt.
_ b _ *

युनमि, ंचः शृंग्मः युद्धे, पुंचह् पुंम्हे

युनषि' ंक्यः पुंवथ् । युंक्षे युञ्जाथे र्युग्ध्वे
युनक्ति मुंक्तः यङ्विन्ति
N5)
र्युक्तः र्यञ्जाते
N*
यञ्जते
N-)

First Preterite. First Preterite.

संयुनक् अयुक्तः चयुक्तः अर्युक्या: अयुञ्जायां अर्बुग्ध्वं

Pot. par. युंज्यां, &c. ; ātm. युञ्जीय, &c. ; imp. par. युनजानि, युंग्धि',
युननु, युनजाव, &c ; ātm. युनजै, पुंश्ल, मुंक्ां, युनजावहै, &c. ; 2d pret. par.
युयोज ; ātm. युयुजे ; Ist fut. योक्ास्मि ; 2d fut. योक्ष्यामि ; 3d pret. par.
स्रयौघं'; ātm. अयुध्वि', अयुक्या:, अयुक्तं, &c.; pass, part. युक्तः.
*) R. 9]. ") Cf the Latinjungimus,jungunt. १) p.69. a. ") p.82../ः (* p. 83.g.
 BxAMPLBS OF WERBS OR THE NINTH OONJUGATION. 123

Root हिंस्. Infin. हिंसितुं, “ to injure.”

Present. First Preferife.
हिनस्मि र्हिल्बः हिंस्म: अहिनसं, स्रर्हिख अहिंस्म

हिनस्ति हिंस्तः हिंसन्ति अहिनत् अहिंस्तां अहिंसन्।

Pot. हिंस्यां, &c. ; imp. हिनसानि, &c. ; 2d pret. जिहिंस* ; Ist fut.
हिंसितास्मि' ; 2d fut. हिंसिष्यामि ; 3d pret. अहिंसिषं"; pass. part. हिंसित.
*) According to Carey fहनद्द् ि. ") Or अह्निः. १) p. 75.c. d) p. 64., note f.

For examples of verbs of the Sth conjugation the student is re

ferred to the auxiliary verb कृ kri, at p. 10l, and the verb तन् in
the tables, pp. 94-97. These are the only two roots in this con
jugation that are ever likely to occur.

ExAMPILES OR' IREREGULAR. PRIMITIWES OR' THE NINTH

CONJUGATION (r.97.)

Root ज्ञा. Infin. ज्ञातुं, “ to know.”

PARASMAIPADA. Presemt Temse.-“ I know.''

जानामि .jānāmi, जानीवः.jamioah, जानीमः.jamāmah.

जानासि.jānāsi, जानीयः.jainithah, जानीय.jainitha.
जानाति.janati, जानीतः.jamita/), जानन्ति.jāmanti.
First Preterite.–“ I was knowing.”
अजानां djānām, स्रजानीव gjamioa, अजानीम djanima.
अजानाः djamāh, अजानीतं djanitam, अजानीत gjamita.
स्रजानात् djanat, स्रजानीतां gjamitām, अजानन् djanam.
Imperatiue.-“ Let me know.''

ज्ञानानि.jānāni, जानाव.jamāpa, जानाम.7amāma.

जानीहि.janihi, जानीतं jamitam, जानीत.janita.
जानातु.7anātu, जानीतां.jamitām, जानन्तु.jananta.
ATMANEPADA. Presemt. --** I know.”

जाने.jane, जानीवहे.janioahe, जानीमहे.janimahe.

जानीषे janishe, जानाथे.janathe, जानीध्वे.janidhace.
जानीते .jinite, जानाते janate, जानते.janate.
124 BxAMPLES OF WERBS OT THE NINTH CONJUGATION.

First Preterite.-“ I was knowing.”

अजानि gjani, स्रजानीवहि djinitahi, स्रजानीमहि ajanimahi.
अजानीयाः djainithāh, अजानायां djanāthām, अजानीध्वं djainidhaoam.
अजानीत djainita, अजानातां djanatam, अजानत gjanata.
Imperatioe.-** Let me know.”
जाने.janai, जानावहै.janācahai, ’ जानामहै.janamahai.
जानीष्व.janishnca, जानायां.janatham, जानीध्वं.janidhucam.
जानीताँ.jamitām, जानातां.7anatim, जानतां.jinatām.

Pot. par. जानीयां, जानीया:, जानीयात्, &c. ; ātm. जानीय, जानीया:, &c. ;
2d pret. par. जज्ञी"; dual जज्ञिव, &e, ; ātm. जज्ञे ; lst. fut. ज्ञातास्मि' ;
2d fut. ज्ञास्यामि' ; Bd pret. स्रज्ञासिषं' ; ātm. अज्ञासि ; p. part. ज्ञात.
*) p.70. a. ") p. 79. e. “) p. 82. d.

Root मह्. Infin. यहोहुं, “ to take."

Presemt. First Preteritd.

निनॆ क्रॆ #े | से सँे ै

Imperatiue. Pot. गृह्मतीयां, &c. ; 2d pret.
गृह्तानि गृह्ताव गृह्मताम | जयाह', जयहिय ; dual जगृहिव', &c. ;
गृहाण गृह्णीतं गृह्मतीत | lst fut. यहीतास्मि'; 2d fut. यहीष्यामि;
गृह्तातु गृह्मतीतां गृह्तन्तु 3d pret. अयहीर्षं '; p. part. गृहीत.
*) p. 77..f: ") This root lengthens the inserted i. e) This is on the authority
of the Siddhānta Kaumudi, but Carey and Wilkins give स्रयहिषं. All agree in
making the ātm. अमहीषि.

Root स्रश् , Infin. अशितुं, “ to eat.”

Presemt. | First Preterite.

अश्यामि अश्लीवः अश्रीम: | अाग्र्यां स्राभ्रंीव अाशूरीम

अश्रूयासि अभ्रूीय: अभ्रंीय | अाश्याः अाश्रीतं अTश्रूयीत
सभ्रूवाति अश्लीतः अश्र्वन्तिस्राश्नात् स्राश्नीतां स्राश्नन्
Pot. स्रग्वीयां, &c. ; imp. अश्वानि , स्रशान", &c. ; 2d pret. स्राश' ; 1St
fut. अशितास्मि ; 2d fut. अशिष्यामि ; ad pret. स्राशिषं' ; pass. part. स्रंशित.
*) R. 97. last paragraph. ") p. 75..fः ") p. 82. c.
 ExAMPLES OP W IERBS OF THE NINTH CONJUGATION. 126

Root क्री. Infin. क्रतुं, “ to buy."

Presenf. First Preferite.
क्रीणामि' क्रीणीवः क्रीणीम: अक्रीणां' अक्रीणीव । स्रक्रीणीम
क्रीणासि क्रीणीयः क्रीणीय * : अक्रीणीतं अक्रीणीत।
क्रीणाति क्रीणीतः क्रीणन्ति। अक्रीणात् अक्रीणीतां स्रक्रीणन्

Pot. क्रीणीयां, &c. ; imp. क्रीणानि, क्रीणीहि, &c. ; 2d pret. विक्राय',

विक्रयिय or विक्रेय ; dual चिक्रियिव"; Ist fut. क्रेतास्मि ; 2d fut. क्रेष्यामि ;
3d pret. स्रक्रेषं' ; pass. part. क्रीत.
*) Cf. Trepvauat. ") Cf. 6Trepuav. *) p. 75. b. d) p. 74. f. *) p. 82..fः

Root स्तु or स्तृ. Infin. स्तप्तुिं, “ to spread.'

Presemt. First Preterāte.

स्तृणामि' स्तृणीव: स्तृणीम: असृणां असृगुं असृग्म

स्तृणासि स्तृणीय: स्तृणीय अस्तृणा: असृगुं अस्तृणीत
स्तृणाति स्तृणीत: स्तृणन्ति। अस्तृणात् अस्तृणीतां अस्तृणन्
Pot. स्तृणीयाँ; imp. स्तृणानि ; ātm. pres. स्तृणे ; lst pret. अस्तृणि ; pot.
स्तृणीय ; imp. स्तृणै ; 2d pret. par. तस्तार', तस्तयि, &c. ; dual तस्तश्वि' ;
ātm. तस्तरे', &c. ; lst fut. स्तरितास्मि' or स्तरीतास्मि ; 2d fut. स्तरिष्यामि" or
स्तरीष्यामि ; 3d pret. स्रस्तारिर्ष' ; pass. part. स्तौणै'
*) This verb is also of the bth conjugation स्तृणोमि, स्तृणोषि, स्तृणोति, स्तृणुव:,
&c., when there is a striking resemblance to the Greek orropvijut, orrāpyuk, &c. ; and
imperf. 6ordiptuv, dordovus, &c. ") p. 75. e. १) p. 76. b. ") p. 70. b. e) p. 82. a.
i) r. l25. d.

ExAMPLE OP CAUSALS, OR WERBS OF THE TENTH

CONJUGATION (p. 86. r. 107.).
Root दृश् dris/. Inf. दशैयितुं, “ to cause to see," " show.'
PARASMAIPADA. Presemt.-“ I cause to see."

दशैयामि darshayāmi, दशैयाव: darshayāoa/।, दशैश्याम: darshayamah.

दशैयसि darsha/asi, दशेयय: darshayatha/), दशैीयय darshayatha.
दशैयति। darsha/ttti, दशेयत: durs/ंdyata/, दर्शयन्ति darsha/anti.
 126 ExAMPLE 0F 0AUSAL WERBS.

Imperfect. “ I was causing to see."

सदशैर्यं adarshayam, स्रदशैोयाव adarshayāra, सदशेयाम adarshayāma

अदशैीयः adarshdya/।, स्रदशैोयतं adarshayatam, स्रदशेश्यत। ddarshajuta.
अदर्शयत् adarshagyat, स्रदशैीयतां ddarshdyatām, स्रदशैश्यन् adarshagyam.

Potential.-“ I may cause to see.''

दर्शयेर्यं darshagegam, दशैयेव darshogyeba, दशैयेम darshogyema.
दशैीये: darshayeh, दशैयेतं darshayetam, दशैीयेत darsha/eta.
दशैयेत्। darshaget, दशैयेतां darshayetam, दशैयेयुः darshageyu/।.
Imperatioe.-** Let me cause to see.”

दशैयानि darshayāni, दशैयाव darshayāca, दशैश्याम darshayāma.

दशैय darshagya, दशेयतं darshdyatam, दशैीयत। darshogyata.
दशैश्यतु darshagatuं, दशैयतां darshayatām, दशैयनु darshagyantu.

Secomd Preterite.-** I caused to see.''

दशैयामास' darshayāmāsa, दशैोयामासिव। darshayāmāsica, दशैोयामासिम darshayāmāsima.

दशैश्यामासिय darshayāmāsitha, दशैयामासयु: da?’shagyāmāsathuh, दशेयामास darshaāyāmāsa.
दशैयामास darshagāmāsa, दशैयामासतुः darshagāmāsatu/।, दशैयामासुः darshaāyāmāsuh.
First Future.-** I will cause to see.''

दशैयितास्मि darshayitāsmi, दशैयिताख: darshogyitasmoah, दशैयितास्मः darshayitāsmal.

दशैयितासि darshayitāsi, दशेयितास्यः darshayitasthah, दशेयितास्य darshayitastha.
दशैयिता darshagitā, दशैयितारौ darshag/itārauं, दशेयितार: darshayitārah.
Second Future.-** I will cause to see.'

दर्शयिष्यामि darshagishyāmi, दशेयिष्याव: darshayighyācah, दशैयिष्याम: darshayis/gimal.

दशैयिष्यसि darshayishyasi, दशैोयिष्यय: darshayishyathah, दशेयिष्यय darshayishgatha.
दशेयिष्यति। darshagi8/gyati, दशैयिष्यतः darshagig/ं/ata/।, दशैयिष्यन्ति। darshagi87aganti.

3d pret. अदीदृशं' or स्रददशॆ ; bened. दर्शयैासं'; cond. स्रदशैयिष्यं; Atm.

pres. दशैये, दशैश्यसे, दशैयते, &c. ; lst pret. स्रदशैये ; pot. दशैयेय ; imp.
दर्शये, दशेयख, &c. ; 2d pret. दशैयाच्वक्रे; lst fut. दशेयिताहे ; 2d fut.
दशैयिष्ये ; 3d pret. स्रदीदृशे, अदीद्दशया:, &c. ; bened. दशैयिषीय ; cond.
स्रदशैयिष्ये; p. part. दशैित',
*) or दशैयाच्चकार darshaganchakara, p. 87. r.108. P) r. 109. १) r. 110. ") r, 125. r.
After this model may be conjugated all causal verbS.
 ( I27 )
I28. ExAMPI,ES OR PASSIWE WERIBS. (p. 89. r. III.).

Root दा. Infin. दातुं, “ to be given.” (p. 90. r. 112.),

Present.–“ I am given.”
दीय diye, दीयावहे diyapahe, दीयामहे dāyāmahe.
दीयसे diyase, दीयेये di/ethe, दीयध्वे diyadhue.
दीयते diyate, दीयेते diyete, . दीयन्ते dijante,
First Preterite.-“ I was given.”
अदीये adiye, अदीयावहि adāyāpahi, अदीयामहि adāyāmahā.
अदीयया: adiyathah, अदीयेयीं ८tdiyethām, अदीयध्वं adiyadhulam.
चञदीयत adiyata, स्रदीयेतां adigetam, अदीयन्त adāyanta.
Potential.-* I may be given.”
दीयेय diyeya, दीयेवहि di/epahi, दीयेमहि dāyemahā.
दीयेयाः diyethāh, दीयेयायीं di/gyāthām, दीयेध्वं di/edhmoam.
दीयेत digeta, दीयेयातां diyeyatām, दीयेरन् dāyeram.
Imiperatioe.–“ Let me be given.”
दीयै diyai, दीयावहे dāyācahai, दीयामहे diyamahai.
दीयख्ब diyasua, दीयेयां di/etham, दीयध्वं diyadhacam.
दीयतां diyatām, दीयेतां dijjetām, दीयन्तां diyantām.
Second Preterite.-“ I have boen given.”
ददे। dade, ददिवहे dadioahe, ददिमहे dadimahe.
ददिषे dadishe, ददाये dadathe, ददिष्त्रे dadidhace (or द्वे),
ददे। dade, ददाते dadate, ददिरे। dadire.
First Future.–“ I shall be given.”
दाताहे datahe, or दाताखहे datāsuahe, दातास्महे datasmahe, &o.
{# dāyitāhe, दायिताखहे dāyitasuahe, दायितारमहेdāyitasmahe,४०.
_ Second Future.–“ I shall be given.” _

दास्ये dāsāye, or दास्यावहे। disg/tioahe, दास्यामहे dasyāmahe,&c.

{ं dāji8//e, दायिष्यावहे dārishgapaha, दायिष्यामहेdārishyāmaha,&o.
Third Preterite.–“ I was given.”
अदिषि adighi, or अदिष्वहि adishuahi, अदिष्महि adishmahā.
{े ddāyishi, अदायिष्वहि adāyighacahi, अदायिष्महि adāyishmahā.
{्काः ८dithāh, or अदिषायाँ adishathām, संदिद्वं ddidhulam.
अदायिष्ठा: adāyishthāh, सदायिषायां ddāgighāthām, अदायिध्वं adāyidhuam.
अदायिadāgi, “it wasgiven,” {े ं, ___ अदिषत। ं
स्रदायिषातां ddti)ishditām, अदायिषत। uddiyishata.
I28 ExAM PILBS OR PASSIWF) WERBS.

Bened. दासीय or दायिषौय, &c. ; cond. स्रदास्ये or सदायिष्ये.

Root कृ. Infः कर्बु , “ to be made " or “ done " (p. 90. U.),
Presem८.-“ I am made." Firsf Preterife.-'' I was made.'

क्रिये क्रियावहे क्रियामहे | अक्रिये अक्रियावहि अक्रियामहि

क्रियसे क्रियेये क्रियध्वे स्रक्रियया: अक्रियेयां सक्रियध्वं
क्रियते। क्रियेते क्रियन्ते अक्रियत अक्रियेतां अक्रियन्त

Potemtial.–“ I may be made." । Imperatire.–“ Let me be made.'

क्रियेय क्रियेवहि क्रियेमहि | क्रिये क्रियावह क्रियामहे

Second Preferide. F'irst Fattadre.

चक्रे चकृवहे चकृमहे {े कर्ह्राखहे कर्त्रास्महे, &c.

चकृषे चक्राये or कारिताहे कारिताखहे कारितास्महे,&c.
चक्रे वक्राते चरृिं Second fut. करिष्ये or कारिष्ये, &c.

Third Preferite.
SING_ DUAL. 1PLURAL_

अवृषि or अकारिषि । अवृष्वहि or अकाष्विहि । अकृष्महि or स्रकाश्मिहि

अकृया: or अकारिष्टा: । अवृषायां or अकारिषायां । अतॄंद्वं or अकारिष्वं
अकाग्,ि “ it was done,”| स्रकृषातां or अकारिषातां । अकृषत or अकारिषत।

Bened. कृषीय or कारिषीय ; cond. स्रकरिष्ये or अकारिष्ये.

The following is an example of a passive verb from a root

ending in a consOnant.

Root गुज. Infin. योर्चु, “ to be fitting."

Pres. युज्ये, “ I am fitting," युज्यसे, युज्यते, &c. ; Ist pret. अयुज्ये,
अयुज्यया:, अयुज्यत, &c. ; pot. युज्येय, &c. ; imp. युज्ये, युज्यख, युज्यतां, &c.;
2d pret. युयुजे, युयुजिषे, युयुजे, &c ; lst fut. योक्ताहे, योक्ासे, योक्ता, &e, ;
2d fut. योघ्ये, योघ्यसे, योल्पते, &c. ; 3d pret. अयुच्छ्,ि अयुक्या:, अयोजि,
स्रगुल्बहि, अयुच्चायां, &c. ; bened. गुष्ठीय, &c. ; cond. अयोघ्ये, &c.
 ( I29 )
IDBSIDERATIWE WERBS.

II9. Although this form of the root rarely appears in its character
of a verb, yet nouns and participles derived from the desidera
tive base are not uncommon (see p. 23. xiii. r. 40., and p. 14l. ४).
Some explanation, therefore, of its structure is indiSpensable.
Moreover, there are certain roots which take a desiderative form,
without exactly yielding a volitive signification ; and these, as
being eguivalent to primitive verbs (amongst which they are some
times classed), may occur in the best writers. For example,
.jugaps, “ to blame,' from the root gap ; chikids, “ to cure,' from
*it ; tifiksh, “ to bear," from dij; ?māmāms, “ to reason,' from mam ;
bibhats, “ to abhor,' from baid/.
The Ter??????dtio?as.

a. Desideratives take the terminations of the regular Scheme

at p. 63., and their inflection either in the par. or ātm. is deter
mined by the practice of the primitive verb. Thus, the root
८ud/, taking both inflections in the primitive, may take both in
the desiderative (Gubodhishāmi, &c., or babodhishe, &c.); and lab/,
taking only the ātm. in the primitives, may take only the ātm.
in the desiderative (/ipse, &c.).
FORMATION OF THE BASE.

Co?ijagational Temses.
८. The initial consonant and vowel of the root are reduplicated,
and if the root inserts i in the primitive (see p. 79.) then ish is
affixed : if the root rejects i, then simply s, changeable to ष् s/,
is affixed. Thus, from Kship, “ to throw,' the base chikships
(विष्प्सिामि chikshipsāmi, &c.); but from cid, “ to know," taking
inserted º in the primitive, cioidis/ (विविदिषामि cāpādis/āmi, &c.).
The reduplication of the consonant is strictly in conformity with
the rules laid down at p. 75., and that of the vowel of the initial
consonant follows the analogy of causal third preterites (p. 88.);
that is, the vowel i (generally, however, Short) is reduplicated for
o, ā, i, ?, ri, ??, e, or ai ; but the vowel a८ for a, ā, and o.* Thus,

* And if the root begin with a vowel the reduplication still follows the analogy
of the same tense ; thus, from osh, ashish, and with ish added, ashishish. See p. 89.
S
130 IDBSIDERATIW B W IBRBS.

from pach, piptaksh ; from yāch, /iyāchis/ ; from jºu, jijirish ; from
drish, didriksh ; from sep, siseri8/ ; from gai, jigās ; but from
3/adj, 9a८yuks/ ; from pā, pupi78/.
c. It has been said that the annexation of i8/ or s to the
reduplicated root is generally determined by the assumption or
rejection of inserted i in the primitive. When ish is affixed, the
radical vowel may in general be optionally changed to Guna.
ThuS, from mud, either mum0dish Or mumudis/. _

d. When s is affixed to roots ending in vowels it has the effect

of lengthening a final i or a, and changing ri or rā to ir ; thus,
from chi, chichish ; from shru, shashrā8/ ; from Kri, chikār8/ ; from
trº, ditārsh.* When to roots ending in consonants, the radical
vowel remains unchanged, but the final consonant combines with the
initial Sibilant, in accordance with the rules laid down in pp. 67. 68. ;
as, from yudh, yuyats (p. 08. ८.); from da/), didhaksh (p. 69. i),
e. The following roots form their desiderative bases anoma
lously, From dā, “ to give," di/४ (diºsāmi, “ I wish to give ');
from āp, “ to obtain,'' 7ps ; from dhā, dhits ; from ji, “ to conguer,''
.jigāsh ; from chi, chikºsh, as well as chichis/ ; from /ham, “ to kill,'
.jighāms ; from यह्) जिपृष्व् ; from प्रच्छ् , पिपृळिम् ; from खप् , सुषुप्स् ;
from शक् , “ to be able," शिछ् ; from लभ् , “ to obtain,' लिप्स् ; from
ग्भ, रिम् ; पत् , पित्स्.
_ Nom Corijugational Temses.
The second preterite is formed by affixing am to the desiderative base, as already
formed, and adding the second preterite of cither one of the auxiliaries kri or bhā
(see p. 77.g.). Thus from pach, the 2d pret. pipokshānchakāra, “ I wished to cook.''
In all the remaining tenscs it is an universal rule that inserted i be assumed after
the desiderative base, whether formed by s or i8/, except in the bened. par. Thus,
Ist fut. of pipaksh, Ist perS. Sing. pipakshitasmi, &c. ; 2d fut. pipakshiglं/āmi, &c. ;
8d pret. upipakshisham, &g. (form I. p. 81.) ; bemed. par. pipakshyāsam, &c. ;
ātm. pipakshishāya, &c. ; condit. opipakshishydm, &c. So, also, taking oiuidish
(formed with ish from oid), the Ist fut. is gioidishittismi ; 2d fut. ciuidishishgyāmi ;
*}d pret. abioidishisham, &c.

* But the root पृ may make पुपूपै ; भृ, बुभ्रुपॆ ; and वृ, वुळूषै .
 ( l3I )
INTENSIWE OR FREOUENTATIWE WERBS.
120. This form of the root is even less used than the deside
rative. In the present participle, however, and in a few nouns,
it may sometimes appear (r. 38. xiii. and l24). It gives intensity
to the radical idea, especially in the case of roots signifying “ to
shine," “ to be beautiful," or “ to lament.' Thus, from dip, “ to
shine," comes the intensive form dedipy, “ to shine brightly," and
the present participle dedipyamāna (see r. l21); so also from shubh,
s/tos/iubhy and shoshubyamānd ; from rud, rorudy and rorudyamāma.
There are two kinds of intensive verb, the one a reduplicated
ātmanepada verb, conforming, like neuter and passive verbs, to
the 4th conjugation, and usually found in a neuter or passive signi
fication ; the other a reduplicated parasmaipada verb, formed
analogously to the 3d conjugation. The first of these is the only
form ever likely to occur.

772e Terj?????adi0?as.

The terminations may be either those of the itm. of the regular

scheme at p. 63., or the par. of the irregular Scheme at p. 66. ;
the former being adapted to that form of intensive which results
from a reduplication of the passive ; the latter to that form which
bears analogy to the 3d conjugation.
FORMATION Op THE BASE OF THE ATMANDPADA FORM OF INTENSIWES•

Conjugational Temses.
The general rule is, that the initial consonant and vowel of the
passive base be reduplicated. The consonant being reduplicated
according to the usual rules (p. 75.), with the Guna substitute of
the radical vowel, whether it be long or Short. Thus, from the
passive base dā/ (of da, " to give ') comes the intensive base dediy
(dediye, dediyase, &c., see p. 127.); from hāy (passive of hā), jehāy
(jehāye, &c.); from stāry, testiry ; from piy, poptiy ; from oidy,
oeuidy ; from Dudhy, Uobudky.
If the passive base contain a medial a, long a is substituted in the reduplication,
aspāpachy frompach ; sismary from smary : if a medial fi, e, or o, the same are
reduplicated ; as gāyāchy from /tich, sesherg/ from ser, lolockg/ from lock/ : ifa medial
श्, then arº is substituted in the reduplication, as daradrishy from dris//, parग्
spris// from spris///.
 132 INTENSIW E, OR FREOUENTATIWE WERBS.

Ifa passive base contain f ri, this becomes री in the intensive base ; as चेक्रीय्
from fक्रय् (pass. ofकृ, “to do”). If the base begin with a, as in at/ (from अद् .
“ to wander'), the initial at is repeated, and the radical d lengthened, thus attity.
If the passive base contain a nasal after Short a, this nasal is often repeated ; as
from gum,.jan'gam/ (जङ्गम्ये, &c.), “ to walk crookedly ”; from bhram, bambhrumy.
The passive bases.jap/, .julp/, dash/, bhdji/, and some others, may insert nasals,
instead of lengthening the vowel in the reduplication. Thus.juijap), Ac. Pady
inserts n? s as pamºpady ; and from chary is formed chdiuchitry ; from harg/,.7eghnāy s
from ghrā),.jegliri/ ; from dhmā/, dedhmiy. _

Non-Corgjugational Temses.
In these tenses intensives follow the analogy of passives and reject the affix /.
Since, however, the base of the second pret. is formed by affixing tim (as usual in
' all polysyllabic forms, p. 77. g.), and since, in all the other tenses, inserted i is
assumed, a coalition of vowels might arise were it not allowed to retain the 3/ in all
cases in which a vowel immediately precedes that affix.* Thus, from dedipy is
formed the 2d pret. (Ist perS. Sing.) dediptinchakre, & c. rejecting 3/ ; but from dedig/,
dediyaichakre, &c. retaining it. Similarly in the other tenses : Ist fut. dedipitahe,
&c. ; dediyittihe, &c. : 2d fut. dedipi8/gye, &c., dediyishye, &c. ; 8d pret. ८dedipishā,
&c., adedi/ighi, &c. ;! bened. dedipighāya, &c., dedi/ighi/a, ४c. ; cond. adedipighāye,
& c., ddedi/is/ं/e, &c.

FORMATION OR' THE BASE OP THE PARASMAIPADA FORM OR INTENSIWES.

Corºjugatiomal Temses.
121. The base is here also formed by a reduplication Similar to that of ātmane
pada intensives; not, however, from the passive, but from the r00t. Thus from the
root puch, pāpach ; from oid, cecid ; from drish, daridrish ; from kri, charikri.ीं
Moreover, in accordance with the rules for the 2d and 8d conjugation (pp. 69. 70.)
the radical vowel reguires Guna before the e terminations of the scheme (p. 66.).
Hence the two bases peped and oeoid (pres. १ebedmi, beoetsi, oecetti ; dual, oeridurah,
&c. s Ist pret. auepedam, aretiet, doeoet, areciduca, &c. ; pot. cecidyām, &c.; imp.

* In passives this c0alition of vowels is avoided by the change of a final vowel to

Wriddhi, as of chi to chā/, of hu to hār, and of kri to kār ; and by the change of
final tº to di/, as of da to dāy, see r. II8.
f In the par. form of intensive, the reduplication may also be daridrish, charikri,
or, according to the general rule dardrish, charkri.
 NO'MINAL W IERBS. 133

oeoedami, oeciddhi, oeoettu, trepedia'u, oecittam, &c.). Again, the base will wary in
accordance with the rules of combination at p. 07., as in budh (pres, Gobodhmi,
bobhotsi, boboddhi, bobudhurah, &c.). And in further analogy to the 2d conjugation
(r. 92. c.) long ? is often optionally inserted before the consomantal P terminations
(preS. oepedimi, beoedishi, Jepediti ; dual, oegidurah, &c. ; Ist pret. ageoedam, aue
oedah, abeuedit, doetidura, &c. s imp. oepedāmi, oeciddhi, oeceditu.).
Lastly, when the root ends in a wowel, the usual changes take place of i and ? to
3/ 0r iy s of u and in to ut; ; and of ri to r : as in the roots bhi, bhā, kri (pres. Ist Sing.
bebhemi, bobhomi, charkarmi ; 8d plur. bebhgati, bobhubati, charkrati).
Non-Coigjugational Temses.
The second preterite follows the usual rule for polysyllabic bases (p.77. g.),
and affixes am with the auxiliaries. Thus from oid (Ist pers. sing.), pecidāmāsa ;
from bhं, beblyāmāsa. In the other tenses, excepting the bened., inserted i is
invariably assumed, and before this inserted i a root ending in a vowel forbids the
usual Guna change in the futures, but admits Wriddhi in the 8d pret. Thus, Ist
fut. (Ist Sing.) beoeditasmi, &c., bebligitāsmi, &c. ; 2d fut. beuedishāyāmi, &c., bebligi
&kg/āmi, &g. ; 8d pret. abepedisham, &'c., abebhājisham, &g. ; bened. oecidyāsam, & c.,
८ebhi/āsam g cond. acepedishgam, abebhgighyam. This rejection of Guna is taken
from Forster, but admits of guestion, especially in the case of roots in a or ā.

NOMINALS, OR WERBS DERIWED FRO'M NOUNS.

l22. These are formed by adding certain affixes to the orude
of nouns. They are not in very common use, but, theoretically,
there is no limit to their formation. They may be classed under
three heads : Ist, transitive nominals, yielding the sense of per
forming, practising, making or using the thing or guality expressed
by the noun ; 2d, intransitive nominals, giving a sense of behaving
like, becoming like, acting like the person or thing expressed by
the noun ; 3d, desiderative nominals, yielding the sense of wishing
for the thing expressed by the noun. The latter are rarely found.
7'/le Te???????afi0228.

a. All the nominal verbs make use of the regular scheme at

p. 63. ; but it should be observed that they are rarely found con
jugated in any other tense than the present.
Formatiom 0f the Base 0f Tramsitige Wominals.
b. These are formed from nouns in the way that causals are
134 NO'MINAL, V ERBS.

formed from roots, by the addition of ay to the crude. But the

final vowel or final consonant, and preceding vowel of the crude,
must be rejected before this affix is annexed. Thus, from oastra,
“cloth,' is formed oastray, “ to clothe " (3d sing. वस्त्रयति bastrayati,
“ he clothes'); from oarman, “ armour," oarmay, “ to put on
armour " (वम्मैयति carmayati); from प्रमाण, “ authority," प्रमाणय् ,
“ to propose as authority.' Whatever modifications adjectives
may undergo before the affixes yas and ishtha (p. 47. *), the same
are reguired before this nominal affix : thus, from dirgha, “ long,'
drāg/ay, “ to lengthen '; from amtika, “ near,' ?meday, “ to make
near," &c.

In the Mitralabha (Prof. Johnson's edition, p. 97.) there is an instance of a nomi

nal werb formed by adding the terminations directly to the noun ; thus, चचूामि,
* I peck,” from चबु, **a beak.”

Formation of the Base 0f Intramsitioe Wominals.

c. The final of the crude of the noun is rejected, as in the last
case, and āy affixed. Thus, from pandita, " wise,' panditāy, “ to
act the part of a wise man " (3d sing. पण्डितायते); from drama,
“ a tree,' dramāy, “ to be like a tree '' ( ); from rājam, “ a
king," rāpāy, “ to act the king " (ण्जायते). This nominal usually
has a neuter or passive signification, and is generally restricted to
the ātm. It is found, however, in an active sense, especially
when derived from mouns expressive of colour ; as, from कृष्ण ,
“ black," कृष्णाय् , “ to blacken " (कृष्णायते),
Formatiom 0f the Base 0f Desideratioe Nominals.
d. These are formed by affixingg to the final wowel of a crude noun. The effect,
however, of this affix is to change a final a or a to ं, to lengthen a final i or u, and
to change चमृ ri to री. Thus from putra, “ a son,” putri), “ to desire a son"
(8d Sing. पुचीयति) ; frompati,“a husband,” patāy, “ todesireahusband” (पतीयति).
So also from मातृ, माचीय्;from rtijam, rāji) (r. 20. *.).
A desiderative nominal verb may also be formed by adding kāmg/ (derived from
kam, “ to desire ") to the crude of nouns : thus from putra, putrakāmy, ** to desire
a Son” (8d Sing. पुचकाम्यति) ; or by affixing s/ ; as from dhama, dhamasy, “ to
desire wealth” (धनस्यति).
 CHAPTER, WII.

PARTIOIPI,ES.

THIS is a Subject in some respects perhaps the most important

that has hitherto engaged our attention. We have endeavoured
in the last chapter to show, that however Complex the structure
of the Sanscrit verb, and however repulsive to the Student at the
Commencement of his studies, this complexity is one rather of
theory than practice, and one that.hardly extends beyOnd the pages
of the grammar, and is little felt, provided the attention be con
fined to the earlier and purer Specimens of Hindu literature.
The cause of this has been shown to be, that the difficulty of the
verb expends itself on tenses that are rarely if ever used by the
best writers. We are now to show that the necessity for these
tenses is superseded by participles, the use of which prevails to
an extent wholly unparalleled in any other language, even in
the Greek. These participles often discharge the functions of
the verb itself, and are constantly found occupying the place of
past and future tenses, and more especially those of passive verbs ;
insomuch that an instance of a passive in amy other tense than
the present or imperative rarely occurs. The consideration,
therefore, of this portion of Our Subject bears most closely upon
the idiomatic structure of the language ; and So prominent a
position do these verbal derivatives hold in the construction of
sentences and collocation of words, that an accurate knowledge
of the mode of their formation and the nature of their duties

afords the best insight into the peculiarities of Sanscrit Syntax,

and elucidates many of the difficulties of idiom in the cognate
dialects of India.
It may be desirable to premise that the ?most importamt of these
participles are not derived immediately from the verb, but from
a common source with the verb, wiZ. the root. The Subject,
therefore, has not been mixed up with that of verbal inflection,
 136 PRESBNT PARTICIP LES.

although in the very first instance, and in others which follow,

the participle is deducible directly from a tense.

PRESBNT PARTICIPILES. PARASMAIPADA.

Formatiom 0f the Crude.

l23. These are the only participles that have any affinity with।
the conjugational structure of the verb. The crude is formed by
Substituting at for anti, the termination of the 3d person plural of
the present tense, So that the peculiarities of conjugation neces
sarily appear in the participle. Thus, from pachamti, “ they cook ''
(8d plur. pres. of पच् , Ist conj.), comes पचत् pachat, " cooking ";
from g/imanti (3d plur. of han, 2d conj.), ghnat ; from यन्ति , “ they
go," यत् , “ going "; from यान्ति , यात् ; from ju/ifoati (3d plur. of hu,
3d conj) जुहत् jahnat; from nrityanti (4th conj.), nrityat; from
chinnanti (5th conj.), चिन्वत् chinicat; from āpnucanti (bth conj.)
āpnuoat ; from randhanti (rudh, 7th conj.), rundhat ; from kurgamti।
(कृ, 8th conj.), karcat ; from punanti (pā, 9th conj) puna८. So
again from samti (Bd plur. of as, “ to be '), sat; from the causal
dars/ayamti (p. 125.), darshaya/ ; from the desiderative ditsamti
(p. l30, e), ditsat.
d, It has been remarked (p.62. and p.80., note f.) that the passive verb may
sometimes assume a parasmaipada inflection ; and that all the neuter verbs placed
under the 4th conjugation may be considered as s0 many examples of this form of
the passive. This theory is corroborated by the fact of the existence of a paras
maipada present participle derivable from apassive base. Thus from दृश्य् , दृश्यत् ,
** being seen” ; from चीय्, चीयत् , * being gathered.”

JDeclemsio??.

b. This in general conforms to r. 63. Thus, पचन् , nom. sing.

du. pl. mase. पचन् pacham, पचन्ती pachantauं, पचन्त: pachanta/ ; fem.
पचन्ती, पचनयी , पचनयः; neut. पचत् , पचन्ती, पचन्ति .
c. But in irregular primitives of the 3d conj., and all verbs
from polysyllabic roots, and all other verbs which reject the nasal
from the plural of the parasmaipada (see p. 69. note), the nom.
sing. masc. is identical with the crude, and ends in at instead of
am ; and the nasal is, moreover, rejected from the du. and pl.
 PRBSBNT PARTIOIPI,BS. 187

masc., and from the fem. Thus, Oil)/rad (from भृ , * to bear,'

3d conj.), nom. sing. du. pl. mase, Dibhrat, bibhratau, Gibhrata/ ;
fem. bibhratº, bibhratyau, Dibhratyah. So also j7grat (from जागृ)
and shāsat (from शाम्). They also drop the nasal in the dual neut.
d, It must also be taken as a general rule, that all other
irregular primitives of the 2d, 5th, 7th, Sth, and 9th conjugations
reject the nasal in the feminine, although they retain it in the
masculine. Thus, adat (from ad, 2d conj.), nom. mase. adan,
adantau, adantah ; fem. adati, &c. ; and randhat (from radh, 7th।
conj.) nom. masc. rundhan, randhantau, &c., fem. rundhati, &e.
But this rule is not universal, for Kuroat (from कृ, 8th conj) is
/kadrgamta in the nom. fem.

PRESIENT PARTICIPILES. ATMANEPADA.

Formation of the Crude.

l24. The crude is formed by substituting amāna for ande, the
termination of the 3d plur. pres. of regular primitive and passive
verbs; and by substituting ama for ate, the termination of the
3d plur. pres. of irregular primitives. Causal verbs take either
dmāna or ama, but more freguently the latter. Thus, from पचन्ते
packante, पचमान pachamana ; from तिष्ठन्ते (stha, Ist conj.), तिष्ठमान ;
from नृत्यन्ते (4th conj), नृत्यमान; from लिम्पन्ते (lip, 6th conj.), लिम्पमान ;
from the causal darshayante (p. l26.), either darshayamāna, or, more
freguently, darshayāma ; from pedayante, bedayāma ; from the de
siderative ditsamte, ditsamāma.
a. But from बुवते Gracate (ब्रू , 2d conj.), ब्रुवाण brutāna ; from
दधते (dhā, 3d conj.), दधान ; from chinfoate (5th conj.), chinicina ;
from युञ्जते (7th conj.), युञ्जान ; from कुवैते (Sth conj.), कुवॆाण ; from
पुनते (9th conj.), पुनानः. The root खास् , “ to sit " (2d conj), makes
अ'ासीन for चासानः.
Declemsi0??.

b. These participles are declined like nouns of the first class,

p. 3l. Thus, pachamāma, nom. maSc. pachamāma/), fem. pachamānā,
neut. pac/2amāimam.
PAST PARTICIPILES.

Passioe Past Participle.-Formation of the Crude.

125. This is the most useful derivative in the language, and is
T।
 । ~..
`.

138 PASSIW IR PAST PARTI0IP LB.

of constant occurrence. It corresponds to the Latin participle

in tus, and, like it, often supplies the place of the past tense. In
neuter roots, especially those which imply motion of any kind, it
is used actively, and often stands for the perfect tense active ; as,
विवरं प्रविष्टः , ‘‘ he entered his hole ''; यामं गत:, “ he went to the
village.' And in all cases this participle may be used to supply
the place of the past tenses of the passive verb, the agent being
placed in the instrumental case, and the participle agreeing with
the object : as, तेन बन्धनानि छिन्नानि, “ by him the bonds were cut.”*
Moreover, it may be used with the auxiliary verbs अस् and भू ,
“ to be,' to form a compound past or future tense, as the Latin
participle is used with the auxiliary sam. Thus, प्राप्नो-स्ति, “ he
has obtained '; प्राप्नो भविष्यति, “ he will have Obtained ''; गतो-स्मि,
“ I am gone "; कृतमस्ति, “ it is done." Lastly, it is sometimes used
in the neuter gender for a substantive ; as, दर्त्तं, “ a gift '; खार्त ,
“ an excavation."f
This participle may be regarded as falling under four heads :
lst, as derived from roots ; 2dly, as derived from causal bases ;
3dly, as derived from desiderative bases; 4thly, as derived from
nominal bases.

I. Deriped from Boots.

a, In general the crude is formed by adding ta (त) directly to
the root ; aS, fromछ्य्ि kship, “ to throw,'' kshipta, “ thrown '; or
if the root end in चg rº, by adding na (न); as, from कृ krं, “ to
SCatter,'' कीर्णे kārma, “ scattered.”Some roots in a, ?, and a, some
in ai preceded by two consonants, with some of those in d, r, and
.j, rejecting inserted i, also take ma instead of ta.
८. Roots ending in vowels do not admit inserted i in this

* This kind of construction is exceedingly common in Sanscrit, and has been

transferred from it to Hinduistani. The particle me in this latter language corre
Sponds most clearly to the Sanscrit ma, which is the usual Sign of the instrumental
case, and can newer occasion any difficulty ifit be regarded in this light.
f In a few instances this participle has a present Signification ; as, भीत, “ fearing"
८८ ____**
स्यित, “ standing.
 PASSIWE; PAST PARTI0IPLB. 139

participle, although they may admit it in the futures* (p. 79. a. ८. c.),
but attach ta or ma directly to the root : as, from gyā, /āta ; from
.ji, jita ; from m2, ?māta ; from shru, shrata ; from bhā, bhāta ; from
कृ• कृत ; from घ्राः, घाण (r. 21.); from li, lina ; from ही, ह्रीण ; from
८े7, /i7?ma.
c. But in certain cases the final vowel of the root is changed ;
thus, Some roots in a change a to i before da : as, from stha, sthita ;
from ma, ?mita ; from daridra, daridrita. Dha, “ to place,'
becomes hita ; dā, “ to give,' datta ,f pā, " to drink,' pāda. Ha।,
“ to guit," becomes hº before ma (हीन). Some roots in a take both
?ad and ta ; as, from घा, घाण and घात ; from वा with the prepo
sition निर्, निवैणि and fनवैात.
d. Roots in चमूं ? change rā to ?r before ma, which passes into
pa (ण) by r. 21. ; as, from तृ, “ to pass," तीर्णे , “ passed." But
from पृ , पूणै, ** full.''
e. The root dhe, “ to suck," becomes dhā before da ; hipe, “ to
call," hā (हूत); pe, “ to weave" ५ (उत)
.f Roots in ट ai generally change ai to ā, before ma or da ; as,
from म्ले ?ndai, “ to fade,'' म्लान mlāna ; from यै , “ to meditate,"
ध्यात; from दे, “ to purify," दात ; from चै , “ to rescue," चाण or चात.
But from गे, “ to sing," गीत ; from झे, “ to waste," छ्ाम.
g. Roots in श्री o change o to i ; as, from so, sita ; from शो, शित.
/. Those roots ending in consonants which take the inserted i।
(p. 79. d) generally take this vowel also in the past participle.
In such cases ta is affixed, and never ma ; aS, from pat, " to fall,'
patita, “ fallen "; and if a or ri precede the final consonant of the
root, these vowels may take Guna ; as, from dyut, dyotita ; from
मृष् , मषैित. Grah, lengthens the inserted i (गृहीत, “taken '),
ā. Roots ending in consonants which forbid the inserted i must
be combined with ta, agreeably to the rules at pp. 67. 68. What
ever form, therefore, the final consonant assumes before the
termination tā of the lst future (p. 80.), the same form will gene

* शी, however, makes शयित, and पू may be पवित as well as पूत.

f When prepositions are prefixed to datta, the initial da may be rejected ; thus,
atta for adatta, “ taken ”; ;pratto for pradatta, “ bestowed '; १yātta for tyādatta,
** expanded"; paritta for paridatta ; sātta for sudatta, the iand u being lengthened.
140 PASSIW E PAST PARTICIPLE.

rally be preserved before the ta of the past participle ; so that,

in many cases, this participle may be derived from the 3d Sing.
of the lst future by shortening the final a, and, if necessary,
restoring the radical vowel to its original state. Thus, taking
some of the examples at p. 80 ; shaktā, “ he will be able,' gives
shakta, “ able '; sekta, “ he will sprinkle,' sikta, “ Sprinkled '; moktā,
makta ; प्रष्टा, पृष्ट ; tyakta, tyakta ; yokrā, 9ukta ; स्रष्टा, मृष्ट ; माहैी, मृष्ट ;
seddhā, siddha ; boddhā, Uuddha ; /oddhā, /uddhd ; ks/leptā, ks/ःipta ;
loprā, lupta ; sarpta, sripta ; kalpta, ktripta ; labdhā, labdha ; lobd/a,
/abdha ; वेष्टा, विष्ट ; द्रष्टा, दृष्ट ; क्रोष्टा, क्रुष्ट ; तष्टा, तष्ट ; टष्टा, इष्ट ; द्वेष्टा,
द्विष्ट; दोष्टा, दुष्ट; क्रष्टा, कृष्ट; दग्धा, दग्ध; सोढा, सोढ; नडा, नड ; गाढा,
गाढ; लेढा, लैौढ (p. 68. /ं); देग्धा, दिग्ध; नग्धा, स्निग्धः रोढा, रूढ (p. 68. h.); .
मोढा, मूढ ; or मोग्धा , मुग्ध; दोग्धा, दुग्ध ; गोढा, पूढ.
j. Most roots ending in d, forbidding the inserted i, take na in
stead of ta, and are combined with ma, agreeably to r. l5 ; as,
from pad, pamma ; from ad, amma ; from bhid, bhimma ; from सद्,
with the preposition fव, विषणं (r. 30. and 21.)
K. Those roots ending in j, which take ma, change j to g before
na ; as, from cij, cigma ; from ragj, rugma. So from masj, rejecting
the s, ?magma ; from lasj, lagma.
1. Some roots which admit i in the futures, forbid it in this
participle ; as, धृष्, in lst fut. धषैिता, in part. धृष्ट ; so अदै, अर्दिता, but
अन्ते (with a prefixed, स्रात्रॆ, “ pained'); दृह्।, दहैिता, but दृढ ; मद्, मदिता,
but मक्तः. See also p. 109.
m. If in forming the passive base (p. 90. f), or in the 2d pret.
(p. 76. d), the g or y contained in a root are changed to their
Semi-vowels a८ or i, the same change takes place in the pass. par
ticiple ; thus, from cach, “ to say," akta ; from oop, upta ; from वह्।,
ऊढ ; from खप्, सुघ्न ; from यज्, इष्ट- Similarly, from दिव्, द्यून or द्यूत ;
from त्वर्, तूर्णे. _

?. Some other changes which take place in forming the passive

base (See p. 90. d. Jr) are preserved before da ; thus, from शास्र्, शिष्ट ;
from व्यध्, विड़. And when the root ends in two conjunct con
SOnants, of which the first is a masal, this nasal is rejected ; as, from
बन्ध्, बड ; from भ्रंशं, भ्रष्ट ; from अन्त्र, स्रक्तः; from सन्त्रं, सक्तः; from भच्,
भग्न : but not if ? is inserted ; as, from खण्द्, खण्डित ; from क्रन्द्,
क्रन्दित (except मन्य्, making मयित),
o. Roots ending in ?m or ?a reject these nasals before da ; as,
 PASSIW B PAST PARTI0IPLE. 141

from gam, “ to go,' gata ; from /am, Gwata ; from ram, rata ; from
८८ट?a, tata ; from /am, /iata : but retain them if a is inserted ; as,
from sfoam, smpamita. From jam, “ to be born,' is formed.jata ; from
/c7am, khāta ; the a being lengthened.
p. Those roots ending in m, of the 4th conjugation, which
lengthen a medial a before the conjugational affix /, also lengthen
it before da, and change ?m to m as in the futures ; thus, from Kram
(r. 89. a), Kranta ; from Dhrām, Ghrānta ; from sham, shānta ; from
dam, dāmta ; from ksham, ks/anta ; from klam, klanda, Similarly,
from gam, gāmta ; from Kam, kāmta.
7. From स्फाय्, “ to swell,” is formed स्फीत ; from प्याय्, पीन or प्यानं.
r. The following are guite anomalous ; from pach, “ to cook,'
22akrga ; from शुम्, “ to dry," शुष्क; from छीव्, “ to be drunk," वि.
2. Deriped.from Caasal Bases.
r. In forming the passive past participles from these, the
Causal affix ay is rejected, but the inserted i is always assumed.
Thus, from /kāray, kārida; from st/tāpay, sthāpita ; from oeday, pedita.
3. Deriged from Desideratioe Bases.
8. In adding ta to a desiderative base, the only rule to be
observed is the invariable insertion of । ; as, from pipās, pipāsita ;
from chikār8/, chikārshita ; from ips, ?psita.
4. Deriped from Wominal Bases.
t. There are in Sanscrit certain participles, which are said to
be formed by adding ita to nouns. Thus, from शिथिल, “ loose,"
शि`ियलित, “ loosened '; from जिह्म, “ crooked,'' जिझित, “ curved.''
These may be regarded as the passive participles of the transitive
nominal verbs शिायिलयति, जिझयति (r. l22. ८.); and whenever this
kind of adjective is found, it may indicate that a nominal verb is
in use, whence the participle is derived.
JDeclensiom 0f Passioe Past Participles.
They all follow the declension of the first class of nouns (r. 48.
49. 50), and in this exhibit a perfect Similarity to the declension
of the Latin participle in tus. Thus, krita, nom. masc. fem. neut.
krita/), kritā, kritam.*
* Since / is eguivalent to s and d to ta, the nom. might be written -tus, -tā, -tum.
 ( I42 )
ACTIWE PAST PARTICIPILES.

126. These are of two kinds ; lst, those derived from the
passive past participle ; 2dly, those derived from the second pre
terite. These latter rarely occur. The former are much used
(especially in modern Sanscrit, and in the writings of commen
tators), to supply the place of a perfect tense active. Thus, tat
kritarān, “ he did that "; tat kritacati, “ she did that." They may
also be used with the auxiliaries as and bhā, to form a compound
perfect tense ; thus, tat kritacan asti, “ he has done that "; tat
kritapān bhapishyati, “ he will have done that."
Formatiom 0f the Crude.
a. In the case of those derived from the passive past participle,
the crude is easily formed by adding pat to that participle. Thus,
from Krita, kritapat (कृतवत्) ; from dagdha, ddgdhdoat ; from aakta,
uktauat; from bhimma, Dhimmatºat ; from sthāpita, sthāpitacat, &c.
b. In the case of those derived from the 2d pret., either oas or ioas is added to
the base of that tense, as formed in the dual and plur. Was, when the base in the
dual and plur. consists of more than one syllable ; as, from tricid (p. 96.), oioiducas ;
from chichi (p. 96.), chichious. But ioas, when the base in the dual and plur. con
sists of one syllable only ; as from tem (p. 90.) temious ; from.jugm (p. 77. e.),
.jagmious. There is an atmanepada participle of the 2d pret. formed by adding ama
to the base ; thus, oiuidāma, chic/ं/āna, tendina,.7agmdiad.
JDeclemsiom.

127. Those formed from the passive past participle are

declimed r. 62. ; thus, kritagat, nom. masc. fem. neut. kritacān,
Kritacati, r. 49., Kritarat.
। Those formed from the 2d pret. are declined in the last paragraph of p. 44. ; thus,
oioidacas, nom. masc. fem. meut. oiuiduotin, cipidus/ia, tricidurah ; and chichioas,
nom. chichipān, chiclyushi, chichioah. Those formed with ioas do not retain i in
the fem. ; thus, teniods, nom. masc. fem. neut. temiodin, temushā,* temioah ; and
.jagmioas, nom. .jugmiotin, .jugmu*/ti,.jugmioah. The ātmanepada participles are
declined like nouns of the first clasS, p. 81.

* Similarly the instr. case masc. is temushā. There seems, however, much dif
ference of opinion as to the rejection of i, and Some Grammarians make the fem.
temyughi, and the inst. masc. fenyuंlati.
 ( I43 )
INDECLINABLE PAST PARTICIPILES.

128. These may be classed under two heads : lst, as formed

by affixing त्वा tica to uncompounded foots ; as, from Dhā, “ to be,"
bhāfica, “ having been "; 2dly, as formed by affixing य /a to roots
compounded with prepositions or other adverbial prefixes ; as,
from amabhā, amabhāya, “ having perceived '; from sdijabhā, 8aj
?Bhāya, “ having become ready." These indeclinable participles
are of the utmost importance, and some of the chief peculiarities
of the syntax of the language are to be traced to the freguency
of their occurrence.

The sparing use made in Sanscrit composition of relative

pronouns, conjunctions, and connective particles, is partly to be
attributed to the continual appearance of these indeclinable par
ticiples, by means of which the sense of a whole clause may be
Suspended, and sentence after Sentence strung together without
the.aid of a single copulative. The sense involved in them is gene
rally expressed by the English “ when," “after,” “ having," or “by ";
thus, tat kritica (तत् कृत्वा), “ when he had done that," “ after he had
done that,” “ having done that," “ by doing that.' See syntax.

Formatiom of the Indeclimable Participle from Umcompoumded Boots.

d. When the root Stands alone and uncompounded, the inde
clinable participle is formed with त्वा tica.*
This affix is closely allied to the ta of the passive past parti
ciple, r. l25., insomuch that the rules for the annexation of ta to
the root apply egually to the indeclinable affix tioa. The forma
tion, therefore, of one participle generally involves that of the
other ; thus, kshipta, “ thrown," kshiptica, “ having thrown"; कृतं,
“ done," कृत्वा, “ having done "; so स्यित, स्यित्वा ; दृष्ट, दृष्ट्ा ; दत्त, दत्वा ;
पीता, पीत्वा ; क्रान्त , क्रान्त्वा ; गृहीत , गृहीत्वा ; उषितं, उषित्वा ; उक्तः, उक्ा; बुड,
बुड़्ा ; ऊढ, ऊदृा ; हित (from धा), हित्वा. And where i is inserted
there is often an optional change of the radical vowel to Guna, as

* There are one or two instances in which an uncompounded root takes य ; as,
अच्यै, ‘*having rewerenced.”-Manu, 7th Book, 145. I. 4. Mahābh. 8. 8017.
144 INDEOLINABLE PARTICIPLES.

in the passive participle (r. l25. h.) ; thus, dyutitna or dyotitica from
dyut ; and मृष् alirays takes Guna (मषॆित्बा). There are a few
instances in which the inserted i is admitted before tmpā, although
rejected before ta ; as, lagna, lajjitica ; and, pice persd, as उषितं, उष्ट्रा.
८. A penultimate nasal is not always rejected before tica ; thus,
from रञ्च् , रक्तः, but ऐंक्ा or रक्ा , the rejection in the indeclinable
participle being generally optional.
c. The causal.verb, which rejects its characteristic ay before the
ita of the passive participle, retains it before itro7. Thus, sthāpita,
“ made to stand " (from the causal base sthāpay), but st/tāpayihrā,
“ having made to stand.'
d. The only important variation from the passive participle
occurs in those roots which take na for ta (r. l25. a.), In such
roots no corresponding change takes place of fica to mipā. Thus,
from शृ. जीणैः, but जरित्बा (or जरॊत्वा); from नॄंः तीणैः, but तीक्षॆा ; from
fछद्, fछन्न, but fछत्वा ; from भक्त्, भग्न, but भंक्ा or भक्ता; from रूजन् ,
रूग्न, but रूक्ा ; from हा, हीन, but हित्वा, “having guitted " (not
distinguishable from हित्वा, “ having placed," froma धा),
Formatiom 0f the Indeclimable Participle from Compoumded Roots.
When a root is compounded with a preposition or indeclinable
word, the indeclinable participle cannot be formed with tica-*
The affix य ga is then used, and the rules which regulate its
annexation to the root are some of them analogous to those which
prevail in other cases in which g/ is affixed ; see the rules for the
formation of neuters (r. 89.), passives (p. 90.), and the benedictive
mood (p. 85.).
a. But if a root end in a short vowel, instead of any lengthen
ing of this vowel, d is interposed ; as, from āshri, “ to take refuge ''
(root त्रि), āshritya, “ having taken refuge "; from निश्चि, निश्चित्य ;
from उल्लु, उलुत्य ; from संस्कृ, संस्कृत्य ; from निःमृं, निःमृत्य . The
lengthening of the radical vowel by coalition does not prevent this
rule ; as, from atā (ati with ), atitya.
८. If a root end in long a, ं, or a, no change takes place : as,
from oihā, oi/%āya ; from upakrā, apakrāya ; from oidhā, oi//tāya.
c. If in long चू ?, this vowel becomes ir ; as, from अवकृ ,
चवक्रयै. But from चापृ, चापूयै .
 INDB0 LINA BLB PARTIOIPLES. |l46

d, Final diphthongs pass into ā : as, from पण्ख्येि, परिव्याय (also

परिवीय) ; from अभिष्ये , अभिध्याय ; from स्रवसो , स्रवसाय . But from सो
with व्यव, व्यवस्य ; from स्राद्धे, आहूय .
e. A penultimate nasal is generally rejected ; as, from samāsaij,
samāsdiya ; from pramant/, pramat//a (used adverbially, “ vio
lently `); but from आशद् , आशङ्कय ; from आलिङ्गं , आालिङ्गय .
.f If a root end in a consonant the general rule is, that no
change takes place ; as, from mikship, mikshipya ; from prāp (pra
and ap), prāpya ; from ciksh (pi and iksh), ciks//a.
g. But some roots ending in am and am may optionally reject
the naSal, and interpose f between Short a and /a ; as, from
?mirgam, mirgatya or mirgamya ; from mi/lam, mihatya. Jam and
Khan instead of interposing /, lengthen the a ; as, from alkhan,
a८८khi70/d.
/. The changes which take place in certain roots before the y
of the passive (p. 90. f) are preserved before ya ; as, from वियह्।,
विगृह्म ; from साप्रल् , सापृच्म; from āryad/, ācidhya ; from gicas,
gyushya. स्फुर् lengthens its vowel before /a ; as, विस्फूयै .
i. In affixing ya to causal bases the characteristic ay is gene
rally rejected :* as,from pra00dhag/, pra00dhya (प्रबोध्य); from प्रसाख्य् ,
प्रसायै ; from सन्दशैय् , सन्दर्शयै.f
Aduerbial Indeclimable Participle.
There is another indeclinable participle yielding the Same Sense as those formed
with tacā and gya, but of very rare 0ccurrence except in the Bhatti kāvya. It is
eguivalent to the accusative case of a noun derived from a root, used adverbially ;
and is formed by adding am to the root, before which affix changes of the radical
vowel take place, Similar to those reguired before the causal affix tg/ (p. 86. c.).
Thus, from ???, ‘* to lead,' māyam, “ having led ''; from pā, ** to drink,' pāyam,
“ having drunk "; from hue, hto7/um ; from pach, pāchum ; from kship, kshepam ;
from ham, ** to kill,” ghātam. It often occupies the last place in a compound ; as in

* It is retained in some few instances; as, विगणय्य, “ having calculated'';

साकलय्य, “ having imagined "; सद्यय्य, “ having narrated.''
ी Thore are one or two instances of compounded roots formed with ttpā; as,
अनुध्यात्वा(from ध्ये), Rām. 1. 2. 20.
Especially in the case of causals, as निवज्ञेयित्वा .
U
146 F`UTURB PASSIWE' PARTI('IPLBS.

the expression समूलघातं, * having totally exterminated"; and in the following

passage from Bhatti :
लतानुपातं कुमुमान्यगृह्तात् स नद्यवस्कन्दमुपास्पृशच।

** The descendant of Kakutstha, Smiling Softly, repeatedly bending down the

creepers, would pluck the blossoms ; descending to the streams, would sip (the
waters) ; seating himself on some variegated rock, would recline in admiration
(of the scene).''
These participles generally imply repetition of the action, as in the passage
above, and in this Sense are themselves often repeated; as, dayam, dag/dm, “ having
repeatedly given.''

FUTURE PASSIWE PARTICIPLES.

129. These are amongst the most common and useful of all
participles, and may be classed under three heads : lst, as formed
with the affix तव्य datya ; 2dly, as formed with अनीय anāya ; 3dly,
as formed with य ya. These affixes yield a sense corresponding
to the Latin dus and the English able and ible, and most commonly
denote obligation or propriety and fitness. Thus, from bhagj, “ to
eat,' Ghoktatya, Or bhdjamāya, or bh0iya, " edible,' “ eatable,'' ‘‘ that
ought to be eaten '; from oac/, “ to speak," caktatya, or pachamāya,
or gāc/iya, “ to be Spoken,' “ dicendas.' They sometimes denote
simple futurity ; as, भोक्तव्य , “ about to be eaten ': and as the passive
past participle Supplies the place of a past tense, So the future
passive participle may Supply the place of a future tense passive ;
as in the following sentence, यदि पछ्'ी पतति तदा मया खादितव्य:, “ If
the bird falls, then it shall be eaten by me.'
Formation of Facture Passice Participles foith t/te d/fic तव्य tavya.
a. These are formed by Substituting tatya for fa, the termina
tion of the 3d pers. Sing. of the Ist future. Thus, from क्षेप्मा
Ashepta, “ he will throw," क्षेप्तव्य %sheptatya, “ to be thrown "; /6artळ,
“ he will do,' /6ardatya, “ to be done '; from Dhapitā, “ he will be,'
८/auitatya, “ about to be." And in the case of roots ending in
consonants rejecting i, whatever changes take place before da, the
same take place before tatya (see p. 80.); thus, //a/%/ā, /yaktarya
(relinguendas) ; प्रष्टा , प्रष्टव्य ; द्रष्टा , द्रष्टव्य ; Goddhā, Goddhatya ; dagdha,
dag///arya, &C.
 FUTURB PASSIWF) PARTICIPLES. 147।।

Formation of Fature Passire Participles icit/ the a/fic सनीय aniya.

८. This affix is added directly to the root, without any other
change than the Guna of the radical vowel. Thus, from वि c/%,
“ to gather,' चयनीय chayamāya, “ to be gathered '; from Dhā, Bhapa
?ढ़/a ; from कृ, करणीय (r. 2l.); from लिख्, लेखनीय ; from शुघ् , शोधनीय ;
from स्पृश्, स्पशैनीय ; from कृष्, कषैणीय (r. 2l.), A final diphthong
is changed to a ; as, from ध्ये, ध्यानीय; from गे, गानीय.
Formation of Fature Passice Participles icith the a/iaं य ya.
c. Before this affix, as before all others beginning with y, oer
tain changes of final vowels become necessary. If a root end in
८ळ, or in e, ai, o, changeable to a, this vowel becomes e (of. p. 85. a.);
as, from mā, “ to measure,' meya, " to be measured,' “ measurable';
from hā, /leya ; from d//ai, dhyeya, &c.
d, If in i, ?, ad, Or a, these vowels take Guna ; as, from c/ं,
c/leya. But the Guna o is changed to do, and sometimes e to dg/,
before ya (as if before a vowel) : thus, from ८/hā, bhagya ; from .ji,
“ to conguer,' jayya. The Guna o, however, oftener passes into
āa before / ; as, from श्रु, श्राव्य ; from plaं, plāgya.
6. If in ri or r these vowels take Wriddhi ; as, from कृ, काययै.
.f Sometimes if a root end in a short vowel no change takes
place, but t is interposed, after the analogy of the indeclinable
participle formed with /a (p. l44. a.), so that the crude of the future
participle is not distinguishable from the indeclinable, except by
the absence of a preposition. Thus, from ji, jitya, " conguerable ";
from sta, statya, “ laudable ''; from Kri, Kritya, " practicable.”
g. If a root end in a single consonant with a medial a, Wriddhi
sometimes takes place ; as, frotm gra/t, grā//a : but not always ;
aS, from shak, 8/lakya ; from 8a/, 8a//a ; from bad/, badhya ; and
rarely if the final is a labial ; aS, from gam, gamya ; from lab/ः,
/o///%/a.
/. If with a medial i or a, Guna generally takes place ; ns,
- from ८/aj, U/igiya ; from li/, le//o.
i. If with a medial ri, no change takes place ; as, from स्पृश्, स्पृश्य.
j. A final ch may be changed to /ं, and.j to g ; and other changes
may take place, some of which are Similar to those before the y of
passives ; as, from pach, pākya ; from cac/, tāk/a ; from bhagj,
 ।

148 NOUNS OP AGENCW.

//hogya ; from grah, gri/kya, as well as grā/kya ; from gad, ādya ;

from ydj, iiya ; from shas, shiskya (p. 90. d. f); from Kham, kheya.
K. Many of these latter are used as Substantives, and there are
other examples of substantives formed with this affix ; as, भाय्यैीा
(fem.), “ a wife," from भृ , “ to support," &c.
Declensiom 0f Future Passice Participles.
They are all declined like nouns of the first class, pp. 31, 32.
ThuS, kardatya ; nom. m. f n. kartatya/), kardatyā, kartatyam. Si
milarly, karajaiya and kārya.

PARTIOIPILES OR THE SECONID RUTURE.

Formatiom 0f the Crude.

130. These are not very common. They are of two kinds,
either as belonging to the parasmaipada, or to the ātmanepada ;
the former being formed by changing anti, the termination of the
3d plur. of the 2d fut., into at ; the latter by changing ande into
amāma. ThuS, from Kariskyamti and Karishyamte, “ they will do,'
kariskyat and Karishyamāna (करिष्यत् करिष्यमाणं) “ about to do' ; from
the passive 2d fut. caks/kyamade, “ they will be said,' oaks/ं/amāna,
“ about to be Said.''
These participles, in the mode of their formation from the 3d
pers. plur., by the affixes at and amāma, resemble present parti
ciples, r. l23.
Declemsiom 0f Participles of the Second Fature.
a. Their declension also conforms to that of present participles.
Those of the parasmaipada are declined according to p. l36. ८.,
and those of the ātmanepada according to p. l37. b.
PARTIOIPIAI, NOUNS OE' AGENOW.

l31. These have been already incidentally moticed in Chap. III.

As, however, they partake of the nature of participles, and are of
great practical utility, some further mention of them is necessary
in the present chapter. They may be classed under three heads ;
lst, as formed from the root ; 2dly, as formed from the lst future ;
3dly, as formed from the causal base.
 NOUNS OR' AG BNO W. 149

1. The crude of the first class is formed from the root by affix
ing a, before which Guna, and rarely Wriddhi, of a final vowel is
reguired ; as, from ji, " to conguer,' jaya (जय), “ conguering."
Medial vowels are generally unchanged ; as, from cad, " to say,'
oada, “ Saying' ; from tad, “ to vex,' tada, " vexing' : and final a,
am, or am, are dropped ; as, from da, " to give," da (द), “ giving' ;
from gam, " to go," ga (ग), " going' ; from jan, “ to be born," ja,
“ being borm' (see their declension, r. 38. l. and p. Bl.). These
nouns of agency are constantly used in poetry as a Substitute for
the present participle,* sometimes governing the same case as this
participle, but always united with the word which they govern in
one compound ; thus, puraijaya (पुरञ्जय), " city-conguering' ; prº
yamcada (प्रियंवद), " speaking kind words' ; jalechara (जलेचर) “ going
in the water' ; 8arasija, “ lake-born." The word which they go
vern often remains in the crude form ; as, from tejas and Kri,
tejaskara, " light-making" (s remaining unchanged, in violation of
r. 29); from mamas and /ri, mamohara, " mind-captivating" (r. 29.);
from Daha८ and dā, ८ahada, “ giving much'' ; from स्रात्मन् and ज्ञा,
सात्मज्ञः, " self-knowing.''
2. The crude of the second class is formed from the 3d pers.
sing. of the lst future of primitive verbs, by substituting the vowel
चतृ ?i for the final vowel a, the nominative case being therefore
identical with the 3d pers. sing. of that tense (see p. 77. r. 100. p. 37.
and r. 4l.), Thus, from Dhokrā, " he will eat,' bh0%Ari, " an eater"
(nom, Ghok/); from योडा, “ he will fight," योद्धृ, “ a fighter"; from
9achita, /āchitri ; from सोढा, सोदृ, &c. This noun of agency is
sometimes, but rarely, found as a participle governing the case
of the verb ; as, वक्ा वाक्यें, “ speaking a Speech' (Draupadiharanam,
32.); वोढा बहुमागैगt, “ bearing the Ganges" (Ratnāvali, p. I.),
3. The orude of the third class is formed in three ways.
a. By adding in to the root, before which affix changes take
place similar to those reguired before the causal affix ay (r. 107.
c. d.); as, from Kri, kārin (कारिन्), " a doer"; from /lam, ghatin, “ a
killer' ; from shā, shāyin, “ a sleeper' : / being inserted after roots

* Implying, however, habitual action, and therefore Something more than pre
sent time.
16() IND BCLINABLB W OR DS.

in a, as, from pā, pāyin, “ a drinker' ; from da, dāyin, " a giver `
(see their declension, r. 43. iii. and p. 43.). This noun of agency
has often, like the first class, the sense of a present participle, and
is then always united with the crude of the word which it governs
in one compound : thus, from mands and /ri, Inamoharin, “ mind
captivating" (r. 29.). It sometimes, also, governs the case of the
verb, being still united with the word which it governs in one
compound ; as, grāmecāsin, " dwelling in the village.'
b. By adding aka to the root before which affix Changes take
place analogous to those before the causal ay (r. l07. c. d. e.fः); as,
from Kri, kāraka (कारक), “ a doer," “ doing' ; from mā, nāyaka, “ a
leader,' “ leading' ; from gra/, gra/ia/%a ; from sid/, sadhaka ; from
/am, ghādaka ; from तुम्, दूषक; from kram, /tramaka ; from mamd,
nandaka ; from stha, sthāpaka (see their declension, r.88. ii. and p.Bl.).
This participial noun is also often joined with the crude of the
noun which it governs in one compound word ; as, कार्ययेसाधक, “ ef
fecting the business.” It is very rarely found governing the case
of the verb ; as, मुकुलानि बुखक:, “ kissing the buds” (Ratnāvali, p. 7.).
c. By adding ama to some few roots ending in consonants, after
changes Similar to those reguired before the causal affix ; as, from
nand, nandama, “ rejoicing' ; from दुष्, दूषणं, “ vitiating' ; from
शुध्, शोधनं, “ cleansing " (see their declension, r. B8. iii. and p. 81.)

(CHAPTER, WIII.

INIDECLINABLE WORIDS.

-4dgerbs.

l32. Adverbs, like nouns and verbs, may be divided into simple
and compound. The latter are treated of in the next Chapter
on Compound Words.
Simple adverbs may be classed under four heads ; Ist, as
 AD W IER BS. 151

formed from the cases of nouns ; 2dly, as formed with affixes ;

3dly, as of uncertain derivation ; 4thly, as prefixes to other words.
4doerbs formed from the Cases of Vouns.
The following cases of nouns are used adverbially :
a. The nominative or accusative neuter of any adjective ; as,
सत्यं, “ truly ''; बहु, “ much "; शीघ्रं, झिप्र, “ guickly "; युक्तं, “ fitly ";
समीपं, “ near '; लङ्, “ lightly "; निभैरं, अत्यन्तं, गाढं, भृशं, " exceed
ingly "; अवश्यं, “ certainly "; नित्यं, “ constantly "; बलवत् , “ strongly.”
The nom. Or acc. neuter of certain pronouns ; as, तत् , “ there
१

fore "; यत्, “ wherefore,'' “ when ''; तावत् , " so long as •', यावत् ,
“ as long as "; किम्, " why ? " The nom. or acc. neut. of certain
Substantives and obsolete words ; as रह:, “ Secretly '; कार्म, “ will
ingly "; नाम, " by name,” “ that is to say "; वारं वारॆ, “ repeatedly ";
विरँ, " long ago '; सुखं, “ pleasantly '; साम्प्रतं, “ now '; नन्कं, “ by
night " (mocta).
८. The instrumental case of nouns and pronouns ; as, धम्मॆण,
“ virtuously "; दघ्छ्णेिन, " southwards "; उत्तरेण, “ northwards ";
उचेः, “ above "; नीचे:, “ below "; शाने:, “ slowly "; तेन, “ therefore ";
येन, " wherefore.' The instr. case of certain obsolete nouns ; as,
विरेण, “ for a long time ''; अविरेण, “ in a short time ''; दिवा, “ by
day"; दिष्ट्या, “ fortunately"; सहसा, अञ्जसा, “ guickly "; अधुना, “now."
c. The ablative case of a few nouns and pronouns ; aS, बलात्।,
“ forcibly "; द्रात्, “ at a distance "; तस्मात्, “ therefore "; कस्मात्,
** wherefore ':P अकस्मात्, “ without cause,” “ unexpectedly '; उत्तरात्,
“ from the north ': and of a few obsolete nouns ; as, चिरात्, ** for a
१

long time "; पश्वात्, “ afterwards.”

d. The locative case of a few mouns and Obsolete words ; as,
राची, “ at might "; दूरे, “ far off ''; प्राहेत, “ in the forenoon '; स्याने,
“ suitably "; अये, “ in front "; एकपदे, “ at once "; सपदि, “ instantly ";
स्रन्तरे , “ within.'
-4dgerbs.formed ?oi//। 4/fires.
I33. चित् chi८ अपि api, and चन chana, may form Indefinite adverbs
of time and place, when affixed to interrogative adverbs ; as, from
कदा, “ when?" कदाचित्, कदापि, and कदाचनं, “ sometimes "; from कुच।
and क्, “ where ?" कुत्रचित्, कुत्रापि, क्वचित्, क्ापि, “ somewhere "; from
१
कुतस्, " whence ?' कुतश्चित् and कुतश्चन।, “ from somewhere "; from
152 AD WEBR BS.

कर्हि, “ when ?" कर्हिचित्, “ at some time "; from कर्यं, “ how ?"
कयच्चन , “ somehow or other '' (cf r. 85).
a. तस् tas (changeable to त: or तो, r. 29) may be added to any
noun, and to some pronouns, to form adverbS ; aS, from यानं, यानत:,
“ with effort "; from आादि, स्रादित:, “ from the beginning "; from त।
(the proper crude of the pronoun ततु), तत:, “ thence "; similarly,
अत:, इत:, “ hence.' This affix usually gives the sense of the
prepositions woit/ and from, and is often eguivalent to the ablative
*

case ; as, in मत्त:, “ from me ''; त्वत्तः, “ from thee ':* but it is some
times vaguely employed to express other relations ; as, पृष्ठत:,
“ behind the back '; प्रयमत:, “ in the first place `; समन्तत:, “ on all
Sides '; अयत:, “ in front '; अभित:, “ near to.'
0. च tra, forming adverbs of Place ; as, अच, " here `; तच,
“ there "; कुत्र, “ where ? " यच, “ where '; सट्टेच, “ everywhere `;
अन्यच, “ in another place"ः एकत्र, “ in one place"; बहुच, “ in many
places"; अमुच, “ there,” “ in the next world.”
c. या //a and यॆ //am, forming adverbs of Mammer ; as, तया,
“ so'; यया, “ as '; सट्टेया, “ in every way '; अन्यया, “ otherwise '';
कर्ये, " how?” इत्यॆ , “ thus."
d. दा dā, forming adverbs of Time from pronouns, &c. ; aS, तदा ,
“ then ''; यदा, “ when '; कदा, “ when P” एकदा, “ once ''; नित्यदा , “ con
stantly "; सट्टेदा, सदा, "always.” _

e. धा, dhā, forming adverbs of Distribation from numeral adjec

tives ; as, टकधा, “ in one way ''; द्विधा, “ in two ways '; षीधा , “ in
six ways '; शतधा, “ in a hundred ways '; सहस्रधा, “ in a thousand
*

ways ' ; बहुधा, " in many ways."

f वत् pat may be added to any noun to form adverbs of Simā
litude ; as, from सूर्य्ये, सूयैवात्, “ like the sun "; from पूखैः, पूचैवत्,
“ as before.'

g. शाम् shas, forming adverbs of Guantit/ ; as, ‘ बहुशः , " abun

dantly "; अल्पशा:, “ in small guantities ''; एकश:, " singly "; शतसहस्रशः,
“ by hundreds and thousands "; क्रमश:, " by degrees.'

* These are the forms generally used for the ablative case of the personal pro
nouns, the proper ablative cases मत् , त्वत् being newer used except as substitutes for
the crude, in compound words.
 ADWERBS. 168

4doerbs 0f Uncerfain Dericatiom.

l34. Of 4firmation.-नूनं, खलु, किल, एव, “ indeed "; अपि, “even.”
८. Of Vegation.–न, नो, नहि, “ not." मा, मास्म are prohibitive ;
as, मा कुरु, " do not." मा is oftem used with the 3d preterite, the
augment being rejected, as मा कार्षीः, “ do not " (p. 102.),
८. Of Interrogation.-किबु, कश्चित् , नु, ननु, क्मुिह, “ whether P"
c. Of Comparison.–इव, “ like '; एव, टवं, “ so "; किम्युनिर्, “ how
much rather.'

*
d. Of 9uantity.–अतीव, “ exceedingly "; ईषत् , “ a little ''; सकृत् ,
'once"; स्रसकृत् , पुन: पुनर्, मुहुस् , भूयस् , “ repeatedly.”
e. Of Manner.-ति, टवं, “ so,” “ thus "ः पुनर् , “ again"; प्रायस् ,
“ for the most part `'; नाना, “ variously "; पृथक् , “ separately ';
मिथ्या, “ falsely "; वृया, मुधा, “ in vain "ः सलै, “ enough "; झटिति,
चाशु (cf ॐkºs), “ guickly "; तूष्णीं, “ silently.”
f Of Time.–अद्य, “ to day," “ now "; इदानी', सम्प्रति, “ now ";
तदानीं, “ then ''; पुरा, “ formerly "; पुरस् , पुरस्तात् , प्राक्,* “ before ';
युगपत् , “ at once "; सद्यस् , “ instantly "; प्रेत्य,* “ after death "; परँ,*
* afterwards "; जातु, “ ever "; न जातु, “ never."
g. Of Place.–इह, “ here "; क्, “ where ?” वहिस् , “ without.”
/. Of Doubt.–किंखित्, अपिनाम, “ perhaps.”
4dcerbial Prgfices.
l35. स्र a prefixed to nouns and even to participles with a priva
tive Or negative force, corresponding to the Greek oं, the Latin in,

and the English in, im, am ; as, from शक्य, “ possible,” अशक्य, “ im
possible "; from स्पृशत्, “ touching " (pres. part), अस्पृशत्, “ not
touching." When a word begins with a vowel, अन्। is euphoni
cally substituted ; as, स्रन्त, “ end '; अनन्त, “ endless.'
a. स्रंति ati, “ excessively," “ very "; as, अतिमहत्, “ very great.”
८. स्रा ā, prefixed to imply “ diminution "; as, स्रापाण्डु, “ some
what pale." ईषत् is prefixed with the same sense.
c. का kā or कु ka, prefixed to words to imply “ disparagement ";
as, कापुरूष, “ a coward •'; कुरूपं, * deformed.'' _

d. दुर् dur, prefixed to imply “ badly," or “ with difficulty '; as,

दुष्कृत, “ badly done " (cf p. 15. note); हुर्भेद्य, “ not easily broken."
It is opposed to सु, and corresponds to the Greek buo.
* These, however, admit of derivation, and a few others less obviously.
x
1:)4 OON.JUNCTIONS.

e. निर् nir and वि ri are prefixed to nouns like च a with a pri

vative or negative sense ; as, निबैल, “ powerless '; विशस्त्र, “ un
armed '; but not to participles.
/ मु sa, prefixed to imply “ well," " easily "; as, सुकृत, “ well
done "; मुभेद्य, “easily broken." In this sense it is opposed to द्वर् ,
and corresponds to the Greek c0. It is also used for खति, to
imply “ very," “ excessively "; as, सुमहत्, “ very great."
CON.JUNOTIONS.

Copulatire.
l36. च cha, “ and,' “ also,' corresponding to the Latin gue and
not et. It can never, therefore, Stand as the first foord in a sen
tence. It is not, however, like gue, necessarily interposed between
the first and second words, but may be admitted to any part of
the sentence, being only excluded from the first place.
a. हि, “ for,' like च is always placed after its word, and never
admitted to the first place in a sentence.
८. यदि, चेत् , “ if"; अय, “ then," “ now," used very commonly as
an inceptive particle. ततस् , “ upon that," “ then " (r. l33. a.),
अन्यच, किञ्च, अपरञ्च, परव, अपिच, “ again," “ moreover," used very com
monly before guotations. चैव, “ also.'
JDisjumctice.
4.

l37. वा cā, “ or," corresponds to the Latin ce, and is always

placed after its word, being never admitted to the first place in a
sentence. जु, किलु, “ but "; the former is placed after its word ;
यद्यपि, " although '; तथापि, “ nevertheless,' “ yet,' sometimes used as
a correlative to the last ; अयवा, किम्वा, “ Or else '; नवा, “ or not ";
यदिवा, “ whether,” “ whether or no.” स्म, ह, तु, वै, are expletives,
oftem used in poetry with no other object than to fill up the verse.
PREPOSITIONS.

l38. Of all the internal evidences of the antiguity of Sanscrit,

there is none more decisive than the sparing use which this lan
guage makes of prepositions, in expressing the dependence of one
word upon another. These aids to syntactical combination are
always to be regarded as a result of modern refinement, incom
 PREPOSITIONS. 155

patible with the sternness and Simplicity of the most ancient

languages. Thus, even the Greek, which of all others is the most
copiously provided with these auxiliaries, made comparatively)
small use of them in the days of Homer, and imitated the Sanscrit
in expressing a variety of diferent relations by some of the cases
of its nouns. It cannot be doubted that much ambiguity may
result from this rigid rejection of any other aid to the construc
tion of Sentences than nominal inflection ; but when, as in Sanscrit,
even this inflection is but sparingly used, and long compounds are
formed, consisting of words joined together in their crude state,
the last only taking any case ; and when even the assistance of
a verb is often denied to guide the reader to the nature of the
dependence of these words upon each other ; we are forced to
admit that this language would gain much in ease and perspicuity,
if it were more abundantly supplied with such important elements
of Syntactical arrangement.
But let not the reader imagine that no prepositions exist in
Sanscrit. It will be found by a reference to r. l65. that they
exist in great abundance, but only as inseparable prefixes, gualify
ing the sense of roots, and the nouns and verbs derived from roots.
There are only three, out of all this list of prepositions, that are
ever used in government with mouns ; viZ. स्रा ā, प्रति prati, and
चनु amac ; and of these the two last are mever So used, except as
jpos/positioms. "

a. स्रा ā, generally signifying “ as far as," " up to,'' governs the

ablative case ; as, स्रासमुद्रात्, “ as far as the ocean '; सामनो:, “ up to
Manu '; and rarely the accusative, as शतम् स्राजाती:, “ for a hun
dred births.” But instances are not common of words in regi
men with this preposition.
**

9. प्रति prati, generally signifying “ at," " with regard to,'

" against," governs the accusative ; as, गङ्गां प्रति, “ at the Ganges ';
धर्मेमं प्रति, “ with regard to justice "; शतुं प्रति, “ against an enemy.”
It sometimes has the force of apadd ; as, मां प्रति, “ apad me,' “ as
far as regards me.”
c. अनु is occasionally found governing the accuSative ; as, तदनु,
'' after that.'

The preposition सा, however, is not separated from the word

156 PRE; POSITIONS.--INTERJBOTIONS.

which it governs, and may be regarded as forming with it a kind

of adverbial compound, especially as instances are not uncommon
of other prepositions united in composition with the neuter form
or accusative case of nouns ; as, प्रतिख्कन्घै, " upon the shoulders '';
प्रतिमुखं, “ face to face "; अधिवृध्रं, “ upon the tree "; चनुगङ्गं, “ along
the Ganges '' (see r. l7l. 6.),
AIDWERBS USED FOR PREPOSITIONS.

139. There are certain adverbs used for prepositions in govern

ment with nouns, but generally placed after the nouns which
they govern.
a. चतृते, " besides,” governing the accusative and sometimes
ablative case. यावत्, “ up to,” “ as far as," sometimes found with
the accusative.

८. सह, साइं, “ with,” “ along with,” governing the instrumental.

८. विना, " without,' with the instrumental or accusative, or
Sometimes the ablative.

d. वहिर् , " out ” and प्रभृति, “ inde a,” “ from a particular time,"
with the ablative.
e. अर्थे, अर्थे, हेतोः, हेती, कृते, निमित्ते, “ on account of," “ for the
sake of,'' with the genitive, or more usually with the crude form.
शपरि , “ above '' (cf. Umrep, super), with the genitive. So अधस् or
अधस्तात्, “ below "; समीपं, सकाशॆ, “ near "; सकाशात् “ from "; अये,
समघ्रं, &e., “ in the presence of `; पश्चात्, “ after "; प्राक्, “ before ";
सन्तरणं, “ without,” “ except "; अन्तर्, " within'; all governing the
genitive. उपरि and अधस् are sometimes doubled ; thus, उपर्युपरि ,
अधो-धः.

INTERJECTIONS,

140. भो:, भो, हे, are vocative ; रे, स्ररे, less respectfully vocative, or
Sometimes expressive of contempt. धिक् expresses “ abhorrence `;
जा:, अहो, अहह, “ surprise "; हा, हाहा, अहो, सहोषत्, “grief "ः साड्,
सुषु, "approbation "; खस्ति, "salutation."
 C HAPTER, Ix,

COMPOUND WORDS,

CoMPOUNDs abound in Sanscrit to a degree wholly unegualled in

any other language, and it becomes mecessary to study the prin
ciples on which they are constructed, before the learner can hope
to understand the simplest sentence in the most elementary book.
Im the foregoing chapters we have treated of simple nouns, simple
verbs, and simple adverbs. We have now to treat of compound
nouns, compound verbs, and compound adverbS.
Observe, that in this chapter a dot placed underneath marks
the division of the words in a compound.
SEcr. 1.-COMPOUND RGOUNS.

141. The student has mow arrived at that portion of the subject
im which the use of the crude state of the noun becomes most
strikingly apparent. This use has been already noticed at r. 36.,
pp. 19, 20 ; and its formation explained, pp. 2l-27. ” In all com
pound nouns (with some few exceptions) the last word alone
. admits of declension, and the preceding word or words reguire
to be placed in the crude form, this crude form admitting of a
plural as well as singular Signification.
Native grammarians class compound nouns under five heads :
the lst they call rArºण्यण्，A, or those composed of two nouns,
the first of which (being in the crude) would be, if uncompounded,
in a case different from, or dependent on, the last ; as, चन्द्रप्रभा,
“ moon-light " (for चन्द्रस्य प्रभा, “ the light of the moon '); शस्त्रकुशल:,
-ला, -लं,* " skilled in arms " (for शस्त्रेषु कुशल:) ; मणिभूषित:, -ता, -तं,

* Observe, that in this chapter the nom. case, and not the crude, of a substantive
terminating a compound will be given, and in the instance of an adjective forming
the last member of a compound, the nom. case masc., fem., and neut. The
examples are chiefly taken from the Hitopadesha, and sometimes the obligue caBes
in which they are there found have been retained.
158 CO M POUND WOR DS.

“ adorned with gems " (for मणिभिर् भूषित:). The 2d, wwAwrowA,
or those formed by the aggregation into one compound of two or
more nouns (the last word being, according to circumstances,
either in the dual, plural, or neuter Singular, and the pre
ceding word or words being in the crude), when, if uncompounded,
they would all be in the same case, connected by a copulative
conjunction ; as, गुरुशिष्यौ, “ master and pupil " (for गुरूः शिष्यश्च) ;
मरणव्याधिशोका:, “ death, sickness, and sorrow " (for मरणं व्याधि: शोकश्च) ;
पाणिपादं, “ hand and foot " (for पाणि: पादश्च). The 3d, AGansAGoब्6
म्:AटA, or those composed of an adjective and substantive, the
adjective being placed first in its crude state, when, if uncom
pounded, it would be in grammatical concord with the substantive ;
as, साधुशील:, “ a good disposition " (for साषुः शील:); सचैद्रव्याणि, “ all
things '' (for संवाणि द्रव्याणि). The 4th, owx०ण्, or those in which
a numeral in its crude state is compounded with a noun, either
so as to form a Singular collective noun, or an adjective ; as,
चिगुणं, “ three gualities " (for चयो गुणा:); चिगुण:, -णा, -णं, “ possess
ing the three gualities.' The 5th, aAघण्vब्.**यः,* or those formed
of any number of words associated to form an epithet to a noun ;
aS, चन्द्रप्रभ:, -भा, -भं, “ brilliant as the moon '; मरणव्याधिशोक:, -का, -कं,
“ liable to death, sickness, and sorrow "; साषुशील:, -ला, -लं, “ well
disposed.''
Such then, in brief, is the mative division of compound words,
a division leading to some confusion, from the incompleteness and
want of Sufficient comprehensiveness in the definitions, and the
absence of Sufficient distinctness and opposition between the seve

* These names either furnish examples of the several kinds of compounds, or

give some SOrt of definition of them. Thus, तत्पुरूष:, “his servant,” is an example
of the Ist kind (for तस्य पुरूष:); द्वन्द्वः is a definition of the 2d kind, meaning
“ conjunction”; कम्मेधाय: is a definition of the 8d kind, i.e. “ containing the
object,” (कस्मै) ; द्विगुः is an example of the 4th kind, meaning “ any thing to the
value of two cows ”; बहुव्रीहिः is an example of the 5th kind, meaning “ possessed of
much rice.” There is a 6th class of compounds called अव्ययीभाव: aayag/ibhācah,
i. e. “ the indeclinable state''; but these will be noticed under the head of compound
adwerbs.
 00M POUND N0UNS. 159

ral parts or members of the division. For it is plain, from the

examples given, that the 5th class of compounds may often be
regarded as another name for the first three, when they take the
form of adjectives declinable in three genders; and that the second
Species of the 4th class is for this reason referrible to the 5th.
The student, moreover, finds it difficult to understand why, if the
definition of the 5th class of compounds be, that they are epithets
of other nouns; such compounds as शास्त्रकुशल and मणिभूषित should
not be comprehended under it. And further, he is often at a
loss to refer a compound to its proper head,* from the inadeguacy
of the definitions to express all the cases included under each।
claSS.

In the following pages the subject is discussed according

to a different method, although it has been thought desirable to
keep the mative arrangement in view.
Compound nouns may be regarded either as simply or com
plealy compounded. The latter have reference to a class of com
pounds within compounds, very prevalent in poetry, involving
two or three Species of simple compounds under one head.
SIMPLV COMPOUNDED NOUNS.

l42. These will be divided into, Ist, Dependent in case (corre

Sponding to Tatpurasha); 2d, Aggregative (Dipandica) ; 3d, De
scriptivef (corresponding to Karmadhāraya) ; 4th, Collective
(corresponding tO Droiga) ; 5th, Relative (corresponding to Baha८
ori/ii). This last includes, a. Relative form of absolute Dependent
compounds, terminated by substantives ; b. Relative form of
Aggregative compounds ; c. Relative form of Descriptive com
pounds ; d. Relative form of Collective compounds ; e. Relative
form of substantives in composition with certain adverbial prefixes.

* AS, for instance, Such a compound as कृष्णशुङ्खाः, -ज्ञा, -झं, “any thing black
and white.”

f As being composed of an adjective or participle preceding a substantive, and

always descriptive of the substantive. Prof. Bopp calls them ‘* Determinativa,” a
word of similar import. The names “ Dependent ” and “ Collective” were sug
gested by Prof. Bopp's “ Dependentia'' and “ Collectiva."
160 DEPBNDBNT 00MPOUNIDS.

DEPRNDENT COMPOUNDS, OR COMPOUNDS DEPENDENT IN CASE

(TATPURUSHA).
-4ccusatioely Dependent.
143. These comprehend all those compounds in which the
relation of the first word (being in the crude) to the last is egui
valent to that of an accusative case. They are generally com
posed of a noun in the first member, and a participle or noun of
agency in the last ; as, खगैप्राप्न:, -प्ना, -प्नं, “ one who has obtained
heaven'' (eguivalent to खगॆ प्राप्न:); fप्रयवादी, " one who speaks kind
words "; बहुद:, “ one who gives much "ः शस्त्रभृत् , “ one who bears
arms.'
a. Before the nouns of agency the accusative case is often
retained, especially in poetry ; as, अरिन्दम:, -मा, -मं, “ enemy
subduing "; हृदयङ्गम:, -मा, -मं, “ heart-touching "ः भयङ्कुर:, -ण, –ं,
“ fear-inspiring ` (see r. l3l. l.).
7??strumentally Dependent.
l44. Or those in which the relation of the first word (being in
the crude) to the last is eguivalent to that of an instrumental case.
These are very common, and are, for the fnost part, composed of
a substantive in the first member, and a passive participle in the
last ; as, लोभमोहित:, -ता, -तं, “ beguiled by avarice '' (for लोभेन
मोहित); वस्त्रवेष्टित:, -ता, -तं, “ covered with clothes `; राजपूजित:, -ता, -तं,
“ honoured by kings ''; विद्याहीन:, -ना, -नं, “ deserted by (i.e. desti
tute of) learning "; ढःखाज्ञै:, -हॆा, -सॆ, “ pained with grief `; स्रात्मकृत:,
-ता, -तं, “ done by one's self '; स्रादित्यसदृश:, -शी, -शं, “ like the sun `
(for स्रादित्येन, सदृशः),
८. Sometimes, but rarely, this kind of compound contains a
Substantive or noun of agency in the last member ; as, विद्याधनं ,
“ money acguired by science "; शास्त्रोपजीवी, " one who lives by arms.”
JDatioely Depemdent.
146. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the
last is eguivalent to that of a dative ; as, परिधानविख्कल्ठं, “ bark for
_)

clothing "; शरणागत:, -ता, -तं, “ come for protection " (for शणाय
स्रागत). This kind of compound is very rare, and is generally
supplied by the use of अर्थॆ (r. l39. e); as, शरणायैम् स्रागत:.
 DEPBNDBNT COMPOUNDS OR TATPURUSHA. 161

4blatipely Dependent,
146. Or those in which the relation of the firSt word to the
last is eguivalent to that of an ablative ; as, राज्यभ्रष्ट:, -ष्टा, -ष्टं,
“ fallen from the kingdom ” (for राज्याद् भ्रष्ट:) ; भवदन्य:, “ other
than you " (for भवतो-न्य:) ; भवड्रयं, “ fear of you.”
Gemitioely Dependemt,
147. Or those in which the relation of the fir’st word to the
last is eduivalent to that of a genitive. These are the most
common of all dependent compounds, and may generally be
expressed by a similar compound in English. They are for the
most part composed of two substantives ; as, समुद्रतीरं, “ sea-shore `
(for समुद्रस्य तीरॆ, “ shore of the sea `) ; अश्वपृष्ठं, “ horse-back";
धनुर्गुणः, “ bow-string "; इष्टिकागृहं, “ brick-house "; गिरिनदी, “ moun
tain-torrent "; अथैश्ागम:, “ acguisition of wealth "; विपहृशा, “ state of
misfortune T; सुडङ्गेद:, “ separation of friends ''; यन्मूङ्घैि, “ On whose

brow " (loc. c.) ; तङ्कच:, “ his words "; किमृधॆ, “ on what account ?"
धम्मॆथिं, ‘‘ On account of virtue '; मूखैःशतै:, * with hundreds of fools ''
(inst. c.); श्लोकद्वयं, “ a couple of shlokas "; भूतलं, “ the surface of
the earth '; पृथिवीपति:, “ lord of the earth "; तत्रृीवनाय, “ for his
support " (dat. c.) ; अस्मत्पुचा:, “ our sons "; त्वत्कर्ममै, “ thy deed `;
पितृवचनं, “ a father's speech '; मृत्युद्धारं, “ the gate of death `;
इच्छासम्पत् , “ fulfilment of wishes "; माचानन्द:, “ a mother’s joy.”
a. Sometimes an adjective in the superlative degree, used
।substantively, occupies the last place in the compound ; as, नरश्रेष्ट:
Or* पुरूषोत्तम:, * the best Of men.'

८. In a few instances the genitive case is retained ; as, विशामूपति:,

“ lord of men "; दिवस्पति:, “ lord of day.”
ुLocaticely Depemdemt,
148. Or those in which the relation of the first wOrd to the
last is eguivalent to that of a locative case ; as, पङ्कुमग्न:, -ग्ना, -ग्नं,
“ sunk in the mud " (for पङ्गे मग्न) ; गगणविहारी, “ sporting in the
sky ; जलक्रीडा, “ sport in the water "; यामवासी, “ a dweller in a
village "; जलज:, “ born in the water."
a. It is very usual to retain the locative case, especially before
nouns of agency ; as, यामेवासी , “ a villager `; जलेश्वर: , “ going in
W
162 AG6#REGATIW B CO'M POUN DS OR DW AND WA.

the water '; उरसिंभूषित:, -ता, -र्त, “ ornamented on the breast ''
(see r. l3l. l.).
JDependent in more tham ome Case.
149. Dependent compounds do not always consist of two words.
They may be composed of almost any number of nouns, all
depending upon each other, in the manner that one case depends
upon another in a sentence ; thus, चक्षुर्विषयातिक्रान्त:, –न्ता, -नतं,
“ passed beyond the range of the eye " (for चक्षुषो विषयम् अतिक्रान्त:) ;
यमध्यस्य:, “ standing in the middle of the chariot "; भीतपरित्राण्वस्तू
पालम्भपण्डित:, “ skilful in censuring the means of rescuing those in
danger.''
AGGREGATIVE CoMPOUNDS (DwANDwA).
l50. This class of compounds has no parallel in other languages.
When two or more persons or things are enumerated together,
it is usual in Sanscrit, instead of connecting them by a copulative,
to aggregate them into one compound word. No syntactical
dependence of one case upon another Subsists between the mem
bers of Dwandwa compounds, Since they must always consist of
words which, if uncompounded, would be in the same case ; and no
other grammatical connection exists than that which would
ordinarily be expressed by the use of the copulative conjunction
and in English, or च in Sanscrit. And it should be observed, that
the chief difference between this class and the last turns upon
this dependence in case of the words compounded on each other ;
insomuch that the existence or absence of Such dependence, as
deducible from the context, is, in some cases, the only guide by
which the student is enabled to refer the compound to the one
head or to the other. Thus, गुरुशिष्यसेवका: may either be a
Dependent compound, and mean “ the servants of the pupils of
the Guru," or an Aggregative, “ the Guru, and the pupil, and the
servant." And मांसशोणितं may either be Dependent, “ the blood
of the flesh," or Aggregative, “ flesh and blood." This ambiguity,
however, can never occur in aggregatives inflected in the dual,
and very rarely occasions any practical difficulty.
There are three kinds of Aggregative compounds : lst, inflected
 AGOGREGATIWE CO'MPOUNDS 0R DWANDWA. '163

in the plural ; 2d, inflected in the dual ; 3d, inflected in the sin
gular. In the first two cases the final letter of the crude of the
word terminating the compound determines the declension, and
its gender the particular form of declension ; in the third case it
seems to be a law that this kind of compound cannot be formed
unless the last word ends in a, or in a vowel changeable to a, or
in a consonant to which a may be Subjoined ; and the gender is
invariably meuter, whatever may be the gender of the final word.
*

Inflected in the Plural.

15l. When more tham dip0 animate objects are enumerated, the
last is inflected in the plural ; as, इन्द्रानिलीयमाकैा:, “ Indra, Anila,
Wama, and Arka " (for इन्द्रः अनिल: यम: स्रकै:) ; रामश्लष्ट्मणभरता:, “ Rāma,
Lakshmana, and Bharata "; मृगव्याध सपैशूकराः, “ the deer, the hunter,
the serpent, and the hog." The learner will observe, that although
the last member of the compound is inflected in the plural, each
of the members has here a singular acceptation. But a plural
signification may often be inherent in some or all of the words
constituting the compound ; thus, मिचोदासीनाशचव:, “ friends, neutrals,
and foes " (for मित्राणि, उदासीना:, शचव:) ; सिंहव्याघ्रमहोरगा:, “ lions,
tigers, and serpents "; श्वगृध्रकङ्ककाकोलभासगोमायुवायसा:, “ dogs, vul
tures, herons, ravens, kites, jackals, and crowS.''
a. So also when more tham tmpo inanimate objects are enume
rated, the last may be inflected in the plural ; as, धर्ममैण्यैकाममोछ्ा:,
“ virtue, wealth, enjoyment, and beatitude '' (for धम्मै:, अथै:, काम:,
मोछ्:); इज्याध्ययनदानानि, “ sacrifice, Study, and liberality " (for इज्या,
सध्ययनं, दानं). In some of the following a plural Signification is in
herent; aS, पुष्परूलफलानि, “flowers, rootS, and fruitS'; अजातमृतमूखैीणाँ,
“ of the unborn, the dead, and the foolish " (for स्रजातानां, मृतानां,
मूखैीणां); नेचमनःखिभावा:, “ eyes, mind, and disposition "; रोगशोकपरिता
पबन्धनव्यसनानि, “ sickness, Sorrow, anguish, bonds, and afflictions.'
८. So also when omly trgo animate or inanimate objects are enu
merated, in which a plaral Signification is inherent, the last is in
flected in the plural ; aS, देवमनुष्या:, “ gods and men "; पुत्रपौचा:,
“ sons and grandsons '; पातोत्पाता:, “ falls and rises '; प्राकाएपरिबा:,
“ ramparts and trenches '; मुखदुःखेषु, “ in pleasures and pains " (for
मुखेषु, द्रुःखेषु) ; पापपुण्यानि, “ sins and virtues."
164 DBSCRIPTIW B COMPOUNDS OR KARMAD'HARAWA.

Inflected in the Dual.

152. When omly tmpo animate objects are enumerated, in each
of which a singalar Signification is inherent, the last is inflected
in the dual ; as, रामलक्ष्मणौ, “ Rāma and Lakshmana" (for राम: लघ्ष्मण:);
चन्द्रसूर्यौ, “ the moon and sun "; मृगकाकौ, “ a deer and a crow."
a. So also when omly tioo inanimate objects are enumerated, in
each of which a singular Signification is inherent, the last is inflected
in the dual; as, सनुरागापरागौ, “ affection and emmity " (for अनुणग:,
अपणग:) ; क्षुत्पिपासे, “ hunger and thirst " (for घुत् पिपासां) ; कुङ्काधी,
“ hunger and sickness "; स्यानासनाभ्यां, “ by standing and sitting "
(for स्यानेन, स्रासनेन); मधुसपैिषी , “ honey and ghee "; मुखदुःखे, “ plea
Sure and pain."
b. In aggregating two nouns of relationship, formed with the affix तृ (r. 4I.), the
first is placed in the nominative case instead of the crude ; as, मातापितरौ, “ mother
and father.''

77iflected in the Singular Veater.

l53. When two or more inamimate objects are enumerated, whe
ther Singular or plural in their Signification, the last may either
be inflected as above, r. 15l. a. ८. r. l52., or in the singular number,
neut. gender ; as, पुष्पमूलफलं, “flowers, roots and fruits" (for पुष्पाणि,
मूलानि, फलानि); यवसान्नोदकेन्धनं , “ grass, food, water, and fuel " (for
यवस:, सन्नं, उदकं, इन्धनं); अहोरात्रं, “ a day and night" (for अहः, रात्रि:) ;
दिग्देशं, “ ५uarters and countries " (for दिश:, देशा:).
a. Sometimes two or more animate objects are thus compounded ; as, पुत्रपौत्रं,
“ sons and grandsons"; हस्पृश्नं, “elephants and horses"; especially inferior objects,
as श्वचाण्डालं, “a dog and an outcast.”
८. In enumerating two gualities the opposite of each other, it
is common to form a Dwandwa Compound of this kind, by
doubling an adjective or participle, and interposing the negative
a ; as, चराचरं , “ moveable and immoveable " (for चरम् अचरं च) ;
शुभाशुभं, “good and evil "ः प्रियाप्रिये , “ in agreeable and disagree
able " (for fप्रये अप्रिये च); दृष्टादृष्टं, “ seen and not seen "; कृताकृतं,
" done and not done.'

DESCRIPTIWE COMPOUNDS (KARMADHARAwA).

l54. Im describing, ५ualifying, or defining a substantive by
 IDESCRIPTIV B CO'MPOU NIDS OR RARMAD HARAWA. 165

means of an adjective or participle, it is common in Sanscrit to

compound the two words together, placing the adjective or parti
ciple in the first member of the Compound in its crude state ; as,
साधुजन:, “ a good man" (for साधुर् जन:); चिरमित्रं, “ an old friend"
(for चिरं मित्र); fप्रयभार्य्ये *, “ a dear wife" (for fप्रया भाय्यैी); रूपवङ्गाय्यै *,
“ a beautiful wife” (for रूपवती भाय्यैी); घुञ्झाणैव:, “ a troubled ocean";
पुण्यकम्मै, “ a holy act "; अनन्तात्मा, “ the infinite soul "; संस्कृतोक्तिः,
“ polished speech '; पुण्यकर्माणि, “ holy acts " (for पुण्यानि कर्ममेीणि) ;
उक्लमनण्णां, “ of the best men " (for उत्तमानां नराणां).
a. महा is substituted for the crude महत्, “ great," in the first
member of a Descriptive compound' ; as, महापुरूष:, not महत्पुरूष:,
“ a great man” (for महान् पुरूष:); महापातकं, “ a great crime” (for
महत्पातकं); महाकुलं, “ a great family.”
८. When the substantive राजन्, “ a king," is taken to form the
last member of a Descriptive compound, it loses its proper form
of declension as a moun of the 6th class (p. 4l.), and is declined
like a noun of the lst class (see p. 42. note *.), सखि, “ a friend";
पयिन्, “a road"; अप्,ि “ the eye"; राचि, “ the night," and some
other words undergo a Similar change in inflection, and become
nouns of the lst class ; as, प्रियसख:, “ a dear friend'; दीधैणर्च, “ a
long night.” When these latter words form the last member of
Dependent or Collective compounds the same holds good; as in
धम्मैणज:, अग्निसख:, गवांछ्:.
c. Numerals in their orude state are sometimes found occupying
the place of adjectives in the first member of a compound of this
claSS ; aS, चतुवैणैा:, “ the four castes"; पञ्चवाणा:, “ five arrows."
d. Adjectives, used substantively, sometimes occupy the last place in Descriptive
compounds ; as, परमधार्मिमेक:, ** a very just man'; परमाहुर्तं, “a very wonderful
thing.''
e. Compounds expressing comparison fall under this class, and are composed of
two substantives, the last being generally the name ofan animal denoting Superiority ;
*ञ्. **
as, पुरूषपुङ्गवः, पुरूषसिंह:, पुरूषंथॆभ:, eguivalent to “an illustrious man.
* _ _ _

* Feminine nouns are rarely compounded in this way ; and there can be no ५ues
tion that fप्रया and रूपवती are the proper crudes of the feminine form of the
adjective. Whon the feminine of an adjective is used substantively, it does not
give place to the crude ; as, कामिनीजन:, “ a wanton woman."
* But महत्। is rotained in a IDependent ; as, महदाश्रय:, * recourso to the great.'
166 COLLECTIWE OO'MPOUNIDS OR D W IGU.

COLLECTIv E COMPOUNDS (DwIGU).

155. A numeral is often compounded with a substantive to form
a collective noun of the neuter gender ; thus, चतुर्युर्ग, * the four
ages" (for चत्वारि युगानि); चतुहॆिशॆ, “ the four guarters"; fचदिनं,
“ three days" (ef. the Latin triduum); चिरात्रं, “ three nights” (एच
being substituted for एचि); त्र्यब्दं, “ three years" (cf triennium),
८. Sometimes the final wowel of the Substantive is changed to ई ; as, चिलीकी,
** the three worlds.”

RELATIv B CoMPOUNDS (BAHUv Ri HI).

156. The greater number of compounds in the preceding four

divisions are terminated by substantives, the sense of each being
in that case absolute and complete in itself All such compounds
may be used relaticely, that is, as epithets of other words, the final
substantive becoming susceptible of three genders, like an adjec
tive (p. 32. *. p. 34. *.) : and it cannot be too forcibly impressed
upon the student that the terms Belatice and Ba/huprāhi have refe
rence to the adjective use of those compounds only which have a
substantive in the last member. This is not to be regarded,
therefore, as a distinct division of the subject of compound words,
So much as a distinct view of the same Subject, the object of which
is to show that all compounds, which are in themselves absolute
and complete in sense, and are terminated by substantives, may
be used adjectively, and in the relation of an epithet to some other
word in the sentence. We have given the name relatice to com
pounds when thus used, not only for the obvious reason of their
being relatively and not absolutely employed, but also because
they usually involve a relative pronoun, and are sometimes trans
lated into English by the aid of this pronoun, and are, moreover,
reSolved by mative commentators into their eguivalent uncom
pounded words by the aid of the genitive case of the relative (यस्य),
Thus, महाधनं is a Descriptive compound, meaning, “ great wealth"ः
and may be used adjectively in relation to पुरूष: ; as, महाधनः पुरूष:,
“ a man foho has great wealth ': or to स्त्री ; as, महाधना स्त्री, “ a
woman nho has great wealth,' and would be resolved by coma
mentators into यस्य or यस्या: महद धनं . In English we have similar
Compounds ; as, “ high-minded,' “ left-handed," and the like, where
 RELATIW B COMPOUNDS OR BAHUW RTHI. 167

the substantive terminating the compound is converted into an

adjective.

Relatiue Form 0f Dependent Compounds.

l57. Many Dependent compounds (especially those that are
instrumentally dependent) are already in their ofom mature relative,
and cannot be used except in connection with some other word in
the sentence. But, on the other hand, many others, and espe
cially those which are genitively dependent, constituting by far
the largest number of this class of compounds, are in their nature
absolute, and yield a sense complete in itself. These may be
made relative by declining the final substantive after the manner
of an adjective. The following are instances : चन्द्राकृति:, -ति:, -fत,
“ moon-shaped " (p. 34. f.), from the absolute compound चन्द्राकृति:,
“ the shape of the moon "; देवरूप:, -पी, -पं,* “ whose form is god
like "; सूर्य्ये प्रभाव:, -वा, -वं,* “ splendid as the sun "; हस्तिपाद:, -दा, -दं,*
“ elephant-footed "; सागएन्त:,-न्त:, -नतं,* “ ending at the sea "; मरणान्त:,
-न्ता, -नतं, “ terminated by death "; कणै:पुरोगम:, -मा, -मं, or कर्णेमुख:,
-खा, -खं,* “headed by Karna'; विष्णुशर्मेनामा, -मा, -म, “ named Wishnu
sharma” (p. 42. note '); पुण्डरीकाक्षः,-घवी, -घं, “lotus-eyed " (r, 154.८.);
नारायणाख्य:, -ख्या, -ख्यं, “ called Nārāyana "; धनमूल:, -ला , -लं,
“ founded on wealth ": लघ्वसंख्यानि (agreeing with धनानि), “ money
to the amount of a lac "; गदाहस्त:, -स्ता, -स्तं, “ having a club in
the hand "; शस्त्रपाणि:, -णि:, -णि, “ having arms in the hand '';
पुष्पविषय:, -या , -र्यं, “ on the subject of flowers,” “ relating to flowers."
These examples are not distinguishable from absolute dependent
compounds, except by declension in three genders.
a. Many of them, however, are not found, except as relatives ;
and if used absolutely would yield a different sense ; thuS, कणैमुखं
means “ the face of Karna," but when used relatively to राजान:,
“ the kings headed by Karna.” So also चारवछु: signifies “ the eye
of the spy,' but when used relatively to राजा, “ a king who sees by
means of his spies,' the nom. case masc. being then चारवघूः.
८. The substantive स्रादि, “ a beginning,'' when it occurs in

* See p. 32. +. पाद् may be substituted for पाद in compounds like हस्तिपादं.
I68 RELATI w B COMPOUNDS OR BAHUv RIIII.

the last member of a compound of this nature, is always used

relatively to some word expressed or understood, and yields a
sense eguivalent to et ce/era. It is necessarily found either in
the plural or neuter singular ; as, इन्द्रादय:, “ Indra and the others "
(agreeing with the nom. case सुरा: expressed or understood, " the
gods commencing with Indra '); अग्न्यूादीनां, “ of Agni and the
Other’s '' (agreeing with पूर्वौक्तानां understood, “ of those abOve

named things of which Agni was the first "); चक्षुरादीनि, “ the
eyes, &c.'' (agreeing with इन्द्रियाणि, “ the senses commencing with
the eyes '). When used in the neut. sing. it either agrees with
पूष्वोंक्तॆ, " the aforesaid," understood, or with a number of things
taken collectively, and the adverb iti। * may be prefixed ; as,
देवानृित्यूादि, “ the word derān, &c." (agreeing with पूर्वौक्कं understood,
“ the aforesaid sentence of which derān is the first word `) ;
दानादिना, “ by liberality, &c.” (agreeing with some class of things
understood, “ by that class of things of which liberality is the
first "). Sometimes स्रादिक is used for स्रादि ; as, दानादिकं, “ gifts,
&c. ': and sometimes साद्य ; as, इन्द्राद्या: सुरा:, “ the gods Of whom
Indra is the first '; Or Sometimes the substantive प्रभृति ; aS,

Jºelatipe Form 0f 4ggregatipe Compoumds.

l58. Aggregative compounds are sometimes used relatively ;
as, मरणव्याधिशोक:, -का, -कं, “ that which is liable to sorrow, sickness,
and death "; especially in the case of adjectives or participles ; as,
कृष्णशुङ्ख:, -ज्ञा, -द्वं , “ black and white '; स्नातानुलिप्त:, -घ्ना, -प्रें, ** bathed
and anointed "; पौरजानपदः, -दा, -दं, “ city and country "; कृतापकृत:,
-ता, -तं, “ done and done badly "; शुभाशुभ:, -भा, -भं, “ good and
evil '' (r. 153. ८.). Examples are still more common under the
head of complex Compounds.
Jºelatice Form 0f Descriptipe Compounds.
l59. A greater number of compound words may be referred to
this head than to any other. Every style of writing abounds

* Sometimes cram is prefixed ; as, एवमादीनि प्रलापानि, * lamentations

beginning thus.''
 RBLATIW B COMPOUNDS OR BAHUW RIHI. 169

with them. The following may serve as examples : अल्पशक्ताि:,

-क्ताि:, -क्तःि, “ whose strength is small'' (p. 34. *.); महाबल:, -ला, -लं,
“ whose strength is great" (r. l54. a. p. 32. f.) ; महातेजा:, -जा:, -ज:,
“ whose glory is great" (r. 68. 69.); महात्मा, -त्मा, -मि, “ high-minded।'
(p. 4], 42); उदारचरिज्ञ:, -ता, -तं, “ of noble demeanour "; पण्डितबुडिः,
-डिः, -डि, “ of wise intellect" (p. 34. *.); प्रियभाय्यै:, -य्यैीा, -यथॆ, “ having
a dear wife ";* अशक्पसन्धान:, -ना, -नं, “ not to be reconciled.'
८. Although a passive participle is not often prefixed to a noun
in an absolute sense, this kind of combination prevails most ex
tensively in the formation of relative compounds ; as, प्राप्ग्कालः,
-ला, -लं, “ whose time has arrived'; जितेन्द्रियः, -या, -र्यं, “ whose pas
sions are subdued''; शान्तचेता:, -ता:, -त:, “ whose mind is composed`;
भग्नाश:, -शा, -शं, “ whose hopes are broken "; हृतराज्य:, -ज्या , -ज्यं,
“ whose kingdom is taken away "; अमिततेजा:, -जा:, -ज:, “ whose
glory is boundless "; वृतकाम:, -मा, -मं, “ whose desire. is accom
plished,'' i.e. “ successful '; अनधिगतशास्त्र:, -स्त्रा , -स्त्रं , “ by whom
the shāstras have not been read '; भिन्नत्ड़्दय:, -या, -र्यं, “ whose heart
is pierced.''
Belatioe form 0f Collectice Compounds.
l60. The following are examples of Collective or Dwigu com
pounds used relatively : द्विपणै:, -णीं, -गॆ, “ two-leaved '; चिलिोचनः,
-नी, –नं, “ tri-ocular "; चिंमूडैः, -ङीं,-इं, “ three-headed” (मूडै being
substituted for मूडैन्); चतुर्मुख:, -खी, -खं, “ four-faced "; चतुष्कोण:,
-णा, -णं , “ guadrangular '; शतडाग्: , -ण, -ऎ, “ hundred-gated ';
चतुर्वेिद्य:, -द्या, -द्यं , “ possessed of the four sciences"; सहस्राष्ट्र:, -छ्ौ, -घ्त्रं,
“ thousand-eyed.'
Jºelatioe form 0f Substamtices compoumded foith certain -4drerbial
Prgfices. -

l6l. This includes a class of compounds possessing no corre

Sponding absolute form, and composed of an adverb prefixed to a
Substantive. By far the greater number of these are formed with

* Occasionally the feminine of the adjective appears in the compound ; as,

षष्ठीभाय्यै:, ‘*having a sixth wife.''
f Unless they be regarded as the relative form of Ayayibhāva compounds.
Z
110 CO'M PLEx CO'MPOUND NOUNS.

the adverbial preposition सह, “ with,' contracted into स ; as, सक्रोध:,

-धा, -धं, “ angry `; सपल:, -ला, -लं, “ fruitful '' (p. 32. *.); सबन्धु:,
-न्षु:, -न्षु, “ possessed of kindred" (r. 54, bp, 56.); सयान:, -ना, -त्नं,
“ energetic "; सानन्द:, -न्दा, -न्दं, “ joyful "; ससचिव:, -वा, -वं, “ ac
companied by ministers '; सज्य:, -ज्या, -ज्यं , “ strung '' (as a bow).
The following are examples of other adverbial prefixes : उदायुध:,
-धा, -धं, “ with uplifted weapon `; नानाप्रकार:, -रा, - , “ of various
forms ''; कनिवास:, -सा, -सं, “ where dwelling' ? क्कजन्मा, -न्मा, -न्म,
“ where born” ? अपभी:, -भी:, -भि, “ fearless" (p. 33. *.); तथाविध:,
-धा, -ध, “ of that kind.'

CO'MPLEx COMPOUND NOUNS.

162. We have now to speak of those complex Compound words,

or compounds within compounds, which form the most remarkable
feature in Sanscrit poetical composition. Instances might be
given of twenty or thirty words thus compounded together, but
these are the productions of the vitiated taste of more modern
times, and are only curious as showing that the power of com
pounding words may often be perverted to the formation of a
style the most extravagant and ridiculous. But even in the best
Specimens of Sanscrit composition,and in the simplest prose writings,
four, five, or even six words are commonly compounded together, in
volving two or three forms under one head. It will be easy, how
ever, to determine the character of the forms involved, by the rules
propounded in the preceding pages ; in proof of which the student
has only to study attentively the examples we are about to give.
a. Instances of abSolute complex Compounds, whose sense is
complete and unconnected, are not very abundant. The following
may be taken as examples ः कालान्तएवृतिशुभाशुभानि, “good and evil
(occurring) in the revolutions of the interval of time," the whole
being a dependent, involving a dependent and an aggregative ;
सेनापतिबलाध्यक्षौ, “ the general and the overseer of the forces,” the
whole being an aggregative, involving two dependents ; शोकगृणतिः
भयाचार्णं, “ the protection from sorrow, enemies, and perils,' the
_

whole being a dependent, involving an aggregative ; स्रवधीजिरूढङ्काक्पै,

“ the disregarded words of a friend,'' the whole being a descrip
tive, involving a dependent.
 CO'M PLEx CO'MPOUND NOUNS. I7I

८. But the greater number of complex Compounds are used

relatively, as epithets of some other word in the sentence ; as,
गलितनखनयनः, -नी, -नं, “ whose teeth and eyes were decayed,'
the whole being the relative form of descriptive, involving an aggre
gative ; • - - :, -ना, -र्न, “ having a white garland and un
- --

guents,'' the whole being the relative form of aggregative, involv

ing a descriptive ; पूर्धैजन्मकृत:, -ता, -त, “ done in a former birth,''
the whole being the relative form of dependent, involving a de
Scriptive ; विद्यावयोवृडः, -डा, -द्धं, “ advanced in learning and age,''
the whole being the relative form of dependent, involving an ag
gregative ; हृषितस्रमृजोहीन:, -ना, -नं, “ having fresh garlands, and
being free from dust,'' the whole being the relative form of ag
gregative, involving a descriptive and dependent; अभिषेकाद्रैशिण:,
-रा:, -र:, “ whose head was moist with unction.'
c. The substantive स्रादि, “ a beginning,' often occurs in com
plex relative compounds, as in simple relatives (r. l57. b.); thus,
शुकसारिकादय:, “ parrots, starlings, &c.” (agreeing with पक्षिण:, “ birds
beginning with parrots and starlings'), the whole being the relative
form of dependent, involving an aggregative ; सन्धिवियहदि, “ peace,
war, &c." (agreeing with पूर्व्वोक्तुं understood); गृहदेवागाएदियुक्ताः, -झता,

-क्लॆ, “ possessed of houses, temples, &c.' Similarly, स्राद्य in the

example उत्तमगन्धाद्या: (agreeing with स्रज:, “ garlands possessing the
best odour and other gualities '),
d. Long complex compounds may be generally translated by beginning at the
last word and proceeding regularly backwards; as in the following मत्तमधुक्एनिकए
_ _ _ _ 'सुखावह:, -हा, -हं, “ causing pleasure by the
music of the woice of the cuckoo, blended with the hum emitted by the swarms of
joyous bees.' _

e. चसात्मकं or रूपः, as occupying the last place in a complex relative, denote ** comr
posed of"; thus, हस्त्यूच्वरय्पदातिकर्ममैकएत्मकं बलं, “ a force consisting of elephants,
horses, chariots, infantry, and Servants'; प्राग्जन्मसुकृतदुष्कृतरूपे कर्ममैणी, ** the two
actions consisting of the g00d and ewil done in a former birth.”

Cerdain -4momalous Compounds.

f There are certain compounds which are too anomalous in their
formation to admit of ready Classification under any one of the
preceding heads. Amongst these may be placed those compounds
172 ANO'MALOUS CO'MPOUNIDS.

expressive of comparison or likeness, usually included under

the Karmadhāraya or Descriptive class. In these the adjec
tive is placed last ; as, छायावच्चल:, -ला, -लं, “ fickle as a shadow ';
फेनोपम:, -मा, -मं, “ like foam "; स्रबुदश्याम:, -मा, -र्म, “ dark as a
cloud "; भूधरविस्तीणै:, -णैीा, -गॆ, “ spread out like a mountain ';
जलविन्दुलोलवपल:,-ला, -लं, “unsteady as a trembling drop of water";
नलिनीदलतोयान्तरल:, -ला, -लं, “ tremulous as water on the leaf of a
lotus '; the last two examples are complex.
g. There is a common anomalous compound formed by placing
अन्तर् after another word, to express “ another," “ other "; as,
स्यानान्तरँ, “ another place ''; राजान्तरण सह, “ along with another king `;
जन्मान्तराणि, “ other births." The following examples, also, are not
readily assignable to amy class : त्यक्तजीवितयोधी, “ a fighter who aban
dons all idea of life ''; सारसद्वितीय:, -या, -र्यं, “ accompanied by the
Sārasa '';* स्रदृष्टपूर्धै, “ never before seen.”
Compound Wouns.formed.from Boots combimed rpith Prepositioms.
163. In the next Section it will be Shewn that the combination
of roots with prepositions prevails most extensively in Sanscrit.
From roots thus combined nouns of the most various significations
may be formed ; thus, from ड्, “ to seiZe,'' with वि and सव, is
formed व्यवहार:, “ practice," from कृ, “ to do,” with अनु, अनुकार,
“ imitation.” Hardly a line can occur in any book that does not
afford an example of this kind of compound.
Spon, II.–CO'MPOUND WERBS.

I64. The learner might look over the list of I900 simple roots,
and very well imagine that in some of these would be contained
every possible variety of idea, and that the aid of prepositions and
adverbial prefixes to expand and modify the sense of each root
would be unnecessary. But the real fact is, that there are com
paratively very few Sanscrit roots in common use ; and that whilst
those that are So appear in a multitude of different forms by the
prefixing of one or two or even three prepositions, the remainder

* So छायाद्वितीय: in Nala, translated by Bopp, umbra geminatus.

 00MPOUND WBRBS. 173

are guite useless for any practical purposes, except the formation
of nouns.
Hence it is that compound verbs are of more freguent occur
rence than simple ones. They are formed in two ways : Ist, by
combining roots with prepositions ; 2dly, by combining the auxi
liaries कृ, “ to do," and भू, “to be," with adverbs, or nouns con
verted into adverbs. _

Compound Werbs formed by combiming Prepositions foith Boots.

l65. The following list exhibits the prepositions chiefly used in
combination with rootS :

अति ati, “ across," “ beyond "; as, अतिया (p. 112.); स्रती, “ to pass
by,” “ transgress' (pres. स्रत्येमि, &c. p. 112).
अधि adhi, “ above,'' “ upon,' “ over '; as, अधिष्ठा, “ to stand over,''
“ preside” (p. 107. pres, स्रंधितिष्ठामि); स्रंधिरूह, “ to climb upon ";
अधिशी, “ to lie upon" (p. ll3.) ; स्रधिगम्, “ to go over towards"
(p. 107.); स्रधी, “ to go over" in the sense of “ reading' (p. I13.).
चनु ana, “ after "; as, स्रनुचर्, “ to follow ''; अनुष्टा, “ to follow,'' in
the sense of “ performing "; अनुकृ, " to imitate" (p. 102.); अनुमन्,
“ to assent.'

सन्तर् antar, “ within "(cf. inter); as, स्रन्तधैा, “ to place within," “ con
ceal" (p. ll9.), in pass. “ to vanish '; अन्तर्भू, “ to be within''

(p. 104.); सन्तश्चर्, “ to walk in the midst” (r. 31.).

अप apa, “ oft;" “ away " (cf. dini); as, स्रपगम्, सपसृ, स्रपे (from स्रप
and इ, p. 112), “ to go away "; अपनी, “ to lead away "; स्रपकृष्,
“ to abstract "; अपवह्, “ to bear away." It also implies detrac
tion ; as, स्रपवद्, “ to defame."

अपि api, “ on," “ over," only used with धा and नह् ; as, स्रपिधा, “ to
shut up "; अपिनह्, “ to bind on." The initial a is generally
rejected, leaving पिधा, पिनह्.
अभि abhi, “ to," “ towards " (cf. āni); as, सभिया, स्रभी, “ to go to
wards "; अभिधाव्, “ to run towards "; अभिदृशर्, “ to behold ''
(p. 107.); अभिवह्, “ to address," “ salute."
अव aua, “ down," “ off"; as, स्रवरूह्।, स्रवतृ, “ to descend '; संवेष्ट्ल्,
“ to look down '; अवकृ, ‘‘ to throw down,' ‘‘ scatter '; अवकृत्।,
“ to cut off' It also implies disparagement ; as, स्रवज्ञा , “ to
despise " (p. l23); अवक्षिप्, “ to insult " (p. III.),
174 । COMPOUND WERBS.

चा a, “ to,' “ towards,'' “ up '' (Latin ad); as, खाविश्, “ to enter '';

चाक्रम्, “ to go towards "; खारूह्, “ to mount up.” When pre
fixed to गम् and या, “ to go," and दा, “ to give," it reverses the
action ; as, चागम्, स्राया, “ to come "; स्रादा, “ to take.' With।

चर् , “ to practise."
उत् at, “ up," “ upwards " (opposed to नि); as, उचर् (r. 16.), उदि,
“ to go up," “ rise " (pres. उदयामि, lst conj.); उडूौ, “ to fly up ";
उड् (उत् and ड, r. 18.), “ to extract"; उन्मिष् and उन्मील् (r. l5.),
*

“ to open the eyes"; उत्कृत्, उच्छिद्, “ to cut up"; उन्मूलं, “ to root

up"; उद्धि, “ to lift up " (उत् and श्रि, r. l7.). When prefixed
to स्या it causes the elision of s ; as, उत्या, “ to stand up.' In
some cases it reverses the action ; as, from पत् , “ to fall,"
उत्पत्, “ to leap up"; from नम्, “ to bend down," उन्नम् (r. l5.),
“ to raise up "; from यम्, “ to keep down," उद्यम्, “ to lift up."
उप apa, “ to," “ towards' (cf. Ur), joined like स्रा and स्रभि to roots
of motion ; as, उपया, “ to approach "; उपचर्, “ to wait upon,"
with विश्, “ to sit down." ** 4८
नि jai, “ down," “ downwards," “ under " (opposed to उत्। ); as, निषत्
“ to fall down "; नियम्, “ to suppress "; fनमिष् and fनमील्, “ to
close the eyes"; fनष्प्,ि निधा, न्यस्, “ to lay down," “ deposit ";
निविशत्, “ to go within," “ encamp." With वृत्। it Signifies “ to
return," “ desist "; with शम्, “ to hear.' In some cases it does
not alter the sense ; as, निहन्, “ to kill.”
निर् nir, “ out "; as, निष्क्रम् (cf note, p. 15.), निगैम्, निःसृ (r. 3l.), “ to
go out '; निष्कृत्।, “ to cut up ''; निवृत्, “ to come to an end,'
“ cease.' With वि, “ to determine.''
परा parā, “ back," “ backwards' (cf. Troºpa), combined with जि and
भू in the sense of “ defeat "; as, पराजि, “ to overcome '' (cf. Trapo
vak4o, AEsch. Chde); पराभू, “ to be defeated.' When.joined with
इ, 2d conj., it signifies “ to retire towards' (pres. परमि); when
with इ, lst conj. ātm., “ to run away," " to retreat," r being
changed to ! (pres. पलाये),
परि pari, “ around” (cf. Trept per); as, परिवेष्ट्, परिवृ, “ to sur
round "; परिवर्, परिगम्, “ to go round "; परीछ्, “ to look round,"
“ examine "; परिवृत्, “ to turn round "; परिधाव्, “ to run round.”
When prefixed to कृ it Signifies “to adorn," and स् is inserted,
परिष्कृ. With भू. “to despise," and with ड्, “ to avoid." It some
 00MPOUND WERBS, 175

times merely gives intensity to the action ; as, परित्यज्, “ to

abandon altogether.''
प्र pra, “ before)” “ forward " (of npo, pro, pra); as, प्रगम्, प्रमृप्, “ to
proceed "; प्रयम्, “ to set before,” “ present "; प्रक्रम्, “ to begin ";
प्रधाव्, “ to run forward "; प्रख्या, “ to set out," “ advance ''; प्रभू ,
“ to be superior," “ prevail "; प्रदृश्, “ to foresee:" With लभर्,
“ to deceive." In combination with the causal of इर्,ि it drops
its final a ; as, प्रेषयामि, “ I send." The r influences a following
nasal by r. 2l. ; as, प्रणम्, “ to bend before,' “ salute.''
प्रति* prati, “ against," “ towards,” “ back again "; as, प्रतियुध्, “ to
fight against "; प्रती, “ to go towards '' (pres. प्रत्येमि); प्रतिगम्, “ to
return '; प्रतिकृ, “ to counteract "; प्रतिहन्, “ to beat back,"
“ repel ''; प्रतिवच्, “ to answer ''; प्रतिलभ् “ to recover ''; प्रतिनी,
“ to lead back"; प्रतिनन्द्, “ to re-8alute." With श्रु, “ to promise ";
with पह्, “ to arrive at," “obtain."
fव oi, “ apart,' implying “ separatiom,' “ distinction,' “ distribution,''
“dispersion" (Latin dis, se); as, विचर्, “ to wander about "; विचल्,
“ to vacillate "; विढु, “ to roam for pleasure "; विकृ, “ to dissi
pate '; विवृ, “ to tear asunder "; विभजन्, “ to divide "; विविच्,
“ to distinguish." Sometimes it gives a privative signification ;
as, वियुज्, “ to disunite "; विस्मृ, “ to forget "; विक्री, “ to sell."
With कृ, “ to change for the worse.” Sometimes it has no
apparent influence on the root ; as, विनश्, “ to perish."
सम् sam, “ with," “ together with " (ruv, con); as, सचि, सङ्गह्।, ** to
collect '; संयुजन्।, “ to join together"; सङ्गम्, “ to meet together ";
सम्पद्, “ to happen "; सङ्क्षिप्, “ to contract." With कृ it signifies
“ to perfect," and स् is inserted, संस्कृ. It is often prefixed ।
without altering the sense ; as, सञ्जन्, " to be produced."
166. Two prepositions are often combined with a root ; as, व्यादा,
“ to open” (वि, स्रा); समे, “ to assemble" (सम्, स्रा, with root इ);
प्रणिपत्, “ to prostrate one's self” (प्र, नि, r. 2l.); मोड्, “ to raise up"
(प्र, उत्, with root ड्),
Occasionally three prepositions are combined ; as, प्रब्याड्, “ to
predict" (प्र, वि, चा); प्रत्युदाड, “ to answer" (प्रति, उत्, चा)
* The final i of the prepositions, प्रति, परेि, नि, is optionally lengthened in
forming certain nouns; as, प्रतीकारं, परीहास, नौकाग्.
 116 00MP0UND WERBS.

l67. In conjugating compound verbs formed with prepositions,

the augment and reduplication do not change their position, but
are inserted between the preposition and the root ,* as, पयैणयं , lst
pret. of नी, with परि; उपाविशं, Ist pret. of विशा, with उप ; चन्वतिष्ठं,
1st pret. of स्या, with चनु ; प्रतिजघान, 2d pret. of हन्, with प्रति ; प्रोज्जहार्,
2d pret. of ड्, with प्र and उत्.
168. Grammarians restrict certain roots to particular voices,
when in combination with particular prepositions ; as, for ex
ample, the root जि, “ to conguer," with वि, and the root विश्, “ to
enter,'' with नि, are restricted to the ātmanepada ; but no certain
rules can be propounded on this Subject : and in the two epic
poems especially, the choice of voice seems so entirely arbitrary
and subservient to the purposes of metre, that many ātmanepada
primitive, and even passive verbs, are occasionally permitted to
take a paraSmaipada inflection.f

Compound Perbs formed 'y combining 4duerbs icith the Roots कृ and भू.
169. These are of two kinds ; Ist, those formed by combining
adverbs with कृ and भू; 2dly, those formed by combining nouns
used adverbially with these roots. Examples of the first kind are,
:, “ to adorn '; स्राविष्कृ, “ to make manifest " (cf note, p. l5.);
वहिष्कृ, “ to eject ''; पुरस्कृ, “ to place in front ' “ follow ''; विनाकृ,
“ to deprive "; सलृ, “ to entertain as a guest"; नमस्कृ, “ to rewere '';
साष्बाबू, प्रादुर्भू. “ to become manifest,'' &c. _

I70. In forming the second kind, the final of a crude word being
a or ā, is changed to ; as, from सञ्ज, सज्जीकृ, “ to make ready ;"
from कृष्णीकृ, “ to blacken '; Or, in a few cases, to a, as
कृष्ण,
from fप्रय. A final i or a are lengthened ; as, from शुचिं, शुचीभू,
“ to become pure "; from लषु, लघूकृ, “ to lighten." A final rt is

* There are a few exceptions to this rule in the Mahābhārata; as in अन्वसच्चरत्

(Prof. Johnson's Ed. p. 83.).
f Thus, यत् , * to striwe,'' and प्रायै , “ to beg for,” which are properly ātmane
pada verbs, are found in the paras. Instances of passive verbs have been given at
p. 89. notef. On the other hand, नन्द्, “ to rejoice,” which is properly a paras
maipada verb, is found in the atm.
 ('OMPOUND ADWRRBS OR AWWAWiBHAWA. 1??

changed to रो rā ; as, from मातृ, माचीभू, “ to become a mother." A

final as becomes either ?, aS, from सुमनम्, सुमनीभू. “ to be of good
mind "; or asi, as, from शिरस्, शिरसोधा, “ to place on the head."
a. But the greater number of compounds of this kind are
formed from crude nouns in a. The following are other examples :
तृणीकृ, “ to esteem as a Straw '; स्तब्धीकृ, “ to stiffen "; एकविक्रीभू, “ to
fix the mind on one object.'
८. Sometimes सात्, placed after a crude noun, is used to form a
compound verb of this kind ; as, from जल, “ water," जलसाकृि, “ to
reduce to liguid "; from भस्मन्, “ ashes," भस्मसात्कृ, “ to reduce to
ashes.'

SECT. III.–COMPOUND ADWERBS (coRREsPoNDING ro

AwwAwiBHAWA CoMPOUNDS).
l71. Compound adverbs are formed by combining adverbs, pre
positions, or adverbial prefixes with nouns in the singular number
neuter gender.
८. The greater number are formed with the adverbial preposi
tion सह 8aha, Contracted into स 8a ; as, from कोप, “ anger," सकोपं,
“ angrily '; from स्रादर, “ respect,'' सादरं, “ respectfully " ; from
अष्टाङ्गपात, “ prostration of the limbs,' साष्टाङ्गपातं, “ reverentially.'
AS, however, the neuter of all adjectives may be used adverbially,
these compound adverbs may be regarded as the neuter of the
fifth form of relative compounds (r. I6I.),
८. The following may be taken as examples of compound ad
verbs formed with other prefixes: अनुज्येष्ठं, “according to seniority';
प्रत्यूङ्गं, “ over every limb "; प्रतिमासं, “ every month "; ययाविधि, “ ac
११.
cording to rule "; यथाशक्तःि, or यावङ्क्षॆ, “ according to one's power `;
यथासुखं, “ happily "; समृष्ट्, “ before the eyes" (स्रष् being substituted
for स्रश्,ि cf. p. 165. ८.); असंशयं, “ undoubtedly '; निर्विशेषं, “ without
distinction.''

c. Some of the adverbs at r. l39. may be placed after crude

nouns ; thus, बालकसमीपं, “ near the child "; रक्ार्थं, “ for the sake
of protection.''
d, A kind of compound adverb is formed by doubling a noun,
lengthening the final of the first word, and changing the final of
the last to i ; as, from दण्ड, “ a stick,'' दण्डादण्डि, “ mutual striking.'
A A
118 SWNTA K.

e. Complex Compound adverbs, involving other compounds, are

sometimes found ; as,खगृहनिर्विशेषेण, “ not differently from one's
own house"; स्तनभरविनमन्मध्यभङ्गानपेघं, “ regardlessly of the curving
of her waist bending under the weight of her bosom."
.f The indec. part. स्रारभ्य, " having begun,' is joined with अद्य ,
“ to day" (अद्यारभ्य), in the sense of " from this time forward-''
प्रभृति is placed adverbially after words, in the same sense ; as,
जन्मप्रभृति, “ from birth upwards."

CHAPTER. K.

SWNTAx.

STRIwE as we may, it is impossible to free the orthographical and

etymological part of Sanscrit Grammar from a certain degree of
intricacy and complexity. But admitting, as we do, this com
plexity in the early part of the subject to be greater than is
ordinarily found, we at the same time affirm, that, in the ag
gregate calculation, the preponderance of difficulty is on the side
of the classical languages. When the student has once thoroughly
mastered the rules relating to the combination of letters and the
inflection of nouns and verbs, the path, in Sanscrit, becomes easy
to him, and he passes with the utmost certainty to a complete ac
५uaintance with the subject in all its bearings. Not So in Greek
or Latin. At the point in Sanscrit where our labours end, at that
point in the others do our real labours begin ; and the young
Scholar, however versed in the declension of nouns and conjugation
of verbs, finds, when he enters upon the syntax of these two lan
guages, that he has hardly passed the threshold of his studies. It
is in the syntax of Greek and Latin that the true test of Scholar
Ship lies. It is here that an almost interminable field of inguiry
opens before the grammarian, and difficulties assail the student,
demanding, for their complete mastery, a more than ordinary de
gree of mental application and capacity. In Sanscrit, on the other
hand, the subject of syntax is reducible to a few plain rules, and
 SWNTAx. 179

might almost be merged in that of compound words. The almost

entire absence of prepositions in govermment with nouns removes
one fertile source of difficulty ; and Such is the extraordinary pre
valence of compounds, that the student who has acguired a thorough
insight into their formation has little else to learn, and the writer
who has properly expounded this portion of the grammar has
already more than half completed his investigation into the laws
which regulate syntactical combinations. We shall endeavour, in
the present chapter, to collect together all the most useful rules
for the connection and collocation of uncompounded words, pre
Supposing, as we have done throughout, that the student is ac
५uainted with the general principles of the subject before us.
Much vagueness and uncertainty, however, may be expected to
attach to the rules propounded, when it is remembered that San
scrit literature consists almost entirely of poetry, and that the laws
of Syntax are ever prone to yield to the necessities of metrical
composition.
Observe, in the present chapter on Syntax, that the Subject may
be made as clear as possible, each word will be Separated from
the next, and vowels will not be allowed to coalesce, although such
coalition be reguired by the laws of combination. Whenever com
pounds are introduced into the examples, a dot, placed underneath,
will mark the division of the words. The examples have been,
in general, selected from the Hitopadesha, or the Mahābhārata,
with the view of serving as an easy delectus, in which the beginner
may exercise himself before passing to continuous translation.
CONCORD OP THE VERB W ITH THE NO'MINATIWE CASE.

l72. The verb must agree with the nominative case in number
and person, as in the following examples: अहं करवाणि , “ I must
perform ;" बिम् सवधेहि, “ do thou attend "; स ददाति, “ he gives ";
सावों ब्रूवः, “ we two say "; कपोता जबु:, “ the pigeons said "; राजा मन्त्री
च जग्मतु:, “ the king and minister went "ः यावच् चन्द्रार्कौ तिष्ठत:, “ as
long as the moon and Sun remain "; युर्वा #, “ do you two re
flect "; यूयम् आायात, “ do ye come "; सज्जना: पूज्यने, “ good men are
honoured ''; वाति पवन:, “ the wind blows '; उदयति शशाङ्गु:, “ the
moon rises"; म्युटति पुष्पं, “ the flower bloSSoms.'
180 SWNTAx.

a. When a participle takes the place of the verb, it must agree

with the nominative in number and gender ; as, स गत:, “ he went";
सा गता, “ She went ''; नायैाव् उक्तवत्यी, “ the two women spoke '; राजा
हत:, “ the king was killed "; बन्धनानि छिन्नानि, " the bonds were cut.'
b. Sometimes, when it is placed between two or more nominative cases, it agrees
with one only ; as, खवघू: प्रबोधिता। पुचश्च, “ his wife and son were awakened.''

c. Wery often the copula, or verb which connects the subject

with the predicate, is omitted ; when, if an adjective stand in
the place of the verb, it will follow the rules of concord in gender
and number ; aS, धनं ढुलैर्भ, “ wealth is difficult of attainment ';
अ'ावां कृताहारौ, “ we two have finished eating.” But if a substantive
stand in the place of the verb, no concord of gender or number
need take place ; as, सम्पदः पदम् आपदां, “ successes are the road to
misfortunes."

CONCOR.D OE' THE ADJ ECTIWE WITH THE SUBSTANTIWE.

I73. An adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun, gualifying a

Substantive, when not compounded with it, must agree with the
Substantive in gender, number, and case ; as, साधु: पुरूष:, “ a good
man "; महद् टु:खं, “ great pain "; एतेषु पूष्वॉक्षु एष्ट्रेषु, * in these before
mentioned countries '; त्रीणि मित्राणि, “ three friends.''
CONCOR D OE THE RELATIWE W ITH THE AN'TECEDENT.

l74 The Relative must agree with the antecedent noun in

gender, number, and person ; but, in Sanscrit, the relative pronoun
almost invariably precedes the noun to which it refers, and this
noun is then put in the Same case with the relative, and the pro
noun स: generally follows in the latter clause of the sentence ; as,
यस्य नरस्य बुद्धिः स बलवान्, “ of whatever man there is intellect, he is
strong.' The noun referred to by the relative may also be joined
with स: , aS, यस्य बुडिः स नरो बलवान्; or may be omitted altogether,
as, यत् प्रतिज्ञातं तत् पालय, “ What you have promised, that abide by";
येषाम् अपत्यानि खादितानि ते: (पििभ:, understood) जिज्ञासा समारञ्चा, “ By
those (birds) whose young ones were devoured, an inguiry was set
On foot.'
। d. The Relative Sometimes Stands alone, an antecedent noun or
pronoun being understood, from which it takes its gender and num
 SWNTAx OE' SUBSTANTIWES. 181

ber ; as, नास्ति पुण्यवान्। (तस्मात् understood) यस्य मित्रेण सम्भाष:, “ there
is not a happier (than that man) of whom there is conversation
with a friend "; धनेन किं यो न ददाति, “ What is the use of wealth (to
him) who does not give ?" ।
८. Sometimes, though rarely, the antecedent noun precedes the
relative in the natural order ; as, न सा भार्य्यै यस्यां भज्ञैा न जुष्यति, “ She
is not a wife in whom the husband does not take pleasure.'
c. तावत् and यावत् stand to each other in the relation of demon
strative and relative ; as, यावन्ति तस्य द्वीपस्य वस्तूनि तावन्ति अस्माकम्
उपनेतव्यानि, " As many products as belong to that island, so many
are to be brought to us." _

d. Similarly, तादृश and यादृश ; as, यादृशं वृत्तं तादृशं तस्मे कयितवन्त:,
“ As the event occurred, so they related it to him.'
SYNTAx OR SUBSTANTIWES.

Under this head it is proposed to explain the construction of

Substantives, without reference to their connection with particular
adjectives, verbs, or participles ; and for this purpose it will be
desirable to exhibit examples under each case.
IWomimatice Case.

A substantive simply and absolutely expressed must be placed

in the nominative case ; as, हितोपदेश:, " the Hitopadesha ''; भट्टिकाव्यं,
“ the poem of Bhatti.'
a. Two nominative cases in different numbers may be placed
in apposition to each other ; as, तृणानि शय्या, “ grass as a bed."
4ccusatige Case.
८). Substantives are not found in the accusative, unconnected
with verbs or participles, except as expressing duration of time or
Space. See r. l80. l8l.
77asfrumental Case.

l75. This case yields a variety of senses. The most usual is

that of the instrument or means by which any thing is done ; as,
मया (उक्'), “ by me it was said "; व्याधेन (पाशो योजित:), “ by the fowler
a Snare was laid '; वेदाध्ययनेन, “ by the study of the Wedas '';
* , “ with one's own eye.''
a. It also has the force of “ with " in expressing other col
182 SWNTAx OR SUBSTANTIVES.

lateral ideas; as, बलीयसा स्पडैीा, “ vying with the strong "; मित्रेण
सम्भाष:, “ conversation with a friend "; पशुभि: सामान्यं, “ eguality with
beasts "; पितुर् गोचरेण, “ with the knowledge of (his) father "; espe
cially when accompaniment is intended ; as, शिष्येण गुरू:, “ the
master with his pupil."
८. The other senses yielded by this case are “ through," “ by
reason of'; as, कृपया, " through compassion "; तेन स्रपराधेन, ** on
account of that transgression.'
c. “According to," " by "; as, विधिना, ‘‘ according to rule ';
मम सम्मतेन , “ according to my opinion "; जात्या, “ by birth."
d. The “ manner ' in which any thing is done, as denoted in
English by the adverbial affix ly, or by the prepositions in, at;
aS, बाहुल्येन, “ in abundance "; धर्म्मेण, “ wirtuously '; खेच्छया, “ at
pleasure "; मुखेन, “ at ease "; अनेन विधिना, “ in this way "; महता
खेहेन (निवसत:), “ they both dwell together in great intimacy ";
(नृप: संचैभूतानि अभिभवति) तेजसा, “a king surpasses all beings in glory ";
मनसा (न कर्त्तेव्यै), “ such a deed must not even be imagined in the
mind "; मानुषरूपेण, “ in human form." ", " ८८
e, Substantives expressive of “ want," " need," may be joined
with the instrumental of the thing wanted ; as, चर्चेया न प्रयोजनं,
“ there is no occasion for inguiry "; मया सेवकेन न प्रयोजनं , “ there is
no meed of me as a servant ''; तृणेन कार्यै, “ there is use for a straw.”
.f: The price for which any thing is done may be in the instrumental ; as,
पक्वभिः। पुराणैर् (याति दासत्वं), “ for five purānas he becomes a slave”; बहुभिर् दतैर्
(युध्यन्ते), “they fight for great rewards.” Similarly, प्राणपरित्यागमूल्येन (श्रीर् न
लभ्यते), * fortune is not obtained at the price of the sacrifice of life.”
gr. So, also, difference between two things; as, त्वया। समुद्रेण च महद् अन्तरँ,
“ there is great difference betweon you and the ocean.”
/. The English expression “ under the idea that ” is expressed by the inst. case
of the Substantive बुडि ; as, व्याघ्रबुडा, “ under the idea that he was a tiger.”
D0uble Instrumentu८.

ā. Sometimes when two substantives come together, expressing parts of a common

idea, they are both placed in the instrumental, instead of one in the genitive ; as,
वकुलै: पुष्पैर् वास्यते, “an odour is emitted by the bakul-plants by their flowers” (for
वकुलानां पुष्पै:), Similarly, ताम् आश्वासयामास प्रेष्याभिश् चन्दनोदकै:, “he caused
her to rewive by her attendants by sandal-water.''
 SWNTA K O R' SU IBST ANTIW IBS. 183

JDatige Case.

176. This case is of very limited applicability, and its func

tions, irrespectively of the influence of verbs, are restricted to
the expression of the object, motive, or cause for which any thing
is done, or the result to which any act tends ; as, स्रात्मविवृङ्खये,
“ for Self-aggrandiZement "; स्रापतृप्रतीकाराय, “ for the counteraction
of calamity "; शस्त्रं च शास्त्रं च प्रतिपत्तये, “ arms and books (lead) to
renown.' When, as in the last example, the result or end to
which any thing leads is denoted by this case, the verb is seldom
expressed, but appears to be involved in the case itself The
following are other examples, यच स्रास्ते विषसंसर्गो -मृतं तदपि मृत्यवे,
“ where there is admixture of poison, then even nectar (leads) to
death "; उपदेशो मूखै्राणां प्रकोपाय न शान्तये, “ advice to fools (leads) to
irritation, not to conciliation ; स वृड्पतिस् तस्या: सन्तोषाय न चभवत्,
“ that old husband was not to her liking.”
८. It will be seen hereafter that certain verbs of *giving” and “ relating,” govern
the dative, Substantives derived from such verbs exercise a similar influence ; as,
अन्यस्मे दानं, ** the giving to another'; स्रन्यस्मै कयनं, “ the telling to another.”
b. Words expressive of Salutation or reverence are joined with the dative ; as,
गणेशाय नमः, ** reverence to Ganesha ”; कुशलं ते, “ health to thee.”
-4blatice Case.

l77. The proper force of the ablative case is expressed by

“ from "; as, लोभात् (क्रोधः प्रभवति), “ from avarice anger arises ";
गिरेः पतनं, “ falling from a mountain "; बाणणां मुखात्, “ from the
mouth of the spies.''
d. Hence this case passes to the expression of various cor
relative ideas ; as, साहारात् किञ्चित्, “ a portion of(from) their food '';
and like the instrumental it very commonly signifies “ by reason
of,” “ in conseguence of "; as, गोमनुषाणां बधात्, “ on account of
the slaughter of cows and men "ः अनवसंऽप्रवेशात् (पुत्रं निन्दति), “ he
blames his son for entering inopportunely"; दण्डभयात्, “ through fear
of punishment '; अस्मत्पुण्योदयात्।, “ by reason of my good fortune.'
b. " According to '; as, मन्त्रिवचनात्, “ according to the advice
of the minister.' Abstract nouns in त्वं are often found in this
case to express some of these ideas; as, सनवस्थितविक्तत्वात्, “ by
reason of the unsteadiness of his mind.' Especially in the
184 SW NTA K OR SUBSTANTIW IBS.

writings of commentators ; as, वक्ष्यमाणत्वात्, “ according to what

will be Said hereafter.''
*

c. It also expresses “ through the means ` or “ instrumentality

of "; as, शृगालात् पाशबडः, "caught in the toils through the instru
mentality of the jackall "; न औषधपरिज्ञानाद् (व्याधे: शान्तिर् भवेत्), “ the
alleviation of disease is not effected by the mere knowledge of
the medicine.''

d. The *manner” in which any thing is done, is occasionally expressed by the

यत्नात्, “ with diligence'; बलात्, “ forcibly "; कुतूहलात्, ** with
ablative ; as,
wonder"; मूलाद् जड़णं, “ tearing up by the roots''; or by the ablative affix
तस्; as, खेच्छात:, “at one's own pleasure” (of p. 152. a.).
e. This case also denotes ** after ''; as, शरीरविगमात्। , **after Separation from the
body "; मुख्यप्रतिबन्धनात्।, “ after the imprisonment of the Chief''; तस्य आगमनात्,
* since his arrival.”

.f In reference to time, “ within ”; as, चिपछ्ात्, “ within three fortnights.”

g. Nouns expressive of fear are joined with the ablative of the thing feared ; as,
मृत्योर्
भर्य, “ fear of death"; चीतो भर्य, *fear of robbers.”
Gemifice Case.

178. This and the locative case are of the most extensive ap
plication, and are often employed, in a vague and indeterminate
manner, to express relations properly belonging to the other cases.
The true force of the genitive is eguivalent to “ of," and this
case appears most freguently when two substantives are to be con
nected, so as to present one idea ; as, मिचस्य वचनं, “ the speech of
a friend "; भर्त्रा नाय्यैा: परमं भूषणं, “ the best ornament of a woman is
her husband "; न नरस्य नरो दासो दासस् जु अथैस्य, “ man is not the
Slave of man, but the slave of wealth.'
d. Possession is freguently expressed by the genitive case alone,
without a verb ; as, सर्व्वा: सम्यक्तयस् तस्य सन्तुष्टं यस्य मानसं, “ all riches
belong to him who has a contented mind '; धन्यो-हं यस्य ईदृशी भाय्येी,
“ happy am I in possessing such a wife.'
b. It often, however, has the force of “ to," and is very gene
rally used to supply the place of the dative ; as, प्राणा अात्मनो =भीष्टा:,
“ one's own life is dear to one's self "; न योजनशतं दू वाह्यमानस्य तृष्णया,
“ a hundred yojanas is not far to one borne away by thirst (of
gain) "; किं प्रज्ञावताम् अविदितं, “ what is unknown to the wise" ? किम्
 SWNTAx OR SUBSTANTIWES. 185

अन्धस्य प्रकाशयति प्रदीप:, “ what does a lamp show to a blind man' ?

किं मया। अपकृतं राज्ञ:, " what offence have I committed towards the
king "? किम् अयम् अस्माकं कर्तुं समयै:, “ what can this man do to us ?'
c. And not unfreguently of “ in' or “ on '; as, स्त्रीणां विश्वास:,
“ confidence in women '; मम सायक्लत्वं , “ dependence on me.''
d. It is even eguivalent occasionally to “ from '' or “ by,” as usually expressed by
the ablative or instrumental; as, न कस्यापि (उपायनं गृह्मतीयात्), ** one ought not to
accept a present from any one''; अस्माकं (वनं त्याज्यं), “ the wood is to be abandoned
by us”; स धन्यो यस्य स्रयैिनो न प्रयान्ति विमुखा:, “he is blessed from whom sup
pliants do not depart in disappointment.”
e. Difference between two things is expressed by this case ; as, सेव्यसेवकयोर् महद्
अन्तर्र, “ there is great difference between the master and the servant.” Cf. p. 182. g.
JDocatice Case.

I79. The locative, like the genitive, expresses the most diversi
fied relations, and freguently usurps the functions of the ofher
cases. Properly, it has the force of “ in,'' “ on,'' or “ at,'' as ex
pressive of many collateral and analogous ideas ; thus, राची , “ in the
night "; यामे, “ in the village "; पृष्ठ, “ on the back "; त्वयि विश्वासः,
“ confidence in you "; मरूप्स्यख्यां वृष्टि, “ rain on desert ground ";
* , “ at the first desire of eating "; पृथिव्यां शेोपितो वृष:, “ a
tree planted in the earth."
a. Hence it passes into the sense “ towards '; as, छ्मा शची च मित्रे
च, “ leniency towards an enemy as well as a friend "; सचैभूतेषु दया,
“ compassion towards all creatures `; सुडत्सु अजिद्य:, “ upright to
wards friends "; सुकृतशतम् असत्सु नष्टं, “ a hundred good offices are
thrown away upon the wicked.'
b. Words signifying “ cause,' * motive,' or “ need," are joined with the locative;
as, सचपत्वे हेतुः, “ the cause of his modesty"; भूपालयोर् वियहे भवङ्कचनं निदाने,
*your speech was the cause of the war between the two princes'; प्रायैकाभावः
झतीवेि कारणं स्त्रियाः, “ the absence of a Suitor is the cause of a woman's chasity ”;
नीकायां किं प्रयोजनं , “ what need of a boat.' Also, words signifying employment
or occupation ; as, स्रयैश्ाजेने प्रवृति:, “ engaging in the acguisition of wealth.”
Words derived from the root gygj usually reguire the locative ; as, मम। राज्यरक्षायाम्
उपयोगः, ** I am of service in preserving the kingdom.''
c. This case may yield other senses eguivalent to **by reason of' “ for," &c. ; as,
मे छिद्रेषु, “through my faults"; चार: परराष्ट्राणाम् स्रवलोकने, “ a spy is for the
B B
186 SWNTAx OR NOUNS OF TIME AND PLACE.

8ake of examining the territory of one's enemies"; युडे कालो-र्यं, “ this is the time’
for battle ”; तस्याम् अनुराग:, ** affection for her '; उपदेशे सनादर:, “disregard for
advice"; का चिन्ता मरणे रणे, “ what anxiety about dying in battle?"
d, It is also used in giving the meaning of a root; as, मह उपादाने, “ the root

grah is in taking.' i.e. conveys the idea of ** taking.''

SW NTAx OF NOUNS OF TIME.

I80. When reference is made to any particular division of =S_

time, the instrumental case is usually reguired ; as, चिभिर् वर्षः,

“ in three years `; द्वादशभिर् मासै:, “ in twelve months "; छ्णेन, ‘* in
an instant '; कियता कालेन, “ in how long time "? वषैःशते:, “ in
hundreds of years '; कालपर्ययेायेण, " in process of time.”
a. When, to duration of time, the accusative case is generally
used ; as, अनेककालॆ, “ for a long time "; एकं मासं, “ for one month `;
द्वौ मासौ, “ for two months '; वषैःशनं, “ for a hundred years "; शाखती:
समा:, “ to all eternity.” The instrumental, however, is sometimes
used in this sense also ; aS, द्वादशभिर् वर्षर् बाणिज्यं कृत्वा, “ having
traded for twelve years ''; कतिपयदिवसे:, “ for a few days.”
८. When any particular period or epoch is referred to, the
locative may be employed; as, कस्मिंश्चिद् दिवसे, “ on a certain day ";
तृतीये दिवसे, “ on the third day ;” or sometimes the accusative ; as,
यां रात्रिं ते दूताः प्रविशन्ति स्म पुरी' तां एधिं भजेन खप्नो दृष्ट:, “ on the night
when the ambassadors entered the city, on that night a dream
was Seen by Bharata.'
NOUNS OP PLACE AND DISTANCE.

I8l. Nouns expressive of distance between two places (according

to Carey) may be in the nominative ; as, कृष्ण: शतं क्रोशा: सोमनायात्,
“ Krishna is a hundred Kos from Somanāth.” Space may also be
expressed by the accusative ; as, क्रोशं गिरि:, “ a hill for a Kos '; or
by the instrumental ; as, क्रोशेन गत्वा, “ having gone for a Kos."
The place in which any thing is done may be in the locative ; as,
विदर्भेषु, ** in Widarbha.''

SW NTAx OF AD.JECTIWES.

-4ccusatice dfter the 4djectipe.

I82. The only adjectives governing an accusative are those
formed from desiderative bases; as, खगृहं जिगमिषु:, “ desirous of
 SWNTAx OR AD JB0 TIW IBS. 187

going home "; पुचम् अभीसु:, “ desirous of obtaining a son "; राजानं
दिडक्षु:, “desirous of seeing the king.”
Instrumental dffer the 4djec/ige.
d. Adjectives or participles used adjectively, expressive of
want or possession, reguire this case ; as, अर्थेन हीन:, “ destitute of
wealth ''; अर्थः समायुक्ता:, “ possessed of riches "; वारिणा पूर्णेो घटः,
* a jar full of water.”
८. So also of “ likeness '' or “ eguality "; as, अनेन सदृशो लोके न
भूतो न भविष्यति, “ there has never been, nor will there ever be, any
One like him in this world ''; ब्रह्महत्या समं पापं , “ a crime egual to
that of killing a Brahman '; प्राणै: समा पत्नी, “ a wife as dear as life `';
आादित्येन जुख्य:, “ egual to the sun." These are also joined with a
genitive.
Gemitice dfter the Adjectice.
I83. Adjectives Signifying “ dear to,' or the reverse, are joined
with the genitive ; as, राज्ञां प्रिय:, “ dear to kings "; भक्तीर: स्त्रीणां
प्रिया:, “ husbands are dear to women ''; न कश्चित् स्त्रीणाम् अप्रिय:,
“ women dislike nobody `; द्वेष्यो भवति मन्त्रिणां, “ he is detestable to
his ministers.''

d. Adjectives expressive of eguality often reguire this case as

well as the instrumental ; thus, सट्टेस्य सम:, “ egual to all ''; तस्य
अनुरूप:, “ like him "; चन्द्रस्य कल्प:, “ like the moon "; न तस्य जुख्य:
कश्चन , “ nobody is egual to him.”
८. So also other adjectives ; as, परोपदेश: सर्व्वेषाँ सुकर: नृणां, “ giving advice to
others is casy to all men”; मुखानाम् उचित:, “ torthy of happiness”; उचित:
झेशानां, **capable of toil.”
Locatioe after the -4djectice.
I84. Adjectives or participles used adjectively, expressive of
“ power '' or “ ability,' are joined with this case ; as, अध्वनि छ्मा
अश्वा:, “ horses able for the journey '; महति शची छ्मो राजा, “ a king
who is a match for a great enemy '; अशक्ता गृहकरणे शाक्का गृहभञ्जने,
‘‘ unable to build a house, but able to demolish One.'
८. So also other adjectives; aS, शस्त्रेषु कुशल:, “skilled in arms"; सलेपेषु प्राज्ञस्: ,
** toise in trifles'; त्वयि।अनुरक्तो विरक्तो वा स्बामी, “ is your mastor attachcd or
oducrse to you ? ” अनुजीविषु मन्दादर:, “ meglectful of his dependants.”
l88 SWNTAx OR THE COMPARATIW E AND SUPBRLATIWE.

SWNTAx OF THE COMPARATIWE AND SUPERLATIWE DEGREE.

I85. Adjectives in the comparative degree reguire the ablative

case ; as, पानी प्राणेभ्यो•पि गरीयसी, “ a wife dearer even than one's
life "; पुत्रस्यशैात् सुखतर: स्पर्शो लोके न विद्यते, “ there is no pleasanter
touch in this world than the touch of a son "ः वडैनात् प्रजारक्षणं श्रेयः,
“ the protection of one's subjects is better than aggrandiZement ';
न मत्तो द्रु:खिततरः पुमान् स्रस्ति, “ there is not a more wretched man
than I"; मतिर् बलाद् बलीयसी, “ mind is more powerful than strength-”
a. Sometimes they govern the instrumental ; as, प्राणेः प्रियतर:,
११.
“ dearer than life "; न अस्ति मया कश्चिद् अल्पभाग्यतरो भुवि, “ there is
nobody upon earth more unfortunate than I.''
D. When it is intended to express “ the better oftwo things” the genitive may be
used ; as,अनयोर् देशयो: को देशो भद्रतर: , “ of these two countries which is the
better ?'

c. The comparative, in Sanscrit, is often resolved into the

expression “ better and not "; as, वरं प्राणपरित्यागो न पुनर् ईदृशे। कस्मैरिणं
प्रवृति:, “ better abandon life than (literally, and not) engage in
such an action "; वर्षे मौनं कार्य्यं न च वचनम् उक्तॆ यद् अनृतं, “ it is better
that Silence should be kept than a speech uttered which is untrue.'
d. The superlative degree is usually joined with the genitive ;
as, ब्राह्मणो द्विपदां श्रेष्ठो गौर् वरिष्ठा चतुष्पदां । गुरुर् गरौयसां श्रेष्ठ: पुत्र: स्पशैवतां
वर:, “ a Brahman is the best of all bipeds, a cow of ५uadrupeds,
a Guru of venerable things, a son of things possessed of touch ";
but Sometimes with the locative ; aS, नरेषु बलवत्तम:, " the most
powerful of men "; and even with an ablative ; as, धान्यानां सङ्ग्रह
उत्तम: सचैसङ्गहात्, “a store of grain is the best of all stores."
e. Comparison is often expressed by an adjective in the positice
degree, joined with a noun in the ablative case ; as, नास्ति तस्मात्
पुण्यवान्, “ there is not a happier than he."
Jf Many words are in their nature comparative and reguire an ablative case,
especially वर्र, अवर्र, अन्य, अन्यदा, अन्यच, इतर, पर, अधिक, जन ; as, प्रछ्ालनात्।
पङ्कस्य अस्यशैनं वर्र्, “it is better not to touch mud than to wash it off"; दारिद्रम्
अव मरणात् , **poverty is less desirable than death ''; को मां मित्राद् अन्यस् चातुं
समयै:, “ who is able to rescue me, other than a friend?” किञ्चु दुःखम् अत: परँ,
* wlःat grief is greater than this{'' न श्रुताद् अन्यद् विब्रूयात् , “ one ought not to
speak differently from what one has heard”; तत्तालाद् अन्यदा, * at another time
 SWNTAx 0F PRONOUNS. 189

than the present "; नरस्य न अन्यच्च मरणाद् भर्यं, “ there is no cause of fear to man
from any other guarter than from death''; योजनशताद् अधिकं, “ more than a
hundred yojanas”; कान्तोदन्त: सङ्गमात्। किचिद् ज्ञनः, “ intelligence of a lower is
something less than a meeting.”
7. Numerals ifused partitively may take the genitive ; as, अश्वानां शतसहस्राणि,
* a hundred thousand of the horses''; and, if comparatively, the ablative ; as,
विवादात्। द्विगुणं दमं, “ a fine the double of that which is in dispute.”
SWNTAx OF PRONOUNS.

186. The chief peculiarities in the syntax of pronouns have

already been noticed in Chapter W., pp. 50-55. It remains to
offer one or two remarks with reference more especially to the
relative and interrogative.
d. In the use of these pronouns a very peculiar attractiom is often
to be observed ; that is, when either a relative or interrogative
pronoun has been used, and an indefinite pronoun would naturally
be expected to follow, the relative or interrogative are repeated,
as in the following examples: यो यस्य (for कस्यचित्) भाव: स्यात्,
“ whatever may be the disposition of whom (i.e. any one)"; यद्
रोचते यस्मै, “ whatever is pleasing to any one "; यस्य ये गुणा: सन्ति,
“ whatever excellencies belong to any one "; यद् येन युज्यते, “ what
ever corresponds with any thing "; केषां किं शास्त्रम् अध्ययनीर्यं, “ what
book is to be read by whom ? (i.e. by any one),*
I87. The relative and interrogative are sometimes used together
in an indefinite distributive sense ; as, यानि कानि मित्राणि, “ any
friends whatever "; or more usually with वित् affixed to the inter
rogative ; as, यस्मे कस्मैचित्, “ to any one whatever.''
a. The neuter of the interrogative is often joined with the
instrumental to signify “ what is the use of ? " " there is no need
of "; as, श्रुतेन किं यो न धर्मम् आचरेत् किम् आत्मना यो न जितेन्द्रियो भवेत्,
* of what use is scriptural knowledge (to one) who does not prac
tice virtue, of what use is a soul (to one) whose passions are not
kept in subjection ?" किं ते अनेन प्रश्रेन, “ what business have you to
make this inguiry ?"

* See, on this Subject, Bopp's Comp. Gram. (Prof. Eastwick's Translation),

vol. ii. p. 587.
190 SW NTA K OP WERIBS.

८. As already shewn (p. 166.), a relative pronoun is Sometimes rendered unne

cessary by the uso of the relative compound ; thus, नगरी चन्द्रिकाधौतहम्यैा is egui
valent to नगरी यस्याश् चन्द्रिकाधीतानि ह्म्येाणि, “a city whose palaces wore sil
vered by the moon-beams.' The relative, when followed by a pluperfect tense,
may sometimes be expressed by the indeclinable participle ; thus, सिंहो व्यrधं हत्वा,
* a lion hawing killed a hunter,” or “ a lion who had killed a hunter.”
SW NTAx OP WERBS.

I88. Nothing is more common in Sanscrit syntax than for the

verb to be omitted altogether, or supplied from the context.
This is more especially the case with the copula, or Substantive
verb ; thus, यावन् मेरुस्थिता देवा यावद् गङ्गा महीतले । चन्द्रार्कौ गगने यावत्
तावद् विप्रकुले वर्य, “as long as the gods have existed in Meru, as
long as the Ganges upon earth, as long as the Sun and moon in
the sky, so long have we (existed) in the family of Brahmans";*
परिज्छेदः पाण्डित्यं, “ discrimination (is) wisdom."
IWomimatice, Gemitioe, and Locatice 4bsolute.

l89. These cases are used absolutely with participles. The no

mimative is very rarely thus used ; as, मुड्न् मे समायात: पुण्यवान् अस्मि,
“ my friend having arrived, I am happy.” The genitive more
freguently ; as, स्रापदाम् स्रापतन्तीनां, “ calamities impending "; पश्यतां
नराणां , “ the men looking on.” The locative very commonly ; as,
तस्मिन् जीवति जीवामि मृते तस्मिन् विये पुन:, “ he living I live, he dying
I die ''; . स्रवसन्नायां रात्री, “ the night being ended "; असति उपायान्तरे,
“ there being no other expedient.” Sometimes the verb is omitted ;
as, दूरे भये, “ the danger (being) distant.” When the passive parti
ciple is thus used absolutely with a moun in the locative Case, the
present participle of अस्, “ to be," is often redundantly added ; as,
तया कृते सति, “ it being so done.”
Hence it is evident that the genitive or locative absolute often
takes the place of the particles, “ when,'“ while,” “since,' “although.`
Worninatice Case affer the 7erb.
** ८८
l90. Werbs signifying “ to be," " to become," “ to appear, tO

* The writer of these pages is indebted for this couplet to Mr. Seton Karr, of the
Bengal Civil Service. It is in the mouth of all the Kulin Brahmans of IBengal, and
is that on which they found thcir claim to precedence.
 SWNTAx OP W IERBS. 191

be called," or “ to be esteemed,'' and other passive verbs used

denominatively, may take a nominative after them ; as, राजा प्रजापालक:
स्यात्, “ let a king be the protector of his subjects '; सा निणनन्दा
प्रतिभाति, “ she appears sorrowful ''; यामो-रण्यं प्रतिभाति, “ the village
appears like a desert "; राजा धम्मै अभिधीयते, “ a king is called Jus
tice "; श्रुतो हितोपदेशो-र्यं , “ this (book) is called Hitopadesha."
4ccusatice Case affer the Werb.
I91. Transitive verbs generally govern this case ; as, विश्रं ससंज्ञे
वधा:, “ Brahmā created the universe '; पुष्पाणि विनोति नारी, “ the
woman gathers flowers "; प्राणान् जहौ। मुमूर्षु:, " the dying man gace ap
the ghost "; मषु वजैयेत्, “ one should apoid wine "; तत्त्वं ब्रूहि, “ speak
the truth.'
d. So also verbs of “ motion '; as, सणति तीर्थॆ। मुनि:, “ the holy man
goes to the place of pilgrimage "; नद्यः समुद्रं द्रवन्ति, “ rivers ran
into the ocean'; भ्रमति मही', “ he wanders over the earth.''
८. Werbs of motion are not unfreguently used with substantives
to supply the place of other verbs ; as, ख्यातिं याति, “ he goes to
fame " for “ he becomes famous"; समताम् एति, “ he goes to eguality"
for “ he becomes egual.”
c. The following are other examples : अप्राप्यम् इच्छति, **he desires what is unat

tainable"; विद्यां चिन्तयेत् , “he should think on wisdom”; अश्वम् स्रारोहति, “ he

mounts his horse"; कर्ममेाणि स्रारभिर, “ they begam the business"; गतान् मा शुच:,
*griece not.for the departed”; सचैलोकाधिपत्यम् अहैति, “he deserpes thesovereignty
of the universe”; पट्टेतकन्दरँ शेते, * he lies doum in a cave of the mountain.”
d. There are certain verbs which take a redundant accusative case after them of

a substantive derived from the same root; as, शपर्यं शेपं, *he Swore an oath '';
वसति वार्स, “he dwells"; वर्त्तेते। वृत्तिं, *he conducts himself"; वाक्यं वदति, “ he
speaks a speech''; नदति नादं, “he raises a cry ” (cf the Greek expressions A6%
Aॐov, xutpa) xapāy, &c.),
Double Accusatioe dfter the Werb.
192. Werbs of ‘*asking” gowern a double accusative ; as, देवं वरँ याचते, “he
seeks a boon of the god"; धनं राजानं प्रार्थैयते, “he begs money from the king."
Of “speaking”; as, राजानं वचनम् अब्रवीत्, “he addressed a speech to the kingः”
a. Causal verbs ; as, सतिfयै भोजयति अत्रं, “ he causes the guest to eat food ";
त्वां बोधयामि यत् ते हृितं, “ I cause you to know what is for your interest ";
शिष्पं वेदान् अध्यापयति गुरु:, “the Guru teaches his pupil the Wedas"; तां गृहं
1{}2 SWNTAx 0F W BRBS.

प्रवेशयति, *he causes her to enter the house'; फलपुष्पोदकं माहयामास नृपात्मजं,
**hepresented the king's son with fruits, flowers, and water"; पुचम् अङ्कम् स्रारोपयति,
**she causes herson to sit on her lap” (literally “ her hip”) ; विद्या नरैः। नृपं सङ्गमयति,
**learning leads a man into the presence of a king.''
b. The following are other examples: तं सेनापतिम्। अभिषिषिबु:, “ they inaugu
rated him general,' more usually joined with an acc. and loc. ; देवं पतिँ वयति,
*she chooses a god for her husband "; स्रवचिनोति कुमुमानि वृक्षान् , “ she gothers
blossoms from the trees"; तान्। प्राहिणोद् यमसादनं, “ he sent them to the abode of
Yama” (Hades) ; स्वचेष्टितानि नर्र् गुरूत्बं विपरीततां वा नयन्ति, “ his own acts lead
a man to eminence or the rewerse.'

Instrumental Case gfter the 7erb.

I93. Any verb may bejoined with the instrumental, to express the
instrument, or cause, Or manner of the action ; as, पुष्पं वातेन मूप्यति,
“ the flower fades by reason of the wind '; स्रझेः क्रीडति , “ he plays
with dice "; मेधो-ग्निं वर्षर् निवैापयति, “ the cloud puts out the fire with
its rain "; सुखेन जीवति , “ he lives happily.”
८. In this Sense many causals take an instrumental ; as, तां मिष्टात्रैर् भोजयामास,
“ he caused her to eat Sweet-meats.''

b. After werbs of “ motiom” this case is used in reference either to the behicle bg achic/ं,
or the place on tohich, the motion takes place ; as, येन प्रयाति, “ he goes in a
chariot "; स्रग्वेन सव्वणति, “he goes on horse-back"; मार्गेण गच्छति, “ he goes on the
road "; पुषुवे। सागरं नौकया, “ he navigated the ocean in a boat.” Similarly,
मुस्राव नयनैः सलिलं, “tears flowed through the eyes.”
c. After werbs of “ carrying,' *placing,' &c., it is used in reference to the place
on which any thing is carried or placed : as, वहति मूडॆा इन्धनं, *he bears faggots
om his head'; कुङ्कुरः स्कन्धेन उह्यते, “ the dog is borne on the shoulders.” कृ is
found with this case in the sense of placing ; as, शिरसा पुचम् अकरोत्, “he placed
his son on his head.” The following are other examples : शिष्येण गच्छति। गुरू:,
“ the master g0es in compamy acith the pupil '; मन्त्रयामास मन्त्रिभिः, “ he comsulted
uith his ministers.” But in this sense सह is usually placed after it. भवॆा भाय्येया
सङ्गच्छति, “ the husband meets the wifo"; संयोजयति रयं हयै:, “ he harnesses the
horses to the chariot ; देहेन वियुज्यते, “ he is separated from the body,' more usu
ally with the ablative. युध्यते। शत्रुभि:, “he fights his enemies,” or शत्रुभि: सह .
d. Werbs of “ boasting"; as, विद्यया विकत्यसे, “you boast of your learning”;
परेषां यशसा श्रुलाघसे, “you glory in the fame of others.” Of “ suearing"; as,
धनुषा शेपे, “he stcore by his bow.”
 SW N'I'Ax O H' W BRBS. 198

e. Werbs of **bug/in//” and “ selling” take the instrumental of the price ; as,
सहस्रैर् अपि मूलैश्ाणाम् एटकं क्रीणीष्व पण्डितं, “ bug/ one wise man even for thousands of
fools”; गवां सहस्रेण गृहं विक्रीणीते, “ he sells his house for a thousand cows.”
JDatice dfter the Werb. .
l94. All verbs in which a Sense of imparting or commamicating
any thing to any object is inherent, may take an accusative of the
thing imparted, and a dative of the object to which it is imparted.
(Freguently, however, they take a genitive or even a locative of
the object), पुत्राय मोदकान् ददाति, “ he gices sweetmeats to his son ";
प्रतिशृणोति, “ he promises a cow to the Brahman '; देवदत्ताय
विप्राय गां
धनं धारयति, “ he orpes money to Devadatta '; कन्यां तस्मै प्रतिपादय,
“ consign the maiden to him,'' more usually with the locative.
The following are other examples of the dative ; तेषां विनाशाय प्रकुरुते
मन:, “ he sets his mind on their destruction "; गमनाय मतिं दधौ, “ he
set his mind on departure,” or with the locative. तन् मह्यं रोचते,
“ that is pleasing to me "; शिष्येभ्य: प्रवक्ष्यामि तत् , “ I will declare this
to my pupils "; सर्व्वे राज्ञे विज्ञापयति, “ he makes knomom all to the
king,'' these are also joined with the genitive of the person.
अमृतत्वाय कल्पते , “ he is rendered fit for immortality "; प्रभवति मम बधाय,
“ he has the poiper to kill me "; तान् मातुर् बधाय स्रचोदयत्, “ he incited
them to the murder of their mother "; पुचाय कुध्यति, “ he is angry
with his SOn.'

-46ladice affer the Wer७.

195. All verbs may take an ablative of the object from which
any thing proceeds, or arises, or is produced ; as, भ्रश्यति। वृष्ट्ात्। पर्च,
“ the leaf falls from the tree "; रुधिरँ श्रवति गाचात्, “ blood flows from
the body ''; सासनाद् उत्तिष्ठति, “ he rises from his Seat '; मृत्पिण्डत: कर्त्रा
कुरुते यद्यद् इच्छति, “ from the lump of clay the artist makes whatever
he wishes `' (p. 152. a.); विनयाद् याति पात्रतां, “ from education a per
SOn attains capacity ''; निजैगाम नगरात्, “ he went out from the city.'
a. Werbs of “ fearing” may be joined with the ablative ; as,
साधुर् न तया मृत्योर् बिभेति यया अनृतात्, “ a good man does not fear death
so much as falsehood "; दण्डाद् उद्विजते जगत् , “ the whole world stands
in awe of punishment.'
b. The following are other examples: प्रासादाद् अवरोहति, * he descemds.from the
palace'; विष्णु: खगैीाद् सवततार्, “ Wishnu descended.from heaven''; कनकसूचम्
अङ्गाद् अवतारयति, “ he takes off (causes to descend) the golden bracelet from his
C C
194 SW NTAN OP W IER BS.

body"; निवर्त्तेते। पापात्, “he ceases.from wickedness"; वचनाद् विणम, “ he left off
Speaking '; नरकात् पितरं त्रायते पुचो धामिमेक:, “a virtuous Son sapes his father
from hell"; अश्वमेधसहस्रात् सत्यम् अतिरिच्यते, “ truth is superior to a thousand
sacrifices '; खहितात्। प्रमाद्यति, “ he meglects his own interest.''

Gemitice dffer the 7Terb.

l96. The genitive, in Sanscrit, is constantly interchangeable with
the dative, locative, or even accusative.* It is more especially,
however, used to supply the place of the first of these cases, So
that almost all verbs may take a genitive as well as dative of the
object to which any thing is imparted, For example, दरिद्रस्य धनं
ददाति, " he gices money to the poor.” It may be used for the
locative after verbs of “ consigning `; as, निक्षेपं मम समपेयति, “ he
deposits a pledge with me ': or, of " trusting '; as, न कश्चित् स्त्रीणां
श्रद्दधाति, “ nobody puts trust in women ''; and for the accusative, in
examples such as, अश्विन्तितानि तु:खानि आयान्ति देहिनां, “ unexpected ills
come upon Corporeal beings.”
a. Other examples are : अजानताम् अस्माकं ख्यापय कस्य असि भायैा, “tel। us
who are ignorant of it, whose wife you are ?' कस्य (for कामात्) बिभ्यति धार्मिमेकाः,
*of whom are the rightcous afraid?” यद् अन्यस्य प्रतिजानीते न तद् अन्यस्य दद्यात् ,
* one Should not gice to one what one promises to another, ''; मम न शृणोति,
“ he does not hear me” (cf the Greek usage) ; मम स्मर:, “ remember me,” or with
the accusative. अस्माकं मृत्युः प्रभवति, “ death ouercomes us'; अग्निर् न तृप्यति
काष्ठानां, “ fire is not satisfied acitl fuel"; तेघो घमेिया:, “ forgige them.”
Locatioe affer the Werb.
197. This case is very widely applicable, but, as elsewhere re
marked, is freguently interchangeable with the dative and genitive.
The first sense of the locative reguires that it should be united
with verbs, in reference only to the place or time in which any
thing is done ; as, पङ्के मज्जति, “ he sinks in the mud "; पुरे वसति, “ he
dwells in the city "; रणमूङ्घेि तिष्ठति, “ he stands in the front of the
fight "; सूर्य्योदये प्रबुध्यते, " at sun-rise he awakes.” But the transi
tion from the place to the object, Or recipient of any action, is

* This wague use of the genitive to express various relations prewails also in
early Greek.”
 SWNTAx OI' W IBRBS. 195

matural, and hence it is that verbs are found with the locative of
the object to which any thing is imparted or communicated, as in
the following examples : मा प्रयच्छ ईश्वर धनं, “ bestorg not money on
the mighty "; तस्मिन् कार्ययैणि निष्पिामि , “ I intrast my affairs to
him "ः पुचे अङ्गुरीयकं समपैयति, “ he consigns a ring to his son "; योग्ये
संविवे न्यस्यति राज्यभारं, “ he intrusts the burthen of the kingdom to a
capable minister "; प्रेतं भूमौ निदध्यात्, “ one should place (bury) a dead
man in the ground `; धम्में मनो दधाति, " he applies his mind to virtue.”
In this sense कृ is used ; as, पृष्ठे इन्धनम् अकरोत्, “ he placed the wood
on his back ''; मतिं पापे करोति, “ he applies his mind to sin.”
८. When दा, “ to give,” is used for “ to put,” it follows the same analogy ; as,
तस्य पुच्छाये हस्तं देहि, “ put
your hand on the end of its tail ;” भस्मन्वये पदं ददी,
* he placed his foot on a heap of ashes.” Similarly, वस्त्राचले धृतो-स्ति, ** he was
/eld by the skirt of his garment.” So also verbs of ** seiZing,” “ striking,”
केशेषु गृह्णाति Or आकृषति, *he seises or drags him by the hair ''; मुने। प्रहरति,
** he strikes a Sleeping man.”
b. Other examples are, उये तपसि वर्त्तेते, *he is engoged in a very severe
penance"; पएकार्येषु मा व्यापृतो भू:, “ do not bus।/ ?yoursedf about other people's
affairs'; विषयेषु सज्यते, “ he is addicted to objects of sense''; सट्टैलोकहिते रमते ,
** he delights in the good of all the world ”; ठुगैधिकारे नियुज्यते, * he is appointed
८o the command of the fort "; द्वी वृषभौ। धुरि नियोजयति, “he yokes two bulls to
the pole'; सैनापत्ये अभिषिच्च माँ, “ amoint me to the generalship "; यतते
पापनियहे, ** he strices to suppress evil-doers.”
c. न मद्विधे युज्यते वाक्पम् ईदृशं, **such language is not suited to aperson like me ";
प्रभुत्वं त्वयि। प्रयुज्यते, “sovereignty is suited to you”; अासने उपाविशत् , ** he re
climed on a Seat'; वृष्पाम् आासखः, * sit thou on a cushion"; शत्रुषु। विप्रसिति,
**he confides in his enemies"; चरणयोः पततिः, *it falls at his feet"; लुठति पादेषु,
** it rolls at the feet.”

Change 0f Case dfter the same Werb.

198. This sometimes occurs; as, विधुरो धृतराष्ट्राय कुन्ती च गान्धाय्यॆा: सर्श्वे
न्यवेदयेतां, “ Widhura and Kunti announced every thing, the one to Dhritarāshtra,
the other to Gāndhāri ” (Astrashikshā 84. Ed. Prof. Johnson), where the same
verb governs a dative and genitive. Similarly, in the Mitralabha (p. 10.), शङ्गिणां
विग्वासो न कलेव्यः स्त्रीषु च, “ confidence is not to be placed in horned animals Or
women.'
l9(G SW NTAN () H' PASSIW IR W IERBS.

SWNTAx OP PASSIWE WERBS.

I99. The prevalence of a passive construction is the most re

markable feature in the syntax of this language. Passive verbs
are joined with the agent, instrument, or cause, in the instrumental
case,* and agree with the object in number and person ; as, वातेन
रज उडूयते, “the dust is raised by the wind"; तेन संचैद्रव्याणि सज्जीक्रियन्तां,
“ let all things be prepared by him "; इषुभिर् स्रादित्यो-न्तरधीयत, “ the
Sun was concealed by arrowS.T But the passive participle, as
elsewhere observed, usually takes the place of the past temses of
the passive verb, and agrees with the object in gender as well as
number ; as, नेत्राणि समायुतानि वारिणा, “ (their) eyes were suffused with
tears "; तेन उन्कं (इदं being understood), " it was said by him.” This
is the favourite construction of Sanscrit prose composition, and the
love for this idiom is very remarkably displayed in such phrases
as the following : हुःखेन गम्यते, “ he is gone to by misery,' for ढुखं
गच्छति ; and स्रागम्यतां दवेन, “ let it be come by your majesty,” for
स्रागच्छतु देव: ; and again, अस्माभिर् एकच स्थीयतां, “ let it be remained
by us in one spot,” for " let us remain in one spot `; येन मार्गेण इष्टं
तेन गम्यतां, “ by whatever road it is desired, by that let it be gone.”
a. Active or causal verbs, which take a double accusative, will retain one accusative
when constructed passively ; but the other accusative passes into a nominative case :
thus, instead of स मां परूषाणि उवाच, *he addressed me in harsh words,” may be
written। तेन अहं परूषाणि उक्ता:, “ by him I was addressed in harsh words.”
SYNTAx OF THE IN FINITIWE.

200. The student must guard against supposing that the infini
tive, in Sanscrit, may be used with the same latitude as in other
languages. Its use is very limited, corresponding rather to that
of the Latin supines, as, indeed, its termination aam may be sup
posed to indicate. And this restriction in the employment of a
part of Speech so important, might be expected to cripple very
seriously the syntactical capabilities of the language, were it not
that the power of compounding words abundantly compensates for
any Such deficiency. Let the student, therefore, accurately distin

* There are a fow instanccs of the agent in tho genitive case ; as, मम। कृतं पापं,
“a crime committed by me,” for मया .
 SWNTA K OR' THRº IN FINITIW B MOOT). 197

guish between the infinitive of Sanscrit, and the infinitive of the

classical languages. In these latter we have this part of speech
constantly made the Subject of a proposition ; Or, in other words,
standing in the place of a nominative, and an accusative case often
admissible before it. We have it also assuming different forms,
to express present, past, or future time, and completeness or in
completeness in the progress of the action. The Sanscrit infini
tive, on the other hand, can never be made the Subject or nomi
native Case to a verb, admits of no accusative before it, and Can
only express indeterminate time and incomplete action. Wherever
it occurs it must always be considered as the object, and never the
Subject, of some verb expressed or understood. And as the object
of the verb, it may be regarded as eguivalent to an indeclinable
Substantive, in which the force Of two cases, an accusative and
dative,* is inherent, and which differs from other Substantives in
its power of governing a case. Its use as a substantive with the
force of the accusatige case correSponds to one use of the Latin
infinitive ; thus, तत् सर्श्वे श्रोतुम् इच्छामि, “ I desire to hear all that,”
“ id audire capio," where श्रोतुं and audire are both eguivalent to
accusative cases, themselves also governing an accusative. Simi
larly, रोदितुं प्रवृत्ता, “ she began to weep "; and महीं जेतुम् अग्भि, “ he
began to conguer the earth,” where महीजयम्। अग्भेि , “ he began the
conguest of the earth,'' would be egually correct. But the San
scrit infinitive appears most commonly in the character of a Sub
Stantive with the force of a datice case ; Or, in other words, will
be found in most instances to involve a sense which belongs espe
cially to the Sanscrit dative, viZ. that of the end or purpose for
which any thing is done, and which it would often be Legually
idiomatic to express by that case ; thus, शावकान्। भवितुम् अ'ागच्छति,
“ he comes to devour the young ones "; शत्रून् योद्धुं सैन्यं प्राहिणोत्, “ he
sent an army to fight the enemy.” In these cases it would be
egually correct in Sanscrit to substitute for the infinitive the dative
case of the verbal noun formed with the affix ama ; thus, भष्झ्णाय,

* Bopp considers the termination of the infinitive to be the accusative of the affix
त', and it is certain that in the Vedas an irregular infinitive in तवे and तवै is found,
`*

which would scem to bo the dative of the same affix. . See I'anini 8. 4. {).
I98 SWNTAN 0F THE IN FINITIW B MOOTD.

“ for the eating `; योधनाय, “ for the fighting `; and in Latin the
infinitive could not be used at all, but either the Supine, deporatur27a,
pagmatum, or still more properly, the conjunction with the sub
junctive mood, “ at deporet,” “ add pagmarent.' The following are
other examples in which the infinitive has a dative force in ex
pressing the purpose of the action : पानीयं पातुं नदीम् अगमत्, “ he
went to the river to drink water `; मम बन्धनं छेचुम् उपसपैति, “ he
comes to cut asunder my bonds `; मां चातुं समयै: (अस्ति being under
stood), “ he is able to rescue me `; पाशान् संवरितुं सयानो बभूव, “ he
busied himself about collecting together the snares.'
a. The Sanscrit infinitive, therefore, rather deserves the name
of a Supine than an infinitive, and in its character of Supine is
Susceptible of either an active or passive Signification. In its
passive character, however, like the Latin Supine in ad, it is joined
with certain words only, the most usual being the passive verb
शक्, “ to be able," and its derivatives ; thus, पाशो न छेत्तुं शक्यते,
“ the snare cannot be cut `; न शक्या: समाधातुं ते दोषा:, “ those evils
cannot be remedied.' The following are other instances : मण्डपः
कारयितुम् आाग्भ:, “ the shed was begun to be built "; राज्ये अभिषेकुं
भवान् निरूपित:, “ your honour has been selected to be inaugurated
to the kingdom "; अहैति कर्त्तुं, “ it deserves to be done ” (Naisha
diya, 5. II2) ; कर्तुम् अनुचितं , “ improper to be done ” (ef. facta in
di/mum and.7rotety o.ioxpdy).
b. The root अहै, ** to deserve,'' when used in combination with an infinitive, is
usually eguivalent to an entreaty or respectful imperative ; as, धम्मॆान्। नो वनुम्।
अहेसि, * deign (or Simply ‘ be pleased') to tell us our duties.' It sometimes has
the force of the Latin debet; as, न मादृशी त्वाम् अभिभाष्टुम् अहेति, “such a person
as I ought not to address you "; न खटनं शोचितुम् अहेसि, “you ought not to
bewail him.'

c. The infinitive is sometimes joined with the noun कामः, **desire,” to form a
kind of compound adjective, expressive of the “ wish to do any thing,' and the
final m of the infinitive is then rejected ; thus, द्रष्टुकाम:, -मा, -मं, ** desirous of
seeing '; जेतुकाम:, -मा, -मं, “ wishing to conguer."
USB AND CONNExION OR THE TENSES.
20l. Pम्.घsघNr ressघ--This tense, besides its proper use, is
freguently used for the future ; as, क्व गच्छामि, “ whither Shall I
go ?' कदा त्वां पश्यामि, “ whon shall I soe thee ?”
 USB AND CONNExION OR THE TENSBS. 199

a. In narration it is commonly used for the past tense ; as,

स भूमिं स्पृष्ट्वा क्री स्पृशति ब्रूते च, “ he, having touched the ground,
touches his ears and SayS.'
b. It may denote habitual or repeated action ; as; मृग: प्रत्यहं तत्र गत्वा शस्यं
खादति, “ the deer going there every day was in the habit of eating the corn”;
यदा स मूषिकशब्दं शृणोति तदा विडालं संवडैयति, “ whenever he heard the noise
of the mouse then he would feed the cat.'

c. It is usually found after यावत् ; as, यावन् मे दन्ता न बुट्चन्ति तावत् तव। पाशं
छिनद्मि, “ as long as my teeth do not break, S0 long will I gnaw asunder your
fetters.” (Cf the use of dum).
d. The present tense of the r00t आास् , “to Sit,' ** remain,' is used with the
present participle of another verb to denote continuous or Simultaneous action ; as,
पशूनां बर्धं कुट्टेत् अास्ते, “ he keeps making a slaughter of the beasts"; मम पश्वाद्
अ'ागच्छन् अ'ास्ते’, “ he is in the act of coming after me."
e. The particle स्म, when used with the present, gives it the force of a perfect ;
as, प्रविशन्ति रम पुरी', * they entered the city.”
202. काम्’sr Puचrघम्:Trघ.–Although this tense properly has
reference to past incomplete action, and has been SO rendered in
the examples given at pp. l01-l28., yet the Student must guard
against Supposing that this is its usual force. It is most com
monly used to denote indefinite past time, without any mecessary
connexion with another action ; as, अर्थे यहीतुं यत्नम् अकरवं, “ I made
an effort to collect wealth,” not mecessarily, “ I was making.”
203. PorघNºrta*..–The name of this tense is no guide to its
numerous uses. Perhaps its most common force is that of fitness
in phrases, where in Latin we should expect to find oporte/
with the infinitive ; as, आागतं भयं वीक्ष्य नर: कुर्य्यैाद् यथोचितं, “ having
beheld danger actually present, a man Should act in a becoming
manner.'

a. It is als0 employed, as might be expected, in indefinite general expressions; as,

यस्य यो भावः स्यात्, “ whatever may be the disposition of any one”; यदा राजा
स्वयं न कुय्यॆात् काय्यैतिदशैनं, “ when the king may not himself make investigation of
the case '; अप्राप्नुकालवचनं ब्रुवन् प्राप्नुयाद् अपमानं, “ by uttering unseasonable
words one may meet with dishonour.”
U. Especially in conditional Sentences ; as, यदि राजा दण्डं न प्रणयेत्। स्वाम्यं
कस्मिँश्विन् नस्यात् सर्व्वेसेितवश्च भिद्येरन्, * if the king were not to inflict punish
ment, ownership would remain with nob0dy, and all barriers would be broken
200 USR ANI) ('ONNBNION OR' THE T BNSBS.

down.'' Sometimes the conjunction is omitted ; as, न भवेत्।, * should it not be so';
न स्यात् पराधीनः, “ were he not subject to another.''
c. The potential often occurs as a Softened imperative, this language, in common
with others in the East, being averse to the more abrupt form ; thus, गच्छेः, ** do
thou go,” for गच्छ ; and अद्यातर् फलानि, “ let him eat fruits,'' for अजु.
204. प्vr*चम्:Arrva.—This tense yields the usual force of “ com
mand ” or “ entreaty "; as, स्राश्वसिहि, “ take courage `; माम् अनुस्मर,
“ remember me.' मा and not न must be used in prohibition ;
अनृतं मा ब्रूहि, “ do not tell a falsehood.' The first person is
8aS,

used to express necessity, see example, r. l72.

a. It is Sometimes employed in conditional phrases to express contingency ; as,
अनुजानीहि मां गच्छामि, “ permit me (and) I will go,” i.e. “ if you will permit me,
I will go"; स्राज्ञापय हन्मि द्रुष्टजनं, “ if you command me I will kill the villain”;
अभयवाचं मे यच्छ गच्छामि, “ if you give me a promise of Security I will go.”
205. s EcoND Pम्:="घम्. Pa--As observed at p. 57., this tense is
properly used to express an action done at some definite period
of past time ; as, कौशल्यादयो नृपतिं दशरथं चक्रन्दु:, “ Kaushalyā and the
others bewailed king Dasharatha.' It is freguently, however,
employed indeterminately.
206. 'म्.sr rण्rण्म्:B.—This tense expresses definite futurity ;
as, तासु दिक्षु कामस्य फलं लब्धासि, “ in those regions thou shalt obtain
the fruit of thy desire "; but is rarely found.
207. secoND ’ण्rण्म्.च.–This tense, although properly indefinite,
is employed to express all degrees aid kinds of futurity, immediate
or remote, definite Or indefinite ; as, खाद् पयः पास्यसि, “ thou।
shalt drink sweet water "; तच अवश्यं पानी' द्रष्ट्यति, “ there certainly
he will see his wife.'
a. It is sometimes used for the imperative ; as, यद् देर्यं तद् दास्यसि,
“ whatever is to be given that you will give '' (do thou give).
208. Parम्:D ºu="घम्.#'#श्च--This tense properly expresses time
indefinitely past ; as, सभून् नृप:, “ there lived (in former times) a
king.' It is not, however, often used as a past tense by earlier
writers, but is freguently employed to supply the place of the im
perative, after the prohibitive particle मा or मारम, the augment
being omitted ; as, मा कृथा:, “ do not make "; मा त्यांीः समर्य, “ do
not lose the opportunity "; मास्म अनृतं वादी:, “do not tell an un
truth "; मा क्रुध:, “ do not be angry "; मा शुच:, “ do not grieve `; मा
हिंसो:, “ do not injure.''
 SYNTAx OF PARTIOIPLES. 201

209. aचश्raoxorrva-Only one example of this tense ocours in

the Hitopadesha : नित्यं भूयात् सकलमुखवसति:, “ may he constantly be
the abode of all happiness.' It is only used in pronouncing
bemedictions.

2l0. coworrrowAw.—This tense is even less freguent than the

last. It is used in conditional propositions, as illustrated by the
following example from Manu : यदि राजा दण्डं न प्रणयेत् तदा शूले मायान्
टुंबैलान्। बलवत्तरा:, “ if the king were not to inflict punish
इव स्रपच्यन्
ment, then the stronger would roast the weak like fish on a
spit "; or, according to the Scholiast, हिंसाम् अकरिष्यन्, “would cause
injury.'
SY NTAx 0F PARTIOIPI,ES.

2ll. Participles govern the cases of the verbs whence they are
derived ; as, व्याधं पश्यन्, “ seeing the fowler "; अरण्ये चरन्, “ walking
in the forest"; शब्दम् स्राकण्यै, “ having heard a noise "; पानीयम् चपीत्वा
गत:, “ he went away without drinking water.'
Passice Past Participle.
212. The syntax of this most useful participle has been ex
plained at p. l37. r. l25. and r. I99. When used actively it may
often govern the accusative case ; as, वृष्म् स्रारूढः, “ he ascended
the tree "; वल्मै तीणै:, “ having crossed the road "; अहं नगरीम् स्रनुप्राप्न:,
“ I reached the city.' But its active use is restricted to meuter
verbs. The following are other examples ; पक्षिण उत्पतिता:, “ the
birds flew away "; व्याधो निवृत्त:, “ the fowler returned "; स प्रमुष्म:,
“ he fell asleep.''
-4ctiue Past Participle.
2l3. This participle is commonly used for a perfect tense active,
and may govern the case of the verb ; as, सर्वॆ श्रुतवान्, “ he heard
everything "; पत्नी पतिम् स्रालिङ्गितवती, “ the wife embraced her hus
band "; एशो हस्ते फलं दत्तवान्, “ he gave the fruit into the hand of
the king.'
Indeclimable Past Participles.
214. The importance of these participles has been noticed, p. l4:B.
They occur, in narration, more commonly than any other, and are
almost invariably used for the past tense, as united with a copula
tive conjunction ; thus, तद् साकयै निश्चितम् एव चर्य कुबुर् इति मत्वा बागं
D D
202 SW NTAx OR PARTICIPILBS.

त्यक्ा स्नात्वा खगृहं ययौ, “ having heard this, having thought to himself
* this is certainly a dog,' having abandoned the goat, having bathed,
he went to his own house.'' In all these cases we Should use in

English the past tense with a conjunction ; thus, “ When he had

heard this, he thought to himself that it must certainly be a dog.
He then abandoned the goat, and when he had bathed, went to his
own house.' It is evident from this example that the indeclinable
participles often stand in the place of a pluperfect tense, a tense
which does not really exist in Sanscrit.
a. But although they always refer to something past, it Should be observed that
they may freguently be rendered in English by the present participle, as in the
fifth sentence of the story at r. 220.
b. Another though less freguent use of them is as gerunds in do ; thus, नणः
शास्त्राण्य् अधीत्य* भवन्ति पण्डिता:, “ men become wise by reading the Shāstras";
स्रकाययैःशतं कृत्वा भर्त्तेव्या, “a wife is to be supported even by doing
भार्यये'ा। अप्य्
a hundred wrong things"; किं पौरूषं हत्वा सुनं, * what bravery is there in killing
a sleeping man?'
c. Prof. Bopp considers the termination of this participle (वा) to be the instru

mental case of the same affix of which the infinitive termination (um) is the accu
sative. Whether this be S0 or not, there can be little doubt that the indeclinable
participle bears about it much of the character of an instrumental case. And the
proof of this is, that it is constantly found in grammatical connexion with the agentः
in this case; thus, सर्व्वेः पशुभिर् मिलित्वा सिंहो विज्ञप्न:, “by all the beasts having
met together thelion was informed''; सर्व्रर् जालम् स्रादाय उडुीयतां, * by all having
taken up the net let it be flown away.”
Future Passipe Participles.
215. The usual sense yielded by this participle is that of “ fit
ness '' or “ necessity '; and the usual construction reguired is,
that the agent on whom the duty or necessity rests, be in the in
strumental case, and the participle agree with the object ; as, त्वया।
प्रवृत्तिर् न विधेया, “ by you the attempt is not to be made." Some
times, however, the agent is the genitive case. Cf. p. 196. note.

* As the Latin gerund is connected with the future participle in dus, So the
Sanscrit indeclinable participle in )a is connected with the future passive participle
in 9a. This is notioed by Bopp.
 SwNTAx OP ADwERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 203

rय्. If the verbgovern two accusatives, one may be retained after the participle; as,
नयनसलिलै त्वया शान्तिं नेर्यं, “the tear of the eye is to be brought to assuagement
by thee.’’
b. Occasionally the neuter of this participle is used impersonally, in which case
it d0es not agree with the object, but may govern it in the manner ofthe verb ; thus,
मया यामं गन्तव्यं, “it is to be gone by me to the village,” for मया यामो गन्तव्यः.
So also त्वया सभां प्रवेष्टव्यं, “by you it is to be entered into the assembly."
c. The neuter भवितव्यं (from भ्रु) is thus impersonally used, and in accordance with
r. l90. reguires the instrumental after it, as well as before; thus, केनापि कारणेन
भवितव्यं, “ by something it is to be become the cause," i.e. “ there must be some
cause"; खामिना सविशेषेण भवितव्यं, “a ruler ought to be possessed of discrimina
tion'; मया तव। अनुचरेण भवितव्यं, “ I must become your companion.”
d, It is not uncommon to find this participle standing merely in the place of a
future tense, no propriety or obligation being implied ; a8, नूनम् अनेन
* । ` गन्तव्यं, “ in all probability this hunter will go in guest of the deer’s
। ॐ

flesh''; where गन्तव्यं is used impersonally. त्वां दृष्ट्वा लोकै: किष्विद् वक्तव्यं, “ when
the people see you they will utter some exclamation.” See also the eleventh
sentence of the story, r. 220.
e. It would appear that the neuter of this participle is sometimesused infinitively,
as expressive merely of the indeterminate action of the verb, in the manner of a
future infinitive, without implying necessity or fitneSS. In Such cases इति is added ;
thus, वच्चयितव्यम् इति, * the being about to deceive "; महैव्यम् इति, ** the being
about to die.”

SYNTAx OP ADVERBS, CONJUNCTIONS, AND INTERJECTIONS.

2l6. The following examples illustrate the construction of the

adverbs enumerated at p. 156., or elsewhere in Chapter WIII.
न दण्डाद् चकृते शक्य: कर्तुं पापविनिपह:, “ the restraint of crime cannot
be made without punishment"; शतं जन्मानि यावत्, “ for a hundred
births "; सपॆविवरं यावत्, “ up to the serpents hole "; पुत्रेण सह, “along
with his son "; हेतुं विना, “ without cause "; सपणधेन विना, “ without
fault ''; विवणद् वहिर् निःसृत्य, “ creeping out of the hole "; अवलोकनष्
णात् प्रभृति, “ from the moment of seeing (him)"; ततः प्रभृति, “ from
that time forward `; धनस्य स्रीयं, “ for the sake of wealth '' (cf.
r. ITl. c.); तस्या: कृते, “ for her sake." उपरि, with the genitive,
occurs rather freguently, and with some latitude of meaning ;
thus, सिंहस् तस्य उपरि पपात, “ the lion fell upon । him "; मम उपरि
204 SW NTAN. OP AID W IERBS ANID CON.JUNCTIONS.

विकाजि:, “ changed in his feelings towards me "; तव उपरि स्रसदृशाव्य

वहारी, “ not behaving properly towards thee "; पुचस्य उपरि कुडः,
“angry with his son.” वृक्षस्य अधस्तात्, “ beneath the tree ''; राज्ञः
समीपं, “ near the king "; पितु: सकाशाद् धनम्। खाददाति, “ he receives
money from his father "; मांसं शुनो-ये निfछ्ष्नं, “ flesh thrown before
the dog "; मम समष्त्रॆ, “ in my presence "; अस्माकं पश्चात् , “ after us.''
साघवात् may take an instrumental ; as, अन्यै: साक्षात्, “ before others.”
प्राक् may govern an ablative ; as, प्राग् उपनयनाद् वेदं नोचायेत्, “ before
investiture let him mot utter the Weda ': Or an accusative ; as,
प्राग् द्वादशसमा:, “ before twelve years are over."
a. अलै, “ enough,” is used with the instrumental, with the force of a prohibi
tive particle; as, अलॆ शङ्गुया, “away with fear,” “do not fear.”
b. मार्च, ‘*even,” “ merely,'' when compounded with another word is declinable ;
as, उत्तरमात्रं न ददाति, **he does not even give an answer '; न शब्दमाचाद् भेतव्यं,
* one ought not to be afraid of mere moise.’’
c. तया and यया, when used as correlatives, are eguivalent to the English so t/tat,
and the Latin ita ut ; thus, यया स्वामी जागर्त्तेि तया मया कर्त्तेव्यं, “ I must So act
that my master awake,” i. e. “ I must do something to make my master awake.'

So also त्वं न जानासि यया गृहप्रष्ां करोमि, “ do not you know that I keep watch
in the house?'
d. यत्। is also used for “ that '; as, अयं नूतनो न्यायो यद् स्रणतिं हत्वा सन्तापः क्रियते,
“ this is a new doctrine, that having killed an enemy remorse should be felt."
e. किं, “ why?" may often be regarded as a note of interrogation which is not
to be translated, but affects only the tone of woice in which a sentence is uttered; as,
जातिमात्रेण किं कश्चित् पूज्यते, “ is any one honoured for mere birth?'
It sometimes has the force of “ whether?” as, ज्ञायतां किम् उपयुक्तः। एतावद् वझेर्न
गृह्ताति अनुपयुक्तो वा, **let it be ascertained whether he is worthy to receive so
large a salary, or whether he is unworthy "; मन्त्री वेक्तःि किं गुणयुक्तो राजा न वा,
* the minister knows whether the king is meritorious or not.''
217. The conjunctions यदि and चेत्, “ if," are commonly used
with the indicative ; as, यदि जीवति भट्राणि पश्यति, “ if he live he will
behold prosperity "; यदि मया प्रयोजनम् अस्ति, “ if there is need of
me "; तृष्णा चेत् परित्यक्ता को दरिद्र:, “ if avarice were abandoned who
would be poor?"
2l8. The interjections धिक् and हा reguire the accusative ; as,
धिक् पापिष्ठं, “ woe to the wretch!" and the vocative interjections
the vocative case ; as, भो: पान्यं, '' O traveller !"
 THE PARTIOLE ITI W ITH TH B RB0TA 0RATIO. 205

oN THE UsE oF इति wITH THE RFora onarro.

219. All the languages of the East are averse to the use of the
obligua oratio. In Sanscrit it is never admitted, and when any
one relates the words or describes the sentiments or thoughts of
another, the relator invariably represents him as speaking the ac
tual words in his own person. In such cases the particle इति
(properly meaning “ so,” “ thus,') is often placed after the words
५uoted, and may be regarded as serving the purpose of inverted
Commas ; thus, शिष्पा ऊषुः कृतकृत्या वयम् इति, the pupils said, “ we
have accomplished our object,' not according to the English or
Latin idiom, “ the pupils said that they had accomplished their ob
ject." So also कलहक्ारी इति ब्रूते भर्त्रा, your husband calls you “ guar
relsome,". where कलहकारी is in the nominative case, as being the
actual word supposed to be spoken by the husband himself in his
own person. So again युष्मान् विश्वासभूमय इति सर्व्वे पक्षिणो मम स्रये
प्रस्तुवन्ति, all the birds praise you in my presence, Saying, “ he is an
object of confidence," where the particle इति is eguivalent to “ say
ing,' and the word विश्वासभूमयः is not in the accusative, to agree
with युष्मान्, as might be expected, but in the nominative, as being
the actual word supposed to be uttered by the birds in their own
persons. In some cases, however, the accusative is retained be
fore इति; as, in the following example from Manu : अई बालम् इत्य्
आाहुः, they call an ignorant man “ child.” But in the latter
part of the Same line it passes into a nominative ; aS, पितेत्य् एव तु
मन्त्रर्द, but (they call) a teacher of scripture “ father.' II. l53.
a. The use of इति is by no means restricted to the guotation of
the words spoken by another. It often has reference merely to
what is passing in the mind either of another person or of one's
self When so employed, it is usually joined with the indeclinable
participle, or of some other part of a verb, Signifying, “ to think,''
“ Suppose," &c., and may be translated by the English conjunc
tion tha/, to which, in fact, it may be regarded as eguivalent ; thus,
मकैटो घण्टां वादयति इति परिज्ञाय, “ having ascertained that it is a monkey
who rings the bell "; पुनर् अथै:वृद्धिः करणीया इति मतिर् बभूव, “ his idea
was that an increase of wealth ought again. to be made '; धन्यो-र्ह
यस्य एतादृशी भार्ययेा इति मनसि निधाय, “ reflecting in his mind that I am
happy in possessing Such a wife.' The accusative is also retained
`206 THE PARTICLE 1TI W ITH THE RBCTA ORATIO.

bofore इति in this sense ; as, मृतम् इति मत्वा, “ thinking that he was
doad.` In all these examples the use of इति indicates that a ५uo
tation is made of the thoughts of the person at the time when the
event took place.
८. Not unfreguently the participle “ thinking," " Supposing," &c.
is omitted altogether, and इति itself involves the sense of Such a
participle ; as, बालो-पि न स्रवमन्तव्यो मनुष्य इति भूमिप:, “ a king even
though a child is not to be despised, saying to one's self he is a
mortal "; सोहाद्दैाद् वा विषुर् इति वा मय्य् अनुक्रोशात्, “ either through af
fection or through Compassion towards me, saying to gyourself what
a wretched man he is.'

ExERCISES IN TRANSI,ATION AND PAR.SING.

220. The following two stories, taken from the 4th Book of the
Hitopadesha, will conclude the chapter on Syntax. A literal
translation is given to both stories, and to the first a grammatical
analysis is Subjoined. All the rules of combination are Observed,
but the words are separated from each other, contrary to the usual
practice of the Hindtis. In the two cases where such separation
is impossible, viZ. where a final and initial vowel blend together
into one Sound, and where crude words are joined with others to
form Compounds, a dot placed underneath marks the division :
I. अस्ति गौतमस्य मुनेस् तपोवने महातपा नाम मुनि:, “ There is in the
sacred grove of the sage Gautama a holy-sage named Mahātapāh।
(Great-devotion).''
2. तेनाश्रमसन्निधाने मूषिकशावकः काकमुखाद् भ्रष्टो दृष्ट:, “ By him, in the
meighbourhood of his hermitage, a young mouse, fallen from the
beak of a crow, was seen.'
3. ततो दयायुक्तेन तेन मुनिना नीवाएकणैः संवडैित:, “ Then by that sage,
touched with compassion, with grains of wild rice it was reared."
4. तदृनन्तरं मूषिकं खादितुम् अनुधावन् विडालो मुनिना दृष्ट:, “ Soon after
this, a cat was observed by the sage running after the mouse to
devour it.'

5. तं मूषिकं भीतम् स्रालोक्य तपःप्रभावात् तेन मुनिना मूषिको बलिष्ठो विडाल:

कृत:, “ Perceiving the mouse terrified, by that sage, through the
efficacy of his devotion, the mouse was changed into a very
strong cat.''
 BxBRCISBS IN TRANSLATION AND PARSINGः, 207

6. स विडालः कुकुराट् बिभेति । तत: कुङ्कुर: कृत: । कुङ्कुरस्य व्याघ्रान् महद् भयं ।
तनिन्तरं स व्याघ्र: कृत:, “The cat fears the dog. Upon that it was
changed into a dog. Great is the dread of the dog for a tiger ;
then it was transformed into a tiger.'
7. अय व्याघ्रम् अपि मूषिकनिवैिशेषं पश्यति मुनि:, “ Now the sage re
gards even the tiger as not differing at all from the mouse.'
8. अतः सर्व्वे तचस्या जनास् तं व्याघ्रं दृष्ट्वा वदति, “ Then all the persons
residing in the neighbourhood, seeing the tiger, say.''
9. अनेन मुनिना मूषिको-र्ये व्याघ्रतां नीत:, ‘ By this holy-sage this
mouse has been brought to the condition of a tiger,'
10. टतच् छ्रुत्वा स व्याघ्रः सव्यथो-चिन्तयत्, “The tiger overhearing this,
being uneasy, reflected.''
11. यावद् अनेन मुनिना जीवितव्यं तावद् इदं मम खरूपाख्यानम् अकीरृिक् न
पलायिष्यते, “ As long as it Shall be lived by this sage, So long this
disgraceful story of my original condition will not die away."
12. इति समालोच्य मुनिं हन्तुं समुद्यत:, “ Thus reflecting he prepared
(was about) to kill the sage.”
13. मुनिस् तस्य चिकीfषैतं ज्ञात्वा पुनर् मूषिको भव इत्य् उक्ा मूषिक एव कृत:,
“ The sage discovering his intention, Saying, ‘ again become a
mouse,' he was reduced to (his former state of) a mouse.”
The student will observe in this story four peculiarities: lst, the
simplicity of the style ; 2dly, the prevalence of compound words ;
3dly, the scarcity of verbs ; 4thly, the prevalence of participles in
| lieu Of verbs.
First sentence.-Asti, “ there is,'' 8d sing. pres. of the root as, 2d conj., p. 101.
Gautamasya, “ of Gautama,” noun of the first class, masc. gend. gen. case (p. 81.).
JMumes, ** of the sage,' noun of the second claSS, masc. gend. gen. case (p. 83.).
Visargah changed to s by r. 25. a. p. 14. Tapopame, “ in the sacred growe,” or
* grove of penance,” genitively dependent compound, p. 161., the first member ofthe
compound formedAby the crude noun tapas, “ penance,” as being changed to o by
r. 29. ; the last member, hy the loc. case of bama, “ grove,” noun of the first claSS,
meut. (p. 82.). Mahātapā, “ great devotion,” relative form of descriptive compound,
p. 168., the first member formed by the crude adjective mahā (substituted for
?mahat), “ great "; the last member, by the nom. case of tapas, “ devotion,' noun
of the Seventh class, neut. (pp. 48. 44.), Wisargah being dropped by r. 28. b. p.14.
ZVaima, * by name,” an adverb, p. 151. a. IMamih, “a sage," noun of the second
class, masc., nom. case. Wis. remains by r. 24. b.
 208 ExBRCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.

Second sentence.-Tema, “ by him," instr. case of the pronoun tat, p. 5L. r. 77.
Ashramasammidhāne, “ in the neighbourhood of his hermitage” genitively dependent
compound, p. 161., the first member formed by the crude noum āshrama, “ her
mitage'; the last member by the loc. case of sammidhāna, “ neighbourhood,' noun
of the first class, neut. (p. 82.). The initial a of this word blends with the final of
tema into a, by r. 4. p. 7. Minghikashāpakah, “ a young mouse," or “ the young of
a mouse,” genitively dependent oompound, p. 161., the first member formed by the
crude noun mighika, “a mouse "; the last, by the nom. case of shāpaka, ** the
young of any animal," noun of the first class (p. 81.). Wis. remains hy r. 24. a.
JKakcmukhād, “ from the beak (or mouth) of a crow,” genitively dependent com
pound, p. 161. ; the first member, formed by the crude noun kāka, *a crow "; the
last, by the abl. case of mukha, ** mouth,” noun of the first class, neut. (p. 82.),
# being changed to d by r.14. p. l1. Brashto, “ fallen,' nom. case, sing. masc. of
the pasS. past part. of the r00t bhramsh, p. 140. m. ; ah changed to o by r. 20. a.
, Drishtah, “ seen,' nom. case, Sing. masc. of the pass. past part. of the root drish
(दृशं) p. 189. i. Wis. remains by r. 24. b.
Third Sentence.-Tato, “ then,” adv. p. 152. a. ; as changed to o by r. 29. and 26. a.
JDayāyuktema, “ touched with compassion," instrumentally dependent compound,
p. 160. ; the first member formed by the crude noun daya, “ compassion ''; the last,
hy the instr. case of yukta, “ endowed with," pass. past part. of the root ygj, p. 189. i.
Tema, see second sentence. Muminā, “ by the sage,' noun of the second class, masc.
gend. instr. case (p. 88.). Vioarahamaih, “ with grains of wild rice,' genitively
dependent compound, p. 16I. ; the first member formed by the crude noum mācāra,
“ wild rice'; the Second, by the instr. plur. of kama, noun of the first class, masc.
Wis. remains by r. 24. ८. Samparddhitah, “ reared," nom. case, Sing. of the pass.
past part. of the causal form of the root oridh, p. 141. Wis. remains by r. 24. b.
Fourth sentence.-1adamantaram, “ soon after this,” compound adverb, the first
momber formed with the pronoun tat, “ this '; the Second by the adwerb dmantaram,
“after.' Mishikam, noun of the first class, masc. gend., acc. case (p. 81.).
Khaditum, ** to eat,'' infinitive mood of the root khād, p. 85. r. 106. and r. 200.
Anudhāpam, * pursuing after,' “ running after,' nom. case, Sing. masc. of the pres.
part. paras. of the root dhāt', “ to run,'' with the preposition amu, *after,' p. 186. b.
Widāl0, ‘*a cat,' noun of the first claSS, masc. (p. 81.), nom. case ; ah changed to 0
by r. 20. ८. Mumina, see third sentence. Drishtah, see second sentence.
Fifth sentence.-Tam, acc. case of the pronoun tat (p. 51.), used as a definite
article, p. 28. r. 46. Mighikam, see fourth sentence. Bhātam, “ terrified,” acc.
case, Sing. masc. of the pass. past part. of the root bhā, p. 188. h. Alokya, “ per
 BxBROISBS IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 209

ceiwing,” indeclinable part. of the root lok, with the prep. 1, p. 14b..f Tapahpra
bhācāt, “ through the efficacy of his devotion” (p. 184. c.), genitively dependent com
pound, p. 161. ; the first member formed by the crude noun topas, “*devotion," s being
changed to Wisargah, by r. 29. and 24. a. ; the second, by the abl. case of prabhāca,
noun of the first claSS, maSc. (p. 81.). Tana, See Second Sentence. Mumina, see
third Sentence. Māshiko, nom. case, ah changed to o by r. 26. ८. Balishtho, “ very
strong," nom. case, masc. of the superlative form of the adj. ८ialim, ** strong ”
(See p. 47.), ah changed to o by r. 26. a. Widalah, see fourth sentence. Wis.
remains by r. 24. a. Kritah, “ changed,” “ made,” nom. case, Sing. of the pasS. past
part. of the root hri, p. 188. b. Wis. remains by r. 24. b.
Sixth sentence.-Sa, nom. case of the pronoun tat (p, 51.), used as a definite
article, p. 28. r. 46. Wis. dropped, by note f, p. 14. Widalah, See fourth sentence.
JKukkurād, “ the dog,'' noun of the first class, masc. (p. 81.), abl. case after a werb of
fearing (p. 198. d.), t changed to d by r. 14. Bibheti, “ fears,” 8d sing. pres. tense
of the root Ghi, 8d conj. p. 119. Tatah, ** upon that,” adw. p. 152. a. ; as changed
to ah, by r. 29. and 24. ८. Kukkurah, “ the dog,” nom. case (p. 81.). Wis. remains
by r. 24.d. Kritah, see fifth sentence. Kakkurasya, “ of the dog,'gen. case (p. 8I.).
Wyāghrām, “ for the tiger," noun of the first class, masc. (p. 8I.), abl. case, after
a noun of **fear ” (p. 184. g.), ८ changed to n by r. 15. Mahad, “ great,' noun adj.
of the fifth claSS, r. 68. nom. case, Sing. neut. ८ changed to d by r. 14. Bhagam,
*fear," noun of the first clasS, neut. (p. 82.), nom. case. Tadamamturam, See fourth
sentence. Wyāghrah, nom. case. Wis. remains by r. 24. ८. Krita/t, See fifth
sentence.

Seventh sentence.-Atha, “ now,” inceptive particle, p. 154. b. Wjaghram, acc.

case. Api, “ even,” adw. Miashikamiruishesham, “ as not differing at all from the
mouse,” compound adverb; the first member formed by the crude noun māshika ;
the second by the neut. form of the Substantive oishesha, “ difference,” with mir
prefixed, see p. 177. ८. Pashgati, 8d sing. pres. tense of the root drish, Ist conj.
p. I07. JMumih, see first Sentence. _

Eighth sentence.-Atah, “ then," adw. p. 152. a. Sarpe, “ all," pronominal adj.

nom. case, plur. masc. p. 54. r. 87. “ Tatrasthā, “ residing in the neighbourhood,"
anomalous compound, in its character resembling a locatively dependent; the first
member being formed by the adverb tatra (p. 152. U.), “ there,' or “ in that place'';
the second by the nom. plur. masc. of the participial noun of agency of the root sthā,
“ t0 remain,' p. 149. 1. Wis. dropped by r. 28. b. Jamas, “ persons,” noun of the
first claSS, masc. gend. (p. 81.) nom. case, plur. Wis. changed to s by r. 25. a. Tam,
acc. case of the pronoun tat (p. 5I.), used as a definite article. Wyāghram, “ tiger,’’
noun of the first claSS, masc. gend. (p. 81.) acc. case. JDrishttpā, “ having seen,"
E E
2I0 ENBRCISES IN TRANSLA'TION ANID PARSING

indeclinable past participle of the root drish। (दृश्), p. 148. a. Wadanti, “ they say,"
{Bd piur. pres. of the root rad, Ist conj.
Ninth sentonce.–Anema, **by this,” instr. case of the demonstrative pronoun
ayam, p. 52. Mumina, see third sentence. Miishiko, nom. case, ah changed to o by
r. 26. b. Ajam, “ this," nom. case of the demonstrative pron., p. 52. The initial a
cut off by r. 26. D. Wyājhrataim, “ the condition of a tiger,” fem. abstract noun of
the first class (p. 81.), acc. case, formed from the substantive tyāghra, “ a tiger,' by
the affix ta, p. 24. xiv. Vita/), *brought.” nom. case, Sing. masc. of the pass-part.
of the root mi, p. 188. b.
Temth sentence.-Etach, “ this,' acc. case, neut. of the demonstrative pron- efot,
p. 52. r. 79., t being changed to ch by r. l7. Chhrutupa, “ overhearing,” indeclinable
participle of the root shru (श्रु) p. I48. a. श्रुत्वा becomes चुत्वा by r. l7. Wyāghrah,
nom. oase. Wis. remains by r. 24. ८. Satyatho, ** uneasy,' relative compound,
formed by prefixing the preposition saha to the fem. substantive tyathā, p. I69.
r. 161. See also p. 82. *, ah changed to o by r. 26. b. Achintayat, “ reflected,T
8d sing. Ist pret. of the root chint, 10th conj. p. 87. e ; the initial a cut off by
r. 26. b.

Eleventh Sentence.-Hindd, **as long as," adw. p. 151. a., t changed to d by r. 14.
Anema, See ninth sentence. Japitatyam, “ to be lived," nom. case, neut. of the fut.
paSS. part. of the root.jit', p. 146. a. See also r. 215. c. d. Tapat, “ so long," adv.
correlative to g/ācat, p. I5]. n. Idam, ** this,' nom. case, neut. of the demonstrative
pron. dyam, p. 52. Mama, “ of me,'' gen. case of the pronoun aham, * I,' p. 50.
Stoarāpāk//timam, **story ofmy original condition,” genitively dependent compound,
p. 10I. ; the first member formed by the crude noun suariipa, **natural form” (cf
r. 89.) ; the second by the nom. case of akhyāma, noun of the first class, neuter, m
retained by r. 28. Akirtikaram, “ disgraceful,” accusatively dependent compound ;
the first member formed by the crude noun akārti, “ disgrace"; the second by the
nom. case, neut. of the participial noun of agency kara, p. 140, 1. Va, “ not,” adv.
p. 158. ८. Pali/islijjate, “ will die away,'' 8d sing. 2d fut. ātm. of the compound
werb palāg/, formed by combining the root i with the prep.para, p. 174.
Twelfth Sentence.-Iti, “ thus,” adv. p. 158. e. See also r. 219. a. Samalochya,
“ reflecting," indeclinable part. of the compound verb 8amaloch (p. 145..f), formed
by combining the root locl) with the prepositions sam and a, pp. 174. I75.
Munim, acc. case. Hantum, “ to kill,” infinitive mood of the root ham, pp. 85.
and II5. and r. 200. Samudyata/, “ prepared,” nom. case, sing. masc. of the pass.
Past part. of the compound verb samudyam (p. 140. 0.), formed by combining the
root /dm with the prepositions sam and at.
Thirfeenth sentence.-Munis, nom. case. Wis. changod to s by r. 25. a. Tosya,
 BNKBR0ISBS IN TRANSIATION AND PARSING. 2II

* of him,” gen. case of the pron. tat, p. 5I. Chihārshitam, “ intention,” acc. case,
nout. of the pass. past part. of the desiderative base of the root kri, “ to do” (p. 14I.
s.), used as a Substantive. Gyātuda, or Jhuitucā, “ discovering,” indecl. part. of the
root.jnā, p. 148. a. Pundr, “again,” adv. p. 158. e., r remains by r.82. Mishiko,
nom. case, d/ changed to o by r. 26. a. Bhampa, ** become,” 2d Sing. imperat. of the
root bhid, p. 104. Ity answers to inverted commas, See r. 219., the final i changed
to g/ by r. 7. Uktupā, “ 8aying,” indecl. part. of the root pach, p. 148. a. Miighika,
nom. case. Wis. dropped by r. 28. a. Eca, “ indeed,” adw. r.184.
STORW OR' THE BRAHMAN AND HIS WEASEI,.

अंस्त्य् उक्तँयिन्यां माधवो नाम ब्राह्मण: । तस्य ब्राह्मणी प्रसूतेा । सी बालापेत्यस्य

गडॆामि तदाऽंन्य: कथॆिच् छ्राद्धं यहीर्घेति । किन्तु शिशोर् खच रक्षक: कीरॆपि नॆस्ति

व्यवर्र्याप्य गच्छामि । तया कृतिवा गत: । ततॆस् तच नकुलेन बालकसमीपं तूष्णीम्

स्वागढ़ॆन् कृष्णंसंपो व्यापैदित: खण्ड्लॆिश्च । ततोसौ नकुलो ब्राह्मणम् स्रार्यान्तम्
अर्वैलोक्य रक्ाविलिर्ममुखपादः सत्वरम् उपार्गम्य ब्राह्मणस्य चणैयोर्, लुलोठ । ततो-सौ
ब्राह्म्णस् तं तर्योंविधं दृष्टॊ मम पुचो-नेने भक्षित ईर् अविवॆायै व्यापॆोदितवान् । अनन्तरं
तिष्ठेति । ततं उपर्काट्कं नकुलं निर्र्प्य सन्तर्मचेता: स परं विषादम् उपगत:
!) p. 101. the final changed to g/ by r. 7. *) loc. c. of ujjag/ini, p. 8I. 3) ah
changed to o by r. 26. a. 4) p. 24. xv. ?) pass. past part. of the root sti, with
the preposition pra, p. 188. b. 6) p. 51. ग्) r. I54. १) p. 177. c. ") p. 145- i.
it) r. I06. and r. 200. ll) r. 125. p. 140. o. and p. 180. a. Iं) p. 156. e. ") p. 4I.
14) p. 161. r.147. i) p. 118. r. 200. li) p. II. r. 17. !7) p. 148. ") r. 154.9
dāridra is an abstract noun, formed according to p. 28. wiii. it) Ist pret. of the
root chint, 10th conj. p. 126. ५) r. 171. a. *l) p. I07. **) or तदान्य:, r. 4.
23) r. 85. r. I7. थ्4) p. 124. 25) gen. case of shisha, p. 85. १t) r. 85. *ग्) r. 4.
28) p. 151. a. *) p. 101. and r. 201. 30) p. II2. *!) anomalous dependent
compound. According to r, 180. a. it may be regarded as accusatively dependent.
32) p. 52. 8ं) anomalous dependent compound. *) r. I71. c. *) indecl. part
of the causal form of the root sthā, with the prepositions oi and dod, p. 140. i.
*ं) p. 143. a. *) Wisargah changed to s by r. 25. a. *) p. IT7. c. *) pres.
part. of the rootgam, p. 107. p.186. with āprefixed, p.174. *) r. 154. *") p. 141-2-
root pad, with ci and di. 4४) Wis. changed to sh by r. 25. d. 4) The initial
a cut off by r. 0. 44) pres. part. of ya, with a, r. I28. 4) p. 145../ः
212 ExERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING.

*) complex relative compound (p. l71. b.), the whole being the relative form of
descriptive, involving a dependent and an aggregative. *T) p. 145. g. root Godm,
with prep. upa and a. *) loc. case, dual of charatad, p. 81., See p. 195. c.
*) 2d pret. of root लुद्, p. 74. ?) Wis. to s by r. 25. a. 5l) r.171. b.
*) p. 148. a. 58) p. 52. *) p. 180. h. 5) r. 219. a. the final changed to g/
by r. 7. “t) p. 145. i. root char, with prep. tri and negative prefix a. #ग्) p. 142.
root pad, with oi and di. 58) r. 8. *) p. 144. ८. १) p. 107. and p. 199. c.
१) p. 70. d. 6ं) Wis. to s by r. 25. a. 6ं) p. 107. 64) Wis. dropped by r. 28. a.
6s) r. 148. १) p. 145..f root rip, with mi. 67) r. 159. a.
Tramslatiom.

Oujein,* a Brahman, named Mādhava. His wife

There lives in

bore him (a son). She having stationed the Brahman (her hus
band) to take charge of the young child, went to perform ablution.
Meanwhile a message came from the king for the Brahman to
perform the Parvana Shrāddha." On hearing which the Brahman,
from his natural neediness, thought to himself, “ if I do not go
guickly some other Brahman will take the Shrāddha. But there
is none here (that I may leave) as a guardian to the child,-what
then can I do ? Come, having stationed this long-cherished weasel,
dear to me as a son, in charge of the infant, I will go.” Having
so done, he went. Presently a black serpent Silently approaching
the child was killed by the weasel and torn in pieces. By and
by the weasel seeing the Brahman returning, guickly running to
meet him, his mouth and feet Smeared with blood, Irolled himself
at the Brahman's feet. Then that Brahman seeing him in such
a condition, hastily concluding that he had eaten the child, killed
him. Afterwards no sooner did he come up than he beheld the
infant slumbering safely and the black serpent lying dead. Then
looking at his benefactor the weasel, and bitterly repenting (of his
precipitation), he experienced exceeding grief.

* The oldest city in India.

f The Shrāddha is a funeral ceremony, consisting of oblations of water and fire
to the gods and manes, and gifts to the officiating Brahmans, performed at various
fixed periods, in behalf of a deceased parent or ancestor, to secure the happy condi
tion of his soul. The Parvana is a particular form of Shrāddha, in behalf of three
ancest0rS.
 SELEOTIONS

IN PR,0SE AND WER.SE.

OBSERWE, that the greater number of the words in the following

Selections will be found in the Wocabulary to Professor Johnson's
edition of the Hitopadesha. And whenever a word does not occur
in that Wocabulary, it is given at the foot of the page.
The words of the text have been printed Separately from each
other, as it is imagined that the permutation of final and initial
letters is of itself a difficulty, unknown in other languages, Suffi
cient to retard the progress of the beginner in his first effort at
translation. It seems, therefore, wholly unreasonable and unne
cessary to increase this difficulty by an useless conformity to the
practice of the natives, in joining together all the words in a sen
tence, until the student has attained a certain degree of proficiency.
When, however, a final and initial wowel blend into one Sound,
and when Crude nouns are associated to form compounds, Separa
tion is impossible, and in Such cases a dot placed underneath
Imarks the division.
The substance of the following Simple story of the Brahman
Wedagarbha and his pupils, is taken from a little book, printed in
Calcutta, called the Sanskritamālā.
 ँ/ ॥ अयु वेदगर्भृोपाख्गूनं । _/ ?-
', ’ । /.ं'ं '%'"2-' ", ं % .
गङ्गातटे पूर्वं वेट्गैभैनामा
" *.
ब्राह्मण असिीत्
6 3
।॥ सेia/च
_ .4- -

३६.१६yत. दिीनॄ मॄं शास्त्राणां प्राह्णेषु । ततः

सॆप्रोटेीलं-। वृतँ हूं वृिधिनःशाखॆय
अथ समी # ८ वं र्मिनी विंशूिं ं द्मेिनः
अषॆपयत्। 2.
* -

..7 24=a 6 *

ः॥ तदॆा वेदगर्भे उत्थॆयि तर्षे जतिवर्सतिः

26-7 ।। A// 2" ८/ - 4*~
*8 .्/ -3ः, , ॐ A 31

*_ • &*ः पष्टवान
_
।॥ ततस। ग्रैन्यूचु
//%ऽ
_
:*। t.}
भवान
4)
3* 2. " ८ 34 35

3 ; तवागूद्वद्यारावृट्र
3T_. A 39 ; भद्रृतुः9ं a,/प्रेरिोझयः
4

। अतिंदू श्रुका-न्यपाठशालात इहायांताः ॥

*) p.151. ८. *) r. 157. p.42. note f. *) Wis. dropped by
r. 28. ८. ) p. 101. ") p. 14. mote f. ग्) p. 167. ८. p.171. c. The Wedānta
is the theological part of the Wedas contained in those chapters called Upanishads;
the Wedangas are the Sciences Subordinate to theWedas; such as Grammar, Prosody,
Astronomy, &c., see Manu II- 105. 8) p. 54. r. 87. *) lit. ** Seeing to the
opposite bank,” i.e. ** thoroughly acguainted with,” r. 48. 1. !") p. 152. ८. Wis.
remains by r. 29. and 24. a. ") acc. case of पाठशाला, “a school,” lit. “a reading
room,” r.147. lº) p. 148. a, Iं) p.85. r.54. ') acc. case pl. of विद्याधैिन्,
*a seeker of knowledge,” “ student;" p. 48. r. I47. **) acc. plur. neut. p. 32.
i changed to g/ by r..7. ") p. 87. note *, and r. 192. a. ") p. 154. ८.
"$) p. 149. a. p.171. b. iº) p. 49. *") nom. case pl. Wis. remains by r. 24. a
१) p. 140. 0. root gam with prep. ā (p. I74.) and sum (175). **) p. 152. d.
*) p.144. p. 174. **) p. 51. *्) p. 168. a. *) पृङ्गा, “ hawing asked,”
p.148. a. The final a of this word blends with the initial a of the next by r. 4.
*) स्रागमनं, **arrival,” प्रयोजनं, “ cause,” r. l47. *e) **he asked,” p. 142. a.
*?) Wis. to s by r. 25. a. ") p. 76. d. p. 175. *l) p. 54. r. 84. **) **a teacher
of the Wedas,” r.147. See Manu II. 140.141. for the difference between an acharya
and an upādhg/āya. *') p. 171. b. Wis. dropped by r. 28. a. 84) r. 2I9.
*) पाण्डित्य, “ learning” (p. 28. wii.), ख्याति, “ fame ” (p. 24. ii.) r.147. *) p. 50.
87) p. 158. a. 151. d. *) p.148. a. *) ** from another School,” affix tas, p. 152.८.
Wis. dropped by r. 28. d. *") p. 158. g., the final a blends with the initial a of
āyātāh. ") p.188. b. p.174.
 ॥ वेट्गभेोपाख्यानं ॥ ३
Z ? . 2- ८ँ
4. { `ँ, * ,: ँ,
तदुचाम्रेणे
2” छं ८८ *
त्तुं 42_

। भ।
_

भर्वेङ्गिर
तद्रूंकृत ब्रूर ये अहं जुगुि
_

*
45

अहँ युर्षर्नीन् अध्यापयिँय

तद्-२Zः of ,
ेोमि__*-। ईति कर्घयित्वा
-२८
सॆ तेषाँम्
., 2. * `
2' ँ 'ं `ं T'्' ँ' ं न्, तृषु वाथषु
# पूंबम् श्रृींे
#ं पुिनः `ं
प्रांतःि
61
ं धुं
गुरो र् मूर्तिं । ती तःि
2-

=`rv
- '}= 8 _.5g _

तथॆानुष्ठितँवान् ।। " ७~—~

ऽ्-' 'भं ? 7-.. 4- 4 - 8 ?
श्रृय
A/ परेद्युः८१प्रॊत: 'नांत्वा कृतंीर्हुिकः सं 4-a
_ A/ आाचेीय्यैः सॆार्युवः
"अ -२.9 । _ 2

पाठशालां समॆंगृपविष्टः ॥ र्तदा पुत्रॆणे समूंहूिताः मुंबै छर्चिर् , ~५

पाठशालाम
#/. विँ
् अगिताः । तत ओंबैग्येत्_ंन् अंपृच्छत् `Sः ।
3 4a _.
_ ॐ ` /
कृषीं किं शुष्ास्त्रम् अध्ययनीं । । केचेित् प्रत्यूचुः _ 15 16

। अस्माकं
-

2. TT 2. / T6 7ं- "

वॆदाः पठनीयाः
/ *
। केचिद्.ऊचुः । अस्माभिः स्मृर्तयो-र्घेतै
12. _ %/ _ 80 3 2. 1 /

व्या: ॥ कंचिद् ऊँचुः । वंयं तॆकेॉन् अध्येष्यॆामहे ॥ अचिा

*) for तदा खाचार्य्येण उक्तः, r. 4. r. 5. r.199. *) p. 188. b. **) r.174.
4) p.128. 4) 2d future, p. 88. *) p. 144. c. *) उपवेशनं, *sitting down,”
p.177. c. 4) acc. pl. neut. p.82. । “") “ He gave,” p. 142. a. 5l) locative
absolute, r. I89. १४) p. 151. a. ं) p. 189. i. p. 174. श्t) p. 58. r.88. *) Ist
pret. of root oad. 56) p. 51. *ग्) r. 79. 5ं) p. 177. c. ं) “ to each one,” r. I7I. ८.
60) मठ, “a cell or Student's apartment.' १) p. 144. c. p. 126. 64) p. 118.
63) gen. c. p.85. Wis. changed to ?” by r. 27. a. १*) **according to the order,”
r. 171. b. 6) ‘*he performed," root sthā, with prep. amu (p. 178), see also p. 142. ८.
66) प्रातर्, “ in the morning,” r. 8I. 6) कृताहिकं, * hawing performed his daily
prayers, or religious observances,' r. Ib9. 6s) r. 161. 6) *having arrived at,”
root i, with sam and Z, r. 166. p. 144. ८. ग्) p. 189. e. n) छ्ात्रं, *a scholar.''
ग्?) r. 90. a. p. 111. ग्*) r. 186. a. ग्4) p. I18. p.147. b. ग्*) p. 54. r. 85.
?t) r. 215. and p. 50. ग्) *are to be read,” nom. pl. m. root पद्. ११) nom. pl. of
स्मृति, *law,” as delivered by Manu and other legislators, p. 84. 79) p. 146. ८.
s) acc. pl. of तर्के, *logical treatise.'' 1) 2d fut. ātm. of i, with adhi, p.79. e.
 1S /. 2.

?ंं । भूर्यतु तांवेद् भुवर्तीम् अभैिमतं । पुंनैर् औहु ।

प्रर्यमुं नेर्दपांतु उपविशन्तु । र्ततृो यषुंविधि तुोन्।
2 ।।,
याप्तिवान्,॥ दॄ मॄान् लूरि लेप्रेष्य कां
{हं गत: । एवं कॆर्मेण प्रत्यहं वेदॆीदीनि शास्त्राणि पाठै
मूम् । ७’ *ऽ 4 .४` %. ८,

f
xचेंदूनृ६ विद्युगभेः
ॐ
29 50
कां'्नितः
Aि 31गुप्तः 42- _ 4।।
।

सूयकाः
स्मिन्
मुनःि,
मठे ईी
'ंगुस्
ड्री चयैस्
तु;तं
चर्यश्च
निरृत् ि।वर्सन्ति
विद्यथैिनो
ब्रे एक्के
2-. ` ॐ, ॐ . ँ । तत्रfकै
२.7 _ ४
तेषु भोजनुष्यनादिषु क्िंमईत् कट्,ं । `०४2_ *

तावेत् कॆन्तेब्यं ॥ इति श्रुत्वा सी-ध्येीपकः किमॆपि प्रत्युत्तरम्

४) p. 104. 3) p. 158. e. *) See root नू, p. 114. note b. 5) **readers of the
Wedas,” nom. pl. m. (p. 149. a.) 6) p. 177. b. ग्) पाठः, **a lesson,” “*lecture,”
r. 192. a. १) p.87. ४. ) r.27. ८. I) p. 158..f It) nom. pl. of अध्यायिन्,
** a reader,” p. 149. ८. l४) p. 174. '),r.20. !4) p. 142. ८. 1ं) p. 152. c.
1) स्माहॆ, “a student of स्मृतिः or law,” p. 28. wiii. !7) p. 145. i. ls) p. 151. b.
1?) **every day,” प्रति is often prefixed in this sense, p. 177. b. १) p. 167. B.
५) p. 199. ८. **) for स्रय टकदा, r. 6. See also p. 152. d. *)p.87. १:) 2d pret.
of the causal of ज्ञा , “ to know,” with prep. वि, p. 87. d. and r. 108. *) voc. case,
p. 87. and r. 81. *t) gen. case, p. 81. and r. 28. ८. *) r. 25. a.
*s) p. 48. सँख्या: is the proper form (r. 157.), but क may be redundantly added to
any word. 2) p. 101. 30) r. 25. a. *l) p. 49. *) root ous, with prep. ?ai,
p. 107. *) p. 152. ८. r. 28. ८. . **) loc. c. (r. 72.) of ckaika, **each single,” eka
being doubled, r. 6. The doubling of a word in a distributive sense is very usual.
*) p. 48. १t) p. 171. c. *ग्) r. 68. १s) r. 89. ८. ११) p. 146. a. 4) r. 26. b.
4l) p.150. b. *) **any,” p. 54. r. 85. *) **answer,” acc. c.
;
मठाना
63 , 9 -२५*
_

बहुप्रनव्ययसाध्य । ।
_

धनॆान्,िं मम गृह नेदानीं -

/ ७ 60 * 0 60 _५

विना वित्तव्ययं कपि कांयैः न

#a * "`7ं "`.2- 12`_. _Tं

;
;
यु,बहुधन्ा भूम्मिष्ठा ब्रूदान्यूच वाराजुन
समाहूय तैः सहैं कोशीरंजिागृ
4) *without giving;'p.148.d. r. l85. *?) r.180. a. 4t) *lost in thought,” nom.c.
*T) p.148. a. 48) p.48. p. 182. d. 49) p. 15I. ८. 50) **having deliberated,” root char
in cauS. with prep. oi, p. 145. ā. !) inst. c. of बुडि, “ mind.” *४) “ he fixed upon,”
p.142. #3) p. 151. c. 5*) p. 76. d. 5?) r.94. 5) “ I will declare,” 2d fut.
of.्'ach (p. 80.), with prep. प्र. *rr.86. । 5s) *built with stone,” r. 144.
59) p*151. B. ") “of such like,” gen. pl. डिश is added to the orude pronouns त,
श्टत, यः, t0 express Similarity, the final a being lengthened. fl) “ the building,”
nom. c. n. 62) “ to be effected by the outlay of much money,” p.171. b. fº) r.6I.
१) for न इदानी', r.5. 6ं) r.187. 66) p. 156. c. 6ग्) p. 152. ८. fi8) p.104.
*) r. 147. 7) r. 85. 7l) r. 157. ग्ं) l0c. case of अजेन, *acguisition,” p. I85. c.
7ं) “ is recommended," p. 140. o. 74) p. 107. ग्) वस्, “tomorrow,” r. 26 a.
7%) p. 172. g. ग्ग्) Ist fut. of gam, “ to g0,” p. 80. 7ं) p. 85. ग्) p. 48.
80) p.87. 8) r.156. 8) *munificent,” r.25. a. - **) वीजित्
१४) p.47. *

proper na * Her0-congueror,” r. 42., ८ changed to m by r. 15. (see p. 107.).

8ं) p.41. r. १) 2d fut. p.80. १) for सर्व्वान् शिष्यान्, r.20. f. *) p. 145.d.
*) “ to the palace of the king of Benares.” १) p. 76. a. p. 112. and r. 191. d.
*ः ।
F F.
 'ा
7. - 'ं ।
पूाम् । तन्कुिर गुरा गुलु
पश्यन्तस त ब्राह्मणा।

पप्यनृता। *', _ / ' ' ' _3

27 2 28_
७…
4
तर्चास्मेन् िनयॆतं । ततंस् तंयोर् एकः7 शीघ्रंॐगत्वा
4? ` २. a-7-् ` 4ं
तेषाम्
. - 3
आागर्मनीवात्तीं मंन्त्रिणे॰कथयेत् । मन्त्री राजेीनं विज्ञापि

i) “ with conversations on wariousbooks of science," or “ with various conversations

on literary topics.” *) “ belonging to mid-day," acc. case, fem. p. 28. viii.
*) p. 102. *) acc. case of दण्ड, ‘*a space of twenty-four minutes,” r. I80. ८.
*) *hawing rested'' (p.145..f), from श्रम्, “ to be weary,” see the force of वि, p. I75.
)ि p. 107. ग्) The repetition of the word gives continuity to the action, “ a; they
kept on advancing.' 9) acc. case, plur. meut.p. 86. r. 7. ) p. 172. g. I) राजकीय,
“ regal” (p. 28. xi.) ; ऐश्वय्यै, “ supremacy” (p. 28. wii.), “signs of regal Supremacy,'
r. -H54. ii) p. 107. r.128. ’ 1ं) r. 28. B. "ं) “thronged with many people,”
p. 171. b. 14) r. 147. !) 8d plur. 2d pret. ofāp (p. 120.) with प्र. lt) nom.
case, dual of दीवारिकं , *a porter.” In forming a noun according to p. 28. ix.,
when the initial is a double consonant, consisting of two letters of which the last is
o org/, this double consonant is resolved into a syllable by the insertion of a for t',
or i for g), and this a८ or i take the Wriddhi change reguired by the rule. ग्) दण्ड,
“ a mace,” “ staff' r.157. 1) 8d dual, 2d pret. of नम्, “to bow” (p. 76. c.), with
prep. प्रः, See p. 175. 1) 8ddual, 2d pret. of प्रच्छ्।, *to ask.” According toWilkins
and Bopp (whose authority was followed at p. 77..f and p. 111.) this should be
पपृच्छतुः, but the form पप्रच्छतुः is correct according to the Siddhānta Kaumudi I42,
and on the same authority the base पप्रच्छ् will be retained throughout this tense.
*) r. 84. *) p. 152. b. *ं) p. 112. and r. 4. *) see ब्रू, note b. p.114. and p. 175.
**) “ the king's presence,” r. 147. *) p. 198. c. *) 2d dual, imperat. of नी,
* to lead.” ºi) p. 51. *ं) p. 151. *) dat. case, p. 48.
 २% 49

ऽ।?
देिशॆ
ॐ
विश्रेषज्ञ
सॆर्ड्ा,नान.4नाःाभाषूासु पृग्डि
* * 2- 52
ताः
4.. । ॥
*७ * * 2. * ७y * धिना: A

3) अ्राज्ञा, “an order,” p. 182. c. १) “ with great respect;" lit. “preceded by great
respect.” *ं) Ist pret. of नी with sam and ā. *) inf. moodof root वग्, * to eulo
giZe,” 10conj. *)“began"root ख्भ् withprep. स्रा, r.126. Seealsop. 197. *) nom.
plur. (r. 28. b.) p. 28. ix. See also r.188. *ं) nom. plur. “ ofagenerousdisposition.”
३ग्) p. 17I. b. 3ं) “ devoted to the sincere (discharge of) religious observances.”
*) सौन्दर्य्ये, “beauty” (p. 23. vii); भूमि, “site" (p.84). *) nom. plur. of
यायडूक, “the performer of freguent sacrifices.” 4i) p. 160. a. *४) रोष, “passion";
य, *current,” “ the current of whose passion is restrained.” **) सौम्य, “hand
some as the moon.' **) सत्वं, *excellence"; , “ possessing.” 4) सदा।,
*always”; उद्यम, “ exertion,” r. 5. r.161. 4) सत्, “good''; स्राचार्, “ practice,”
r. 14. r. 159. 4) “devoted to the protection of your subjects.” 48) “ knowing
the peculiarities of various countries'; ज्ञ , “ knowing,” p. 140. 1. *) loc. case of
भाषा, “a dialect.' 5) गुणिन्, *a gifted person' (r. 20. last paragraph) ; गणः,
**a multitude.' ") “ to be honoured,' root seo, p. 147. c. *) “ possessing a
large accumulation offame and riches,'' r. I7I. b. *) r. 140. । 54) p. 83. p. 22. vi.
" . 2. ', / ? * 4 Z

राऽंयती वं । सुकविता चेद् अस्ति राज्येन किं? यतः ।

चरिं पश्यैर्नि-राजनिः श्रस्त्रैः पश्यँन्ति परिहर्ता: ॥
चारैचमूंषी
गोहः
-पि ाराजँ
एवै सोई ष्टुंगिंषः
अतीनी नॆ सर्वॆशॆाः । शालाचविर्ङ् /८) ?

68 * * . 64 ।।

ग्निां पालर्क3ैर्वाद् उंज्ञं “ट्ऽ 'अपसृता । A

अद्य
2 #
इज्छेति : प्रात: पाठ
। श्रुः । 3
प्रावेरृित्वे
80

_*- 4
1

गन्तव्य ॥
*

*
_

* '॰ %
अथ कार्येोधीश् अार्गेय तन् िविप्रान् वासंगृहं नीत्वा
5ं) “than royalty,” p. 152. a. p. 188..f: 5) r.217. 5ग्) r. I87.a. 58) p. 107.
5ं) p. 167. a. १) विशिष्टता, “ superiority,” p. 24. xiv. p. 188../ः 6l) r. 28. a.
6ं) r. 154. प्राणिन्, *a living creāture,'' p. 27. iv. "ं) “ from his being the पालकः
(r. 150. b.) or protector,'' see r. I77. D. १) p. 154. b. "ं) root जि', ‘* to con
५uer,” with prep. वि and निर्, p. 144. a. ") acc. case, neut. p. 48. r. 28. a.
") “ one by whom gifts are given,” “ liberal,” p. 169. a. 'ं) p. 140. I. t) loc.
case of fछ्ाति, “ the earth,'' p. 84. ग्) p. 169. a. 7) root शैस् , * to praise,"
p. 145. e. 7ं) r. 194. ग्) p. 49. 7*) “ Silver coins,” acc. ease, plur. fem.
(p.81.), r. 28. b. 7) p. 118. ') acc. case of अन्त:पर्, “the inner or priwate
apartments.' ग्ग्) p. 158..fः 7ं) p. l40. a. ?ं) pं107. *) causal of श्रु,
* to hear,” p. 144. c. ") p. 208. b. *) lit. “ the superintendant of affairs’
(r. I47.), ** the steward,'' r. 28. ८. *) p. I45. g. *) नी, ‘* to lead,"
r. 1{)2. b.
 ॥ वेदगर्भेीपाख्यानं ॥ Ca
___5___5__5 -3- * 3 - * A’

ं #ं## नि,
तदार्मोन्यः सुमृत्योपवेिश ! राजा मन्त्रेिण सूह .3

कां
मयीजैनंमृत्वयि पथॆीद्मूर्त्रीब्रूह्.ि
ज्ञप्रतुिः। नॄतु,मन्त्रिनु वेदुंस्यागुर्मन्
"भो म्रुिमी-मूी महाँवि
इान् । सट्टेर्दु
N.*, शास्त्राध्यापनेन
A 2 ०. A2कोलं यापयति
(, / । विद्यार्थिभ्यो
a P.

विद्यादानात् तृस्य कॄं नयित् । तुल्मातुतूहांसाः

) लिह्, “tolick” (p. 147. h); पा, “to drink” (e); चंद्रॆ, “to chew” (g); शूम्।,
** to suck” (h.). This division of food into four kinds, lickables, drinkables,
cheucables, and suckables, is not unusual in Indian writings. )ि caus. of bhgj,
* to eat,” r. 108. r. 198. a. ग्) **having finished,' caus. of root स्राय् with सम्,
p. 145. ā. $) समेत्य उपविवेश। (r. 5.), “having arrived, sat down," 2d pret. of विश्_
, ) मन्त्, “ to consult;" 10th conj. p. 192. c. ') voc. case, p. 48. n) p.128.
"*) p.114. ) voc. case of प्रभु, “master,” p.85. I) p. 165. a, विद्वान् is
here used as a substantive, **a learned man ” (p. 44.). 1) p. 152. d.
It) ** causes to go,” “ passes," caus. of yā, p. 87. d. ") r. I76. a. i8) p. 188..f;
see r. 188. ") p. 151. c. *) साहाय्य, “ assistance"; सैसाधनं, “effecting,” “the
effecting some assistance in this matter.” *") “ is inferred,'' pass. of ma with
amu, r. I12. *) root da, “ to give,” p. 79. e. **) acc. case plur. of परिवारकं,
**an attendant.” **) root hace (p. 107.) with prep. ā. ५) p. 202. c. 2) **on
an obeisance being made," r. 180. *ग्) gen. case, fem. of प्राचीन, ** old.”
 * `* ` म मॆ
गुष्य । ं म्ररूति 44 _`_ -

इं सहस्रे मृदृोः कुीर्षीद् देड्,ि भृतृिदिीनां प्रहस्रम् ं ।

७्" / 2. -. _ 3 3. .4ं - 6.
अथ मन्त्री मूर्त्तिषु वेर्दगर्भे समेत्य सरृं राज्ञोक्तुं,थां या
माम् । सर्वः िियेर् डेक्, भुद्रं भद्रृत्या वृयम् ईट्टे ।
* |ावदृतू अस्मृाकं सुजातीयों.भवान् सर्पिश्ली
।
_* 53 श तःि
*ऽ 54
महाः गुडिः
-

७*
-

- - महाः ता यैसैाधनहेतुः _
।

*ं) loc. case, “ pointed out.” *) “ on all four sides,'' p. 165. c. ; दिशं।, * a guarter,”
loc. case plur. p. 45. *) *cause to be built," caus. of मा (p. 87. d.) with prep. mir.
*) पाषाणं, “ stone”; जूर्णे, “mortar)” “lime” p. 108. b. *४) fनम्मॆाण, “ con
struction.'' 83) “ completed.” *!) root दिश् with prep. स्रा, “ to command,”
p. 145..fः *) acc. case, “ the superintendant of the कोष or treasury,” “the
treasurer.' *) स्राड्ानं, “ summons,” r. l77. b. *) root गम् with sam, upa,
and d, p. 145. g. 39) p. 109. a. loc. case. 8) r. 180. 4) acc. neut. (p. 48.).
*) acc. dual neut. *) acc. plur. fem. p. 81. 4a) p. 118. 4) “ for the pay
ment of wages,' r. I71. c. 4) p. 17I. c. *) **according to need," r. 171. c.
*) r. 207. a. *) for राज्ञा जन्कं, ** that which had been said by the king.”
*) caus. of श्रु, “ to hear,” r. 108. 50) p. 205. 5l) “ of the same class or caste "
(p. 28. xi.), the prep. स when compounded with जाति and पछ् has the force of
समानः, **same.'' *) “ of the same party.” 5ं) r. 159. 5*) “ the instrument
of the accomplishment of great affairs.
 ॥ वेट्गभेीपाख्यानं । . ११
f 2ः_ +42 । / ु3 । । ८. /
ब्राह्मणस्य बाह्येणी गतिः । विश्वान् हि विश्वॆांसं वर्त्तिं । केा
चिन्ता नः कायैसिङेये ? ॥ ~~ . .
अर्थै प्रातैर् वेदगैभैः समुत्थाय सर्वः शिष्यैः सह जलंौश्ये
सूकृत्यं नृपे। #विा। मूातः । तृदा र्मन्त्री ौि;
राजा तत्रागत्य विप्रान् । तद्रा वदगभ:
#ं##[###-##
राजा सुश्राँब्यं सुललॆितम् अश्रुतॆपूिर्वॆ सामगानं श्रुत्वा चर्म

गङ्गैट्या वाचा साधु साध्व् इत्य् अब्रवीत् । सर्वे विप्रा राजेन्

जये जयेर्व् ऊचुः । अथ वेद्गभी-पृडॆत् । भी भूर्पते भवती
विभूत्या वयं सर्वे सिडमनोरथा इदानीं स्वगृहं जिगॆमिषवः।
राजावदत् । यथाभिमतं भवतां तथा भवतु । तदा स
आचाष्ये उत्थाय शिष्यैः सह् प्रर्तेस्थे । ततो मन्त्री किञ्चिद्
5्) acc. case, p. 44. 5) p. 94. ") dat. case of सिड़ि (p. 84.),
* why meed we be anxious about the success of our affairs?'' 58) r. 89.
59) r.108. t) r. 19. til) **in a line.” 9*) p. 145. i. 5ं) सामवेद,
the Sāma Weda is the third of the four Wedas, composed in metre, and therefore
always chaunted; गानं, “ a chaunt;" r.147. १*) “delightful to be heard,”
p. 147. d. $ं) “ very charming.” %) p. 172. g. ") “being astonished,”
चमत्। is a sound of Surprise prefixed to कृ. ११) “ having the hair of his body
erect with delight,' p. 160. a. श्) “ his eyes shedding tears of (religious) sym
pathy,” p. 171. U. 70) “ his faith and devotion being excited.” ग्) गङ्गद,
* indistinct,” or “convulsive,' from emotion. ग्*) voc. case, p. 4I. 7*) 2d sing.
imperat. of root.ji, p. I06., a word used in acclamation. ग्*) p. 205. 7) p. 111.
76) r. 140. ग्) p. 85. *. 79) p. 169. a. ग्) r.182. and p.85. १) 8d sing.
2d pret. ātm. of स्या (p.76. a.) with प्र, p. 175.
१२ ॥ वेदगर्भेीपाख्यानं ।
दू विप्रान् अनुष्वज्य परावेवृते । काग्यैाधीशेन प्ररिताः
काय्येकांराट्यो विप्राणां पुंवाच् चलिता: । ते सर्व्व शीघ्रम्
आागत्य गङ्गातटं प्राप्ना: । तत: काय्येकाराज्ञया नार्विवीर्
नीवॆा समांनीता । ते सर्व्व नौकाम् अारूंह्य पारं गताः । ततस्
त सन्ध्याकाले पाठशालां प्राँपुः ।
अथ वेदगर्भो गृहं प्राप्य राची तेषां काम्यैकाऎदीनाम्

नीत्वा छाबैः सह् बहु विचाय्यै नवीनॆायाः पाठशॆालाया

चयमध्य मठाच पाठशाला च सुनिम्मेिता जातॆा: ॥

अथ चेरेिर् आगत्य सर्वॊ वृत्तान्तो रॉज्ञे विज्ञापितः । राजा
काय्ये'ाधीशम् अाज्ञापयत् । पचलेिर्रबकम् अाहय । वेट्गभेाय
पचं लेखय । ततः काय्येाधीशो रौजलेिखकम् अहूयाकथयत्।
') व्रज् to go with चनु, p. 178. *) 2d pret. of वृत् , “ to turn --

(p. 106.), with परा, p. 174. *) काययैकाग्, “the managing workman,''

p. 107. b. 4) p. 156. e. and r. 10. ) r. 212. १) inst. case, plur.
of नाविक, “ a boat-man." ग्) नौका, “a boat.” 8) “ was brought,"
root नी, p. 188. b. ") p. 174. I) पार्, “ the opposite bank.” ll) 2d pret.
p. 120. 1१) p. 167. b. 1ं) “ hospitality," p. 28. wii. _ l4) “ after he had per
formed his morning exercises (of religion)," p. 160. a. 1) r.192. b. It) gen.
case, fem. of नवीन, “ new.” ग्) r. 28. b. ls) p. 177. c. i) p. 126.
*0) acc. case, plur. masc. of स्यपति, “ an architect,” “ master-builder.” *) acc.
case, plur. masc. of भृतिकं, “ a hired labourer," sh inserted before च by r. 20.
*ं) p. 105. b. *) caus. of Gyuj with mi, r. 108. *) p. 140. o. *) p. 202. c.
2) r. 194. *ग्) acc. case, पच, “ a letter"; लेखक, “a writer” (p. 150. b.).
*ं) 2d sing. imp. p. 107. *) r. 20. +. *t) p. I45. d.
 ॥ वेट्गभेीपाख्यानं । १३

आचाय्येाय पचं लेखनीयं । तस्यार्चेोगमनार्थे गद्यपद्येतादियुक्तं

पचं लिख । ततस् तेन पैचे लिखिते काय्येाधीशो राजानं

मास । राजापचं प्राप्य वेदगर्भो इवाभ्यां शिष्याभ्यां सह् शीघ्रं

राजसन्निधिम् अार्गेमत् ॥
अथ राजा वेदगभैम् आागतं दृष्ट्ठा प्रणनाम । आचाग्यैस्
र्तुं वेदं पठित्वैर्शिषं ददौ । राजा पृच्छति । भी विईन् पाठ
शाला कीईर्शी जाता मठाच्च कीदृशा: कंति जाता: ? ।
आचार्य्येणेत्तं । भूपते चे शते मठा निम्मेिता: । मध्ये महती
पाठशाला सुनिम्मेिताभवॆत् । भूपैतिनोक्तं । तच छाचाः
प्रवेशैनीया भवता । वेद्गभैः प्रत्याह् । स्वयं गत्वा नवगृह्
प्रवेशेी राज्ञा कारयितॆव्य: । ततो भूपतिर् भद्रं भद्रम् इत्य्
उक्ता भृत्यान् अवदत् । मौहूर्त्तेिक आहूयतां । ततस् तैर्
आहूतो गणक आागत्योपविष्ट: ।
अथ नृपतिस् तम् आज्ञापयति । भो ज्योतैिषिक नव
*l) p. 147. b. *) “ for his coming hither,” “ containing an invitation for him to
come hither.” 33) गद्य, “ prose''; पद्य, “ verse,'' p. 17I. c. *) r. I89. *) मुद्रा, “a
seal”; अङ्क्षित, “ stamped.” *) “ letter-carrier," root वह्, p. 150. b. *) 2d pret.
(r. 108.) of caus. of ड्रम् with प्र, p. 175. *) p. 48. *) 8d pret. ofgam, “ to go,'
with prep. d, p. 83. /. 4) p. 148. a. *l) r. 187. *) “ having recited,''
p. 148. a. *) acc. case of ashis, p. 44. *. 44) p. 118. *?) r. 140. 4t) voc.
case of oiducas, p. 44. *) nom. fem. of कोडश, “ what kind?” *) p. 54. +.
4) p. 104. *) p. 85. f. १) “are to be made to enter” (p. 147. U.) caus. of root
with प्र, See also r. 215. *४) caus. of कृ, p. 146. ८८. *ं) “ the astrologer,'
formed by p. 28. ix., from मुहूर्त्ते, **an hour.' **) 8d Sing. imp. paSS. p. 90../ः
*) गणक, “an astrologer,” from गण्, “to calculate," p. 150. ". ") r. 5.
३ग्) ज्योतिषिक, “ an astrologer," from ज्योतिस्, “ a star.'
G Gः
१४ । वेट्गभेीपाख्यानं ॥
गृहप्रवेशॆाय दिनं निरूपॆणीयं । ततः स विचाय्यै नवगृह्
प्रवेशयोग्यं लग्नं कथयॆामास । राजोवाच । तत्पूर्वेंदिने तचा
स्माभिर् गन्तव्यं भवान् यॆद् यत् कंम्मे तच कर्र्णीयं तत्
सवं स्वयं विधास्यति । अथ वेद्गर्भो रार्जानुज्ञां गृहीत्वा
गृहं गत: ॥
पर-हनि प्रातः स राजा मन्त्रिणम् अाज्ञापितवान् ।
पाठशालां प्रति लोकान् प्रेषेय । ते तच द्रव्याण्य् अासार्दयन्तु
स्थानानि परिष्कुवेन्तु । ततः स धनं दत्त्वा बहून् काय्येका
रिणी जनान् प्राहिंणेीत् । तदनन्तरं स राजा भृत्यमन्त्रि
पुरोहितैः सहितः शुभे मुहूर्त्तं तच जगाम । नृपतिर् गजः
वाहॆनेन पुरोहितश्च मन्त्रिप्रभृतयस् तुरगवाँह्नैश् चलिताः ।
भृत्याः पदैर् वव्रेजुः ॥
अथ तच गत्वा राजा निरूपितदिवसे ब्राह्मैणैर् वास्तुया
5ग्) r, 176. *) “is to bechosen,” “fixed upon,” root रूप् with नि. ं) “ auspicious
moment,” “ favourable season." ") r, 108. १) “ on the day before that (fixed upon
for the ceremony).” 6५) p.208. b. 6ं) r. 86. 94) p. 42. 6) r. 147. b.
6f) “ will arrange,'' root धा with prep. वि, p. 119. । ") acc. case of अनुज्ञा, “ per
mission to depart,'' r. 147. ts) p. 148. a. 99) loc. case of अहन्, “a day.”
70) r. 126. ') p. 155. b. *) p. 175. 3) r. 7. *) 8d plur. imp. of caus. of
सद् with स्रा, “let them procure.” ?) *let them decorate,” p. 102. p. 174.
") acc. case, p. 48. 7) Ist pret. of हि, “ to send,” with prep. प्र, 5th conj. r. 94.
s) पुरोहित, * the family priest," “ with the servants, the minister, and the pricst,”
r. 151. *) “at an auspicious moment;" a muhiirta is two dandas or forty-eight
minutes. ") r, 198. b. वाहन is applied to any thing which carries, p. 150. c.
li) “ the minister and the others,'' r. 157. 1४) जुणं, “a horse,” r. 25. a.
l) 2d pret. of व्रज्, “ to go,” r. 98. !!) r. 198. a. *hawing caused the ceremony
to be performed by the Brahmans.'' 1) वालुयाग, **a ceremony or Sacrifice
performed on entering a new habitation,” r. 157.
 ॥ वेट्गभेीपाख्यानं ॥ १u

दिचैर् महोत्सवं कारयित्वा छाचान् नवं वेश्म प्रावेशयत् ।

तदनन्तरं नरपति: काय्यैकाऎदिभ्यः पारितोषिकं प्रादात् ।

मना अब्रवीत् । सपरिवॆारस्य राज्ञः शुभं भूयात् । भूयात्

पुनर्दृशैनं ।
रिपुर्ज्ञेयी भवान् भूयात् प्रजानां च प्रपालैकः ।
निरामेयेी निरातङ्कः सदाभक्ति: परंवर ॥
इत्य् अाशिषं समाकण्ये स राजा जातभक्तिस् तैर् ब्राह्मणेर्
अनुज्ञैातः सहामात्यभृत्यपुरोहितैः स्वपुरं प्रति प्रतस्थे ।

विद्यार्चियेनच नानादिग्देशेभ्य: क्रमश् अागत्य चीणि शतानि

बभूवुः। स च तान् सर्वॆान् अन्तेवॆासिनःप्रतिंदिनं चिकेिोलम्
अध्यापयति स्म ।
I) नृत्य, “ dancing”; गीतं , “ singing "; वादित्र, “ musical instrument,” r. 15I. a.
"ग्) r. 48. i, IS) Ist pret. r. 192. a. ") r. 104. and r. 157. ५) acc.case, “agratuity,”
that which causes परिज्ञोष, “ satisfaction" (p. 28. ix.). १1) 8d prot. of da with prep.
pra, p. 88. i. **) r. 182. **) p. 169. a. *4) “ together with his retinue,'' r. I01.
*) r. 200. *) “ the congueror ofyour enemies," p.149. 1. *ग्) “the guardian.”
*) “ free from स्रामय or sickness,"p. 154. ४. r. 101. *) “ free from all आतङ्कः, ap
prehension.” *) “always devoted to," r. 16I. *) loc. case, “ the Supreme Lord,”
‘‘ the Deity,” r.184. a. *) “ permitted to depart.’’ **) “ spread abroad,'' root
āp with oi, p. 120. *) p. 104. *) acc. case, plur. of अन्तेवासिन, **a pupil,”
p.48. ३ग्) प्रति give the sense of “every,' r. 171. b. 39) “ at the three Seasons.”
i.e. ** morning, noon, and evening.' *) p. 199. e.
 SEILECTIONS FRO'M THE INSTITUTES OF MANU.

ORIGIN OF THE FOUR OLASSES, AND GENERAL W IEw O F THEIR DUTIES.

संवेस्यास्य तु सगैस्य गुप्त्यॆर्थे स महाद्युतिः ।

मुखबाहूरुपंज्ञानां पृथक् कम्मेौण्य् अकल्पयत् ॥ १॥

दानं प्रतियॆहं चैव ब्राह्मेणानाम् अकल्पयत् ॥ २ ॥

प्रजानां रष्ट्रणं दानम् इज्याध्ययनम् एव च ।
विषयेष्व् अप्रसक्तिश्च ष्ट्चियस्य समंीसत: ॥ ३॥
पशूनां रष्णं दानम् इज्याध्ययनम् एव च ।
बर्णिक्पथं कुंसीदं च वैश्यस्य कृषिम् एव च ॥ ४॥
एकम् एव तु शूद्रस्य प्रभुः कम्मे समादिशत् ।
एतेषाम् एव वणेीनां शुश्रूषाम् अनसूयया ॥ ५ ॥
भूतानां प्राणिनः श्रेष्ठाः प्राणिनां बुडिंजीविनः ।
बुर्डिमत्सु नराः श्रेष्ठा नरेषु ब्राह्मणाः स्मृताः ॥६॥
l) Gen. case, sing. of संगॆ, “ creation." *) r. I7I. c. 3) r. 159. *) जरू,
masc. “ the thigh.'' ) पद, masc. “ the foot;" r. 16. This is a complex com
`

pound, the whole being a dependent inwolving an aggregative, p. I71. b. 6) r. 7.

ग्) Ist pret. of कूप्, * to enjoin,” I0th conj. p. 87. e *) acc. case of यजनं, n. ** the
performance ofa sacrifice.” ?) the lengthening of the a Shows that this word is from
the causal, p. 87. e. I) acc. case of प्रतिग्रह, “ acceptance.” il) r. 196.
1१) **summarily," p. 152. a. 1ं) acc. case of बणिक्पश्य, n. “ traffic,” lit. “ way of
merchants.'' 14) acc. case of कुसीद, n. “ usury.” ') acc. case of शुश्रूषा, fem.
* service,'' lit. “ desire to hear,' p. 28. xiii. !f) instr. case of अनसूया, fem.
* absence of envy or grudge, p. 182. d. 1ग्) p. 188. d. 's) r. 144. ८.
It) r.42. ii. and p. l88. d.
 ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥ १७

ब्राह्मणेषु च विद्वंसो विह्वासु कृतबुद्धयः ।

कृतबुडिषु कर्त्रारः कर्तृषु ब्रह्मविदिनः ॥७॥
विप्राणां ज्ञानतो ज्येष्ठं चियाणां तु वीभ्येतः ।
वैश्यानां धान्यधनॆतः शूद्राणाम् एव जन्मतः ॥ ६ ॥
ब्राह्मण: ष्ट्ाचियेी वेश्यस् चॆयो वणे द्विजातयः ।
चतुर्थे एकजातिस् तु शूद्रो नास्ति तु पञ्चमः ॥ ९ ॥
THE FIRST OR SACERDOTAL CLASS (OR BRAHMANS).

Duties of the Brahman in the first Order (4ahrama) or 2aarter 0f

his Life, as a Brahmachārं, or Student of Hºeligion, sa.ject do
/his Guru or Preceptor.

विद्या ब्राह्मणम् एाँयाह् सेवॆधिस् तं-स्मि रट् मां ।

असूर्यकाय मां मा-द्रस् तथा स्यॆां वीग्यैवैत्तमा ॥१०॥
यम् एव तु शुचिं विद्या नियतबह्मचारिणं ।
तस्मै मां बूहि विप्राय निधिपॆायाप्रमोदिने ॥ ११॥
धम्मेीथॆ यच न स्यातां शुश्रूषा वापि तह्रिधा ।
तच विद्या न वप्नेव्या शुभं वीजम् इवोषरे ॥ १२ ॥
i8) p.44. 1ं) p. 87. *) ब्रह्म, “ the divine spirit, from which all things
are supposed to emanate, and to which they return.' *) p. 152. a.
*) p. 28. viii. *) p. 48. **) indec. part. of root i, “to go,” with
prep. ā, p. 144. ८. *) nom. case (r. 25. ८.) of सेवधि, **a divine treasure.'
") r. 9. *) p. 101. ') dat. case of असूयक, “a detracter.” *) r. 208. and
p. 83. i. ?) nom. fem. of the Superl. degree of वीयैवात्, * possessed of wigour,"
r. 42. i. r. 71. 6) r. 174. ग्) 2d Sing. pot. of oid, “ to know," p.95. and r. 28. B.
8) r. 194. 9) p. 114. I) dat. case of fनधिप, “ the protector ofa treasure";
प, “ a protector,” from पा, “ to protect,' by r. 181. I. !!) dat. case of
अप्रमादिन्, * not negligent,' p. 48. I४) r. 152. a. ') nom. fem. of fut. pass.
part. of oap, “ to sow,” p. 146. d. !!) ज्ञषणं, n. * a barren salt soil.''
१b; ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥
विद्यैयेव समं कॉमं मज्ञेयं ब्रह्मैवादिना ।
अापद्य् अपि हि घोरायां न त्व् एर्नाम् इरिणे वपेत् ॥ १३ ॥
ब्राह्मेस्य जन्मन: कत्ते'ा रुंवधिम्मेस्य च शासिता ।
बाली-पि विप्रो वृडस्य पिता भवति धैम्मेतः ॥ १४॥
न तेन वृडो भवति येनास्य पलितं शिरः ।
यो वै युवाप्य् अधीर्येीनस् तं देवाः स्थविरं विदुः ॥ १५ ॥
यथा कार्ष्टमयो हस्ती यथा चम्मैमेयो मृगः ।
यश्च विप्री-नधीयानस् चयस् ते नाम बिभ्रैति ॥१६॥
संवंतिमांस् तु निर्येमान् ब्रह्मचारी गुरी वसन् ।
यैम्येन्द्रियायामं तपोवृईयथैम् अात्मनः ॥ १७ ॥
चोदितो गुरुणा नित्यम् अप्रचोदित एव वा ।
कुर्य्येाद् अध्ययॆने यत्नम् आाचाय्यैस्य हितेषु च ॥ १६ ॥
अाचाय्यैश्च पिता चैव माता भ्राता च पूर्वॆज: ।
नार्त्तेनॆाप्य् अवमन्तव्या ब्राह्मणेन विशेषतः ॥ १९ ॥
यं मातैीपितरी ङ्काशं सैर्हृते सम्भवे नृर्णे ।
न तस्य निष्कृतिः श्र्रपा कथुं वषैश्तैर् अपि ॥ २०॥
1) r. 6. i) p. 151. a. Iग्) ब्रह्म, “ the Wedas"; वादिन्, * an expounder,' p. 149. a.
i8) p. 52. note. lं) इणि, n. “ barren Soil.” *) ब्राह्म, adj. “ relating to Brahmā,”
**divine,” p. 28. wiii. १l) r.66. *) suca is here used generally (*own ”) and
not reflexively. *) nom. case, Sing. masc. of शासितृ, p. 115. p. 149. 2.
*ः) p. 152. a. 2) पठित, adj. “gray ” (as the hair). *) nom. case, Sing. of the
pres. part. ātm. of अधी, “ to read," p. 118. and r. l24. *) p. 95. note. *ं) p. 28.xii.
*) r. 185. *) p. 117. 3l) for सेवेत इमान्, r. 5. r. 20. : seceta is the ad sing.
pot. atm. of set), “ to serve,” “ practise." *४) See verse 62. *ं) i.e. गुरुसमीपे,
com. **at his Guru's.” *) indec. part. of yum, “ to restrain,” with prep. sam
and mi. *) p. 177. ०. *) p. 102. ३) p. 195. b. *) “ born first,” “elder.”
*) p. 140. ८. !) r. I52. b. 1i) 8d dual pres. ātm. of stth, “ to bear.” **) p. 37. #ः
*) ** acduittance,” “ discharge of a debt.” 41) p. 108. ५. 4) r. I80.
 ॥ मनुसंहितासारः । १७

तयोर् नित्यं प्रियं कुय्येाद् आचाय्येस्य च संवेदा ।

तेष्व् एव चिषु तुष्टेषु तपः सर्वे समाप्यते ॥ २१ ॥
तेषां चयाणां शुश्रूषा परमं तप उर्च्यते ।
न तैर् अभ्यननुज्ञातो धम्मैम् अन्यं समाचरेत् ॥ २२ ॥
अभिवॆादनशीलस्य नित्यं वृडोपसेविनः ।
चत्वॆारि सम्प्रवडेन्ते अायुर् विद्या यशो बलं ॥ २३ ॥
यया खनन् खनिचेण नरो वाये अधिगच्छति ।
तथा गुरुगतां विद्यां शुश्रूषुर् अधिगच्छति ॥ २४॥

श्रद्दधानः शुभां विद्याम् आददीतावराद् अपि ॥ २५ ॥

अय तेन परो धर्ममी विद्या शौचं f ॥

विविधानि च श्रूिंपानि समादयानि सवेत: ॥ २६॥

इन्द्रियाणां विचैरतां विषयेष्व् अपहॆारिषु ।
संयमे यत्नम् अार्तिष्ठेट् विडान् यन्तेिव वाजिनां ॥ २७॥
4) p. 90.Jr. r. 190. *) “ unpermitted.” This insertion of the nega
tive prefix am (r. 185.) between the two prep0sitions is remarkable, and the
more so, as the metre would egually admit of अनभ्यनुज्ञातो. ' 48) अभिवादनं,
*salutation.” 4ं) उपसेविन्, *one who serves or honours,” p. 149. a. %) p. 48.
1) 8d plur. pres. ātm. of the root वृध्।, 1st conj. with prep. 8am and pra. *) r. 7.
*) lit. “ desirous to hear,' r. 40. *) श्रद्दधानः, “ possessing श्रत्, belief,”
r. 124. ८. ) 8d sing. pot. ātm. of da with prep. ā, p. I74. ' ') “ purity,” from
शुचि, “ pure,' by p. 28. viii. ग्) nom. plur. m. of शिल्पं, “ an art.” s) “ to be
collected,” fut. part. of da (p. 147. c.) with prep. som and ८. ") gen. plur. of
pres, part. of चर् (r.128.) with prep. oi, p. 175. ") loc. plur. r. 7. !) अपहारिन्,
“a seiZer," from ड् (p. 149. a.) with’ prep. apa. 1*) r0ot sthā with prep. a, “ to
follow up,” “ apply ''; यानम् आास्या is a common phrase in Manu for “ to maka
effort.'' *) यन्ताः, nom. sing. masc. ** a driver,' from यम्, “ to restrain'
(r. L81. 2.).
२० ॥ मनुसंहितासारः ।
न जाँतु कामः कामानाम् उपभोगेन शाम्यति ।
हविषा कृष्णवॆत्मॆव भूय एवाभिर्वेडैते ॥ २b ॥
इन्द्रियाणां प्रसङ्गेन दोषम् ऋरँछत्य् असंशॆयं ।
सन्नियम्य तु तान्य् एव ततः सिद्धिं नियच्छति ॥ २९ ॥
वेदास् त्यागश्च यज्ञाश्च नियमाश्च तपांसि च ।
न विप्रेंदुष्टभावस्य सिद्धिं गच्छन्ति कर्हिचित् ॥ ३० ॥
वशे कृत्वेन्द्रियायामं संयॆम्य च मनस् तथा ।
संवेान् संसाधयेद् अथैान् अश्विन् योगॆतस् तनुं ॥ ३१॥
इन्द्रियाणां तु सर्वेषां यंद्य एकं छ्रॆतीन्द्रियं ।
तेनास्य ष्ट्प्रति प्रज्ञा हॆते: पाचै'ाद् इवोदकं ॥ ३२ ॥
यस्य वाडूवनैसे शुडे सम्यग्गुने च सवेदा ।
स वै संवेम् अवाप्नोति वेदाँन्तीपगतॆ फलं ॥ ३३॥
सम्माँनाद् ब्राह्मणेी नित्यम् उर्द्विजेत विषाद् इव ।
अमृतस्येव चार्काङ्ग्रेद् अवमानस्य संवेदा ॥ ३४॥

14) p. 158..fः 1ं) p. 100. 16) कृष्णवामैन्,masc. “ fire ” (nom.

case -त्मैो). IT) p. 158. d. ls) root वृथ् with prep. अभि . l9) 8d sing. pres.
of root चलृ, “ to go to,” “ incur,' r. 191. b. ५) r. I71. b. १) root यम् with नि,
“ to obtain"; com: लभते. *) “ depraved,” pass. part. of दुम् (p. 189. i.) with
prep. oi and pra. ं **) r. 188. 2) यम् with prep. सम् . *) nom. case sing.
of the pres. part. of fछ्, “ to harass,” 5th conj. r.128. r. l85. 2) योगः, * reli
gious meditation," p. 152. a. 2) तनुं, fem. “ the body.” *s) r. I86. ८. r. 7.
*) 8d sing. pres. of छ्र्, Ist conj. “to ooZe out,” “ to disappear gradually.”
३) इति, “a leather skin.” *) r. 195. *) r. 152. a. मनस्, when compounded with
वाक्, becomes मनसि . Pānini, 6. 4. 77. *) see p. २. 7. 84) उपगतः, **obtained,'' lit.
“ undergone.” *) r.105. a. १t) root विज्न्, 6th conj. with उत्, “ to fear.” ३ग्) root
कांछ् with चा,** to be desirous of.' *) gen. case of अवमानं, n. “ dishonour.”
 ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥ । २१

सुखं ह्य् अवमतः शंत सुखं च प्रतिबुध्यते ।

मुखं चरति लोके-स्मैिब् अवमैन्ता विनश्यति ॥ ३५ ॥
एवं चरति यो विप्रो ब्रह्मचर्य्यैम् अविलुतः ।
स गच्छत्य् उत्तमं स्थानं न चेहार्जायते पुनः ॥ ३६॥
JDaties of the Brahmam in the second Order, or 69uarter of his Life,
ds a Grihastha, or House/holder.

चतुर्थेम् आायुषो भार्गम् उर्षित्वाद्यं गुरी द्विजः ।

द्वितीयम् आायुषो भागं कृतदारी गृहे वसेत् ॥ ३७॥
अद्रोहिणैव भूतानाम् अस्पद्रोहेण वा पुनः ।
अङ्खशेन शरीरस्य कुर्वीत धनसञ्चयं ॥ ३६ ॥
धम्मे'ाथॆाव् उच्येते श्रेयः कामायैीं धम्मे एव च ।
अर्थे एवेह वा श्रेयस् चिवगे इति तु स्थितिः ॥ ३९॥
सन्तोषं परम् आस्थाय मुखार्थी संयॆतो भवेत् ।
सन्तोषमूलं हि सुखं दुःखैमूिलं विपर्ययैयः ॥ ४०॥
3ं) p. 118. 4) r.9. r. 19. *l) r. 181. 2. 4) p. 175. *) स, “ not,"
and विबुत, “deviating.” *) 8d sing pres. of root, जन्, 4th conj.
(r. 89. d.), “ to be born,'' with prep. अा. If from this may be derived a noun
चाजाति, the phrase शतम् अ'ाजाती: (p. 155. d.) might be explained, without
making स्रा gowern the accusative. ") p. 44. *. *) acc. case (r. 180. a.) of भागं,
८6part.” *) p. 148. d. 4) i.e. गुरूकुले, C0Im. ) दार्, “a wife,” p. 169. a.
p. 82. *. 6) स्र, “ not"; द्रोह, m. “injury.” ग्) p. 108. १) r.152. a. r, 190.
१) p. 90..fः 1) “ restrained.” ") These two compounds well illustrate the
aiference between a relative and abSolute dependent compound; the first is used
relatively, and as an epithet of सुखे, it must therefore be translated *has its root,”
or ५c is founded in contentment"; the second is not used relatively to विपर्ययेयः, or
it would be written दुःखरूलः; it must, therefore, be translated as an absolute
dependent, “ the root of misery," see p. 167. 6.
H H
 २२ ॥ मनुसंहितासारः ।
वेदोदितं खैकं कम्मे नित्यं कुग्यैाद् अतन्द्रितः ।
तेंद्भिः कुंवेन् यथाशक्तिं प्राप्नोति परमां गतिं ॥ ४१॥
इन्द्रियार्थेषु सर्वेषु न प्रसज्येत कामतः ।
सद्वेन् िपरित्र्यजेद् अथैतान् स्वाध्यायस्य विरी"धिनः ॥ ४२ ॥
वयसः कम्मेणेी-थैस्य श्रुतस्याभिजैनस्य च ।
वेषवाग्बुडिकासारूप्यम् आाचैरन् विचरेद् इह ॥ ४३॥
न सीदॆब् अपि धर्मेण मनी-धम्मँ निवेशयेत् ।
अधाम्मेिकाणां पापानाम् अ्रशु पश्यन् विपस्यैयं ॥ ४४॥
नाधम्मेश् चरितॆी लोके सद्यः फलति गौर् इव ।
शनैर् आावत्तैर्मानस् तु कॆर्त्तुर् मूलानि कृतेंति ॥ ४५॥
यदि नात्मनि पुचेषु न चेत् पुचेषु नर्घृषु ।
न त्व् एव तु कृती-धम्मैः कर्त्तुर् भवति निष्फैल: ॥ ४६॥
व्यसनस्य च मृत्योश्च व्यसनं कर्ष्टम् उच्यते ।
व्यसैन्य् अधी-धी वजति खैर् याँत्य् अव्यसनी मृतः ॥ ४७॥
t) खक, “own)” p. 23. si, I) for तद् हि, r, 18. l) r.128. 1ं) p. 120.
I) १d sing pot. pass.of सन्त् ,“toadhere to,"p.90.d. l)p. 174. 1ं) स्वाध्याय,*in
audible reading to one'sself ofscripture.” !ं) acc. case plur. of विरोधिन्, **adverse to,”
“inconsistent,"from रूथ्, by p. 149. a. *)gen.casesing.of अभिजनं, “family rank.”
*) also written वेश, “dress." *) “ sameness of form,” from सरूपं, by p.28. wii.
Cf. also p. १०. note 51. *) r.128. and p. 174. *) root sad, p. 107. and r.128.
r. 19. १) p. 182. b. १) p. 158. e. *”) “ committed,” p. 189. h.
*१) p. 158..fः *) nom. case (r. 27. ८.) ofgo, “ the earth," meaning also **a cow,”
p. 89. #. 3) p. 151. b. *) lit. “ rolling on," root वृत् with स्रा, r. 124.
*ं) p. 87. *) p.65. b. *) loc. plur. of नमृ, “a grandson, p. 87. *) “ without
फलं, *fruit,” p. 154. e. and p. 15. note. *) कष्ट, “ the most grievous,” used as
a Superlative. ३) for व्यसनी (r. 7.) p. 27. iv. *) p. 156. e. ३) खर्, indecl.
* heaven." 40) p. 112.
 ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥ २३

नास्तैिक्यं वेदनिन्दां च देवतानां च कुलॆनं ।

इषं दम्भं च मानं च क्रोधं तैह्म्यं च वज्ज्ञेयेत् ॥ ४६ ॥
नार्रन्तुदः स्याद् अाती-पि न परद्रोह्यर्कम्मेधीः ।
ययास्योद्विजते वाचा परो न ताम् उदीर्रयेत् ॥ ४९॥
सत्यं ब्रूयात् प्रियं ब्रूर्यान् न ब्रूयात् सत्यम् अप्रियं ।
प्रियं च नानृतं ब्रूयाद् एष धम्मै: सनाँतनः ॥ ५०॥
यद् यॆत् परवशं कम्मै तत् तद् यत्नेन वर्जयेत् ।
यद् यद् अात्मवशं तु स्यात् तत् तत् सेवेत यानॆतः ॥ ५१॥
सर्वॆ परवशं दुःखं संवेम् आात्मवशं सुखं ।
एतद् विद्यात् समासेन लष्णं सुखाद्दुःखयोः ॥ ५२॥
पूजयेद् अशैनं नित्यम् अद्यैीच् चैतद् अकुर्सयन् ।
इष्ट्रा हृयेत् प्रसीदेच् च प्रतिनन्देच् च सवेशः ॥ ५३॥
अपुण्यं लोकविद्विष्टं तस्मात् तत् परिवर्जयेत् ॥ ५४॥
Al) *atheism,” from नास्ति, “ there is not (a God).” *) “contempt.''
4ं) from तीक्ष्णं, “sharp,” “cruel,” by p. 28. vii. 4ं) अरूनुद, “acrimonious,”
*galling.” 4) This is a very anomalous compound. 4) 8d sing.
pot. of root ईर् with prep. ut, “ to utter:" 4) r.15. *) “perpetual.”
4) r.86. #) r.182. d. 5l) p. 152. a. 5ं) r. 152. a. 5ं) “food,” from
चश्, by p.22. iii. 51) 8d sing. pot. of root अद्, “to eat,' 2d conj. r. 16.
55) nom. case sing. of pres. part. (r.128.) of root कुत्स्, 10th conj. “ to contemn,"
r. 135. 50) 8d sing. pot. of root sad (p. 107.) with pra, “ to be calm,” “ contented.”
5i) 8d sing. pot. of नन्द् with प्रति, “ to receive with pleasure and thankfulness.’
प्रणम्य प्राञ्जलिः कययेत्। । अस्माकं नित्यम् अस्त्वेतद् इति, COm. ās) खिन् not
सारोग्य, adj. “ belonging to health," formed from खरोगं, by p. 28. vii. *) चन्
not वायुप्प, “belonging to life,” p.28. vii. ") स्र not खग्यै, “belonging to
heaven," p. 28. wii. I) r.185. a.
२४ ॥ मनुसंहितासारः ।
सम्प्राप्नाय त्व् अतिथेये प्रदद्यैाद् आासैनोदके ।
अन्नं चैव यथाशक्ति सत्कृत्य विधिपूर्धैकं ॥ ५५ ॥
न वै स्वयं तद् अग्नीयॆाद् अतिथिं यन् न भोजयेत् ।
धन्यं यशस्यम् आयुष्यं स्वग्र्ये चातिर्थिपूजनं । प६॥
यत्किंचिद् अपि दातव्यं याचितेनानसूयया ।
परितुष्टेन भावेन पौंचम् आासॆाद्य शक्तितः ॥ ५७॥
येन येन तु भावेन यद् यद् दानं प्रयज्ञैति ।
तत् तत् तेनैव भावेन प्राप्नोति प्रतिपूजितः ॥ ut; ॥
न विस्मॆयेत तपसॆा न दत्वा परिकीर्त्तेियेत् ।
विस्मयात् छ्रति तपो दानं च परिकीर्त्तेनात् ॥ ५९॥
न धम्मेस्यार्पदशेन पापं कृत्वा व्रतं चरेत् ।
व्रतेन पापं प्रडॆाद्य कुबेन् स्त्रीशूद्रदम्भनं ॥ ६०॥
यो-न्यथा सन्तॆम् आत्मानम् अन्यथा सैसुि भाषते ।
स पापकृत्तमो लोके स्तेन आात्मापहॆारकः ॥ ६१ ॥
*) dat. case, p. 88. and r. 104. *) 8d sing. pot. of दा (p. 118.)
with प्र . 4) r. l52. a. *) lit. “ preceded by rule "; पूर्धैकं is very
commonly added to a word in modern Sanscrit and Bengāli, to express
the manner in which, or the state of mind with which, any thing is done.
१) p. 124. ग्) p. 28. wii. 8) r. 147. पूजनं, “the act of honouring.”
१) r.187. li) “a fit object,” properly “ a vessel.” ll) root sad with a, “to
meet with.' l) wam (r. 88. c.) with pra, “ to bestow.” i8) “ honoured in
return,” p. 175. ':) 8d Sing. pot. ātm. of smi, Ist conj. with Di, “ to admire,”
* foel pride in.” 1) r.175. b. l6) root कृत्।, 10th conj. irreg. with परि, “ to
proclaim." ") स्रपदेश, “ disguise.” l8) indec. part. of the root छद्, 10th
conj. “ to cover,” with prep. प्र, p.145. i. I) दम्भन, *deceit.” *) r. I28.
2l) r. 197. *ं) r. 42. r.71. *) root ड् , “ to seiZe” (p. 150. b.), with
prep. `dpu.
 ॥ मनुसंहितासारः । २u।

यमॆान् सेवत सततं न नित्यं नियैमान् बुधः ।

यमान् पतत्य् अकुंवॆाणी नियमान् केवलान् भजैन् ॥ ६२ ॥
धम्मॆ श्नैः सञ्चिनुयाद् वल्मीकम् इव पुतिकॆाः ।
परलीकसहायाँधं संवेभूतान्य् अपीडैयन् ॥ ६३॥
नार्मुच हि सहायार्थे पिता माता च तिष्ठतः ।
न पुचंदॆा न ज्ञातिर् धम्मैस् तिष्ठति केवलः ॥६४॥
एकः प्रजायते जन्तुर् एक एव प्रलीयैते ।
एकी-नुर्भुङ्गे सुकृतम् एक एव च दुष्कृतं ॥ ६५ ॥
मृतं शरीरम् उत्सृज्य काष्ठलोष्टसमं श्तिी ।
विमुखा बान्धवा याँन्ति धम्मैस् तम् अनुगच्छति ॥ ६६॥
तस्माद् धम्मॆ सहायार्थे नित्यं सञ्चिनुयाच् छनैः ।
धर्म्मेण हि सहायेन तमॆस् तरति दुस्तरँ ॥ ६७ ॥
धम्मेप्रधानं पुरुषं तपसा हतकिंस्विषं ।
परलोकं नयत्य् आशु भाषॆबन्तं खश्रीि"रिणं ॥ ६६ ॥
*) Thegyamāh, or “ moral duties,” according to the scholiast,are purity of thought,
chastity, compassion, patience, truth, religious meditation, honesty, freedom from
। malice, mildness, and self-restraint ः the niyamāh, or “ceremonial duties,” are
ablution, fasting, Sacrificing, reading of Scripture, and religious Silence. **) r. 124. a.
26) root भज्ञ, “ to serve,” “ perform,” r.128. *) 8d sing. pot. of root chi (p.95.)
with prep. sam. १$) nom. plur. of पुत्तिका, * a kind of ant ”; पिपोलिकाप्रभेदा:,
Com. According to Wilkins, these ant-hills are Seen in Bengal eight or ten feet
high. 2) r.171. c. *) nom. case Sing. of the pres. part. of root पीड्, 10th
। conj. “ to pain,” r. 185. *) p. 152. b. *४) r. 158. a. *) 8d Sing. pres. atm.
of ली, 4th conj. “ to perish.'' *') 8d Sing. pres. ātm. of भुञ्जर्, 7th conj. “ to eat,"
r. 95. and See युज्, p. 122. *) p. 110., p. 145..f. *t) p. 112. ३) r. 17.
१) r.60. ३) हत from हन्, “ to destroy,” p. 140. 0. किल्विषं, n. “ sin,” p. 160. u.
4) acc. case of भाखत्, “ luminous,” formed from भास्, “ light,” by r. 42. i.
*l) acc. case of खशशैरिन्, “ having a celestial body,” from ख', “ heaven," and शरीरं,
**body,” p.27. iv.
२६ ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥
Duties of the Grihastha's Wife.

पाणिर्याहस्य सांध्बी स्त्री जीवतो वा मृतस्य वा ।

पतिलीकम् अभीप्सन्ती नाचरत् किञ्चिद् अप्रियं ॥ ६९ ॥
उपचैय्यै: स्त्रिया सार्धूपा सततं देववैित् पतिः ।
पतिं शुश्रूषते येन तेन स्वर्गे महीयेते ॥ ७०॥
सदा प्रहृष्टेया भाव्यं गृह्यकार्येषु दर्छया ।
सुसंंकृतोपरूतया व्यये चामुक्तईस्तया ।। ७१ ।।
पतिं या नाभिपॆरति मनोवाग्देहसंयता ।
इहांयां कीर्त्तेिम् आाप्नोति पतिश्लीकं पंच च ॥ ७२ ॥
न च। गृह्णीयात् पायौ प्रे"ते परस्य तु ।
अासीतॆामर्रणात् छ्ाँन्ता नियता ब्रह्मचारिणी ॥ ७३॥
) gen. case of पाणियाह, “one who takes hy the hand,” “a husband.”
१) nom. fem. of साडु, “virtuous,” p.46. *) nom. fem. of pres. part. (p. 186. b.)
of desid. form of aip (p. 180. e.) with prep. abhi. 4) ** to be served,”
root char with prep. upa, p. 147. g. ?) inst. case, r. 40. %) p. 152..fः
ग्) 8d sing. pres. of an irregular nominal verb महीय्, “ to be exalted,'' **honoured,”
formed from महत्, “great,” com. पूज्यते. 8) तया, “ by her (understood)
भाव्यं, it is to be (p. 147. d.) प्रहृष्टया, cheerful," see p. 208. c. 9) inst. fem.
of द्रष्, “ skilful.” I) p. 160. a. उपस्कर्, “ an article of household furniture.”
Com. कुण्डकटाहादि, “ pots,” “pans,” “crockery,” &c. m) inst. fem. of अमुक्हस्तः,
lit. “ whose hand is not free,” p. 160. a. 1ं) चर् with चभिः, “ to transgress," “ to
deal treacherously with.” le) acc. fem. of स्रग्य, ** chief.” !*) p. 152. b.
1) p.85. f. l) loc. case of प्रेत, “ deceased,” root इ, “ to go," with प्र, p. I88. ८.
r) 8d sing. pot. ātm. of root स्रास्, 2d conj. “ to remain.” ls) स्रा, “ until”;
मरणात्।, abl. case “death,” p. 156. a. ") “ patient,” p. 141.
 ॥ मनुसंहितासारः । २७

JDuties of the Brahman in the third Order, or Cuarter of /iis Life,

as a Wamaprastha, or Hermit.

गृह्स्यस् तु यदा पश्येद् बैलीपलितम् आत्मनः ।

पुचॆषु भाग्यै निर्न्निप्य तदारण्यं समाँश्रयेत् ॥ ७४॥
यद् भष्ट्यं स्यात् ततो दद्याद् बलिं भिष्ां च शक्तिँत: ।
चैम्मूलफलभिष्ाँभिर् अचेयेद् अाश्रमॆागतान् ॥ ७५ ॥
स्वाध्याये नित्ययुक्तः स्याद् दन्ती मैच: समौहितः ।
र्देता नित्यम् अनादैाता सवेभूतानुकंपकः ॥ ७६॥

धरार्षैश्यो-ममॆचैव वृष्ट्मूलनिकेतनः ॥ ७७॥

तपश् चरन् उर्येतरं शोषॆयेद् देहम् अात्मनः ।
वीतैकाशीकभयी विप्रो ब्रह्मलोके महीयते ॥ ७b ॥
Duties of the Brahman in the fourth Order, or Cuarter of his Life,
as a Bhiksha८, or religious Mendicam८.

वनेषु तु विह्वेत्येवं तृतीयं भागम् आायुषः ।

चतुर्थेम् आायुषो भागं त्यक्ता सङ्गान् परिर्व्रजेत् ॥ ७९ ॥
१) बली, “a wrinkle.” 2) r. 197. **) p. 145..fः **) root fत्र, Ist conj. with sam
and a, ** to have recourso to.” **) p. 152. a. *) अर्, “ water,” p..45. + ; प is
changed to म by the same rule that a final क् is changed to ङ before a nasal, r. 15.
2) r. 151. a. १) r. 148. *) युक्तः, “ intent on.” *) p. 141.
अ) *amicable,” from मित्र, “a friend,” by p. 28. viii. *) *composed," from dhā
with prep. 8am and d, p. 189. c. *) p.87. 3ं) अन् not खादाता, “a receiver,
p. 174. *4) from root कम्य् with prep. अनु (p. 150. b.), lit. “ trembling after,”
*easily moved with commiseration." *) धण, “ the ground"; शय, “ who sleeps,”
from शी, “ to sleep," p. 140. 1. *) “ free from selfishness"; स्र, “ not," and मम,
१* of me.'' *) निक्षेतन, n. “a habitation,” p. 82. +. *) श्वय, “ severe,” r. 71.
3ं) root शुम्, 10th conj. (p.87. e.), “ to dry up.” 4) वीत, “ freed from,” lit.
*gone," root इ with prep. विः, p. 188. b. ') root ड् with वि, p. 175., p. 144. a.
*) root व्रजन्। with परॆि, “ to wander about,” especially as a mendicant.
२b; ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥
कूप्नकेशनखश्मश्रुः पांची देही कुमुग्भवान् ।
विचरन् नियतो नित्यं सर्वे भूतान्य् अपीडयन् ॥ ६० ॥
नाभिनन्देत मरणं नाभिनन्देत जीवितं ।
। कालम् एव प्रतीक्षेत निर्देशं भृतको यथा ॥ ६१ ॥
इन्द्रियाणां निरोधेन रागवेषष्ट्येिण च ।
अहिंसया च भूतानाम् अमृर्तत्वाय कल्पते ॥ ६२॥
अतिवँाट्स् तितिक्षेत नावमन्येत कश्चन ।
कुष्यन्तं न प्रतिकुध्येद् अाकुष्टः कुशलं वदेत् ॥ ६३॥
अल्पान्त्राभ्यवहैरिण ह्: स्यानाँसनेन च ।
20 विषयैर् इन्द्रियाणि निर्वर्त्तेयेत् ॥ ६४॥
जराशोकसमाँविष्टं रोगायतनम् आातुरं ।
रजस्वँलम् अनित्यं च भूतेंविासम् इमं त्यजेत् ॥ ६५ ॥

१) **having a पाचordish,” p.27. iv. 4) “having aदण्डorstaff,” p.27. iv. ं)“having

a कुमुम्भ or water-pot,” r. 42. i. ") 8d sing. pot. ātm. of root ईष्, 1st conj. with
प्रति, “ to expect.' ग्) “ wages,” भृति, com. $) “a hired labourer.” $) inst.
case of fनरोधः, ** restraint.” I) dat. case of अमृतत्वं, “immortality,” p.22. wi.
r. 194. n) 8d sing. pres. atm. of कूप्, lst conj. (p. 64. a.), “ to be fit for.”

1१) acc. case plur. (r. 20.) of अतिवाद, “ opprobrious language.'' is) p. 129.
r. 119. l4) p. 175. I) root कुशम् with स्रा, “ to curse,” p. 180. ā. 16) lit.
* welfare.” ग्) अभ्यवहार्, “eating.” ') एड्स्, adv. “ in private.” t) r. 158.
2) nom. plur. neut. of the pres. part. of the passive of ढु, r.124. *l) caus. of
root वृत्। with नि, “ to cause to cease.” *्) root विश with सम् and स्रा, “to
enter,” “ occupy," p. I89. i. *) “possessed of जम्, or the guality of passion,”
p. 28. xii. ४A) भूत, “ element”; चावास, “habitation,'' i.e. देहं पृथिव्यादिभूतानि
ग्नॆिर्तिं, **a body formed of the five elements, earth, fire, water, air, and
aether."
 ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥ _ २C)

अनेन विधिनॆा सेंद्वेींस् त्यक्ता सङ्गान् श्ने: शनै: ।

सन्न्यसेिनापहॆत्येनॆ: प्राप्नोति परमां गतिं ॥ ६६॥
चतुर्भिर् अपि चैवैतैर् नित्यम् आाश्रमिभिर् द्विजैः ।
दश्लष्ट्ाणकी धम्मे: सेवितव्य: प्रयत्नतः ॥ ६७॥
धृतिः ष्मा दमी-स्तेयं शौचम् इन्द्रियनिग्रहः ।
धी विद्यैा सत्यम् अक्रोधो दशकं धम्मेलष्ट्णं ॥ bb ॥

THE SECOND OR MILITARW CLASS (OR KSHATRIWAS).

The Hing.

ब्राह्मं प्राप्नेन संस्कारं ष्ट्ाचियेण ययाँविधि ।

संवेस्यास्य ययाँन्यायं कलेव्यं परिष्ट्ण ॥ b९॥
नाबझ ष्ट्ञ्चेम् ऋभीति नाश्चं ब्रह्म वडेते ।
ब्रह्म छ्चं च सम्पृक्तम् इह चामुच वडैते ॥ ९० ॥
अराजैक हि लोके-स्मिन् संवेतो विद्रुते भयात् ।
रष्त्रॆाथैम् अस्य सङ्ग्रेस्य राजानम् असृजत् प्रभुः ।। ९१॥
*) p. 182. d. *d) r. 20. य) root अस् with सम् and नि, “ to give up all
worldly affections.” *) root हन् with अप, “to expel,” p. 145. 7. श्) acc. neut.
of टनस्, “sin,” r.69. r. 6. 30) for च खट्व टते:, r. 6. r. 27. a. *l) inst. plur.
of आाश्रमिन्, ** belonging to an order,” p. 27. iv. *) लघ्छ्णं, “a sign,” “cha
racteristic,' p. 28. xii. *) com. सन्तोषः. *) अ , “ not,” and स्तेय, “theft.”
3्) com. शास्त्रादितत्त्वज्ञानं, “ knowledge of the principles of the shāstras. *t) com.
आत्मज्ञानं, “ knowledge of self.” *) r. 17I. b. *) nom. case neut. of अब्रह्मन्,
* having no Brahman,” “ without the Brahmanical class.” *9) nom. case neut.
** the military body.'' *) ऋध्।, 5th conj. ** to prosper,” r. 94. *l) root पृच्
with सम्, * to unite,'' p. 180. i. *) अराजक, **having no king." *) p. 177. c.
44) p. 110.
I 1।।
३० । मनुसंहितासारः ।
बाली-पि नावमन्तव्यो मनुष्य इति भूमिपः ।
महती देवता ह्य् एषा नरंपेण तिष्ठति ॥ ९२ ॥
परमं यत्नम् अातिष्ठेत् स्तेनानां निर्मैह नृपः ।
स्तेनानां नियर्ह्राद् अस्य यशो राष्ट्रं च वडैते ॥ ९३॥
रक्ष्णाट् आाग्यैश्वृत्तानां करटकानां च शोधनात् ।
नरेन्द्रास् र्चिदिवं यान्ति प्रजापालनतत्पराः ॥९४॥
यथोडॉति निर्हेतिा कट् धान्यं च रष्ट्ाति ।
तथा रक्षेन् नृपो राष्ट्रं हन्याच् च परिपन्थिनः ॥ ९५ ॥
अर्शसंस् तस्करान् यस् तु बलिं गृह्माति पार्थिवः ।
तस्य प्रष्ठुभ्यते राष्ट्रं स्वगैाच् च परिहीयते ॥ ९६॥
निभैयं तु भवेद् यस्य राष्ट्रं बाहुबलाश्रितं ।
तस्य तद् वडेते नित्यं सिच्यमान इव द्रुमः ॥ ९७॥
अधाम्मेिकं चिभिर् न्यंीयैर् निर्गृह्णीयात् प्रयत्नतः ।
निरोघेनन बन्धेन विविधन बधेन च ॥ ७bः ॥

*ं) p.206. D. 44) p. 182. d. 4) p. 105. D. 46) r. 177. ….

*) nom. plur. of नरेन्द्र, “a king,” lit. “ the chief of men.” 48) “ paradise,”
the place where the three great gods Sport. *) root ढ with उत्, p. J74.
*0) nom. case maSc. of निहैोतृ, *a reaper,” root दो, “ to cut,” with निर्, see p. IIO. c.
p. 149. 2. ") कछ्, m. “ grass,” “ weeds." ४) p. I15. *) acc. case plur. of
परिपन्थिन् , lit. “ one who attacks on the पयिन्। or r0ad.'' 4) अस, “ not,” and
शासन्, * punishing” (r. 20.) nom. case of pres. part. of शास (p. I15.). Properly
this Should be अशासत्, see p. 186. c., but Such violations of Grammar are not
uncommon in metrical composition. #) root अभ्, 4th conj. ātm. ** to be shaken,”
with प्र. ") p. 154. e. ग्) r. 208. a. ४) स्राश्रितं, “depending on," “ resting on,"
root fश्रः, p. 188. b. *) pres. part. of the pass. of सिच्, “to irrigate,” r. 124.
") inst. plur. of न्याय, “an act of policy.” !!) p. 124. ४) fनश्रोधन, *prevention.”
 ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥ ३१

यदि न प्रणैयेद् राजा दण्डं दण्ड्येष्व् अतन्द्रितः ।

शूले मत्स्यान् इवापर्ष्टयन् दु बलवक्त्रणा: ।। ९७ ।।

अद्यैात् काकः पुरोडॆाशं श्वा च लिह्याद् धर्विस् तथा ।

स्वाम्यं च न स्यात् कस्मिंश्चिद् भिद्येरन् सवेसेतवः ॥१००॥
सङ्घेी दण्डजितो लोको दुलैभो हि शुचिर् नरः ।
दण्डस्य हि भयात् सर्वॆ जगट् भोगॆाय कल्पते ।। १०१ ।।
यावॆान् अबध्यस्य बध तावान् बध्यस्य मोझुणे ।
अधर्ममी नृपतेर् दृष्टो धम्मेस् तु विनियॆञ्छतः ।। १०२ ।।
इन्द्रियाणां जये योगं समातिष्ठेद् दिवॉनिशं ।
जितेन्द्रियो हि शक्नोति वशे स्थापयितुं प्रजाः ।। १०३ ।।
4dministratiom 0f Justice.

नीत्पाँदयेत् स्वयं कार्य्यं राजा नाप्य् अस्य पूरुषः ।

न च प्रापितम् अन्येन यॆसेद् अर्थे कथञ्चन ।। १०४ ।।
यथा नयॆत्य् असृक्पतैिर् मृगस्य मृगॆयु: पदं ।
नयेत् तथानुमानेन धम्मेस्य नृपतिः पदं ॥ १०५ ॥
*) 8d sing. pot. of root नी with प्र, “ to inflict,” p. I75. !!) दण्ड्न, *deserving
punishment,' root दण्द्, ** to punish,' p. I47. 7. !ं) शूलं, n. *an iron pin or Spit.”
It) r.210. ग्) 8d sing. pot. of अद्, 2d conj. “ to eat.” IS) acc. case masc. of
पुरोडाशः, *an oblation of clarified butter mixed with cakes of barley meal." ") root
लिह, 2d conj. “ to lick." *) हविस्, n. ** clarified butter,” r. 18. *) r. 208. b.
*:) 8d plur. pot. of the pass. of भिद्, “ to break,” p. 99. थ्) r. 194. *!) p. 181. c.
*) loc. of मोछ्णं, “liberation.” ५) root यम् with वि and fन, p. 64. c. p. 180.
Com. ययाशास्त्रं दण्डं कुर्व्वेत:, * inflicting punishment in a legal manner.' *) r. I58.
*) p. 87. d. ५) root पद् in caus. with उत्, “ to excite.' १) root यस्, “to
devour,” *seiZe upon”; but the scholiast explains it by उपेक्षेत, “ should neglect.'
१) root नी (p. 64. a.) hore, “ to track." *५) पात, “ a falling,'' “ dropping.'
3ं) “a hunter.”
३२ ॥ मनुसंहितासारः ।
धर्ममी विडैस् त्व् अधर्म्मेण सभां यचोपतिष्ठते ।
श्र्रयं चास्य न कृन्तन्ति विडास् तच सभाँसदः ॥ १०६॥
सभां वा न प्रवेष्टव्यं वक्तव्यं वा समञ्जसं ।
अब्रुवन् विब्रुवन् वापि नरो भवति किल्बैिषी ॥ १०७ ॥
सत्येन पूर्यत साष्ट्री धम्मे: सत्येन वडेते ।
तस्मात् सत्यं हि वक्तव्यं सवेश्वर्णेषु साष्ट्रिभि: ॥ १०b ॥
अन्धो मत्स्यान् इवार्ध्नाति स नर: कण्टके: सह ।
यी भाषते-थैवैकर्त्र्यम् अप्रत्यष्ट्रं सभां गत: ॥ १०९ ॥
जन्माग्रैभृति यत्किञ्चित् पुण्यं भद्र त्वया कृतं ।
तत् ते सर्वे शुनी गच्छेद् यदि ब्रूयास् त्वम् अन्यथा ॥ ११०॥
अवार्क्'शिरास् तमस्य् अन्ध किल्विर्षी नरकं व्रजेत् ।
यः प्रश्नं वितॆयं ब्रूयात् पृष्टः सन् धम्मेनिचये ॥ १११॥
मन्यन्ते वै पापकृतो न कश्चित् पश्यतीति नः ।
तांस् तु देवाः प्रपश्यन्ति स्वस्यैवान्तरैपूरुषः ॥ ११२ ॥
एकी-हम् अस्मीत्य् अात्मानं यत् त्वं कस्याण मन्यसे ।
नित्यं स्थितस् ते र्हृद्य् एष पुण्यपापेक्षूिता मुनिः ॥११३॥
84) root व्यध्।, ** to pierce,” p. 140. m. *) 8d Sing. pres. ātm. of स्या with जप
(p. 107.), “ to appr0ach.” *") शल्य, m. n. “a dart.” s) root कृत्, r. 90. ८., for
उत्कृत्।, * to extract," Com. उड़णन्ति . 3s) सभासद्, “one of an assembly "; सभा,
“ an assembly"; सद्, “to sit,” p. 25. r.42. *) p. 208. b. *) समञ्जस,
ºutºr प
ter, ** fruth.'' 41 ) nom. case masc. of किस्विषिन्, “ p0SSessing किल्विषं,
_ _ * _

sin,' p. 27. iw. 4a) p. 99. *) p. I24. *) “ the state of being विकल्ठः,
mutilated, defective,” p. 28. wii. 4) p. 178..fः 4) acc. plur. of घवन्, p.42. +.
*") nom. case masc. “ having the head downwards.” 4s) loo.case of अन्धः, **blind,'
here “ total.” 4) r. I90. a. *) वि , “ not,” and तय, “true,” p. 154. e.
") p. 89. ४) r. 20. $) अन्तरपूरूष, lit. ** the inner man,” “ the internal spirit.”
4) p. 205. a. ") p. 180. c. , ) l0c. case of हृद्, r.60. ग्) nom. case masc. of
ईदिातृ, “an inspector,'' p. 14{}. 2. `) मुनि, “ a holy sage,” here it refers to “ the
soul," “ the intelligont spirit.’’
 ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥ ३३

अ'ात्मेव ह्य् अात्मन: साष्ट्री गर्तिर् अात्मा तयात्मनः ।

मावैमंस्या: स्वम् अात्मानं नृणां साष्ट्रिणम् उत्तमं ॥११४॥
द्यौर् भूमिर् अापो हृद्यं चन्द्रार्केताग्नियमानिलाः ।
राचि: सन्ध्ये च धम्मेच वृत्तज्ञा: संवेदेिहिनां ॥ ११५ ॥
THE THIRD OR COMIMERCIAL CI.ASS (OR vAISHWAS).

वैश्यस् तु कृतसंस्कारः कृत्वा दारार्पयिहं ।

वार्त्तीयां नित्ययुक्तः स्यात् पशूनां चैव रष्ट्णे ॥ ११६॥
प्रजापतिर् हि वैश्याय सृष्ट्ठा परिदद पशून् ।
ब्राह्मणाय च राज्ञे च सद्वेीा: परिट्द प्रजाः ॥ ११७ ॥
वीजानाम् उप्तिँविच स्यात् छ्चदिोषगुणस्य च ।
साऎसारं च भाण्डानां देशानां च गुणागुणान् ॥ ११ ॥
मणिमुक्ताप्रवॆालानां लीहानां तार्नेतवस्य च ।
गन्धानां च रसानां च विद्याद् अघेर्बिलाबलं ॥ ११९ ॥
भृत्यानां च भृतिं विद्याद् भाषाश्च विविधा नृणां ।
द्रव्याणां स्यानयोगॆांश्च क्रयविक्रयम् एव च ॥ १२० ॥
धर्म्मेण च द्रव्यावृडॆाव् अतिष्ठेद् यत्नम् उत्तमं ।
दद्याञ्च सर्वे भूतानाम् अन्नम् एव प्रयत्नतः ॥ १२१ ॥
१) गतिः, “ that to which ome goes for refuge.” l) 2d sing. of 8d pret. of मन्
with अव, ** to contemn,” p. 82. e., the augment being dropped by r. 208. ll) r. 151.
1४) nom. dual of सन्ध्या , “ twilight.” lं) दार्, “ wife,” परियह्, “taking.” 14) loc.
c. of वाज्ञैT, **agriculture and trade.” lā) a name of Brahmā, ** the lord of all
beings.' I) root सृजन्, p. 148. a. l) 2d pret. ātm. of दा (p. 118.) with परिं.
1ं) उनि, *sowing,” विह, “ to know,” r. 42. r. 16. it) r. 158. b. *) प्रबाल,
** coral,'' r. 1छै1. a. ५l) तान्तवः, n. “ woven cloth.” *) lit. “ the price strong and
weak” (r. 158. b.), i. ८. “ dear and cheap.” *) योग is sometimes.joined to another
word, without much Obvious meaning. *!) l0c. c. r.8. * ) r. 196.
 *

३४ ॥ मनुसंहितासार: ॥
THE FOURTH OR SERW ILE CLASS (OR SHUDRAs).

शुश्रूषेव तु शूद्रस्य धर्ममो नैःश्रेयस: पर: ॥ १२२॥

28 29

शुचिर् उत्कृष्टशुश्रूषुर् मृदुवाँग् अनर्हेङ्कृतः ।

ब्राह्मणायाश्रयो नित्यम् उत्कृष्टां जातिम् अश्नुते ॥ १२३॥
अहिंसा सत्यम् अस्तेयं शौचम् इन्द्रियनिग्रहं ।
एतं सामासिकं धम्में चातुंबैण्र्य-ब्रवीन् मनुः ॥१२४॥
*t) “ possessed of यशास् fame,'' p. 27. v. *ग्) formed from निःश्रेयस्, ** final bea

titude, by p. 28. wiii. *ं) r. 45. ४) अन्, ** not," and त, ** proud ''; lit.
“ making much of self.” *) loc. c. “ the four classes" collectively, from चतुवैणै,
by p. 28. wii.
TRANSLATION OF THE FOREGOING SEI,ECTIONS FRO'M
THE INSTITUTES OR MANU.

Infroductory JPemarks.
THE precise time at which the Institutes of Manu were compiled
is uncertain. Sir William Jones places the date about twelve
hundred years before Christ, and Mr. Elphinstone about nine
hundred, or about the age of Homer. It will be observed, by a
reference to the translation (verses 69-73.), that the burning of
the Sati, Or Indian widow, is not even hinted at, which, of itself,
fixes the time of the compilation of the laws far anterior to the
era of Alexander the Great, the Macedonians having found this
Cruel and revolting custom prevalent at the period of their
invasion. But whatever may be the date of this code, the matter
it contains Cannot fail to strike the most Superficial Observer as
full of interest and importance. No one, it is presumed, will
read the subjoined translation without admiring the lofty and
almost Christian tone of morality that pervades it : and when it
is remembered that we are entirely without historical account
of the Hindus at these early ages, every one must admit the
importance of a work, which, presenting us with a Complete
picture of their laws, religion, and Social habits, may serve as a
guide to many points in their political history.
Let not, however, the reader Suppose that the translation we
have here given of the most striking passages in these Institutes
is intended to serve as a Sample of the whole, or he will derive
from its perusal a very exalted and a very false notion of the
state of Hindu morality at this early epoch. The original work
is polluted by numerous rules and prohibitions, having reference
to practices which Could only have prevailed in a corrupt and
degraded state of moral feeling. It should, moreover, be borne
in mind, that the compiler of this code, who was probably some
learned Brahman of the day, collected from the literature of
his country, and the opinions of his own time, what ought to De
the laws which should regulate the community, rather than what
those laws actually were ; and that he doubtless mixed up with
36 SBLE0TIONS FRO'M MANU TRANSLATED.

the existing state of things many of his own ideas upon guestions
of religion, morality, and law. Nevertheless, however much the
minuter parts of the picture presented to us in this book are
to be attributed to the imagination of the legislator, and however
much it may be necessary to soften down the particular features
of the landscape, Still, taken as a whole, it furnishes us with a
very valuable representation of the early condition of the Hindu
people. And its importance will be enhanced, when it is remem
bered that the natives of India at the present day regard it not
only as the oldest, but as the most sacred text after the Wedas,
and that it still furnishes the basis of Hindu jurisprudence.
The original work is entirely wanting in arrangement, and the
preceding extracts have been selected from various parts so as to
give the cream of the whole with as much continuity and con
nexion as the subject would admit. The reader must understand
that the most remarkable feature in Hindu society, as depicted in
the Institutes, is the division of the people into four classes or
castes : Ist, The Sacerdotal ; 2d, The Military ; 3d, The Commer
cial ; 4th, The Servile. The first three classes, though by no
means egual, were admitted into one common pale, and called by
the common name of “ twice-born.' With reference to them
alone were these Institutes composed, the 4th class being in that
state of degradation which would seem to indicate that they were
the aborigines of the soil, subject to a conguering race. As to
the lst, or Sacerdotal Class, the Brahmans who formed it were
held to be the chief of all human beings; they were even superior
to the king, and their lives and property were protected by the
most stringent laws. They were to divide their lives into four
guarters (or orders), living for the first guarter as students with
their preceptors ; for the second, as householders with their
families ; for the third, as anchorites in the woods ; for the fourth,
as religious mendicants, wandering from house to house, and
emaciating their bodies by mortification and austerity. As to
the 2d, or Military Class, although much inferior in rank to the
Sacerdotal, they enjoyed great privileges, and, inaSmuch as the
king and his ministers were taken from their body, must have
been practically the most powerful. As to the 3d, or Commercial,
 SBLEOTIONS FRO'M MANU TRANSLATED. 37

they were not held in much esteem, their duties being to keep
cattle, till the ground, and engage in trade. The 4th, or Servile
Class, were excluded from all political and religious privileges ;
and although it does not appear that they were the slaves of the
state like those of Europe, their only duties were made to consist
in serving the other three classes.
Mr. Elphinstone notices two great peculiarities in the society
thus constituted : Ist, the little importance attached to the direc
tion of public worship and religious ceremonies by the Brahmans ;
2dly, the strictness with which all the actions of the Brahmans
are regulated, as if living in a convent, and not scattered over a
vast tract of country, without head or council or ecclesiastical
government.
The annexed translation is partly founded upon that of Sir
William Jones ; but although, in some passages, the words of that
distinguished oriental Scholar have been followed, it has been
thought desirable to introduce many alterations in the present
version.

TRANSIATION.

ORIGIN OR THE FOUR CLASSES, AND GENERAL, VIEw OF THEIR DUTIES.

I. For the sake of the preservation of all this creation, the

Supreme in glory assigned separate duties to those who sprang
respectively from his mouth, his arm, his thigh, and his foot.
2. To Brahmams he assigned the duties of teaching, of reading,
of sacrificing, of assisting at sacrifices, of giving, and (if indigent)
of receiving.
3. The (duties) of a R8hatriya are, in brief, the defence of the
people, giving, Sacrificing, reading, freedom from attachment to
sensual pleasures.
4. To the 7aishya (he assigned the duties of) keeping cattle,
giving, sacrificing, reading, trading, lending money at interest,
and agriculture.
5. To the Shādra, the Supreme Ruler appointed one single
duty, the service of these (other) classes ungrudgingly.
6. Of created things, the most excellent are those which are
animated ; Of the animated, those endued with intellectual life ;
R K
38 SBLEOTIONS F RO'M MANU TRANSLATED.

of the intelligent, mankind ; and of men, Brahmans (or the

sacerdotal class).
7. Of Brahmans, those who are learned (in the ritual); of
the learned, those whose minds are acguainted with their duty ;
of those who are acguainted with their duty, Such as perform it ;
of Such as perform it, those who have acguaintance with the
Supreme Spirit,
8. The seniority of Brahmans (or priests) is from Sacred
learning ; of Kshatriyas (or soldiers) from valour ; of Waishyas
(or merchants and husbandmen) from (abundance of) grain and
money ; of Shtidras (or slaves) from priority of birth alone.
9. The Brahman, the Kshatriya, and the Waishya are the
three twice-born classes (their Sacred birth taking place at their
investiture with the sacred thread) ; but the fourth class, or
Shtidra, is once-born (as being excluded from investiture with the
thread); there is no fifth class (except those which are mixed and
impure),
THE FIRST, OR SACERDOTAI, CLASS (OR BRAHMANS).
Daties of the Brahman in the first Order (Ashrama) or guarter of
his Life, as a Brahmachārā, or Student of Beligiom, subject to his
Gurad or Preceptor.
I0. Learning, having approached a Brahman, Said to him,
“ I am thy divine treasure, preserve me, deliver me not to a
scorner ; so (preserved) I shall become Supremely strong.
II. But communicate me to that Student who will be a careful
guardian of the treasure, and whom thou Shalt know to be pure,
self-governed, and a Brahmachāri.”
12. Where virtue and worldly means (Sufficient to secure it)
are not found, or diligent attention proportioned (to the holiness
of the Subject), in that soil divine knowledge must not be sown,

like good seed on barren land.

l3. A teacher of the Weda should be willing to die with his
learning rather than Sow it in sterile soil, even though he be in
grievous distress. _

14. A Brahman who is the Causer of Spiritual birth, the teacher

.of proper duties, even though a child, becomes by right the father
of an old man.
 SELBCTIONS FR0M MANU TRANSLATED. 39

Ib. A man is not therefore aged because his head is gray ;

him surely the gods consider as aged, who, though young, is well
read in Scripture.
I6. As an elephant made of wood, as an antelope made of
leather, So is an unread Brahman ; these three (merely) bear the
11aIIl69.

I7. These (following) rules must a Brahmachāri observe, whilst

dwelling with his preceptor, keeping all his passions under con
troul, for the sake of increasing his habitual devotion.
l8. When commanded by his preceptor, and even when he has
received no command, let him always be diligent in reading and
in friendly offices toward his teacher.
l9. A teacher, a father, a mother, and an elder brother, are not
to be treated with disrespect, especially by a Brahman, even
though he be much irritated.
20. That trouble which a mother and father undergo in rearing
their children is a debt which cannot be repaid even in hundreds
of years.
21. Let a man constantly do what may please these (his
parents), and on all occasions what may please his preceptor ;
when these three are Satisfied, his whole course of devotion is
accomplished.
22. Obedience to these three is called the highest devotion,
and without their approbation he must perform no other duty.
23. Of (the youth) who habitually greets and constantly reveres
the aged, four things obtain increase-life, knowledge, fame,
strength.
24. As a man who digs deep with a spade comes to a Spring
of water, So he who is diligent in serving (his preceptor) attains
the knowledge which lies in his teacher’s mind.
25. Even from poison mectar may be taken, even from a child
gentleness of speech : a believer in Scripture may receive a good
lesson even from a man of the lowest claSS.

26. Therefore the highest virtue, learning, purity, gentleness of

speech, and various liberal arts Should be collected by him from
all guarters.?
27. In the restraint of the organs which run wild among
40 SELECTIONS FRO'M MANU TRANSLATED.

ravishing objects of sense, a wise man should apply diligent care,

like a charioteer in managing (restive) steeds.
28. IDesire is never satisfied with the enjoyment of desired
objects, as the fire (is not appeased) by clarified butter, it only
blaZes more vehemently.
29. By addiction to his sensual organs a man undoubtedly in
curs guilt; but having kept them in subjection, he thence attains
heavenly bliss.
30. Neither the Wedas, nor almsgiving, nor Sacrifices, nor strict
observances, nor pious austerities, ever lead that man to heavenly
felicity who is inwardly depraved.
3l. Having kept all his organs of sense under controul,
and obtained command over his heart also, he will accomplish
every object, even though he reduce not his body by religious
austerities.
32. But when one among all his organs gives way, by that
single defect his knowledge of divine truth passes away, as water
leaks through (a single crack in) a leathern vessel.
33. He whose discourse and heart are pure and ever perfectly
guarded, attains all the fruit acguired by a complete course of
studying the Weda.
34. Let a Brahman constantly shrink from worldly honour as
he would poison, and rather always earnestly desire disrespect as
he would nectar. _

36. For though scorned he may sleep with pleasure ; with

pleasure may he awake ; with pleasure may he pass through this
life ; but the scorner utterly perishes.
36. The Brahman who thus without deviation passes the time
of his studentship, ascends (after death) to the most exalted regions,
and is not again Subject to birth in this lower world.

JDaties of the Brahmam in the second order or guarder of his life, as

a Grihastha, or House/holder.
37. Let a Brahman, having dwelt with a preceptor for the first
guarter of his life, pass the second guarter of life in his own house,
as a married man.

38. With no injury to animated beings, or with as little injury

 SBLBO'TIONS B'IR0-M MANU TRANSLATED, 41

as possible, and without toil to his own body, let him accumulate
riches.

39. The chief temporal good is by some declared to be virtue

and wealth ; (by some) pleasure and wealth ; and (by some) virtue
alone ; (by others) wealth alone ; but the chief good here below is
an assemblage of all three : this is a sure decision.*
40. If he seek happiness, let him be moderate (in the acguisi
tion of riches), pursuing perfect contentment : for happiness has
its root in content, and discontent is the root of misery.
4I. Let him daily, without sloth, perform his peculiar duty
prescribed by the Weda ; for performing that duty to the best of
his ability he obtains Supreme bliss.
42. Let him not from carmal desire be too strongly attached to
all objects of sense : let him wholly abandon all pursuits that are
incompatible with the study of Scripture.
43. Let him pass through this world, bringing his apparel, his
discourse, and his intellectual acguirements into conformity with
his age, his occupations, his means, his divine knowledge, and his
station in life.

44. Though sinking (into penury) in conseguence of his righteous

dealings, let him never apply his mind to unrighteousness, observ
ing the speedy overthrow of iniguitous and sinful men.
45. Iniguity practised in this world, like the earth, does not
bear fruit at the moment : but advancing little by little it eradi
cates the author of it.
46. Wes ; iniguity, once committed, fails not of producing fruit
to him who wrought it; if not in his person, yet in his Sons ; Or
if not in his Sons, yet in his grandsons.
47. Of death and of vice, vice is pronounced the more dreadful ;
since after death a vicious man sinks to the lowest depths of hell,
while a man, free from wice, reaches heaven.
48. Let him, therefore, Shum atheism, disbelief of Scripture, con
tempt of the deities, malice, hypocrisy, pride, anger, and cruelty.

* This passage will call to the mind of the classical Scholar the 5th and 6th
chapters of the Ist book of Aristotle's Bthics.
42 SBLECTIONS FRO'M MANU TRANSLATED.

49. Let him not wound the feelings of others, even though irri
tated ; let him not injure another in thought or deed ; let him
not even utter a word by which his fellow-creature may suffer
uneasineSS.

50. Let him say what is true, let him say what is pleasing ; let
him Speak no disagreeable truth, nor let him speak agreeable
falsehood: this is a perpetual law.
5l. Whatever act depends (for its accomplishment) on another,
that act let him carefully shun ; but whatever depends on himself,
to that let him diligently attend.
52. Every thing which depends (for its attainment) on the
favour of another causes unhappiness, but every thing which de
pends on one's own individual exertions causes happiness : let him
know this to be in a few words the definition of pleasure and pain.
53. Let him always honour his food, and eat it without con
tempt ; when he sees it, let him rejoice, and be content, and ever
return thanks for it (praying that he may always obtain it),
54. Excessive eating is prejudicial to health, to life, and to the
prospect of attaining heaven ; it is destructive to merit, and odious
amongst men ; therefore, he should by all means avoid it.
55. To a guest who has arrived at his house let him offer a
Seat and water and food, Such as may be in his power, treating
him with hospitality, according to prescribed rule.
56. Let him never eat any thing himself which he has not first
Set before his guest : reverence of a guest is conducive to wealth,
to fame, to life, and to a heavenly reward.
57. When asked, he should give something, though it be a
mere trifle, ungrudgingly, with a cheerful heart, and to the best
of his means, having met with a worthy object of charity.
58. With whatever spirit a man bestows any gift, with the very
Same Spirit, being honoured in return, he Shall receive a similar
recompense.
59. Let not a man pride himself on his religious observances ;
having made a donation let him never proclaim it : by pride, the
merit of devotion is lost, and the merit of almsgiving by ostenta
tiously proclaiming it.
60. Let him mot having committed Sin perform a penance
 SBLEOTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 43

under the pretext of religion, disguising his crime under mere

bodily austerity, and deceiving (only) women and the lowest class
of men.

6l. He who being of one character describes himself to the

good as of another is the most Sinful wretch in the world, the
worst of thieves, a stealer of men's minds.
62. A wise man should constantly discharge all the moral
duties,* though he perform not constantly the ceremonies of reli
gion ; since he falls low, if, performing ceremonial acts only, he
discharges not his moral duties. _

63. Giving pain to no creature, let him, for the sake of obtain
ing a companion to the next world, accumulate virtue by degrees,
as the white ants (collect the soil into) a hillock.
64. For neither father, nor mother, nor wife, nor Son, nor kins
man, will remain as his companion in his passage to the next
world ; his virtue alone will adhere tO him.
65. Single is every living being born, single he passes away,
single he eats the fruit of his good deeds, and single the fruit of
his evil deeds.

66. When he leaves his dead body, like a log or a lump of clay,
On the ground, his kindred retire with averted faces, but his virtue
accompanies his Soul.
67. Continually, therefore, and by degrees, let him accumulate
virtue, for the sake of Securing an inseparable associate ; since
with virtue as his companion he will traverse a gloom, hard
indeed to be traversed.
68. The man who is eminent in piety, and whose offences
have been expiated by devotion, such a man does his wirtue in
stantly convey after death to another world with a radiant form
and a body of celestial Substance.
Daties of the Grihastha's Wife.
69. A faithful wife, wishing to attain in heaven the mansion of
her husband, must do nothing unkind to that husband, be he living
Or dead. _

70. A husband must constantly be served as a god by a vir

* See p. ३५. note 24.

44 SBLECTIONS F RO'M MANU TRANSLATED.

tuous wife. As far only as she is obedient to her lord, so far is

she exalted in heaven.
71. She must always be cheerful, skilful in her management of
the affairs of the house, careful in cleaning the household furni
ture, and not too lavish in her expenditure.
72. She who commits no offence against her lord, but is devoted
to him in mind, Speech, and body, acguires high renown in this
world, and in the next the Same abode with her husband.
73. And when her husband is dead, let her not even pronounce
the name of another man, but let her continue till her own death,
forgiving all injuries, performing austerities, and avoiding every
sensual pleasure.

Duties of the Brahman in the third order or 7atarter of his life, as a

7andpras//a, or Hermit.
74. When the householder perceives wrinkles on his body, and
his hair gray, consigning his wife to the care of his soms, let him
then have recourse to the forest.
75. From Such food as himself may eat, let him to the best of
his ability make offerings and give alms, and with water, roots,
fruit, and other presents let him honour all who visit his hermitage.
76. Let him be constantly engaged in the study of Scripture,
patient of extremities, benevolent, Composed in mind, a constant
giver but no receiver of gifts, tenderly affectionate towards all
animated bodies.

77. Not Solicitous for the means of gratification, his organs pro
perly kept in subjection, Sleeping on the bare ground, without one
selfish affection, dwelling at the roots of trees.
78. Let him emaciate his bodily frame, enduring harsher and
harsher mortifications. A Brahman who has banished sorrow and
fear becomes exalted in the divine world.

Duties of the Brahman in the fourth order or juarter of his life, as a

IBhikshu, or Tºeligious Memadicam/.
79. Having thus passed his time in the forests during the
third portion of his life, let him for the fourth portion of it
become a Parivrājaka (or religious mendicant), abandoning all
sensual connexions.
 SBLE0TI0NS F'RO'M MANU TRANSLATED. 45

80. His hair, nails, and beard being clipped, bearing with him
a dish, a staff and a water-pot, intent on religious meditation,
let him wander about continually without causing pain to any
Creature.

81. Let him not long for death, let him not long for life, let
him expect his appointed time as a hired Servant his wages.
82. By the restraint of his sensual organs, by the gradual
extinction of affection and hatred, and by abstinence from injury
to sentient beings, he becomes fit for immortality.
83. Let him bear opprobrious Speech with patience, let him
not treat any one with contempt, with an angry man let him not
in his turn be angry, when cursed let him utter a blessing.
84. By eating little food, and by standing and sitting in soli
tary places, let him Suppress those organs that are hurried away
by Sensual objects.
85. A mansion infested by decrepitude and Sorrow, the Seat
of malady, harassed by pains, haunted with the darkness of
passion, transient and formed of earth, Such a mansion let him
cheerfully guit.
86. In this manner having by little and little abandoned all
earthly attachments, and having by devotion of himself to God
effaced sin, he then attains the supreme path of glory.
87. By Brahmans, placed in these four orders, a (system of)
duty having ten characteristics must be sedulously practised.
88. Contentment, returning good for evil, self-command, honesty,
purification, coercion of the organs, knowledge of Science, wisdom,
veracity, and freedom from anger, form their tenfold system of duty.
THE SECOND, OR MILITARW CIASS (OR KSHATRIWAS).
The King.
89. By a Kshatriya (or man of the military class), who has re
Ceived in due form the investiture prescribed by the Wedas, the pro
tection of all these (his dominions) is to be made according to rule.
90. The military class does not flourish without the sacerdotal,
nor does the sacerdotal prosper without the military ; the Sacer
dotal and military Classes, when associated together, obtain increase
in this world and the next.
I, L,
 4{} SBLEOTIONS F RO M MANU TRANSLATED.

9l. For if the world were without a king it would be agitated

by fear, therefore the Supreme Ruler created a king for the sake
of the protection of all this (universe).
92. A king, even though a child, must not be treated with
Contempt from an idea that he is a mere mortal ; for he is a
mighty divinity that appears in human Shape.
93. A king should apply all his eforts to the suppression of
robbers ; for by the suppression of such wicked men his fame and
territory obtain increase.
94. By the protection of the virtuous and the extirpation of
evil doers, monarchs who devote themselves to the care of their
Subjects attain paradise.
। 9b. As a husbandman plucks up weeds and preserves his corn,
thus let a king destroy the iniguitous and protect his country.
96. But that monarch who takes a revenue without restraining
the wicked, of Such an one the dominions become trOubled, and
he himSelf is excluded from heaven.
97. But of him whose realm is supported by the strength of
his arm and free from terror, the dominions continually flourish
like a tree duly watered.
98. Let him diligently suppress the unrighteous by three
methods-by coercion, by confinement, and by various kinds of
capital punishment.
99. If the king were not with the greatest activity to inflict
punishment on the guilty, the stronger would roast the weak like
fish On a Spit.
I00. The crow would peck the consecrated offering, and the
dog would lick the clarified butter ; Ownership would remain with
nobody, all barriers would be broken down.
101. The whole human race is kept under controul by punish
ment, for an innocent man is difficult to be found : through fear
of punishment the whole universe is fitted for the enjoyment of
its blessings.
I02. Injustice is considered to attach to a king as much in
releasing the man who deserves punishment, as in punishing the
man who deserves it not ; but justice to one who inflicts it with
proper discrimination.
 SBLBOTIONS FRO'M MANU TRANSI,ATED. 47

I03. Day and night must he s exert every efort to gain the
victory over his passions, Sinee that king alone whose passions
are Subdued can keep his Subjects also in Subjection.

4dministration of Jastice.
I04. Neither the king himself nor the king's officer ought ever
to promote litigation, or to neglect a law-suit when brought
before him by another.
I05. As a hunter tracks the lurking-place of the (wounded)
deer by the drops of blood, So must a king investigate the direc
tion in which justice lies by deliberate arguments.
I06. Where justice, being wounded by iniguity, approaches the
Court, and the judges extract not the dart, there those judges also
shall be wounded by it.
107. Either the court must not be entered, Or truth must be
declared : that man is criminal who either remains silent or says
what is false.
108. By truth is a witness purified from Sin ; by truth is
justice advanced : truth must, therefore, be Spoken by witnesses of
every Class.
109. The man who, being arrived in a court of justice, gives an
imperfect account of a transaction, the truth of which he has not
clearly ascertained, shall resemble a blind man who eats fish along
with the bOneS.
II0. The merit of every wirtuous act which thou hast done,
O good man, since thy birth, shall depart from thee to the dogs,
if thou Speak falsely.
III. Headlong in utter darkness Shall the guilty wretch tumble
into hell, who, being asked a guestion in judicial induiry, answers
falsely.
112. The sinful say in their hearts, “ None sees us.” Wes ; the
gods distinctly see them, and so does the spirit within their breasts.
I13. Though thou thinkest to thyself, O good friend, “ I am
alone,” there resides in thy bosom an Omniscient being, the
inspector of thy goodness or of thy wickedness.
114. The SOul itself is itS Own witmeSS ; the sOul itself is its
own refuge : offend not thy own Soul, the Supreme internal
witness of men.
48 SBLECTIONS FRO'M MANU TRANSLATED.

115. The firmament, the earth, the waters, the human heart,
the moon, the Sun, the fire, the Judge of departed Souls, the
wind, the might, the two twilights, and justice, are acguainted with
the conduct of all corporeal beings.
THE THIR D OR OO MIMERCIAI, CLASS (OR vAISHWAS).

116. Let the Waishya, having received investiture with the

sacrificial thread, and having married a wife, be always attentive
to his business of agriculture and trade, and the tending of cattle.
II7. Since the Lord of the world, having created cattle, in
trusted them to the care of the Waishya, while he intrusted the
whole human species to the Brahman and KShatriya.
II8. Let him be acguainted with the proper Seasons for Sowing
seeds, and with the bad or good Gualities of land, the excellence or
defects of commodities, the advantages and disadvantages of diffe
rent regions.
II9. Of gems, pearls, and coral ; of metals, woven Cloths, per
fumes, and condiments, let him know the prices both high and low.
I20. Let him know the just wages of servants, and the various
dialects of men, the best mode of keeping goods, and every thing
connected with purchase and Sale.
l2l. Let him exert his utmost efforts to augment his property
by all righteous means; and let him, to the best of his power,
contribute toward the Support and nourishmaent, of all creatures.

THE FOURTH OR SERWILE CLASS (OR SHUDRAS).

l22. Attendance on illustrious Brahmans, who are householders
and learned in the Wedas, is of itself the highest duty of a Shtidra,
and conducive to his heavenly reward.
I23. Pure (in body and mind), serving the three higher classes,
mild in speech, never arrogant, ever firm in his dependence on
the Sacerdotal class, he may obtain the highest class in another
transmigration.
124. Avoidance of injury to animated beings, veracity, honesty,
cleanliness, and command over the organs of sense, form the com
pendious system of duties which Manu has ordained for all the
four Classes.
 SCHEME OF THE SHI,OKA, OR ANUSHTUBH METRE.

The Institutes of Manu are written in the shloka, Or ama8/htubhः

???efre. This is the commonest of all the infinite variety of
Sanscrit metres, and is that which chiefly prevails in the great
epic poems of the East. It consists of two lines of sixteen
syllables each, but the rules which regulate one line apply egually
to the other. The Scheme is as followS :-

1 2 3 4 5 6 '/ 8 | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
_______ N_/ स-7 उ7 _ | _______ N_A - N_V *

The lst, 2d, 3d, 4th, 9th, I0th, IIth, and l2th syllables may be
either long or Short. The l6th, as ending the line, is also com
mon. But the line may be considered as divided into two parts
at the Sth syllable, Since it is an almost universal rule that this
Syllable must end a word, fohether simple or compound. Hence it
follows that the usual privilege of a final Syllable is conceded
to the 8th also.

The 5th syllable ought always to be short. The 6th may be

either long or Short, but if long then the ith ought to be long
also, and if short then the 7th ought to be short also. But oc
casional variations from these last rules occur.
The last four syllables form two iambics, the l3th being always
short, the l4th always long, and the l5th always short.
Every shloka, or couplet of two lines, must form a com
plete sentence in itself, and contain both subject and predicate.
Not unfreguently, however, in the Rāmāyana and Mahābhārata,
three lines are united to form a triplet.
 _ ___
___
_', `-
______ ”’ --~' --~-
________--’ ___________`- `-_**__=-- * _* " --__” --__- * _ __-_-
 CORREOTIONS.

P. 77. line 5..for Siege read SeiZe.

P. 78. note,.fbr r. 88. ८. read r. 88. O.
' P. 79. line 4. .for ksheptwā redd kshiptwi.
P. I07. note 8. for अवाप्ट्,ि अवावहि read अवच्छ्।ि, अवक्वहि .

In some few cases the long marks ower the vowels and the dots which distinguish।
the cerebral letters have broken off in the printing of part of the impression.
Thus, in p. 24. line I, redd jivā. In p. 42. note f, read Vedagarbhamāmā. In
p. 79. line 4 from the bottom, read dātā, line 8, jetā. Some few other cases may be
found.
 LONIOON .

W I LLIAM WATTS, CROwN COURT, TEMPILE IBAR.

 ।
। ।
। ।

।
। । ..

।। ।
RETURR
|TO =2
दुर्विणAToNDEPARTwENT_ ।
202 Moin Librory _ ।

। । | LOAN PERIOD 1 2 3
।। ।। । HOWAE USE
| 4 5 6

ALL BOOKS MAV BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAVS

1-month loons moy be renevved by colling 642-3405
6-month loons moy be rechdrged by bringing b००ks f० Circulofion Desk
Renevvols ond rechorges moy be mode 4 doys prior f० due dote
DUE AS STAM\PED BELOW
। BEt, Clº--". 2!। "n " 1983 ।
। _
_____ -
Jut- +`ं’ _

कान्ताच्णकायां ऋ।
_

––
_ |llPI 7 1082 73 55 =
MAV 2 ? 1979 BEt.cit tt0छ'82 .., ं
att. clic MuW 1 *ंीं '_|_ ं ं
–=

न =

fi-५. ५iit. APR 1 4

*+’-+—
50uc-pºrdt.uala:v _

FORW NO. DD 6, UNाVEरSITVOFCALFORNIA,BERREाद7

BERKELEY, CA 94720
(P) ।
GENERAL LIBHARW-1U.0. BERKELEW

|| BDDDB77E7a
_ _ _
। । । ।
।
। ।
। ।